Full text of "Meddelelser om Grønland"

See other formats

Br |

i U

Meddelelser om Grønland.

'
i -
| и
1 4 2
i
U
kJ =
a ' У
” |
0 =
3 à :
S ii
4 x
i
Cs
B в
> i æn у = т у р A N
€ у a i a 3 114 8 р Le
= '
+
i u .
‚
| у
Е -
I .
à >
1 i
i
} 5
; x
| ,
Г
A
% т
:

Meddelelser om Grønland.

udgivne af

Commissionen for Ledelsen af de geologiske og geographiske
Undersøgelser i Grønland,

Fire og tredivte Hefte.

Med 23 Tavler.

Kjøbenhavn.
I Commission hos C. A. Reitzel,
Bianco Lunos Bogtrykkeri.

1910.

“VIL.

Indhold.

Ueber Albit von Grönland. Von ©. Dreyer und У. Goldschmidt in
Heidelberg. (Hertil Tavle I—V)

. On the occurrence of Fredericella sultana Blumenb. and Paludi-

cella Ehrenbergii van Bened. in Greenland. By С. Wesenberg-Lund
Medfedte Misdannelser m. m hos den grønlandske Befolkning. Ved
Gustav leldart +3 ET Baar ee ee NN PTT eee
On Gyrolite from Greenland By 0. В. Bøggild

. Geologiske og antikvariske lagttagelser i Julianehaab Distrikt. Af

К. J. У. Steenstrup. (Hertil Tavle VI—XXI.)

. Beretning om Undersagelserne af Jakobshavn-Isfjord og dens Om-

givelser fra Foraaret 1903 til Efteraaret 1904. Af M. С. Engell.
И ЛЕА ОЧНО ees PR RE See ee
Contributions to the Ethnology and Anthropogeography of the
Ге ГРА GY iMacs Sieenshy: =": 044.2 2.2003... are

Side

155

253

2
ws
= tha
ay
\
ad
ER
un
| Е
* # J
8
т
| A
”
i ne ar 2
р
x
‚>
7 i
i j
{
© U
tat
i
у i
i
.
Ud
sa
‘
i
Г
к
.
L 2
7
a i
в Е
: e
A
a
2 N 4
a

р
=
=
i
i
À
. N
é
i
A i
‘ å E i
i ]
ir
t i
i
| т
Vi
i iy
h
GLS
i
}
р
f В ‘
i
i
sia +
À i и

Ueber Albit von Grönland.

Von

C. Dreyer und V. Goldschmidt in Heidelberg.

OO:

XXXIV. 1

м.
ao
in
NM då
D
i
A
5
»
+

An den Albit knüpft sich eine Reihe interessanter Fragen.
Er ist einer der wichtigsten Vertreter des unter den Mineralien
seltenen triklinen Systems. Er bildet das eine Endglied der
Reihe der Kalk-Natron-Feldspäthe, die in der Krystallographie,
ebenso wie in der Petrographie eine wichtige Rolle spielen.
Anderseits besteht eine enge Beziehung zwischen dem triklinen
Albit und dem monoklinen Orthoklas, die man bei den
Fragen über das Wesen der Isomorphie zu berücksichtigen hat.

Ferner ist der Albit ausgezeichnet durch Zwillings- und
Viellingsbildungen, auch damit verbundenen Ablenkungen und
Winkelschwankungen, Krümmungen und Facettenbildungen, die
Gegenstand des genetischen Interesses sind. Er zeigt regel-
mässige Verwachsung mit dem Orthoklas, der einem andern
Krystallsystem angehört. Er ist häufig und weit verbreitet und
seit Jahrzehnten immer aufs Neue Gegenstand des vielseitigen
Studiums. Es vergeht kein Jahr, das nicht Beobachtungen über
den Albit brächte.

Trotz der Häufigkeit des Albits sind Krystalle, die sich zur
Messung eignen, selten.

Die genaue Berechnung der krystallographischen Elemente
stösst beim Albit auf besondere Schwierigkeiten, herrührend
von gestôrter Flächenausbildung. Diese Störungen dürften
wesentlich hervorgebracht sein durch die erkennbare, wie ver-
steckte Viellingsbildung nach dem Albitgesetz'). Auch isomorphe

1) Vgl. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1898. 29. 381. Index. 1890. 2. 22.
iP

Einlagerungen wirken störend da, wo der Albit nicht rein d.h.
nicht das Grenzglied der Albit-Anorthit-Reihe ist.

In dem Index der Krystallformen wurde der Versuch
gemacht (1890. 2. 19—22), zuverlässige Elemente zu erhalten.
Dies geschah auf Grund der Messungen von Max Schuster,
eines äusserst zuverlässigen Beobachters, der sich gerade
damals eingehend mit dem Albit befasste. Schuster hatte,
um den Einfluss der Zwillingsbildung zu beseitigen, durch
Abspalten solche Partien hergestellt, an denen dem Augenschein
nach Zwillingsbildung nicht zu finden war.

Die auf Grund von Schusters Messungen gewonnenen
Elemente weichen von denen der andern Autoren stark ab. Als
daher bei Ausarbeitung der Winkeltabellen!) die Frage ent-
stand, welche Elemente zu acceptieren seien, wurde die Tabelle
für die Schusterschen Elemente ausgerechnet und daneben
für die von Brezina?) angegebenen.

Spätere eigene Messungen am Albit liessen die Überzeugung
gewinnen, dass die Schusterschen Elemente nicht haltbar
seien, und es entstand der Wunsch, durch genaue Messungen
und Discussion die Frage abzuklären.

Indessen erschien eine schöne Publication von G. Melczer?)
«Daten zur genauern Kenntnis des Albits», die das Bekannte
zusammenfasste und neue sorgfältige Beobachtungen und Be-
rechnungen zufügte. Für Melezers Beobachtungen bot sich
ausgezeichnetes Material von Nadabula, in scharfer Ausbil-
dung und chemisch von idealer Reinheit.

Melczer gibt folgende Zusammenstellung derjenigen Ele-
mentangaben, die er für die zuverlässigsten hält:

1) Berlin. Springer. 1897. 139 u. 140.

?) Min. Mitth. 1873. 3. 19. Nach Messungen von Rath (Pogg. Ann. 1870.
Ergzbd. 5. 425).

3) Zeitschr. Kryst. 1905. 40. 571.

a битв a в 7

Des Cloizeaux-Lacroix 0.6333:1:0.5572 94°03' 116°27' 88°09'
ее ЕР К 0.6365 ; 130.5593 94505’. 116°49%87°51
oran ann: <2 th 0.6330: 1:0.5558 94°05! 116°31'. 88°09’
SVG ET SEEREN ak eee 062280005575 94°04" 116728’ 88208;
Glinka (Kerebinsk)...... 0.6341: 1:0.5574 942705’ 116°27 88°07"

— (SlatO ust) ыы... 0.6350 :1 ::0:5586 : 94°16’ 116°44'. 87245!
NRA ig сана. 0.635: 120:557: и 94015’ 116°39' 83705
Melczer (Nadabula) . . . .. 06350000 55180066 26087591

Man könnte zufügen:

Вей: па (mach Rath)... 06366: 1:0.5582 921577116475 87359

Ausserdem führt Melczer als unsicher folgende an:

Shraus (Atlası......... 0:6545 :Ё: 0.5550 33 262 16.137 3378}
Rath (u.Breithaupt.Periklin) 0.6365 : 1 :0.5592 93°18’ 116°51’ 89°13’
Barwald (Kasbek)....... 0.5986... 1: 0.5280’ 91707’ 11625885 20!
Beutell (Strisau)........ 0.6360 :1:0.5558 94°40’ 117°00' 88°00'
Goldschmidt (n.Schuster) 0.6187 :1:0.5641 93°49’ 116°48' 89°03'
Braneck-(Bevin);..#.:..... 0.6388 : 1:0.5651 93°33 116°31' 88°50’

Wir wollen sogleich das Resultat zufügen, das aus der
folgenden Untersuchung des Albits von Grönland erhalten wurde
und das als zuverlässig gelten dürfte:

Dreyer u. Goldschmidt 0.6373:1:0.5599 94°18' 116°41' 87°37'

Aus dieser Zusammenstellung geht hervor, dass starke
Differenzen nicht mehr bestehen, die Elemente des Albit mit
grosser Annäherung sicher gestellt sind.

Das Mittel aus allen mit Ausschluss der unsicheren ergibt:

NÅ TA RE RES ER 0.6349 :1: 0.5578, 94°09! 116°35' 8757
Dreyer u. Goldsehmidt.... 0.6373: 1:0.5599 94°18’ 116°41' 87°37’

Die Differenz ist am stärksten beim Winkel 7. Da beträgt
sie 20’. Dies ist nicht auffallend, da die grösste Unsicherheit
in den Winkeln der Prismenzone besteht.

Unsere Elemente stimmen sehr nahe mit den von Brezina
berechneten, für die die Winkeltabelle ausgerechnet wurde.
Trotz der geringen Differenz erschien es wünschenswert, für
die verbesserten Elemente die Winkeltabelle neu zu berechnen
wegen der grossen Zahl der hinzugetretenen neuen Formen.

Zur Neubestimmung der Elemente bot sich eine
günstige Gelegenheit. Dr. G. Lincio brachte von einer Reise
nach Kopenhagen die Nachricht, es befinde sich im dortigen
Museum ein grosser Vorrat ausgezeichneter Albite von Grön-
land. Er hat selbst eines dieser Kryställchen gemessen. Die
Ausbildung ist eine für Albit selten scharfe; auch zeigten die
Analysen von Chr. Winther (durch Prof. N. V. Ussing
freundlichst mitgeteilt), dass ein reiner Albit vorliegt.

Die Analysen von Chr. Winther ergaben folgende Zahlen:

Albitv. Kangerdluarsuk Albit v. Narsarsuk Berechnet
SiO, = 68.80°%o SiO, = 68.8000 SiO, = 63.790
Al,O, = 19.48 - A1,0; = 19.40 - А15 О; = 19.5 -
Са0. — 0.00 - CaO = 0.20 - —
Е 50:00 = К.О = 0.00 - —

Na,O = 11.86 - Na,O = 11.68 - Na, 0 less
100.09 °/o 100.08 9/0 100.00 °/o

Durch Prof. N. V. Ussing in Kopenhagen wurde uns das
ganze dort befindliche, dem mineralogischen Museum der Uni-
versität gehörige schöne Material zum Zwecke krystallographi-
scher Bearbeitung zur Verfügung gestellt, wofür wir zu grossem
Dank verpflichtet sind. Das Material stammt grösstentheils von
den dänischen wissenschaftlichen Expeditionen her, die von der
«Gommission für die Leitung der geologischen und geographi-
schen Untersuchungen in Grönland» ausgesandt wurden (Expe-
ditionen von Bloch 1890, Flink 1897, Steenstrup 1899
und Ussing 1900); einige der untersuchten Krystalle sind
während der letzten Jahre von Grönländern gesammelt und an
das Kopenhagener Museum verkauft worden. Die Resultate der
Untersuchung mögen im Folgenden mitgeteilt werden.

Besonders folgende Grunde waren ausserdem massgebend
zum Eingehen in die Untersuchung:

1. Die neuen zweikreisigen Goniometer mit ihrer
verbesserten Optik, mit Wechselsignal, vermehrter Lichtstårke und
Okular-Abblendung machten es måglich, kleine und lichtschwache
Flåchen aufzufinden und zu symbolisieren, die sich bisher der
Erkennung entzogen hatten. So war die Möglichkeit gegeben,
manches Neue zu finden. Diese Hoffnung hat sich erfüllt.
Unsere Kenntnis des Formensystems des Albils hat sich wesent-
lich erweitert.

2. Die in der Publication von Borgstrém und Gold-
schmidt «Krystallberechnung im triklinen System, illustriert
am Anorthit» (Zeitschr. Kryst. 1905. 41. 63) ausgearbeitete Me-
thode der Elementberechnung ermåglicht auch fir das trikline
System die Elemente nicht aus fünf ausgewählten Fundamental-
winkeln zu berechnen, sondern zu dieser Berechnung alle guten
Positionen aller gemessenen Krystalle zugleich in die Rechnung
zu ziehen und unter sich auszugleichen. Diese Methode sollte
angewandt werden.

Kritik und Ubersicht beim Ausgleich gestattete das Schwan-
kende zu eliminieren und so das Zuverlåssigste allein der defi-
nitiven Rechnung zuzuführen. Nicht immer sind die best aus-
gebildeten Flåchen am richtigsten Ort. So sind beim Albit
die Prismenflächen mit dem Pinakoid M = 0 & (010), wenn
noch so scharf und gut reflektierend, doch abgelenkt und
unzuverlåssig.

Die Untersuchung hat das bestätigt, was G. Melczer!) vom Albit von
Nadabula sagt:

«Ein erschwerender Umstand war ferner, dass ich die zu M gemes-
senen Winkel ausser Acht lassen musste, weil ich mich gleich bei der Mes-
sung der ersten Krystalle überzeugte, dass dieselben, auch wenn sie gute,
einfache Reflexe geben, gegen die Prismenflachen convergieren. Sie liegen
nämlich nicht genau in den Zonen nP, ox, yy und, wo beide Flachen (010

bis 1° kleiner als 180°».

12 | —

und 010) gut ausgebildet sind, ist der Winkel um

1) Zeitschr. Kryst. 1905. 40. 484.

3. Diese Störung gerade in der Prismenzone ist
genetisch von wesentlicher Bedeutung. Sie erklart sich durch
Ablenkung und schiefe Verwachsung infolge der Viellingsbildung
nach dem Albitgesetz ').

Merkwiirdig ist dabei, aber durchaus sicher gestellt, dass
die Ablenkung die Terminalflachen nicht oder doch nicht so
stark trifft, als die Prismen. Es entsteht die Aufgabe, die Ur-
sachen dieses Gegensatzes klarzulegen. Zur Lösung dieser
Aufgabe konnten die vorliegenden Untersuchungen beitragen
durch Feststellung der Tatsachen.

4. Von den für Albit angegebenen Formen ist eine An-
zahl unsicher. Es erschien wünschenswert, das Verzeichnis zu
klären durch Bestätigung oder Ausscheidung des Unsicheren.
Durch die Messungen am grönländer Albit wurden in der Tat
einige Formen gesichert, die der Bestätigung bedurften. Andere
schienen nach wie vor unsicher. Zur Prüfung der inneren
Wahrscheinlichkeit der zweifelhaften Formen wurde die Dis-
cussion der Zahlenreihen?) herangezogen.

Literatur. Über Albit von Grönland ist noch nicht viel berichtet
worden:

Flink, G. Beschreibung eines neuen Mineral.-Fundorts in Grönland. Zeit-
schr. Kryst. 1894. 23. 366.

Ussing, N. У. Mineral. u. petrogr. Untersuchungen an grönländischen
Nephelin-Syeniten. Meddel. om Grønland. 1894. 14. 13. Ref. Jahrb. Min.
1899. 2. 358.

Flink, G. Bericht über eine mineralogische Reise in Süd Grönland.
Meddel. om Grenland. 1898. 14. 221. Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1900. 32. 616.

Belowsky. Beiträge zur Petrographie des westlichen Grönlands. Zeitschr.
d. geol. Ges. 1905. 57. 15.

Beggild, O. B. Mineralogia Groenlandica. Meddel. om Grenland. 1905.
32. 460.

Ussing und Belowsky bringen keine Daten über beob-
achtete Formen am Albit. Flink berichtet über einen noch
nicht genau bestimmten Fundort (1894). Er sagt:

1) Zeitschr. Kryst. 1898. 29. 381.
2) Zeitschr. Kryst. 1897. 28. 29 fig. 426 flg.

«Das Mineral kommt nur als jüngeres Gebilde vor. Die Krystalle sind
klar, wasserhell und sitzen meist an grösseren Individuen von Orthoklas,
diesen in paralleler Orientierung bekleidend. Das Vorhandensein folgender
Formen ist festgestellt worden:

010 130 150 110 110 130 111 001 021
M f L T l 2 р Р n

Die Krystalle sind nach dem Längspinakoid tafelartig ausgebildet. Zwillings-
bildung nach derselben Fläche kommt fast an jedem Individum vor. Spez.
Gew. = 2.624».

In der zweiten Publication bestimmt Flink den Fundort
als Narsarsuk unweit Igaliko (Südgrönland). Er berichtet
weiter über Albit-Funde sowohl von Kangerdluarsuk als von
Siorarsuit und Tutup Agdlerkofia am Tunugdliarfik Fjord.
Diese Fundorte mit Ausnahme des letzteren haben Material
geliefert, das der vorliegenden Arbeit zugrunde liegt:

Beobachtete Formen. Am Goniometer durchgemessen
wurden 17 Krystalle. Doch wurde etwa die sechsfache Anzahl
aufgesetzt und auf Ausbildung und Flächenreichtum geprüft.
Folgende 34 Formen konnten mit Sicherheit nachgewiesen wer-
den. Dabei sind die für Albit neuen Formen mit *, die be-
stätigten, bisher noch nicht ganz sicheren mit -- bezeichnet

Nee OB TE ee N N ana

seele ee Se Pe)

e n ÿ 4 у Dravid wise
oa 10. 20. 1 2: > il > 29
CARO MO 05 1e 10d, 201. LUI 1139-112! 5111,33]

д 0 п 7 Е o x 7 0
о 207) US

Позор, Чара 051.94, 99024-8489. 152

Von diesen sind für Albit neu die 8 Formen K#Td4égaQ
und das noch etwas unsichere =. In Goldschmidts Win-
keltabellen aufgenommen sind: PMZfTizenxzyypgoou.

Von den übrigen finden sich bei:

Jeremejev: Jubelb. 0. К. russ. Berg. Inst. 1573. 277%
hW. Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1900. 32, 493.

Wiik: Finsk. Vet. Soc. Förh. 1884—26: Z. Ref. Zeitschr.
Kryst. 1886. 11. 311.

Klockmann: Zeitschr. D. geol. Ges. 1882. 34.417: aL.

Viola: Min. pet. Mit. 1895. 15. 135: 7.

Bowman: Min. Mag. 1902. 13. 115: yY.

Die bei Fouque (Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1885. 10. 636)
angeführten Formen (012) und (012) beruhen auf einem Druck-
fehler.

Correctur: Zeitschr. Kryst. 1885. 10 636. Zeile 8 у. u. lies: (021) (021)
statt (012), (012).
{310} {310} bei Glinka!) Zeitschr. Kryst. 1894. 22. 63, Ref. Karnojit-
sky, ist ein Druckfehler, ebenso {itt} und zu lesen:
Correctur:
Zeitschr. Kryst. 1894. 22.63. Zeile 4 v.u. lies: le {111} statt {310} {310}. . {111}
— — — 64. — 11 v.o. — (130): statt (310): (021)
— — — — b6v.u — (110) DER statt (110) : (310).

ee т fon | Melczer. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1905. 40. 583 als
ziemlich gut reflectierend, die Symbole als
sicher bezeichnet.

Trotzdem erscheinen dieselben als fraglich und der Bestäti-
gung bedürftig. Die Symbole sind ungewöhnlich, passen nicht
in die Reihe. Es liegt der Verdacht vor, dass die Flächen
einer Zwillingslamelle nach dem Albitgesetz ihren Ort ver-
danken und nichts anderes sind als æ-resp. o-Flächen.

Melczer giebt die gemessenen Winkel:

Po) (TO) — 6
(7 19°30'

ur
=
=
=
|

Mea ==

1) Glinka hat in Brief vom 23. Jan. 07 diesen Correcturen beigestimmt.

Es ist aber beim Albitzwilling, wie aus der Figur ersichtlich

19°22° 4°05" p'o 6° 9!

6°52" 23°27" EM

ee eee.
Æ 30°00' P ох’ = 19°99'.

Die Übereinstimmung mit Melczers Messung ist so gut,

dass ein Zweifel an dieser Deutung kaum bestehen bleibt. Da-

-9 и VE
nach wären die Formen 1: und 1: zu löschen. In die Win-
keltabellen aufgenommen sind ausser diesen folgende Formen"):
7 y = p Ф A 7 б À (2

5 БЕ нк. 4 55 44 6 М 3 1 3
D. œo- =0 50 = ME = Е =
4 4 3 3 22 33 5 3 2 22
23003450 30 4037, 408: 552 ‚4481: 665 483! 3891 132
Ra. Ra. Fr: Ra. Rosi Lev: Dse: Rass Hess Ва
Ausserdem sich in der Literatur angegeben !):
i Sf BR no eh Ad
Е Bf ade te 2 Balen TH сэ z 2
30 ace 25 3. 2 3 © =F coh = LE 05
310430 270 310. 5301 430 230 140 1.20.0 012) 012
RAR к Gl Kl KI: \. KL К. Fou. Fou.
1) Dabei bedeutet:
Dx. — Descloizeaux Manuel 1862. 1. 819.
Jer. — Jeremejew Jubelb. russ. Berg. Inst. 1873. 2. 179. Ref. Zeit-
schr. Kryst. 1900. 32. 493.
Ru. = Rumpf Min. Ми. 1874. 4. 98. Ref. Jahrb. Min. 1874. 868.
Ва. — у. Rath Zeitschr. Kryst. 1881. 5. 27.
Kl. = Klockmann Zeitschr. 4. geol. Ges. 1882. 34. 410.
Fou. — Fouqué Bull. soc. fr. Min. 1883. 6. 197. Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst.
1884. 10. 636.
Gl. = Glinka Russ. Berg. Journ. 1889. 4. 10. Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst.
1894. 22. 63.
Fr. = Franck Bull Ac. Belg. 1891. (3) 21. 605. Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst.
1894. 23. 477.
Vi. — Viola Min. pet. Mitt. 1895. 15. 135. Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1898.
D ae UH là
SI. = Slavik Bull. intern. Ac. Boh. 1902. 7. Ref. Jahrb. Min. 1903.
1201:
Bo. — Bowman Min. Mag. 1902. 13. 115.
Me. — Melczer Zeitschr. Kryst. 1905. 40. 571.

т о ele
4 4 i т 7 Ya jen =
304 504 МЕ 757. 181 1.20.1. 404) 197 To LD

GS EME PANNE Kl. Kl. Kl. Me. Kl. Bo.

Da es ebenso wünschenswert erscheint, das Formenver-
zeichnis abzuklären, als zu bereichern, so wurden die genannten

Formen einer kritischen Durchsicht unterzogen.

4 eg № i.
To в, 3%; æ 4; «30; 18; 1.20; 15; 15.16 von
Klockmann angegeben, wurden Gdt. Index 1890. 2. 22. als

nicht genügend gesichert betrachtet und in das Formenver-
zeichnis nicht aufgenommen. Ausserdem waren als unsicher
dort aufgeführt 22 und æ5, die an unseren Grönländer
Albiten wiedergefunden und somit bestätigt wurden.

18 und 1.20 nennt auch Viola (Min. рег. Mitt. 1895. 15.
139). Sie stehen aber so hart ап M = Oo und so isoliert in
der Reihe der Zone 19, dass sie als Vicinale zu M anzusprechen
und nicht unter die typischen Formen aufzunehmen sein dürften.

Auch die übrigen genannten Klockmannschen Formen
bedürfen der Bestätigung.

31 (311) Bowman kann als gesichert gelten.

- 4 — 13 —
р = 3 0 (405); a a (445); 6 = 9 9 (132) von G. v. Rath
angegeben, erscheinen gesichert.
= 21450; y — 21450) sind dagegen aus der Reihe

der gesicherten zu entfernen. Rath sagt über sie: «Combina-
tions-Kanten annähernd = 4—6° gemessen. Eine genauere
Messung wird durch die starke vertikale Streifung der gemes-
senen Flächen verhindert. Ihre Messung entspricht etwa den
Symbolen и = > P' (450) und у = ’P (150).

= = 0 (403) findet sich bei Franck (Zeitschr. Kryst. 1894.

23. 477 u. 478) als Referat aus dem Bull. soc. belg. Doch liegen
hier Druckfehler vor, wie aus den Winkeln ersichtlich. Es ist
nicht 403, sondern 403.

Correctur.
Zeitschr. Kryst. 1894. 23 Seite 477 Zeile 13 v.u. lies: {403} statt {103}
— ee 3.0 (101) (403) statt (101): (403)
RG 0010) 1403) = (010): (402)
Die Form ist zu streichen.

b= > (552) angegeben von Rumpf (Min. Mit. 1874. 4.
98). Die Form liegt an einem ungewöhnlichen Ort, vereinzelt,
durch eine einzelne Winkelmessung bestimmt. Flächenausbil-
dung schlecht, Messung genähert. Die Form ist aus der Reihe
der gesicherten zu streichen.

Correctur.

Hintze Handb. Min. 1891. 2. 1447. Zeile 12 v.o. lies: ¢ (552) statt (552). _
= — = 1448. — 14 v.0. — (552): (110) statt (552) : (110).

OY S|

л — , (665) findet sich bei Descloizeaux (Manuel 1862.

1. 318) als BE ebenso in dem zugehörigen Atlas, Taf. 25 Fig.
146 an einem Periklin-Zwilling. Die zugehörige Messung von
Marignac ist von Descloizeaux mit ? versehen. Schrauf
hat in seinem Atlas (1864. Tf. 4. Fig. 28) Descloizeaux's Figur
umgezeichnet.

Die Discussion der Zahlen der Zone hat die Form nicht
wahrscheiniich gemacht. Sie ist bis zur Bestätigung als unsi-
cher anzusehen.

A= 3 (332) findet sich bei Descloizeaux (Manuel 1862.

1. 318. 320) als bs am Periklin, die Messung nach Marignac.
mit ?? versehen, um 174’ von der Rechnung differierend. Hes-
senberg (Senckenb. Abh. 1858. 2. 248. Albit v. Sterzing.) gibt
die Form als cp aus Zone Po und xf. Er bemerkt aber dazu:
«Die Flache lieferte kein ganz vollkommenes Spiegelbild, und
ich bin geneigt, sie als die Resultante eines sehr feinfurchigen
Wechsels der beiden anliegenden Flächen P'(o) und «P'(7’)
anzusehen». Mit Rücksicht auf ihre innere Wahrscheinlichkeit
darf die Form wohl doch als gesichert gelten.

g = 23 (221) findet sich bei Lévy (Descript. 1837. Taf. 41
Fig. 7), nachgezeichnet von Schrauf (Atlas 1864, Taf. 3. Fig.
17) als ©. Die Form bedurfte der Bestätigung, da sie nur an
einem Periklin beschrieben wurde, bevor das Periklin-Zwillings-
gesetz bekannt war. Es liegt der Verdacht vor, dass es sich um
eine Fläche handelt, die durch die Zwillingsbildung ihren Ort
erhalten hat.

Die Form wurde an unseren Albiten mit Sicherheit nach-
gewiesen.

i ss (443) findet sich bei Lévy (Descript. 1837. Taf. 41
Fig. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8), hiervon copiert bei Schrauf (Atlas 1864.
Taf. 3 Fig. 16. 17) als д. Von späteren Autoren nicht gefunden.
Es liegt der Verdacht vor, dass die Lévyschen Beobachtungen
anders zu deuten seien. Etwa, dass Zwillingsbildung bei der
Deutung übersehen wurde.

Die Form bedarf der Bestatigung.

С = %5 (150) (Rumpf Min. Mitt. 1874. 4. 98). Gemessen
EM = 16°; berechnet 19°21’; stimmt schlecht. Sollte diese
Form nicht noch von andern beobachtet sein, so wäre sie erst
durch die vorliegende Bestätigung zu den gesicherten ge-

kommen.

2) (230) von Viola angegeben (Min. pet. Mitt. 1895. 15.

139) mit der Messung:

— 11747". berechnet! 10°46); СПЕ: 2 12042
Die Diskussion der Zahlen lässt >;

erkennen. Auch ist 25 bekannt, æ 5 dagegen nicht. Es be-

als wahrscheinlich

rechnet sich:
о DR <= 153
Die Beobachtung liegt zwischen beiden Symbolen und unter-

scheidet sich von beiden um mehr als 1°. Die Form bedarf

der Beståtigung.

в = > (443) findet sich bei Descloizeaux (Manuel 1862.

1. 318) als à Die Messung pb = 70°30 mit ? versehen.
Rath giebt sie abermals (Zeitschr. Kryst. 1881. 5.29) und zwar
ohne Messung bestimmt durch zwei Zonen ow und rM. Die

Form wird unsicher mit der Unsicherkeit von r = 3 0. Sie

liegt an der Zwillingsgrenze, daher besteht der Verdacht der
Ablenkung für 7 ebenso wie für о. Mit Rücksicht auf die Zu-
verlässigkeit und Vorsicht der Beobachter kann die Form als
gesichert gelten.

4
3 ER

2. 248.) als qh gesichert. Rath giebt sie (Zeilschr. Kryst.

0 (403) ist durch Hessenberg (Senckenb. Abh. 1858.

1881: >: 97, sowie Taf. 2. Fig.7). Sie liegt an der Zwillings-
grenze und könnte abgelenkt sein. Eine Messung ist nicht
gegeben.

Neumann giebt die Form als (r?) (Berl. Ak. Abh. 1830.
218) mit der Bemerkung: «Sie ist sehr unvollkommen, gewölbt
und erlaubt nur eine ganz. ungefähre Messung».

Gemessen: ry = 15°10' berechnet: 16°37’
— TE — 114730’ — 37ER:

Descloizeaux (Manuel 1862. 1. 318) gibt Messungen
pa == Pr = 62—65°, berechnet 65°28’.

Hessenberg hat sie mit Sicherheit für den Albit von
Sterzing nachgewiesen. (Senkenb. Abh. 1858. 2. 247). Er
nennt sie «glatt und unzweilfelhaft». Gemessen: Pr = 64°52’.

Nach brieflicher Mitteilung (14. Dez. 1906) hat Vrba die

h
> 4 7 N
Form 30 an Krystallen von Bobruvka (Mähren) durch folgende
Messungen nachgewiesen.
4
Gemessen: cr = 0:50 = 65°35! (Mittel); berechnet: 65°28’.
5)

11 (111) von Jeremejew angegeben als с = 'Р (Jubelb.
Petersb. Berg. Inst. 1873. 179; Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1900. 382.

495), jedoch ohne Winkel, Figur oder. sonstige Angabe. Die
Form bedarf der Bestatigung.

0 (804) findet sich bei Glinka (Ref. Karnojitsky Zeit-
schr. Kryst. 1894. 22. 63) ohne Messung oder sonstige Angabe.
Es liegt ein Druckfehler vor und ist zu lesen (403) statt (304).

Es bleiben danach ausser den am Albit von Grönland
beobachteten Formen als gesichert nur die folgenden übrig:

WII x
eo) Hi a
|

| wol |

103, 2339 43 31 182
Rath. Hsb. Rath. Bowm. Rath.
© 0 (504) von Slavik angegeben für Albite von Bobruvka

4
(Mahren), jedoch nur auf Grund von Schimmermessungen (Bull.

Bohm. Akad. 1902. Sep. S.6). Nach brieflicher Mittheilung von
Vrba (14. Dez. 1906) haben genauere Messungen das Symbol
nicht bestatigt. Vielmehr liegt dort das auch von anderen

ae | 7
Fundorten bekannte 50 (403) vor. (Vgl. oben bei 50. Danach

ist das Symbol zu lüschen.
Als der Bestätigung bedürftig sind danach anzusehen:

3 4 4 6
= м.
930 111 443 665
Vi. Jer. Lev. Dx.

Durch Druckfehler und sonstiges Versehen sind in die
Formenverzeichnisse geraten und daher zu streichen:

J ips
Basu) Ba 30 0 -

>>>

Shae) 403. 304...50 131 757 * 797. О
Gl. Gl. Fra. Gl. SI. Vi. Mel. Mel. Fou. Fou.

2300450970 530 430 140 552 450 1.20.0 181 1:20.1 414 15.161

17
Als Vicinale oder ganz unsichere Formen sind anzusehen:

a © 4

5 55 и
ти 2) 9
3 3 29 20121810 ВО

Векь KI + Ru Rasy SP Kl EI Sr

Grosse Zahl der unsicheren Formen. Die auffallende Tat-
sache, dass wir beim Albit in der Literatur so viele unsi-
chere Formen neben verhältnismässig wenig sichern antreffen,
erklärt sich folgendermassen.

Die reichliche, selten fehlende Viellingsbildung
(Compositbildung !}), verbunden mit Ablenknng und schiefer Ver-
wachsung bewirkt eine Unsicherheit der Flächenposition. Diese
Unsicherheit trifft besonders die Hauptzonen, vor allem die
Prismenzone. Hier begegnen wir fortlaufenden Reihen von
Reflexen, die man nicht deuten kann, ohne den Krystall in alle
seine Lamellen aufzulösen, dann Positionsschwankungen durch
Ablenkung nnd Ausheilung einspringender Winkel.

Trotzdem (man kann auch sagen weil) hier genetisch
das Manichfaltigste vorgeht, kommen nur die einfachsten
Formen der Reihe zur sicheren Bestimmung als typische
Formen. Alles andere bleibt unsicher oder ist vicinal und
influenziert.

Kommen nun solche vicinale Gebilde in die Nähe eines
typischen Ortes, so ist selbst der erfahrene und kritische Beob-
achter geneigt, solchen Gebilden ein Symbol zu geben, sie als
typisch anzusehen. Wie viel mehr der minder Erfahrene, der
in jedem Reflex neuer Position eine neue zu symbolisierende
Form begrüsst.

Ähnlich wie in der Prismenzone ist es in den übrigen
Zonen, von denen nur wenige genetisch wichtig sind. Die
wichtigste von diesen ist [eM], dann [PM], [Pl], [РТ].

!) Ueber Composite vgl. Zeitschr. f. Kryst. 1907. 43. 347.
XXXIV. 9

Das Gesamtbild ist: Wenige Zonen mit vielen schwankenden,
wenig typischen Positionen. Das ist das Bild einer Formen-
entwicklung wie sie die Compositbildung') zu begleiten pflegt.

Schwierigkeit der Bestimmung und Deutung hängt mit
diesen Verhältnissen zusammen. Es ist oft nicht leicht, die
Zwillingsteile richtig zu trennen, für jede Fläche —, oben und
unten zu unterscheiden. besonders dann, wenn Viellings- oder
Zwillingsbildung nach zwei Gesetzen zugleich vorliegt oder die
Unterlage (Orthoklas) bestimmend und ablenkend auf die Flä-
chenlage mitwirkt (Induction und Influenzirung?)). Letzteres ist
beim Albit häufig der Fall. Hier hat die zweikreisige Messung
mit ihrer graphischen Discussion im gnomonischen Bild uns in
den Stand gesetzt, die kritische Auflösung komplizierter Bil-
dungen durchzuführen und dadurch eine Anzahl neuer Formen
sicher festzustellen, unsichere zu beseitigen.

Aber auch diese klärende Bearbeitung ändert das Gesamt-
bild nicht: Wenige Zonen, mit vielen schwankenden, wenig
typischen Positionen.

Die Ausscheidung des Unsicheren ist beim Albit mehr als
bei andern Krystallarten nötig, da die Aufnahme des Unsicheren
bei Deutung der an sich schon complicierten Verhältnisse ver-
wirrend wirkt. Ist ein Symbol, wenn auch unsicher, angegeben,
so verleitet dies einen folgenden Beobachter, einen Reflex ähn-
icher Position ebenso zu deuten, ohne die strenge Kritik anzu-
wenden, die eine neue Form erfordert. So erfährt die unsi-
chere, oft unrichtige Form, eine scheinbare, unberechtigte
Bestätigung.

Es empfiehlt sich, alle unsicheren Formen bis zur sicheren
Neufindung bei allen Diskussionen als unrichtig oder nicht vor-
handen anzusehen und sie nur in den Verzeichnissen zu führen,
um die Angaben des Beobachters zu respectieren und sie
andern, vielleicht anders Urteilenden, nicht vorzuenthalten.

!) Ueber Composite vgl. Zeitschr. f. Kryst. 1907.
2) vgl. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1907. 42. 596.

Discussion der Zonen.
wesentlichen Zonen discutiert werden und untersucht, wie sich

Es mögen die Zahlenreihen der

die neu gefundenen resp. hier bestätigten, bisher unsicheren

Formen einreihen.

Prismenzone').

Mist ice.
pq —0 05 08
ЧР = © 5 3
Ви. со 2 1

.. *
Z Ken
2345:
2 23 со
AU
2 3 1
1 1
FO ao

ho tee Pr PRE SV
©0 nn w2 D 3 æ5 0%
0 1 2 3 9 22

1 A 1

0 3 1 2 5) Е >:

Die Reihe ist normal in ihren beiden Stücken ГМ und /M;
Die neue Form K, sowie die Bestätigungen

h steht isoliert.

ZhaL sind wertvolle Ergänzungen.
Längs-Domen-Zone 09.

M
pq = 0»
1
a
Die

e
02

0
0

Form Z = 05 ist auffallend;

я М

0 3 0%
5 м
9 [© =

zu erwarten ware 06.

Messung und Rechnung stimmen gut (vgl. S.24), aber der

ist verwaschen.

Es wurde deshalb die Form als der

Bestätigung bedürftig unter die unsicheren gestellt.

Reflex
Zone р.
Vig д
i
1 = 0 5

0 Oo
Tha ae
3
1
ven

Auffallend ist die Zahl

doch

ist diese durch den

Col |

dol = ©

tell

DER)

Sie spricht gegen die Form 5,

erfahrenen und vorsichtigen Beob-

achter G. von Rath als sicher angegeben (s. oben S. 15).

1) Im folgenden bedeute * neu, -- bestatigt. Ferner bedeute v in der Rechen-

1
vorschrift z. Beisp. 5 (р — 1) die Glieder der vorhergehenden Reihe.

Zwischen о und я liegt eine lokale Entwicklung vor. Die-
selbe hat Formen hervorgebracht (в, À), die nur mühsam gesi-

chert sind.
Zone pp.
Je 7 т р A g [
11 11 = 33 =
Ba: wid = >> 9 =
р9 0 33 99 11 99 22 œ со
1 1 3
= Е а 2 9
9 0 3 5 1 9 2 Ce

Die Reihe ist normal. Die neuen Formen /A passen gut

en N 44. :
hinein. Auch eine Form 4 = 33 ist angegeben, wurde jedoch
für unsicher gehalten (siehe oben). Bestatigt sie sich, so haben
wir eine schwache lokale Entwicklung zwischen pg, wie zwischen

on der vorigen Zone.

Zone po.
h P x 1 y h
Bon ce) 0 10 20 20 со 0
0
0 - 1 D = 1—p

Die Zone zeichnet sich aus durch die zwei wichtigen Fla-
chen wy. Zwischen diesen eine kleine lokale Entwicklung, die
das schwache 7 hervorgebracht hat. Zu erwarten ware noch
5 0. Die schwache Entwicklung entspricht derjenigen zwischen

on und pg (vgl. das Projectionsbild Taf. 1 Fig. 21). Alle diese
schwachen Entwicklungen liegen in dem Band zwischen den
Parallelzonen 19 und 24. Merkwiirdig ist die Schwäche von x
an unseren Grönländer Krystallen.

Zone 1q.
M p x 0 7 £ M
pg == 0» 11 10 1 13 15 0%
1 1 Е
Dr ane 0 ae 2 3 >

Die neue Form & passt gut in die Reihe.

Zone 24.
x? * x
M X 9 Ф y u 4 M
Ba ler. 99 GR 99" Е 20, 24.020000
q 1

Das von Bowman gefundene, hier hestätigte у passt gut
in die Reihe. Diese ist genau analog der vorhergehenden 19.
Die an Kryst. 6 gefundene Form 29 passt nicht in die Reihe.
Sie ist ihren Zahlen nach als Vicinale zu M anzusehen. Dagegen

bildet die neue Form g = 21 eine werthvolle Ergänzung der
Reihe.
Zone er
2 x
M у 0 т Q M
TI en ows? Lean 2
u 29) 29° 7200 nn
1
DE q = » 0 1 2 3 QC

Die neue Form © passt gut in die Reihe: Diese ist analog
den beiden Reihen 14 und 24 und ware ihnen gleich, wenn

1 Е
50 gefunden würde.

Zone p1.
h W p o i h
29 = «0 1 11 21 31 20
1 1 7 A
PA rel) ro 1 0 5 | &

Eine schwache Zone. Die neue Form @ passt gut.

Zone: р— 2 = а.

IE n О 7 7 T:
pq = 0 i Тов —
9 a 9 = » 0 : 1 9 со

Die schöne Reihe ist ganz normal. Die neue Form О,
sowie die bestätigten уу passen gut.

Zone pq = — 1.
| д ий w o l
i 1 = 31 = 5
Del ==" 962 5 10 : 21 orale a
2g == ‘5 i 0 ) 2 x
Die neuen Formen passen gut.
Zone 3 p + q = — 4.
* * *
2 ÿ Q 0 ) w 9 2
5 = Oi ERNST = =
р Re = ea 99
со 3 04 99 1 50 99 22 3
1 4 3
А 2 = 9 5
re 0 oe eas I DE
1 1
0 3 9 1 D == mi I:

Die neuen Formen passen gut in die Reihe.

Die neuen und bestätigten Formen sind folgendermassen
charakterisiert:

Z = w2 (120) Wiik (Zeitschr. Kryst. 1886. 11. 311)
bedurfte der Bestätigung. Sie wurde an drei Krystallen mit 5
Flachen beobachtet.

Buchst.

| le el

een

|= 34| Gemessen Berechnet |

| = . li © | == == | Г.

| 2s = = —- | Bemerkungen
SIN © | p РА WA |

02 6 | 1 | 221018 |90°00 221025 | 90200 | breit. Reflex gut

lo u ice „ | 41°25 | w | schmal. Вей. sehr gut

15) 3 | TS 7 | " | " | Refl. schwach
I 41090" | и | " | „ | alle schmal ? Вей. zieml. gut
221010 |» | 221°25' | " | | Refl. gut

h = 20 (100) findet sich bei Jeremejew (Jubelb. Petersb.
Berg. Inst. 1873), Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1900. 32.493. Die Form
fand sich an 6 der Grönländer Krystalle mit 8 Flächen.

= | S E 2 Gemessen | Berechnet
Е | я Bs Eee === | | Bemerkungen
a | ыы Ta RE EN CE
В [oo | | 91024: 90° | 90°28" | 90°— |\
| | 4 | 2 1\269°30'| — | 270928 | » IS äuss. schmal. Вей. sehr schwach
| (Sa HE JOUR | 90228 в | sehr schmal. Вей. sehr schwach
3 il 91°0 | — Holy schmal. Refl. lichtschwach
pes! ly 90250°| — Е
| PSE | 2 |\271°04 | — | 270028 er, schmal, ausgedehnter Вей.
| | 15 | 1 30°26 | == 1 ” | „ | sehr schmal, sehr schwach. Вей.
tou | 90°69 | So ee |. — = —
a = 943 (120). Von Klockmann gegeben. Konnte hier
bestätigt werden. An 8 Krystallen mit 10 Flächen.
Е Е RE 2 | Gemessen | Berechnet |
Е а | 26 = 2 —— | = — | Bemerkungen
Е Ур | © |
a |o2| | 318246 90°— | 318959 | 90°— | sehr schmal. Вей. sehr schwach
24 аа 5918055 | n | " | schmal. Вей. gut.
| 3 | 1 139220 ler coe | 138°59 | » | mässig breit. Вей. schwach
| вом » | w | sehr schmal. Вей. unscharf
| 6 LE A 138°55| ›„ | СИ | schmal. Вей. sehr gut
| 10 | 1 | 318059) „ |318°59 | „ | sehr schmal. Вей. zieml. scharf
PL aloe Son th | " „ | sehr schmal. Вей. schwach
jet erg SETS Gi er Ne” fa | = =
Weel Ge lea, TESS и. | ” „ | sehr schmal. Вей. ziemlich gut

L = 5 (150). Von Klockmann gegeben. Konnte hier
vielfach bestätigt werden. An 10 Krystallen mit 18 Flachen,
oft mit vorziiglicher Ausbildung. Die besten Messungen gaben
folgende Krystalle :

Pers
= |= |= |S2| Gemessen Berechnet
| Е Br: BE 38 — — Bemerkungen
нае | р Ф р
E | — Я m — — — —- —
IED Co 5] RS 1 160°42’| 90°— | 160°44" | 90°00") massig breit. Вей. sehr gut
f160°39) » » | | schmal. Вей. gut
| | | Ål |
| aed: 2 |\ 160°41 „ | " » | sehmal. Вей. sehr gut
| | | | SS i | |
| | У 160°42 „ | » | м | sehr schmal. Вей. gut
| 002 N 160938" » | RAM | schmal. Refl. gut
# — 04(041). Neu. An 1 Krystall mit 1 Fläche.
| TOTEN ат i
Г | = | = S Е Gemessen | Berechnet |
| Е | Е $s ЕЕ ET = = | Bemerkungen
ing | 04 | 4 | 1 | 167°18 | 65°51" 167°00' | 65°51'| sehr klein,ab.eben и. wohlbegrenzt

Trotzdem nur eine Flache beobachtet ist, wurde die Form
als sicher angesehen, da die Flache gut begrenzt ist und Mes-
sung und Rechnung gut übereinstimmen.

?Е = 05 (051). Neu. An einem Krystall mit 5 Flächen.
ie ee ie So
ESSAI EMI PERS Gemessen | Berechnet |
| 73755 | © | | R
| = 2 #5 == es 2 | Bemerkungen
Is | РЕ | |
| 2 | MIN Ф | (2 Pd oy
—_—- EN 5 tl os ee ВЫ >
| ler ors USE NESA STE SAN sd ao . i i
| & | 05 15| 2 |169°52 | 70°18'| 169°36’ | 70°12 f schmal, nicht ganz scharf, aber
| | | | | | И einheitl. reflekt.
| | | | |
| | | 1680507 | 70925 | | Гап 4 Lamellen, unscharf. Reflex
| | | |\\ verwischt

Trotz der guten Übereinstimmung von Messung und Rech-
nung erscheint die Form der Beståtigung bedürftig, da die
Reflexe unscharf sind und die Zahl nicht gut in die Reihe
passt (vgl. S. 19).

no
or

W = 1(lll). An zwei Krystallen mit je einer Fläche. Die
Form wird von Jeremejew angegeben (Jubelb. Berg. Inst.
Petersb. 1873. Ref. Zeitschr. Kryst. 1900. 32.193 als р == {111} P',
aber ohne Messung anzugeben. Sie konnte an den Grönländer
Krystallen mit Sicherheit nachgewiesen werden.

5 |S Е pore Gemessen Berechnet |
3 Е EE FEI = - ASE Wl | Bemerkungen
ван HSG LED и vg!) pal
7 m SEA Cu M Im Tr nae я ЕДЕТЕ я
ue | | 3 | 1 66°57 | 58206 67°13 | 58°09’) schmal, gut leucht. Refl. unscharf
| | | 8
| | tae |.67°20: | 58°18| D " | sehr klein, glänz. Refl. schwach
Berl
I — 33 (113). Neu.
| LE = S| Г 7 | =
= |S |= 38 Gemessen Berechnet | |
te | = 5 ЕЕ — —- | Bemerkungen
| = | > - 2? S | | |
| co | ACER Sie p Ile % | в | |
И. | eme re
| | 3030’ 17691’ 33°44’ | 17099, J ziemlich gross, vollkom. eben.
| Г | 35 ll | 1 | 33°30" | 17°21") 33°44" | 17°22 (BRET sehen
Trotzdem die Form nur mit einer Fläche auftritt, ist sie
I
durch deren gute Ausbildung und Übereinstimmung von Mes-
sung und Rechnung gesichert.
33
— —. Neu
22
Ms | 7 ;
hs | S = 32| Gemessen | Berechnet |
Е | Е |B as —n | Bemerkungen
= Se | |
|2 | @ |=" \s ZU AN N | |
aie. ie | MR TNS ET
A = Aa ER 46°20’ | 53°90'| 46°28" 580181 f ziemlich breit, vollk. eben, gut

\ spiegelnd

u | | |
| |

Trotzdem die Form nur mit einer Fläche auftritt, ist sie
doch durch deren gute Ausbildung und Übereinstimmung von
Messung und Rechnung gesichert.

ur
(OO) == 99 (312). Neu
we
2 + | = =| | 3
| a | E = Sa Gemessen | _ Berechnet |
Е E | = = | ar || Bemerkungen
(> = 7; в | | |
ma | | SET | Ф p gp |
ai > IR on |
Io 3.6 2 | 69°50" |46°10'| 69°32" | 46°04 | stark leuchtend, mit gutem Refl.
| = | 69°46’ | 46°10" | | lichtschwächer. Вей. deutlich
Bei der Güte der Ausbildung, sowie Ubereinstimmung von
Messung und Rechnung, erscheint die Form gesichert.
ф = 21(211). Neu.
| J hes el | ||
5 | S |Z =, Gemessen | Berechnet |
| Е а | | Bemerkungen
=p ala Cul op) pr en p-| |
oe 6 1.2. 65°56" | 58°00’| 66°08" | 58200" gut leucht. Streif. Refl.zieml. gut

Bei der Giite der Ausbildung und Ubereinstimmung von
Messung und Rechnung erscheint die Form gesichert. Sie passt

gut in die Zahlenreihe.

Die Form erscheint gesichert. Sie passt gut in die Zahlenreihe.

X = 29 (291). Vicinale.

€

5 | | rn: я nr. | |
RULES ai Ke= Gemessen | Berechnet | |
| = Е | mae lene 2 à De | Bemerkungen
S|) = | 2 se | |
| a | a |e = |e oa Veg ale MEET С HS A
| re т Fi 7 ORT | = Я | 5 di r £ a II Ha ME = т = я г
| > = | n ~ ‚ | | rorr ооо“ =
x || 2911 619 | 15°40" (79°98). 159557 | 79023 | schmal, glänzend. Refl. schwach

1
| | 15°42’ | 79028
| | |
Le ЗБ ВЕНЕВ

п | |
|

Trotz dieser Festigkeit der Position, die sich im Auftreten
mit je einer Fläche an beiden Individuen eines Zwillings zu
erkennen gibt, müchten wir diese Form in Anbetracht des
Symbols, der Nähe an M = 0» und der Isoliertheit in der
Zahlenreihe als Vicinale ansprechen. Sie wurde deshalb unter

die unsicheren gestellt.

Я = 13 (131). Von Viola nachgewiesen (Min. pet. Mitt.
1895. 15. 140), jedoch nur an einem Krystall mit schwankender
Position: Gemessen I : 13 = 28°16'; 30°05'; 32°20’. Diese
Form findet sich an den meisten unserer Krystalle gross und
gut ausgebildet. Sie ist geradezu charakteristisch für alle die
hier untersuchten grönländischen Fundorte. Von den 17 gemes-.
senen Krystallen wurde sie an 13 mit 23 Flachen beobachtet.
Von den Terminalflächen ist sie an Häufigkeit bei unseren
Krystallen nur von Ppo übertroffen. Einige der besten Mes-
sungen mögen im folgenden zusammengestellt werden.

| | = | |
ee = 2.2) Gemessen Berechnet |
22 2:38 = =. Bemerkungen
HARAS ALT |
Ss ns ON 2 ID gp р
= Fan | mn Er] at ae
| 7 | 13} 3 | 1 | 163°10° | 59°08’) 163°17’ | 59°08'| sehr gross, Вей. vorzüglich
| | 56-159. | 1639167 595107 | sehr gross, Refl. vorzüglich
| | ren Sst ae. hte
| | | 163°14 | 59°10 | | sehr gross, Вей. vorzüglich
| | 12 | 22 1655207 "59210: | kleines Dreieck. Вей. sehr gut
| | | | 163910" | 59°10’ | schmal. Refl. gut
| | Ш
Mittel aus allen 23 Messungen: © = 163° 17' D = 29,09)
berechnet: ф = 163°17 р = 49°09.
& = 15 (151). Neu.
с BI ER Te We Ba :
m Neue ||, (Gemessen | Berechnet |
ae ee à | Bemerkungen
Bele. | oe, |e ce | | X
| EAR SIE Sa 9 | p |
АБ | 6 |1 | 1695507 | 70°10) 169559 | 10308’ | { Assis breit. Вей. schwach aber
| | | | |\ einheitlich

Trotzdem nur mit einer Fläche ausgebildet, ist die Form
gesichert in Anbetracht der guten Ausbildung und der Über-
einstimmung von Messung und Rechnung.

Y= 24 (241), von Bowman beobachtet (Min. Mag. 1902.
13. 115). Konnte hier nachgewiesen und dadurch bestätigt

werden.
= Е = © = Gemessen | Berechnet
| = = |

Е МЕ Ds ==! а т Bemerkungen

A | m | ts ST pe Weg Ф PE
—— mue = = nn
| | DA | TEE EEN || 2 р 2 Lamellen; sehr gute kleine

24 | 15 | 1 | 145°55 | 69°06| 145°50 | 69°01") Jan 2 ‚ sehr В
| | KEN РМ | un \ Flächen. Refl. gut
u = 2(221) eine seltene Form. An 3 Krystallen mit 4
Flächen beobachtet.

| Е ra 5 | | +

=, Vous SE Gemessen Berechnet

SRE — | Bemerkungen

ag ler Se) ¢ |. g p
ic 0 Eee | In ni
| % } 6 1 | 125°17’ 60545 125216 | 60°51’) sehr klein. Refl.schwach, zieml.gut
| Е | 5
| ТИ | 1 |! 125908. 61208 sehr klein. Вей. schlecht
| lon? f125°27 60°43’ | sehr gross und gut. Refl. gut

| 11125920" | & 437 | | sehr gross und gut. Refl. gut

Die Berechnung der Elemente geschah nach der von Borg-
ström und Goldschmidt publicierten Methode!) Es sind
zünächst die Positionswinkel фо für alle guten Flächen jedes
Krystalls zu berechnen aus den Ablesungen v und A, wobei

o=v—v; p=h—h.

Die Grösse hy, die Polstellung des Instruments, ist leicht
ermittelt. Sie wurde für unsere Messungen — 50° gemacht.
Die Richtigkeit der Werte о hängt nun ab von einem guten

und vorsichtigen Polarstellen des Krystalls am Goniometer.

1) Zeitschr. Kryst. 1905. 41. 63.

Diese bot keine Schwierigkeit infolge der jedesmal guten Aus-
bildung der Prismenzone als Zone. Der Ort der Prismen
schwankte, aber nur innerhalb der Zone. Selten fiel ein Reflex
aus der Zone heraus. So erscheinen für alle Messungen guter
Flächen die Werte o gesichert.

Anders ist es mit den g. Sind die © richtig abgelesen, so
brauchen wir zur Berechnung der g für jeden Krystall eine
ausgleichende Berechnung von v,. Dieser Berechnung von v,
ist eine ganz besondere Sorgfall zuzuwenden. Geschieht sie
unvorsichtig, so sind alle © ungenau. Der Albit bietet hierfür
eine besondere Schwierigkeit durch den Umstand, dass die
Flächen der Prismenzone wegen Schwankens hierzu nicht zu
brauchen sind. Speziell das hierfür so wichtige und bequeme,
stets vorhandene und meist gross und eben ausgebildete
М = 0х versagt, da die Erfahrung zeigt, dass es aus den
Zonen, denen es angehört, innerhalb der Prismenzone abgelenkt
ist. Diese Ablenkung schwankt nach beiden Seiten d.h. nach
T und Г hin von 10’ bis über 1°. Im Durchschnitt beträgt sie
etwa 20’. Auch die Prismen 7'/fz sind innerhalb der Prismen-
zone abgelenkt und schwankend, wenn auch ihre Reflexe noch
so gut sind.

Es bleibt daher nur übrig, ©, mit Hilfe der Zonen der
Terminalflächen zu berechnen und zwar ausschliesslich aus den
Quer-Parallelzonen Og und 19. Nur ausnahensweise konnte
einmal die Zone 24 herangezogen werden.

Die Berechnung von +, aus den Quer-Paralielzonen geschah
aus je zwei Flächen p,q, und 9,9, mit den Ablesungen 0,9,
und v,o, nach der Formel:

v v
Lo — 44
m v?
Yo— Ya
wobei 7; = sin v4 tg 04 15 — sinvetgpe

В, =

v v
У1 = COSY, tg 01 Y2 = COSUVetg 02

Man combiniert so der Reihe nach je zwei Flächen einer

Zone und nimmt aus allen erhaltenen guten Werten den
nm Durchschnitt.

| Fast alle Krystalle waren

Viellinge nach dem Albitgesetz.

Hierbei fällt jede Fläche beider

Stellungen in die gleiche Quer-

Ай Paz
Text Fig. 1.

parallelzone, also Og wieder in
Zone Og, 14 wieder in Zone 1g.
Dies erfolgt mit grosser Strenge. Es kann also jede Fläche
einer solchen Zone mit in die Rechnung gezogen werden,
gleichgiltig, ob sie der ersten oder der zweiten Stellung ange-
hört. Ausgenommen ist nur die stets abgelenkte Grenzfläche
der Reihe M = 0%.

Anmerkung. Es bewährte sich bei unseren Krystallen
regelmässig die Tatsache, dass bei den Viellingen nach dem

= = 1
Albitgesetz die Querparallelzonen Og und 1g, auch 29 und All

beider Stellung sich deckten und zwar obne Ablenkung bis auf
M, das aus der Zone gerückt ist, dass ebenso die Prismen-
zonen sich deckten, jedoch mit Ablenkung aller Flachen inner-
halb der Zone.

Diese Tatsachen sind von wesentlichster Bedeutung für
die Beurteilung der Vorgänge bei der Zwillingsbildung.

Es sind nicht die ganzen Partikel an der Zwillingsgrenze
gegeneinander abgelenkt, wie wir das beispielsweise beim Ge-
russit von Mapimi') und von Monteponi°) kennen gelernt haben.

Es sind vielmehr für die einzelnen Partikel gewisse Vor-
zugsrichtungen (Flächennormalen) in der Kraftsphäre gegen
andere abgelenkt, aie ihre Richtung beibehalten haben.

In der Prismenzone sind alle Richtungen abgelenkt, in den
übrigen Zonen nicht. Es entsteht die Frage, warum gerade

in der Prismenzone?

1) Gdt. Jahrb. Min. 1902. Beit bd. 15. 582.
?) Hubrecht Zeitschr. Kryst. 1905. 40. 170.

Es entsteht ferner die genetisch wichtige Frage: was sind
bei den Zwillingen nach dem Albitgesetz die Verknüpfer, die
Binder? Gewiss sind es die Bindezonen [29]; [Og] und [19]
als Ganzes. Ist nun in diesen der Hauptbinder die allen diesen
Zonen gemeinsame Fläche M = 0» resp. deren Normale oder
sind es zugleich die sich fast genau deckenden ebenfalls
gestörten Prismenflächen 7'/ (f2).

Ist etwa gerade die Ablenkung charakteristisch für die
aktiven Binder, die gleichzeitig tätig sind und widersprechende
Anforderungen stellen? Ist gerade die Prismenzone dadurch
als Zone fest, für die Einzelpositionen gestört, weil in ihr die
aktiven Binder MT! liegen?

Sind dagegen in den Zonen Og und 19 die Normalen der
Flächen Р = 0, е = 02, и = 02 гезр. х = 10, о —1, р —11
nicht aktive Binder und deshalb nicht abgelenkt?

Kann gerade die Störung als Kennzeichen für die Activitat
der Flächennormalen als Binder angesehen worden ?

Ist etwa die grosse Nähe der Binder in der Prismenzone
an der Ablenkung schuld, während bei etwas grösserer Distanz
der Punkte eine Ablenkung nicht stattfindet?

Die vorliegende Untersuchung liefert Material zur Prüfung
und endlichen Entscheidung dieser für die Krystallgenese wie
für die Formenentwicklung wichtigen Fragen. Die eingehende
Untersuchung der Fragen soll an anderem Ort geschehen.

Berechnung von &,. Schema und Beispiel.

Als Beispiel möge die Berechnung von v, aus den
Querparallelzonen Og und lg fiir das obere Ende von Krystall
6 gegeben werden.

Die nächste Aufgabe ist die Berechnung von x” und y? aus
den durch die Messung erhaltenen Winkeln © und р. Schema

und Beispiel hierfür gibt die Tabelle I der folgende Seite.

Tabelle I.

Schema u. Beispiel.

Berechnung von av. yv.
2 — sin vige
y? = cos vigp

Formeln:

Le М,
К = 50>

| Symbol

Qualität |
des Вей.

Messung

| log sin ®

|105 tg р
| log cosv |

| log x
log y?

a?
y?

bo
Qt

30 |

1723

S| |

bol rl

| mittelm. |

sehr gut

| schlecht

mass. gut

vorz.

VOTZ.

VOrZ.

vorz.

VOTZ.

| schlecht |

schlecht |

| 310

| 121

268

150

100

142

27 |

| 109

о |

52 |

00 |

30 |

76°50"

5 50 |

40 |

8 30 |

59 11

| 34 10

11 40

11,40

38 30

26°50’

| 908 072
| 970 404
| 999 683
958 799
970 404
996 472
| 988 180
006 633

| 999 260
| 006 633

| 992 983
022 438

| 999 979

993 695
| 983 171

| 997-934

| 931 489

999 214
| 931 489
| 927 537

| 978 445

| 990 061
| 989 947

| 988 151 |
| 926 267 |

| 972 055 |

022438 |
| 849 708 |
969 787 |
| 983 171 |

993 789 | |
| 976 866 | 0
| 953 243 |0.
70 072 |

| 947 894 |

| 996 717 |
1990 061 |
| 957 358 |

| 978 476 |
970 087 |

929 203 |

| 966 876 |

|
|
|

| 994 813
| 987 784 |

| 005 893 |
| 932 900 |

| 015 421 |
| 994 493 |

| 022 417 |
872 146 |

929 493 |
| 879 383 |
| |
| 930 703 |
859 026 |

986 778 |
947 419 |

| 968 506 |
980 008 |
| |

0.0609
0.5022

0.1959
0.4664

|0.8874

0.7548

1.1453
0.2133

1.4263
0.8809

1.6756

0.0526:

0.1969
0.0622

0.2028
0.0389

0.7375

0.2980

0.4842
0.6311

Ze Si ee sende

WW
ene”

Text Fig. 2. Kryst. No.6. Gnomon. Bild.

Zur Illustration diene das Projectionsbild Text Fig. 2 sowie
die Figuren Fig. 6 Taf. 3, Fig. 21. 22. Taf. 1. 2.

Berechnung von v, aus den besten 2 und yv der Zonen 04, 1q.

Wy — 21
Schema u. Beispiel. Y2 — 91
Journal | Buchstaben Le — Ty log... ie te
No Gite v v log eae ce ue
: Gai Ai Е
in 2.0327 30 807
19 : 18 DA Г À 0.51449 SEE
vorz. : VOrz. 0.5415 973 360
r:P | 1.0844 003 518
19 : 16 is 2 | 0.51443 | 104 55
vorz. : vorz. 0.2889 | 946075
va | 0.9494 | 997745 |
19: 17 р Era ME 0.57406 | 104 56
vorz. : $. gut 0.2531 | 940 339
ee Pin 1.0833 | 003475 | D IEEE
(SAL | sæ n
| s. gut : vorz. 0.2884 | 946000 | RR
| P':P 01350 | 913027 |
17 : 16 NE FROM — | 0.57639 4 51
: $. gut : vorz. 0.0358 | 855388 | Be 7
|
ıy 3.1019 049 163
| 20:21 Lu 0.57349 | 104 57
vorz. : VOIZ. 0.8282 991 814 |

34
Tabelle IT (Fortsetzung).

x? nl. x? : т
en ee 3 р ue 7 log tg ©, VE
0. ute Yo— Yi OF Eee
: 5.1638 | 033522
20 : 29 DE | “| 0.56963 | 105904
vorz. : schl | 0.5829 | 976 559
:0' 2.0133 | 030391
20 : 24 FA Rene 0.57140 | 105 01
| vorz. : schl. | 0.5401: 973 251
| VAE
: | 1.0 003 655
20 : 23 ISK Mrs + 0.57028 | 105 03
vorz. : schl. | 0.2926 946 627
Hsp 0.9421 997 408
20 : | 0.57642
cage vorz. : mitt. 0.2498 | 939 766 ee
| pin | 21598 | 033 442 2
| 30:21 | | 0.57069 | 105 0%
i | mitt.: vorz. | 0.5784 | 976373 |” и
| | pip | 1.2917: | 008698
30 : 29 0.56431 | 105
mitt. : schl. | 0.3332 952 267 тв
| p':0 | 1.0712: | 002989
| 30 : 24 | 0.56705 | 105 10
| | mitt. : sch. | 0.2903 | 946 284
| pio | 01457 | 916352 |,
| 30 : 23 Me 0.53258 | (106 21
| | mitt. : schl. | 0.0428 863 094 ose
me | 5 | 0:
м 0:7 | 2.0141 | 030 409 | 55660 | 10683
| schl. : vorz ' 0.5856 | 973 887
| BED | 1.076011] 8003181 “ae.
| 93-99 | i 0.56893 | 105 06
| 3 | schl. : sch. | 0.2903 946 288
| | |
| re | N OOF | 2
| 93. 94 | 0:0 | ee | 996 ee 0,57280 | 104 58
schl.: sch. | 0.2475 939 358
shee | 1.0886 | 003686 |
| 24 : | | 0.577 р
| ae schl. : vorz. 0.2881 945 953 1159 I
Bess 0 :p 0.1505 917 738 а ie en
ET о i O42 а
| | }
| | re N O26 9
| pin 0.9381 | 997 225
| 29 : 21 i 0.58255 | 104 39
| ога | 0.2458: Br De
| =
| eo de Pin 0.9483. || 7997696" Nr NE
Has vorz. : vor. | 0.2526 | 940243 |”

Mittelwert von &,. In obige Berechnungstabellen wurden
bereits die Positionen schlechter Reflexe nicht aufgenommen.
So z.B. 0,7. Die erhaltenen Werte v, differieren bis 1°. Wir
können sie nach der Qualität der Flächen in zwei Gruppen

teilen:
| Sehr gute Minder gute
[aus nn’ | v, = 104°55 || aus np | vo = 105°04
- nP 104 55: | = 201 105.08
- nP°| —10455| - № = 105 03
- Ри — 104 54| - yp’ | = 104 51:
= PP’| —10451:| - py — 105 02:
оля — 104 57 | =" pp | — 105.15
22 TH Е 9 — 105 10
| - [20| —10621]()
| RE A ET LE
nel RE T0 06
| поесть Sb ode
| - от — 104 49
| - [ор — 105 52](!)
| | - pr = 104 39

Die Sicherheit von v, hangt ab von der Sicherheit der
Position der beiden combinierten Flachen und der Giite des
Reflexes, sowie von der Distanz der Flachenpunkte. Ist diese
Distanz gross, so können auch schwächere Positionen gute v,-
Werte liefern, ist diese klein, so werden die Werte », beson-
ders unsicher. Dies ist z.B. bei p'o und о’р der Fall. Diese
differieren stark von allen andern Werten und sind am besten
aus der Rechnung fortzulassen.

Wir stehen nun vor der Frage, ob wir für v, das Mittel
aus den sehr guten Werten annehmen sollen, oder das Mittel
aus allen unter Ausscheidung von p'o und o'p, oder endlich
das Mittel aus allen. Im Zweifel stellen wir die drei Werte

nebeneinander.

Mittel aus den 7 besten Werten...... ©, = 104°55'
Mittel aus allen, ausser p'o und 0'p... - = 104 59
Mittel&austallent!s... rn Amine = tes 205005:

Das Mittel aus den 7 besten Werten ist offenbar das rich-
tigste, in Anbetracht der geringen Schwankungen. Immerhin gibt
das Mittel aus allen Werthen mit Ausschluss der beiden [|] eine
gute Controle. Der Werth 104°55’ dürfte nicht um mehr als 1/2’
ungenau sein. Das Mittel aus allen 105°05’ ist ungenauer.

Tabelle Ш. Zusammenstellung der besten Werth
No. | 12 == (0) i | = n ie | е = 02 p = Il
des Kryst. AL | 2 | FOIRE | Ip 6
3 81949 | 26°51" | 154°31° | 49021 | .... ……. | 36°58 | 3894
PA 82 02 26 51. | 37 04 |388
82 00 265 | 37 03 385
| || р
5 81 58 2652 |
| 81 50 | 26 50 |
6 | 82 00 | 26 50 154 32 | 49 21. | 22°43’ | 52018 | (37 35) | 38 5
| 8208 | 26 50 | 154-32 | 49 21. | .... | .... | 3655 38
т | (82.35) | 2645 | 154 35 | 4910 | .... 5.
| | | . || |
| 82 13 | 26 45 | 154 31 | 49 19° |
De: | 3650 384
Ms | | 37 00 | 38 4
| | ui
9 81 50 | 26 50 | | 36 57 38 4
| | | 37-12 | 38
12 82 11 | 26 51 154 31: | 49 21 | | 37 14 | 38
82 14 | 26 51 | 154 31° | 49 21 | |
13 1081459212652: 020% ol ee
| 81 59 | 26 52 | | | 37 00: 38
| | | cl
MSI AT) 06/40 с. | BEES | 30 56. 088
| 8158 2651 | | 3702 38 4l
Mittel | 82°00" 26°50" 154°31° | 49920” (22043) (52218) | 36°58’: | 38
| | | | |

In der gleichen Weise berechnen wir v, bei allen Kry-
stallen und bilden dann die ¢ = v—v%.

Nachdem fiir jeden Krystall v, bestimmt ist, berechnen
wir fiir alle seine Flachen die Positionswinkel go durch Sub-
traktion aus den Ablesungen vh. Dabei ist:

B= Ub; р =h—h,;

йо, die Polstellung des Instruments ist bekannt. Wir hatten

genau A, = 50° gemacht.
op nach Krystallen und Formen. Tabelle Ш.
и = a Le LCR LE RENTE ES
Е | 2—1 | JES 20 | 9 noe
— = > | т |
Ф в pool Ve | 9 | р

4 |

13508 | 34 14
135 09 | 34 14 | i
Ш 50 | 3410 | 163 17 59 IL | 8638 | 55 47 | 50°30" | 62213
13457 | 3410 | 16313 | 5911 | 8638 | 55 47 | 50 30 | 62 13

10
Base | 2405 | 1639191 590509 |... | .... |... |

135 08 | 3404 16316 | 59 09

135 13 34 18 163 20 59 11 86 38 | 55 43 |
135 15 3418 | 163 20 59 11 86 38 | 55 43 |

135 06 | 3404 | 16316 | 59 09 A Re Ich 3 а

134 51 | 34 18 50 35 62 09

в. = а |. 0208
|

135906 | 34°10 | 163917 | 59910' 86°38° 55545. | 5030 6291

Auswahl der besten Werte co aus allen Krystallen
geschieht am besten wie in der Tabelle Ш (S. 36—37). Darin
sind die sichersten Positionswinkel fett gedruckt, die mindest
sichern in ( ).

Anmerkung zu Tab. Ill. $. 36. 37. Für Bildung der Mittelwerte ist
der mathematische Weg der, jedem Wert ein Gewicht beizulegen, das
sich zusammensetzt aus der Zahl der Beobachtungen und einer für die
Qualität eingesetzten Zahl. Der rationelle Weg dagegen ist der, auf
grund alles Bekannten das Zuverlassigste auszuwahlen. Man wird den
mathematischen Weg beachten, aber sich davor hüten, das Beste durch
Heranziehen von Geringerem zu verderben.

Wo die Grenzen sind zwischen strenger Rechnung und Entscheidung
aus sonstiger Beurteilung der Verhaltnisse, darüber lassen sich Vorschriften
nicht aufstellen. Die oberste Regel ist vernünftig verfahren, unter vor-
sichtiger Erwägung aller Momente.

In der Regel wurde folgendes Verfahren als das beste befunden:

A. Bilduug des Mittels aus den besten Werten allein,
B. Bildung des Mittels aus allen brauchbaren Werten.

Vergleich von A und B. Sind beide gleich, so ist der beste Mittelwert
gesichert. Differieren beide, so gibt die Differenz ein Anhalten, in welchen
Grenzen A durch B zu modifizieren ist. In der Regel ist A ein grôsseres
Gewicht beizulegen und sein Wert durch B nur wenig zu modifizieren.

Auf diese Weise sind die Mittel- oder wahrscheinlichsten
Werte in obiger Tabelle uud in den folgenden Rechnungen gebildet.

Es liegt in diesem Ausgleichsverfahren etwas persönliche Willkür.
Doch ist diese einer rigurosen aber ungerechten mathematischen Vorschrift
vorzuziehen. Letztere lässt sich ja von persönlicher Willkür auch nur
scheinbar freimachen. Es bleibt die Auswahl des Brauchbaren und das
gegebene Gewicht noch immer willkürlich.

Berechnung der Elemente der Projection: a’); %',: 2’, Sin »;
D'o 605 >; 9’, aus den Positionswinkeln op.
Aus den ausgewählten besten Werten фр berechnen sich

dann die Coordinaten:
x = sing tg po; y = cos¢ tg p;
aus diesen die Elemente nach den Formeln:
ae. = Lo + pp’siny У = Yo + 99, + PP", COS».

Im folgenden mügen Schema und Beispiel für Ausrechnung

und Ausgleich gegeben werden.

Berechnung von æ'y' aus den Mittelwerten gp. Wir
rechnen nach folgenden Schema:

| | 999 575 | 969979 | 0.5010
P O | 82°00 | 26°50 | 970404 | 884760 | 0.0704
| 914 356

| | 963358 | 969952 | 0.5007
n 02: | 154 31: | 49 20° | 006607 | 002165 | 1.0511
| | | 995 558

| | 958 678 | 969866 | 0.4997
e 02 | (2243 | 5218) | 011188 | 007681 | 1.1935
| 996 493
| 977923 | 968357: | 0.4826
р 11 | 36 58 | 38 44 | 990436 | 980685 | 0.6410
| | | 990 249 |
| | 984873 | 968044 | 0.4791
23 = | bede
Sr 1 |135 06 | 3410 | 983171 | 968195 | 0.4808

| | 985024 |

| 945 885 | 968294 | 0.4819

|» 13 1163 17 | 5910 | 022409 | 020534 | 1.6045
| | 998 125 | |
| | 999925 | 016631 | 1.4666

y | 20 | 8638 | 55 45° | 016706 | 893482 | 0.0861
| 876 776

О 22 | 5030 | 6211 | 027769 | 008120 | 1.2056
| | | 980 351

|
era
988741 | 016510 | 1.4625
|
| |

Berechnung und Ausgleich von a’); p', sin » aus den æ'w".
Wir fassen die Werte von gleichem p zu je einer Gruppe
zusammen und berechnen nach folgendem Schema:

Tabelle V. Schema u. Beispiel. Berechnung von +, "p', sin v.
Giese. on) | x, — 0.5012
&/ |e | der | p | x — w+ pp, sin» 0 =
= = = Werthe | | eingesetzt

| р 0 14 |0 0.5010)
I 02 7 | 0 | 0.5007 } Mittel: 0.5009 = x’,
u. or | KO 0.4997)
p-|11| 13 | 1 | 0.4826
о! 1| 11 | 1 | 0.4791 } Mittel: 0.4809 = «’,—p’.sinv | 0.9821: = p’, sin»
zus | 7 | 1 0.4808
| y | 20 8 | 2 | 14666)... BD: у + h о
| Hil о | 22 4 |5 1465] Mittel: 1.4659 — х,— 2p’ sinv| 1.9671 = 2p’, sin v

ee еы.

Aus Gruppe I berechnet sich x’, = 0.5009 |
a ae — - = 0.5040]

Der Wert aus | ist der bessere. Das zeigt sich in der
Übereinstimmung der Werte aus P und я. Der nicht so sichere
aus e sucht ihn herabzuziehen. Es erscheint daher nicht rich-
tig, ihn durch den aus И. Ш wesentlich heraufzusetzen. Als
bester Wert erschien:

Cie 0.5012.
Dies eingesetzt gibt aus II: p', sin» = 0.9821-\
à = = -Ш: - - - = 0.9835.]

Dem Wert aus II wurde das grössere Gewicht beigelegt.

Es erschien als
bester Wert р’, sinv = 0.9826.

Berechnung von y',; 9’, und р’, cosy». Wir fassen wieder
die Werte mit gleichem p zu je einer Gruppe zusammen und
rechnen nach folgendem Schema (siehe Tabelle VI $. 41).

Berechnung von q’,.
Aus P und n folgt: g'o = 0.5607:
- Pyy folgt: g'o = 0.5609
- po folgt: g', == 0.5609
Es erschien als:
Bester Wert: 4’, = 0.5608.

62000 = 1809 °,d :JIOA 497594 COL0 0 = °F sya Ay 193894
i :spe 09190849 soy se 1919849 $
17/0'0 = °,f :13105 fod -
-88000 = 48099 d :uaje sne [on { 0020°0 — ft :1910; Ab -
91000 = 1800°d :18107 АИ sny | <010'0 = °,A :3910} ug sny

‘4 $09 °,d пол Sunup99194 OF WOA Sune

‘4 809 ° d °° bb" fi uoa Sunuysoieg

[9145199 ‘п 1942$

‘IA ЭПэЧе г,

Zusammenstellung der Elemente. Wir haben jetzt die fünf
Elemente in der ersten Form

7205012 go == 0.9608” р, sin = 0826
у’, = 0.0705 № 1 p', cosy = 0.0079

Nun ist das Problem der Elementbestimmung gelåst, die
Ausgleichung vollzogen. Es bleibt noch die Umrechnung der
Elemente in andere Formen. Dies geschieht in der in Zeitschr.
Kryst. 1905. 41. 85 fig. angegebenen Weise. Es berechnen sich:

x, = 0.5012 | p, = 0.8767 | x, = 0.4472 | a, == 11384 | a = 0.6367
y) = 0.0705 | 4, = 0.5004 | y, = 0.0629 | В, = 1.7880 | b — 1

р’, = 0.9826: | r, =1 d = 04516 | с, = 1 с = 0.5593
| d'o = 0.5608: | 2 = 86°24 | № = 0.8922 | а = 94°15"
y = 90°28 | м = 63°28 | @ = 116937
87°41’

LM | — 0525

Diese Elemente können derzeit als die best gesicherten

gelten. Sie kommen den von Brezina nach Rath berech-
neten nahe; weichen dagegen stark ab von den in dem Index
(2.19) und den Winkeltabellen nach Schuster gegebenen
Elementen. Diese letzteren sind also zu beseitigen.

Da durch die vorliegenden Untersuchungen das Formen-
verzeichnis des Albit sich wesentlich verändert hat, desgleichen
die Elemente verbessert sind, erschien es richtig, eine neue
Winkeltabelle auszurechnen. Dieselbe ist im folgenden
gegeben.

Sie wurde in zwei Teile geteilt:

Siehere Formen
Unsichere Formen.

Letztere sind von Wert, um dem Leser die eigne Kritik
über schwankende Formen zu erleichtern. Dagegen wurden die
ganz unsicheren die unrichtigen Formen weggelassen.

Elemente.

Po = 0.8767 | A = 86°42’ | a = 0.6367| а = 94°15 | x, = 0.4472 | 4 = 0.4516

| do = 0.5004 | м = 63 28 |b=1 8—6 36 |) gq — 0069416 81009.
ro) |» — 90 28 |с= 05593 у = 874 | № = 0.8922 |

Winkeltabelle. Sichere Formen.

PÉTER | | ae | d

1|| 0 |001| 81°59-| 2651 126037") 4°02’ | 26°34’) 3°36": 0.5012 | 0.0705 |0.5061:
2| M | Oc |010| 0 00 | 90 001 O 00 190 00 | 0 00 90 00! 0 00 co
3| 2 | со |100| 90 28 | » 19000 | » |89 32| 0 28 | 1.2348| u A
al ¢ соб [150] 1921] » | » | » [1921-80 38-| 0354 « Я
5| Г | ©3 | 130| 3024] „ " „ |3024 59 36 | 0.5868 | » i
612102 (12014125) » jf » [41 25 48 36 | 0.8822| » 3

|
тк 03 350 | 46 40:| , » | » |46 40-43 19°] 10602| , |
|

Sieg | < 110! 60 88 |: » " „ |60 38/29 22 | 1.7772| , à
9! | com [1101120 04; » | » n |59 56130 04 | 1.7274| u i
10| а | ©2 | 120/138 59 | » " „ 141 01/48 59 | 0.8698| » "
М 2 | 3 1180114950 | » | » „ |30 10 59 50 | 0.5812| » h
12 L | об | 150 |160 44 | » " „ 19 15:70 44-| 0.344 , 5
13| e | 02 |021| 22 48 |52 18126 37: 50 00: 117 51146 49 0.5012 1.1922 11.2933

14|n | 02 |021 154 30° |49 21| » 146 26 | 19 03-43 13: „ | 1.0512 11.1645

15| 9 | 04 0411167 00: | 65 51| „ 6511: |11 50 62 45°) » [21129 2.2800
16, x | 10 | 101] 80 44 26 00/25 42- | 4 29. |55 38 | 4 02-| 0.4814 | 0.0785 0.4877
17| 4 10 403 | 84 16 | 39 06-38 58 | 4 38: | 38 52-| 3 36: | 0.8089 | 0.0812 |0.8130
18| y | 20 201 | 86 37 | 55 42-55 40 | 4 56: | 55 34| 2 47-| 1.4640 | 0.0865 |1.4666
19| W | 1 la) 67 13 |58 09 56 01-31 56: | 51 33/19 12- | 1.4839 | 0.6233 |1.6095
2) ER 1113] 33 44 |17 22) 9 51: |14 36 | 9 32-'14 22 0.1737 | 0.2601 0.3128
21 | sl 2. 1112| 1 36 19 33) 0 34 19 39: 0 32 19 32- | 0.0099 | 0.3549 0.3551
29 | р | 11 |T11 | 36 58: |38 40125 42: 32 35: | 22 04-129 57 | 0.4814 | 0.6394 |0.8003
23| A | = 332 | 46 28- 53 18 44 12: 42 44 | 35 32-38 31 | 0.9726 | 0.9238 |1.3414
o1 | ØE 922.4991] 15 | 1.4640 | 1.2071 11.8975

79 2385 40 | 78 58:
| |

70 56° |

a кд

3 = | | || ,
= = 5 | || = | = , d
SAME SAT 0e р | Ho 5 7 |(Prismen) У
я | | (zy) | —8 р
| п | | | jo i | >
| 5 |1217714-11939) 053411538 | 0933'- 11°38 | 0.0099 | 0.2059 | 0.2061
| 4] | | | | | Е
| 1 1111135 03 | 34 16:25 42:25 45 |23 26° 23 29. 0.4814 | 0.4824 0.6815
а | | | | _ à
| : 443 129 29-|46 21 |38 58 33 41 |33 56: 27 23: | 0.8089 | 0.6665 | 1.0481
| ” | | | | | |
| 2 | 2 [382 127 55 |,50 58/44 12-37 11-157 46 58 32- | 0.9726 | 0.7588 1.2336
2 |2211125 16 | 60 51] 45 59: 45 29: 30 17 | 1.4640 | 1.0352 | 1.7930
| 13 |131/163 17 | 59 08 58 02- 14 17: 55 18 | 0.4814 | 1.6029| 1.6736
| | || ||
E | 15. 151 169 59 | 70 08 | 69 51 | 9 25 67 51 | » = | 2.7257 | 2.7679
21 |211 66 08 | 58 00: 32 55 50 52 20 03° 1.4640 0.6474 1.6008
31 |811 | 75 00 | 68 27 33 14-63 57° 13 55: | 2.4466 | 0.6554 | 2.5309
24 |241 145 50 | 69 01 65 07: |31 37: 50 35 | 1.4640 | 2.1569 | 2.6069
ae |132 |179 15: | 37 29 37 29 | 0 27 37 29 | 0.0099 | 0.7667 | 0.7668
ze | | |
15 152 119 34-|53 02 | 0 34 53 01 | 0 20° 53 02 | 0.0099 | 1.3287 | 1.3288
— = | | | N
an | | | || | | |
ae | 312 | 69 32: | 46 04144 1219 57 |42 26 |14 35 | 0.9726 | 0.3629 | 1.0381
Unsichere Formen.
| 2 se ; | | 7 , |
| 2 = 5 | | = | ie | 2 Ål
| © в = Ф p mo | © | 7 [|(Рившев) У | NR
Е A = | | | (x:4) | =tgp
AE eee | |
о 5 230 |130°50' | 90°00/| 90°00’ 90°00’, 49°10" 40950" | 1.1571 | x со
=) | | [= | fe
| 05 | 051/169 36.) 70 12126 37° 69 54" 9 46 67 44-| 0.5012 | 2.7338 | 2.7794
| A = =: | || IE | er |
12 443 44 18 49 11/38 58 39 39 31 5432 48" | 0.8089 0.8290 1.1583
№ 22) || | | | |
it | | | | | væ | L | и
> |665 131 vie 00: 30 40/30 15-26 08: | 0.6779 0.5929 | 0.9006
9 | | | | |
18 |181| 601 | 77 42195 42:| 77 33:| 55 53 16 20 | 0.4814 | 4.5654 | 4.5907
29 | 291), 15 55 15 38 1.4640 | 5.1342 | 5.3390

Folgende Formen wurden in die Winkeltabelle nicht auf-
genommen. Dieselben sind ganz unsicher gder durch ein Ver-
sehen in das Formenverzeichnis gekommen, oder endlich als

Vicinale angesehen worden.

4 5 Ta 5 4 5 = = 1
en 3% р 555 3 > 3° sæ PG 54 20 05
310: 430 450 270. 310 530 430 450 140. 120.0 012
a4 3 5 SE AIM £20
ST 2 Е RS = 9 fe. > Sl
05 „0 z0 Om ti REDE 1.20 BOR 15.16
se 403.5304 504 111 552: 757 1.90.1. 412 7197 15161

Beschreibung der einzelnen Krystalle.
Das Material teilt sich nach Fundort und Ausbildung in
vier Gruppen:
1. Albit von Siorarsuit, sehr flächenreich.
Albit von Kangerdluarsuk, flächenärmer.

w to

Albit von Narsarsuk flächenärmer. Aufgewachsen auf
Orthoklas.
4. Albit von Nunasarnausak (nur ein kleines Handstück).

Krystall 1 von Siorarsuit. (Taf. 1 Fig. 1). Wasserhell.
Dimensionen 1.3 : 0.6 : 09™™. Der einzige einfache d.h. nicht
verzwillingte Krystall, der sich trotz aufmerksamen Suchens in
dem reichen Material finden liess. An beiden Enden ausgebildet.

Gombination:

РМ СЕ КТГ ава po 7

Symbol: 0 Ох 5 «3 >;

Das vorzüglich ausgebildete Kryställchen brachte die neue

20 11 1 13

55|

Form И = # 3 (350) mit zwei schmalen, doch gut spiegelnden
Flächen. |

Die Form zeigte sich weiterhin noch an 4 Krystallen, im
ganzen mit 8 Flächen. Sie ist als typische Form gesichert.
(vgl. S. 19 und 23).

WI Ie,

no! —

Ferner brachte das Kryställchen die Bestätigung der bisher
unsicheren Form y = 13 (131) (vgl. S.27) mit zwei kleinen
glänzenden Flächen mit einfachem Reflex.

Gemessen: фр = 163°21'; 90°- berechnet: yo = 163°17'; 90°-
163 28;

Die Form ist als typisch gesichert. Sie kehrte fast bei
jedem von unseren Krystallen wieder und zeigte sich als eine
der Hauptformen unserer grönländischen Fundorte.

Es möge hervorgehoben werden, dass die Ablenkung in
der Prismenzone auch hier bei dem einfachen Krystall gefun-
den wurde. Es ist anzunehmen, dass versteckte Lamellen nach
dem Albitgesetz auch dieses Kryställchen durchsetzen und an
den Ablenkungen Schuld sind.

Die Flächen M = 0% (010) sind beide vortrefflich aus-
gebildet, der Reflex vorzüglich, und trotzdem sitzt er nicht an
seinem Ort, differiert vielmehr um — 10’ resp. — 24’ von dem
aus den Terminalflächen berechneten Ort. Fläche und Gegen-
fläche sind nicht parallel. Die praktische Folge ist, dass man
zum Zwecke einer genauen Ortsbestimmung des 0-Meridians
(Berechnung von v,) die M-Flächen nicht verwenden kann,
auch nicht die anderen Prismenflächen, wenn sie noch so gross,
glatt und einheitlich reflektierend sind, sondern nur die Termi-
nalflächen.

Theoretisch sind diese Ablenkungen in der Prismenzone
von höchstem Interesse. Sie finden sich bei allen von uns
untersuchten Krystallen.

Krystall 2 von Kangerdluarsuk (Taf. I Fig. 2). Dimen-
sionen: 2.5 : 1.5: 3m, Zwilling nach dem Albitgesetz. Beide
Individuen im Gleichgewicht.

Combination:
Buchst М бл KES ae ee DEO

Symbol: О 0» 55 53 «&

Die Ausbildung der Flächen ist sehr gut. Die Prismen-
flachen zeigen trotz vortrefflicher Ausbildung die beim Albit
gewohnten Ablenkungen und zwar:

Ablenkungen:

М um — 18; — 30; J um + 115 — 20; To um — 17; + 25
f - — 6; —30; € - +14; —6.

Die Prismenflächen sind gestreift. Ausser den typischen
Flächen zeigen sich Vicinale in der Prismenzone. An dem
Krystall wurde die neue Form А == » (350) wiedergefunden.
Ausserdem zeigte sich:

a a 2 (120) als schmale gut glänzende Fläche (vgl. S. 23)
mit gutem Reflex. Von Klockmann zuerst angegeben, durch
Viola bestätigt; konnte an 7 Krystallen, ôfters von ziemlicher
Breite, mit Sicherheit nachgewiesen werden.

Krystall 3 von Siorarsuit (Taf.2 Fig. 3) von derselben
Stufe, wie Krystall 1. Farblos, durchsichtig, etwas trüb.
Dimensionen: 0.8 : 0.6 :1.7”®. Zwilling nach dem Albitgesetz.
Der linke Krystall (im Bild farblos), klein und unvollkommen
ausgebildet im Verhältnis zum rechten (blau). Das Verhältnis
beider ist aus dem Kopfbild (Fig. 32) ersichtlich.

Combination:

Rechter Krystal; PM oC f T lt 2:L п W po 7
Linker N OT le, nee em
Symbol : 0 020 205 13 < 0 53 5 02 1 11 1 13

Die Prismen mit dem Pinakoid zeigen wieder ihre Ablen-
kung trotz guter Ausbildung:

Ablenkungen:
M um —33; —9; Zum +55; +21; fum +44; — 35
T- —18;—8; I - —5;—16; 2 - —7;—%.

Der Krystall zeigte die von Jeremejew und Bowman
angegebene seltene Form W = 1(111); (vgl. $. 25). Dieselbe

erscheint als schmaler leuchtender Streif in Zone PT. Sie liess
sich noch an Krystall 15 nachweisen und ist unter die sicheren
Formen einzureihen.

Т, = %5 (150); von Klockmann gegeben, von Glinka
und Viola wieder angeführt, tritt an 10 von unseren Kry-
stallen auf. An Krystall 5 als schmaler Streif, wohl begrenzt
und mit sehr gutem Reflex. Die Form ist gesichert (vgl. S. 24).

7 — 13 (131) erscheint hier gross und vorzüglich ausgebildet.

Krystall 4. (Taf. 2 Fig. 4). Wasserheller Krystall von
Narsarsuk. Zwilling nach dem Albitgesetz. An beiden Enden
ausgebildet. Dimensionen: 2: 1.3 : 3%, Beide Individuen im
Gleichgewicht.

Combination:

ВОР АГ Л os ce ge y Pp 7
Symbol: 0 0% 0 3 wo © 3 œ5 02 02 04 20 11 13

Die Prismenzone mit verhältnismässig kleinen Abweich-
ungen; nur bis 8.

h = 0 (100) bisher nur von Jeremejew angegeben
(vgl. S. 23) erscheint als äusserst feiner Streifen mit sehr schwa-
chem, doch einstellbarem Reflex. Die Form fand sich noch an
weiteren 6 Krystallen, jedesmal als sehr feiner Streifen. Sie ist
schwach aber sicher.

L = ©5(150) und у = 13 (131), schon an Krystall 1
und 3 gefunden, erscheinen hier wieder, у unten als herr-
schende Flache.

3 = 04(041) ist neu für Albit. Nur an diesem Krystall
gefunden, mit einer kleinen wohlbegrenzten Fläche. Sie ist
gesichert und passt gut in die harmonische Reihe (vgl. 5. 19
u. 24).

e = 02 (021) gehört zu den seltensten und schwächsten
Flächen unserer Grönländer Albite. Sie ist sehr klein und
wurde nur noch an Krystall 6 mit einer kleinen Fläche nach-

gewiesen.

Krystall 5 (Taf. 3 Fig. 5). Wasserheller Krystall von Sio-
rarsuit. Vertreter eines für diesen Fundort häufigen, geradezu
charakteristischen Typus. Dimensionen: 1.2 : 0.5 : Zum,
Dem Bau nach entspricht der Krystall den von G. Rose (Pogg.
Ann. 1865. 125. 457. Taf. 4) beschriebenen Roc-tourné-
Zwillingen: «Er ist, wie es Naumann ausdrückt (Mineralogie
1877. 643) ein Kontaktzwilling in bezug auf den brachydiago-
nalen, Durchkreuzungszwilling in bezug auf den makrodiago-
nalen Hauptschnitt». Der Habitus ist jedoch ein anderer. Dort
herrschen M Py; hier 2fnpn.

Die Kryställchen sind zart, säulenförmig gestreckt nach
den Prismen. Selten an beiden Enden ausgebildet. Sie stehen
in grösserer Zahl, wie Kornhalme nebeneinander. Eine Abart
des selben Typus zeigt Krystall 8, eine andere Krystall 9. Bei
den letztern ist M grösser als bei Krystall 5.

Combination:

0 0=> 53 wa of 09 10. TI

Wl =) ©

Die Ablenkungen in der Prismenzone betrugen:

Bei М: + 10’ und — 1'; bei 2: + 9’ und + 8’;

+10 — — 5; +24 — — 30;
bei 7: + 4' und +38; bei f: — 12’ und + 9’;
+7 — +19; — 34 — — 4.

Eine Gesetzmässigkeit in diesen Ablenkungen konnte bisher
nicht gefunden werden. Nur das scheint sich zu wiederholen,
dass je schmäler das M ist, desto kleiner seine Ablenkungen.

Krystall 6 (Taf.3 Fig.6). Wasserhell von Siorarsuit.
An beiden Enden gut entwickelt. Dimensionen: 1.1 : 0.5: 1.39,
Zwilling nach dem Albitgesetz. Er ist der formenreichste von
allen gemessenen Krystallen von vorzüglicher Ausbildung und

ungewöhnlichem Reichtum in den Terminalflächen.
XXXIV, 4

Combination:

—|
—
a
m
ot
65|
—
55|
do
wo
>
52| Co]

£ == 15 (151) für Albit neu fand sich nur an diesem Kry-
stall, ist aber auf grund der guten Ausbildung und der Uber-
einstimmung von Messung und Rechnung gesichert (vgl. S. 27).
Ihre Zahl passt gut in die Reihe (vgl. S. 20).

@ == A (211) für Albit neu. Schmal, 2 Flächen mit gutem
Reflex. Gesichert (vgl. S.21 u. 26).

?X = 29 (291), für Albit neu. 2 schmale Flächen mit
gutem Reflex. Messung und Rechnung stimmen gut (S. 26),
aber die Symbolzahl ist so auffallend (vgl. $. 21), dass die Form
vielleicht als Vicinale anzusehen ist. Sie wurde deshalb mit ?
versehen und in der Winkeltabelle unter die unsicheren Formen

gestellt.

oOo ==

| |

| (819), für Albit neu. Schmale kleine Fläche in

Zone yp. Bei der guten Ubereinstimmung von Messung und

Rechnung gesichert (S. 26). Sie passt gut in das Formensystem

des Albit (S. 22).
ЕАО 2 (120)
a = 59 (130)
L = %5 (150) unseren Krystallen nicht selten.
Е,

bedurften der Bestätigung. Sie sind an

Krystall 7 (Taf.3 Fig. 7). Wasserhelles Bruchstück von
Kangerdluarsuk. Dimensionen: 1.5:1.2:1™™. Ein gleich-
seitig ausgebildeter Zwilling nach dem Albitgesetz, der Vertreter
eines mehrfach gefundenen Typus, charakterisiert durch {die
grossen und gut ausgebildeten о neben den grossen P,” daneben

schmal # und N.

Combination:

PY M С i l ZEN 0 7
1:

0760 6070600 SN cara Coon ar.

Krystall 8 (Taf. 3 Fig. 8). Wasserhell, von Siorarsuit.
Dimensionen: 0.8 : 0.4 : 0.8™. Ähnlich Krystall 5 (vgl. S. 49)
und wie dieser ähnlich gebaut mit den Roc-tourné Zwillingen.
M starker entwickelt. Das hintere Krystallpaar von dem vor-
deren teilweise umschlossen.

Combination:

FH MINUET ae l 2 Må MOMS

Doc cog) 55 o3 02 Ш

WI ml ©,
nol =
dO] OF

Q =), (2) für Albit neu, wurde nur an diesem Krystall

mit einer Fläche gefunden. Messung und Reflex stimmen gut
(vgl. 5. 26), auch passt die Form gut in die Zahlenreihe (vgl.
S. 22). Sie ist als gesichert anzusehen.

Krystall 9 (Taf.3 Fig. 9). Wasserhell, von Siorarsuit.
Dimensionen: 1.5:1:1.3™™. Ähnlich Krystall 8. Das kleinere,
hier nach vorn gezeichnete Krystallpaar ist von dem grösseren
fast ganz umschlossen.

Combination:

К. РТ 28 PY Des ORE:
0 Om 5 03 ©) = wm m3 02 MU Г

Der Krystall zeigt wieder die bereits an Krystall 1 und 2

gefundene neue Form K — x = Die Prismenflächen sind
wieder abgelenkt z.B. Т um + 24’, — 40: +2, — 2’. M ist
in zwei Facetten geteilt.

Krystall 10 von Narsarsuk (Taf. 4 Fig. 10) ist eine inter-
essante Verwachsung von Albit mit Orthoklas. Auf einem

grossen Karlsbader Zwilling von grauweissem, trübem, nicht
4*

Der linke Krystall zeigt die Kombination: PME ZTlzn«

ganz frischem Orthoklas (30 : 30 : 407") sitzen zwei grosse Albit-
krystalle. Einer auf jedem der beiden Orthoklas Individuen.
Der Albit ist klar und frisch von blass-rosa-vioietter Farbe.
Die Figur gibt ein etwas schematisches Bild der Anordnung und
relativen Grössen.

Der linke Albitkrystall ist ein Zwilling (20 : 9 : 18) nach
dem Albitgesetz, der rechte ein Vielling nach dem gleichen
Gesetz (18 : 9 : 12”®). Beide Albite sind nach dem Karlsbader
Gesetz gegeneinander gestellt, verdanken jedoch diese Stellung
nicht sich selbst, sondern dem Orthoklas, auf dem sie orientiert
sitzen. Fortsetzungen des linken Krystalls überwachsen die Pris-
menflächen und das Pinakoid M des Orthoklas.

rechte — - - — PM € f TV ee

Krystall 11 (Taf. 4 Fig. 11). Rôtlichvioletter durchsichtiger
Vielling nach dem Albitgesetz von Narsarsuk. Von gleichem
Typus wie Krystall 10. Dimensionen: 3 : 1.8 : 37,

Combination:

г т са а op RE
0 00 “5 «3 < za «9 æ3 w5 10 20 11 ae aa

An ihm zeigten sich 6 nach dem Albitgesetz verwachsene
Scheiben in der ungefähren relativen Grösse der Figur. Diese
Lamellen schwanken in ihrer gegenseitigen Orientierung um
etwa !/2°. Die Ursache der Schwankung bei diesem sehr gut
ausgebildeten Krystall dürfte in dem Einfluss des Orthoklas zu
suchen sein, auf dem der Albit aufsass und dem er sich
bei seinen etwas verschiedenen Elementen nicht genau parallel
richten kann.

Die Terminalflächen geben durchweg gute Reflexe, die
Prismen zeigen die üblichen Ablenkungen. Interessant an dem
Krystall ist die neue Form /:

53
1
а

grosse ebene Fläche mit sehr gutem Reflex. Messung und

IN € i HOME
3 (113) ist vertreten durch eine verhältnismässig

Rechnung stimmen gut (vgl. $. 25). Die Form bildet eine
hübsche Ergänzung der harmonisch entwickelten Zone:

(as Oe eae MG,
re ee и ОС 10 9
0 33°99 11 sn ieee (vgl. S. 20).
и = 2(221) ist eine für den Albit seltene Form. Sie

zeigte sich bereits oben an Kryst.6 und noch einmal an unse-
rem Krystall 15.

a = ©2(120), Г = »5(150) und у = 13 (131) haben
sich auch hier gefunden.

Krystall 12 (Taf. 4 Fig. 12). Wasserheller Vielling nach dem
Albitgesetz von Kangerdluarsuk. Dimensionen: 1.2 : 0.6 :
0.5™™. Der Krystall besteht aus zwei ziemlich gleich grossen
Individuen in Zwillingsstellung, zwischen denen zwei starke
Zwillingslamellen eingeschoben sind. Er ist vom Typus des
Krystalls 7.

Combination:

Е Me НХ,
005 58 © oo es 091 13

Krystall 13 (Taf. 4 Fig. 13). Wasserhelles Bruchstück von
Kangerdluarsuk. Dimensionen: 0.8 : 0.5 : 0.87,
Combination:
BEN Ve OUT fall ub ele tent to
(DESCARTES OCT At

Die Terminalflächen gaben vorzügliche Reflexe. Das Pina-
koid М zeigte trotz ausgezeichneten Reflexes eine Ablenkung
von — 20" und — 40’ von dem durch die Zonen PP’ und pp’
angezeigten Ort.

h = «0 (100) und а = 2 (120) erscheinen als feine

Streifen.

Krystall 14 (Taf. 4 Fig. 14). Durchscheinender weisser Кгу-
stall von Siorarsuit. Dimensionen: 3:1.5:2.5™™. Zwilling
nach dem Albitgesetz mit zwei eingeschlossenen Zwillings-
lamellen.

Combination:

Buch: & FT u. Е “pr N

a) >
5 2 1

OMAR coh) cod ce 55 © =5 20 11

Die neue Form A = (332) passt gut in die harmonische
90

ä 2
Reihe der Zone pp (vgl. S. 20). Sie wurde nur an diesem
Krystall gefunden, ist aber ziemlich breit, eben und gut spie-

gelnd. Messung und Rechnung stimmen gut (vgl. S. 25).

Krystall 15 (Taf. 4 Fig. 15). Weisser, trüber Krystall oder
richtiger Krystallgruppe von Siorarsuit. Dimensionen :
7:3.5 : 91". Besteht aus vielen Lamellen nach dem Albit-
gesetz, von denen nur ein Teil in der Figur wiedergegeben ist.
Die einzelnen Individuen sind ungleich hoch und nicht ganz
eng aneinander geschlossen. Der Reichtum an Formen ist hier
sehr gross.

Combination:

ис 2 KT. 2 Та BW hote
0 Oc 0 25 23 x2 © © wh «3 05 02 05 1 1151 2
?Е — 05 (051) erschien an 4 Lamellen. Messung und

Rechnung stimmen gut, doch war der Reflex verwischt und, da
die Zahl in der Reihe etwas compliciert erscheint, wurde die
Form als der Bestätigung bedürftig angesehen.

№ — «0 (100); erscheint schmal; 2 = co2 (120) tritt mit
3 schmalen aber guten Flächen auf.

= = 3 (350) mit 2 schmalen aber gut reflektierenden
Flächen; [ — «5(150) mit 2 kleinen sehr gut spiegelnden
Flachen.

W = 1(111) fand sich mit einer sehr kleinen aber gut
bestimmbaren Fläche.

X= 24 (241) fand sich nur an diesem Krystall als sehr
gute kleine Flache mit gutem Reflex.

Krystall 16 (Taf. 5 Fig. 16) von Siorarsuit. Wasserhell.
Dimensionen: 2.5: 1.5: 3", Es ist ein Zwilling mit einge-
schobenen Lamellen. Die Terminalflächen von ganz vortreff-
licher Ausbildung; die Prismen, obwohl mit guten Reflexen,
mit den üblichen Abweichungen behaftet: M um — 14’ und
— 12; Zum — 6’; Tum + 35’.

Combination:

Ben fie а Бо тор

Krystall 17 (Taf. 5 Fig. 17). Eine interessante Uberwachsung
von Orthoklas mit Albit von Narsarsuk. Ein einfacher Ortho-
klas. Krystall ist rundum von einer glasig-wasserhellen, mehrere
Millimeter dicken Hülle von Albit umgeschlosseu, so dass der
Eindruck eines einheitlichen, grossen Albitkrytsalls entsteht.
Dimensionen: 22 : 12 : 20", Der Albit gliedert sich oberfläch-
lich in viele parallele Endigungen von Zwillingen nach dem
Albitgesetz mit den Terminalflächen Ppoynxy. Der umhüllte
Orthoklas ist in der Figur durch blaue Farbe angedeutet.

Krystall 18 (Taf. 5 Fig. 18). Von Narsarsuk. Karlsbader
Zwilling von Orthoklas; rundum eingehüllt von einem glasig-
durchsichtigen Mantel von Albit. Dimensionen: 40 : 20 : 30m",
Der Albit, wieder am Ende in Zwillinge nach dem Albitgesetz
aufgelöst, zeigt die Terminalflächen: Pponn. Der eingeschlos-
sene Orthoklas ist in der Figur durch blaue Farbe angedeutet.

Krystall 19 (Taf. 5 Fig. 19). Von Narsarsuk. Ein grosser
Manebacher Zwilling von Orthoklas mit orientiertem Albit. Dieser
hat sich fast ausschliesslich auf den Prismen aufgesetzt. Dort

bildet er aneinandergelegte Tafeln von ungleicher Länge und Dicke
in sehr grosser Zahl. Jede Tafel ein Albitzwilling mit eingescho-
benen Lamellen. Die Figur giebt diese Tafeln nur im Gröbsten
wieder, zeigt aber ihre Anordnung. Auf M hat sich nur eine
minimale, vielfach unterbrochene Schicht von Albit abgesetzt,
auf P fast gar nichts. In der Figur ist der Orthoklas durch
blaue Farbe ausgezeichnet. Dimensionen: 25 : 20 : 23mm,

Krystall 20. Von Nunasarnausak (Taf. 5 Fig. 20). Farb-
los, wasserhell. Vielling nach dem Albitgesetz. Dimensionen:
le a 2

Combination:

MRC Res LA DNS RTE BED

|
WI el $2

Tafelförmig durch starkes Vorherschen von M. Bemer-
kenswerth ist das Fehlen von P in allen Lamellen. Ausbildung
nicht sehr vollkommen, sodass die Messungen zur Element-
bestimmung nicht herangezogen werden konnten. Interessant
ist das Auftreten der neuen Form A und der seltenen aL
sowie das für unsere Grönländer Albite charakteristischen 7.
Auch an diesem Krystall ist 7 die am besten ausgebildete, nach
M ist sie die grösste Fläche.

Projectionsbilder. Taf. 1 Fig. 21 giebt ein gnomonisches
Gesammtbild der gesicherten Formen des Albit. Sie bilden
ein einfaches übersichtliches System von pseudo-hexagonaler
Anlage. Die 5 an unseren Grönländer Albiten nicht beobach-
teten Formen » 207) sind durch leere Ringel kenntlich gemacht.

Taf. 2 Fig. 22 gibt ein gnomonisches Gesammtbild der
Formen eines Zwillings nach dem Albitgesetz. An Stelle

fast jedes Punktes des einfachen Bildes Fig. 21 ist hier ein
Pärchen benachbarter Punkte getreten. So tritt P zu P’; n’ zu
e u.s.w. Die Abstände in solchen Paaren sind bei den Termi-
nalflächen nicht klein. Sie sind dagegen sehr klein bei den
Prismen. Dies dürfte die Ursache der Ablenkungen und Stö-
rungen gerade in der Prismenzone sein und es möge die Figur
hierzu als Illustration dienen.

Merkwürdig ist in dem Formensystem des Albit die einsei-
tige Entwieklung der Formen nach links und hinten. Die Ein-
seitigkeit wird theilweise compensirt durch die Zwillingsbildung.

Statistik. Die folgende Tabelle S. 58 zeigt die Combina-
tionen der 17 gemessenen Krystalle und gibt dadurch ein Bild
von der relativen Häufigkeit der einzelnen Formen. Die den
Buchstaben angehängten Ziffern geben die Zahl der Einzelflächen.

Zusammenfassung. Der Resultat der vorliegenden Unter-
suchung ist etwa folgendes.

1. Das Albit-Vorkommen von Grönland, speziell von
den Fundorten Siorarsuit und Kangerdluarsuk hat sich
als das formenreichste und vielleicht das best ausgebildete
unter den untersuchten Albiten gezeigt. Es hat 32 verschie-
dene, gut gesicherte Flächenarten geliefert, darunter 8 neue; 7
von früheren Beobachtern angegebene, aber der Bestätigung
bedürftige Formen, wurden definitiv gesichert.

Das Formenverzeichnis des Albit umfasst jetzt 37 sichere
Formen (darunter 32 von Grönland) und 6 unsichere (darunter
2 von Grönland).

2. Die für den Albit angegebenen Formen wurden einer
kritischen Sichtung unterzogen, wobei die Discussion der
Zahlenreihen gute Dienste leistete. Neben den unrichtigen und
vicinalen wurden auch die unsichern oder der Bestätigung

Combinationen.

* bedeutet: neu

- bedeutet: bestätigt.

Die dem Buchstaben angehängte Ziffer bezeichnet die Zahl der Einzelflächen.

Kryst. i RE Rn å ? ee | ее те. .? A
we lpun er ES bred bre tlale|Eleln|s|Blaly|WiFly|plalg/elolulaléle x ти о
1 РМ. & 1 fo |.. | Ko) Tall, ..|2 No . Ye 72 | Po 0 |... | Me
а, О То IEG ILO Ts ао | 65 AU Da MO er
BZ EV RER HEE NCAA ee MER | VA Dale on a
4 |P,M В И TEN [hes DE @ | a oa Ио | Ses DE No ; ere NEA |
SR HÆR HIVE th | Ug 24 Ny me CM De SER KOR De À
6 РМ & Г, 9, Г! lg | @5 | 25 | Те] es | %e То | Уз |.. |. | 72 Ра | .. | 92| дэ |0, | 1 | 7 | 61 | Po) Xe wg
РЕ Alt ANS 22 No 05 а
8 Р.М. fa | 72| lo 22 | Lol ..| Mo ; Ya|Pa|-- do . Qi
9 | P,|M, & | fa Ky} Ts) Uy 24 па 3 Um 17712 Oo ee 02
10 |P.1M, 3 | fs | 41 T,| tl, | аа | 23 | Га 2 | 24| .- Ра д, | 04 11
11 Ре М» So | fs ORAEAENET .. Ta) Ye T,|Y2|Ps 9: 94 Ут | 73 Se
12 P,M, ip Tea 29 Ns i pr mio Na
toe RP UM he ie alle 28 Е Nee seal Meet И : ;
14 |PMIR | fo .. | 74| В Z| La .. Ya i р. Ла 92 02
1 ERE ET ES ES BÆR SIP AIRE LANDE ne Es W, ра до | Om 02 95 : a
16 || P,|M,| h, ze И KEN Е on : Yo lees (DEN DEN Da: :
20 M; af Ка! T5| ly a, 24 | Li). |. 72 |Po д. | 09 VE .
Zahl 4. er ir wel Fa с F к 2 ve i Е
ВЫ О 10) Gero SE HS TG A C1 AE OO A 3 8 802 212 ES ES EE
Einzel-
flächen | 60 | 44| 71191391 6 | 8 152154 110 144118 | 2 122] 1 | 2 1101151 2 | 1 1141391 115 [191271 412311/21211/1211I

bedürftigen ausgeschieden und so das Formenverzeichnis abge-
klärt. Sollte dabei die eine oder andere richtige Form geopfert
sein, so wird sie sich durch spätere Beobachtung wieder ein-
stellen. Eine Abklärung aber war nötig. Das nun Festgehaltene
dürfte sicher sein.

Eine Zusammenstellung der Combinationen liess ein Bild
von der relativen Häufigkeit der verschiedenen Formen
gewinnen und kann bei Untersuchungen über deren Rangord-
nung verwendet werden.

3. Die von Chr. Winther ausgeführte, uns zur Publika-
tion überlassene Analyse hat gezeigt, dass das Material ein
sehr reiner Albit ist. Auf einen solchen beziehen sich also

unsere Elemente.

4. Die Elemente des Albit wurden neu berechnet unter
Heranziehung aller besten Messungen der 16 ersten gemessenen
Krystalle. Dabei wurde die von Borgström und Gold-
schmidt veröffentlichte Methode der Krystallberechnung für
das trikline System verwendet und den vorliegenden Verhält-
nissen angepasst. Das ausführliche Beispiel der Ausrechnung
dürfte manchem willkommen sein.

Die so gefundenen Elemente dürften als die für Albit best
gesicherten gelten können. Sie weichen nur um ein Geringes
von den von Brezina nach Raths Messungen berechneten
Elementen ab, dagegen stark von den nach Schusters Mes-
sungen von Goldschmidt berechneten Elementen. Letztere

können daher nicht mehr festgehalten werden.

5. Mit den neuen Elementen wurde eine Winkeltabelle
neu berechnet. Dies geschah trotz der geringen Differenz
wegen der vielen neuen Formen, sowie mit Rücksicht auf die
sonstige Abklärung des Formenverzeichnisses.

6. Zur Berechnung der Elemente konnten nur die Ter-
minalflächen verwendet werden. Die Flächen der Pris-
menzone zeigten auch bei den schärfst ausgebildeten Kry-

stallen starke Ablenkungen. Das Studium dieser Ablen-
kungen und ihrer Beziehung zur Zwillings- und Viellingsbildung
ist genetisch von grossem Interesse. Speziell die Tatsache ist
wichtig, das gerade die stärkste Zone am meisten gestört ist,
ohne Störung des Krystallbaues und ohne Ablenkung der Ter-
minalflächen. So sind die Flächen der Parallelzonen 09, 19,
2q schön an ihrem Ort, während das zu allen diesen Zonen
gehörige M = 0% jedesmal, meist stark, abgelenkt ist.

Correcturen.
Seite 5 Zeile 10 u. 4 v.u.
lies: 0.6367:1:0.5593 94°15’ 116°37' 87°41'
statt: 0.6373 :1:0.5599 94°18’ 116°41' 87°37’

Seite 5 Zeile 2 v.u. lies: 16’ statt: 20’
IIND. lies: 878476 "statt: “97S Ame
CENTRES bes ANT - 981 151 - 988 151
PRIE UNS По Ube EDG tee = 0.6311

Heidelberg, Dezember 1906.

Meddelelser om Gronland XXXIV.

977
Gn

PRE VES

SPA TA
x

Da)

i C Dreyer gex.1905

Lith. Gerstenlauer a Reisacher, Stuttgart

Meddelelser om Gronland XXXIV.

Sirarsuit

Fig 3°

Albit.

Narsarsuk

Fig. 42

Albit.
Zwilling nach dem Albitgesetx

Gnomonisches
Gesammtbild.

Lithv.Gerstenlauer a Reisacher, Stuttgart

‘ ‘
.
. = . ‘ -
i ) _
Ve = `
£ \
* 5 р - a
' ”
. 2 >
= * ‚ B
"ra р \ ‘ a
” . ©
в i .
x .
;
. р = :
! «
’
. 2
À .
: = .
i р < .
4 .
5 к i
я > у
. +
. . A à
2: ` E
i
В

Meddelelser om Gronland XXXIV.

A bit.

Storarsuit

Figo 2
M

tps 958

Theil von 5° vergriss

Storarsuit

Storars uit
ib 1

Meddelelser om Gronland XXXIV.

Narsarsuk

Albit.

Narsarsuk

”

Meddelelser om Grønland XXXIV. Tav. V.

Albit. | Е

Narsarsuk

Storars uit

Orthoklas
Karlshader-
Z mulung

|_| Albit

Fig. 17

E Orthoklas

Ц Albit

Fig. 19

Мтазаг
nausak

DI] 224 =
Manebacher Zrvilung
U Abit

Q
G

IL.

On the occurrence of Fredericella sultana
Blumenb. and Paludicella Ehrenbergii van
Bened. in Greenland.

C. Wesenberg-Lund.

1907.

XXXIV. 5

CE pt arth gt we FR Ps os | o's SS © eT
ha. » у. ee la
3 4 oe
I
ve
by +
D
bi}
aS
| 2 3 så * = .
y i |

Denmark has hitherto been the most northerly country
from which fairly detailed reports of the fresh-water Bryozoa
have appeared. From Dalyells’ (1848 р. 87) and Allmans’
researches (1856 р. 78) we know that Cristatella mucedo and
Plumatella fungosa occur in Scotland, and that P. repens has
probably a wide distribution in that country. As regards Norway
Kraepelin only reports (1887 p. 99) that he has taken Paludi-
cella in the neighbourhood of Kongsberg and Plumatella fruticosa
(1887 p.120) near Drammen. To my knowledge we have hardly any
reports at all from Sweden whereas a good many from Finland.
From Nurmijärwisö са. 6 miles to the north of Helsingfors
Paludicella, Fredericella, Plumatella princeps, var. fruticosa,
P. polymorpha var. repens and cespitosa besides Cristatella
have been reported by Stenroos (1898 р. 50). As far as I am
aware no growing Bryozoa have been found farther north.” From
the existing evidence as to the boundaries of the fresh-water
Bryozoa it would seem that they do not extend very far to the
north; their geografical distribution would seem to justify our con-
sidering them as organisms requiring a considerably high summer
temperature to enable them to thrive. Yet several circumstances
make it questionable whether this opinion will hold good.

In the first. place it has been proved that fresh-water Bryozoa
occur at considerable depths where the annual temperature is
but low. Du Plessis thus pointed out a species of Frede-
ricella, by Forel termed К. Du Plessisi (1901 р. 113). It is
common in the upper part of the abyssal region at ca. 45 m.
where Forel obtained ca. 150 specimens at a single dredging.

At this depth they live and thrive at a temperature varying
between 4—9° С. Zschokke recently (1906 p.72) states that
the Vierwaldstätter See down to its greatest depths is covered
with “Rasen und Wäldern” of Fredericella Du Plessisi, in
other words that even at depths of 214 m. (Halbfass 1903
p. 712) with a constant annual temperature of ca. 4—5° C. (Am-
berg 1904 p. 91—93) the fresh-water Bryozoa still occur’).

These curious deepwater Fredericella which I have also
dredged in Lake Geneva are not as is the case with Bryozoa
in general attached to other bodies, but like the Pennatulides
they stick loosely in the mud of the lake bottom. According
to Forel they have the power of moving and when kept in
glass vessels are said to be able to rise out of the mud at
the bottom and at will to fasten themselves in the same. Da-
venport mentions (1904 р. 213) that Paludicella Ehrenbergi
and Fredericella sultana have been determined in catches from
Lake Michigan at depths of 23—36 m. For my own part I
have often during several years taken shells of mussels at 11
—15 m. with fixed statoblasts of Plumatella attached to them
and besides at one dredging in Furesø, estimated at 20 m., I
got a colony of Cristatella.

Further, it has been established that fresh-water Bryozoa
inhabit lakes almost verging on the snow region. The species
which according to Zschokke (1900 p. 115) occur in mountain
lakes are Fredericella sultana, Plumatella repens and Cristalla
mucedo, of which Cristatella has been found at the greatest
height (2293 m.). From lakes in the Engadin valley at 1825 m.
above sea level Zschokke reports Fredericella as occuring
abundantly even below the icecover of the lakes.

Besides these examples furnished by the fauna of our
own day we may also point to the Bryozoa of past epochs
for evidence which unmistakably shows that these organisms

1) The same species has quite recently also been found in the abyssal
region of lake d'Annecy (Marc le Roux 1907 р. 267).

must be quite able to exist at a much lower temperature than
our present knowledge of their geographical distribution would
seem to warrant. In samples of chitin and silicious fragments
from Scandinavian peat bogs kindly sent me some years ago
by Gunnar Anderson | was able (1896 р. 51) to determine
Cristatella statoblasts so early as in the Dryas-layers; Pluma-
tella did not occur until the pine period. Since then Crista-
tella as well as Plumatella statoblasts have been reported by
several observers as well as by myself in the quartar layers of
Denmark, Sweden, Norway, Finland and North Germany. As I
thought it unnecessary to mention here the numerous places of
discovry, I applied to the intimate connoisseur of the fauna
and flora of the Danish peat-bogs, N. Hartz, for some general
information as to the occurrence of Bryozoa statoblasts in our
peat-layers. According to Hartz the statoblasts of the above-
mentioned Bryozoa are found throughout all the several layers,
the Cristatella occurring most commonly, whereas in the Dryas-
layers the Plumatella are more rare.

Consequently it cannot be denied that, whether we con-
sider the occurrence of the fresh-water Bryozoa of the present
time or call to mind their vertical distribution during past ages,
in both cases it seems extraordinary that now-a-days the Bry-
ozoa should cease at so great a distance from the polar circle
as has hitherto been supposed to be the case. If these orga-
nisms have been able to exist under the natural-conditions of
the Dryas-period and if still able to liwe at the low tempera-
tures prevailing at the bottom of the Vierwaldstattersee as also
in Alpine lakes situated near the snow-region, we should be
justified in supposing that, although the natural conditions ob-
taining in countris beyond the arctic circle at the present day
do not admit of a direct comparison with the conditions pre-
vailing at the period where the Dryas layers were deposited in
our own latitudes, that the northern limit of these forms at
present would extend farther to the north.

Mr. Ad. Jensen of the Zoological Museum of Copenhagen on
his return from Greenland in the autumn of 1906 informed me that
he had found freshwater Bryozoa in the vicinity of the colony of
Jacobshavn near the Disko-Bay (69° 13’ N.). Being conversant with
the above facts this message was of course full of interest to me
and ! owe Mr. Ad. Jensen my best thanks for the readiness with
which he handed over the samples to me for closer inspection.
As to the locality Ad. Jensen reports. ‘‘To the north-east of the
colony of Jacobshavn a plain extends for a couple of English
miles along the base of the mountains. The plain is watered
by a small rivulet, which discharges itself into the harbour.
On its way to the harbour it passes through several small lakes
or tarns. The Bryozoa were found on the 28% of August 1906
in the bed of the stream at the place where it leaves the
uppermost and largest of the small lakes; the height above
sea level was са. 30 m. In this place the river is quite shallow.
the bed is covered with stones and partly ‘‘moss-grown”.
Numerous Sticklebacks (Gasterosteus aculeatus) were swarming
about besides the brood of the arctic Char (Salmo alpinus).
Numerous curiously formed chitinous sheaths housing the pupa
of Simulium adhered to the lower sides of the stones. On
handling them I observed a colony of Bryozoa fixed on to the
lower side of a stone; on turning round hundreds of stones I
at length succeeded in finding one more with a colony attached
to the lower side of the stone. Unhappily the stones were both
too large to go into any of my glasses so that I had no option
but to detach the branches of the Bryozoa from them with a
knife. The stream in this place was scarcely more than 7/3 m.
deep. I further looked for Bryozoa on stones in the littoral zone
of the lake but without success. However a dredging across
one of the small inlets of the lake fetched up numerous Bryozoan
branches with statoblasts. The lake itself is a ‘‘cold” one being
comparatively deep; it is fed by the melting snow of the moun-
tains and has an outlet. In contradistinction to such lakes |

call the smaller lakes. or ponds that have neither affluents nor
outlets “warm” lakes; the temperature of these shallow, stagnant
waters is in summer often comparatively high. I measured
15° C. in one of these very shallow ponds; in the latter the
ice melts early in summer; they were free from ice when we
arrived at the ‘‘South eastern” bay on the 20 of June, whereas
the colder lakes were still covered with ice which did not melt
until the last days of June. With regard to the animal life of
these lakes a characteristie difference was noticeable, the shallow,
warm lakes producing an abundant fauna; on hauling a plankton
net through the water small animals such as Branchinecta
paludosa, Copepoda, Cladocera, Rotifera etc. appear in great
numbers in the net. Notwithstanding several hauls in a couple
of cold lakes I obtained no micro-organisms visible to the naked
eye. In the lake near Jacobshayn, at the bottom of which the
Bryozoa occured I likewise fished in vain with my plankton
net; the only live animals observed were a small arctic Char
and a good many larve of a gnat (Chironomus) about an inch
long, which enclosed in their tubes of mud came up from
the bottom along with a tangled mass of Bryozoa, Characea
and moss.

It may further be remarked that according to Rink’s (I p. 39)
twelve years of observation the mean temperature at Jacobshavn
is in Jan. — 14°2, Feb. — 15°2, March —11°6, Ap. — 6'7, May
— 0:1, June + 3:7, July + 5°9, Aug. +43, Sep. + 1:0, Okt.
— 9:5, Nov. — 9-1, Dec. — 12°2.”

The Bryozoa proved to be Fredericella sultana Blumenb.
The form of the colony was the usual one with spreading
branches well apart from each other and much resembling
those 1 had seen from the abyssal region of Lake Geneva and
figured by Forel (1901 p. 114); the tubes contained the well
known brown kidney shaped statoblasts without annulus. The
colour of the tubes was a pale yellow, in the youngest
parts almost white; they lack the Diatom-coating so charac-

teristic of the Danish Fredericella (W.-L. 1896 р. 262) whereas
grains of sand were observed here and there in the fragil and
soft tubes, in order to make them firmer. In the sample
handed over to me from the above mentioned lake the Frede-
ricella were entangled in a mass chiefly of Characea inter-
spersed with Fontinalis. Evidently the feeble, pliant colony
clung to the Characea along the stems of which they possibly
branched and twined for support. The length of the tubes at
any rate measured 4—5 cm., possibly considerably more.

A further inspection of the sample from the rivulet revealed
some few specimens af another Bryozoa: Paludicella Ehren-
bergii v. Benned. attached to the branches of Fredericella. In
our native lakes it is by no means a rare sight to see Palu-
dicella coating the branches of Fredericella. It must now be
considered as a matter of fact that the fresh-waters of the arctic
zone are inhabited by at least two fresh-water Bryozoa: Frede-
ricella sultana and Paludicella Ehrenbergii.

A closer perusal of the literature consequent on the present
find showed that although no Bryozoa colonies had as yet been
recorded from the polar zone their statoblasts had been noted.
B. statoblasts are reported from Spitzbergen by Richard
(1897 p. 1); P. fruticosa from the Murman coast (1901 p. 23) and
P. repens by Levander from Russian Karelien (1905 p. 33).

Whilst the presence of statoblasts in one of our home-
localities may probably always be considered as a sure sign
that the species to which the statoblasts belong will also occur
in the locality, the case may be different when the statoblasts
occur at so great a distance from the limits of the domain the
growing Bryozoan colonies have hitherto been known to occupy,
the dispersing powers of the statoblasts being as is well known,
very great.

In order more definitely to ascertain the northernmost
locality from which living fresh-water Bryozoa colonies have
been reported I applied for better information on this head to

Scotland, Norway, Sweden and Finland. Mr. James Murray
advised me, that outside the reports af Dalyell and All-
mann no knowledge had been gained as to their distribution
in Scotland. Prof. G.O.Sars informed me that in the vicinity
of Christiania he had met with Plumatella repens (fairly com-
mon) Cristatella (only in one locality) and probably also with
Fredericella; otherwise nothing was known at to their distri-
bution in Norway excepting from Krapelins reports. Ekman
writes me that Bryozoa are not known to occur in Swedish
Lapmark; at the same time he reports Cristatella, Plumatella
repens (?), Plumatella fungosa, and Paludicella as having been
found in Sweden, however their utmost boundary lay just to
the north of the great Swedish lakes. Levander reports that
hitherto Paludicella, Fredericella, Cristalla, Plumatella repens,
fruticosa, fungosa and punctata have been found in Finland.
With the exception of P. repens which is said to be generally
distributed throughout the southern and central parts of Fin-
land, the other forms have only been found in some few lo-
calities in the southern part of the country’.

As the above shows Ad. Jensen’s find is of no small
interest, it extends the northern limits of the Bryozoa from
60° N. to 70° N. and is the means of bringing about an
agreement in the distribution of the Bryozoa towards the north
and their occurence in Alpine lakes, in the abyssal region
of lakes in low countries as also their distribution in pre-
historic times.

It is worth while to notice that the form, which according
to the common evidence of present observers in more tem-
perate latitudes seems to thrive best at the lowest temperatures:
Fredericella sultana (Zschokke а. 0., see above) so far like-
wise proves to be the dominant form towards the north. Knowing

! I beg to express my best thanks to each of the above mentioned scientists
for their kindness in thus having placed their knowledge at my disposai.

as we now do that the artic zone houses fresh-water Bryozoa, and
that probably other species than those here mentioned may be
expected to occur, our researches must aim at a better under-
standing af their mode of reproduction.

It is a well known fact, that by far the greater part of the
investigations regarding the reproduction of the lower fresh-
water organisms have until a few years ago taken place ex-
clusively in Central Europe. Owing to studies pursued in this
from a geographical point of view very limited area our know-
ledge on this head has been based. It seems to have been
tacitly understood that the results arrived at from this territory
must hold good in any other locality where the lower fresh-
water fauna happened to occur, i.e. almost all over the surface
of the earth. During later years a series of publications. have
appeared. on this fresh-water fauna, resting on investigations
carried on in artic and North European as well as in the high
alpine lakes of Switzerland, in Italy and North Africa. In Central
Europe these studies have further been carried on with some
regard to the conditions to which the organisms occurring in this
territory are subjected. Of this extensive literature we shall here
only mention the general results that have been gained, which
further researches will more fully substantiate. In all the lower
fresh-water groups of animals with various modes of repro-
duction — digonic or monogonic (parthenogenesis, gemmation,
division) or producing two types of eggs (resting eggs with
thick shells and summereggs with thin shells) the two modes
of reproduction are not employed indiscriminately under all
climatic conditions nor in every locality; nor are the two types
of eggs everywhere utilised to the same degree. This is the case
with the Copepoda, Cladocera, Ostracoda, Rotifera, Bryozoa,
Planaria, Dinoflagellata and will in the future probably likewise
prove to hold good with regard to the Phyllopoda. In certain
latitudes and under certain conditions the monogenic propagation
prevails, in others the digonic. The circumstance that organisms

endowed with various modes of reproduction employ these
differently under differing external conditions | regard as an in-
disputable fact, which in my opinion has hardly been appreciated
by zoologists, whilst to botanists, whose knowledge of the life-
conditions and vital requirements of plants exceeds by far that of
zoologists with regard to animals it has long been an acknow-
ledged fact. In botanical literature it has often been emphasized,
that sexual reproduction is abandoned in high latitudes, and
that plants living under arctic conditions increase either chiefly
or exclusively vegetatively. To mention an example Nathorst
(1883 p.64) reports that a great many of the Spitzbergen plants
produce no fruit at all; the phenomenon is even observable
in the Feroe Islands (Ostenfeld 1901 р. 106 and 1906 р. 41
where further literature is cited). In botany it is so pronounced,
that plants which in a given locality do not produce ripe seeds
are considered by some botanists as relicts, a view which how-
ever can hardly be supported (Warming 1904 р. 74). With
regard to plants fertilized by the aid of insects it is of course
often the absence of the proper insects which forms a hindrance
in this respect. Ostenfeld further remarks, that with regard
to wind fertilized plants the explanation of the above feature
must be sought for in climatic conditions, more especially the
low summer temperature — the same interpretation as has been
propounded in recent zoological literature on the various modes
of propagation of the lower fresh-water organisms in high
northern latitudes.

I shall not here enter upon this now pretty. extensive
literature, comprising numbers of greatly differing organisms,
but only restrict myself to a few remarks respecting the
Bryozoa.

Already in 1896 (p. 350) I was of opinion, that the sexual
reproduction of the Bryozoa decreases towards the north. Not-
withstanding regular fortnightly investigations made upon colonies
of P. fruticosa, Fredericella and Lophopus in their habitual

places of growth, I was never able to find either larvæ, eggs
or spermatozoa. This is in all essentials in accordance with the
results arrived at by Kraepelin with respect to North Ger-
many (see W.-L. 1897 p. 344—349) and further corresponds
with Zschokkes reports on his researches respecting Bryozoa
in high Alpine lakes. Zschokke states, that he has never seen
any sexual elements in the Plumatella colonies of lakes in-
vestigated by him, and that these Alpine Bryozoa possibly —
he does not wish to express himself positively — may prove
to form an interesting parallel to the colonies of the northern
regions (1900 p. 119). Thanks to Kraepelins investigations
we now know that in North Germany Paludicella produces eggs
as well as spermatozoa, a feature which will probably also hold
good with us. The larves have only once been found in the
vicinity of Breslau (Bråem 1896 p. 54). Since then 1 have
continually been in search of them in and on the large Palu-
dicella colonies in Fure- and Lyngby-Sø but as yet without
success. Whilst neither Kraepelin nor I have ever seen the
Fredericella larva, Chirica (1904 p. 2) reports, that in the
Rumanian lakes the /redericella throw off their larves in the
latter end of July; these larva haves further been observed by
Bräem as far as I know near Breslau (1895 p. 503).

In our latitudes the production of eggs and sperms along
with a copious produce of larve can only be regarded as a
common feature in Plumatella repens, fungosa and in Crista-
tella. Further researches must now decide, whether not only
the forms, that already with us seem to have abandoned more
or less the sexual mode of reproduction (Fredericella, Pluma-
tella fruticosa. and possibly also Paludicella Ehrenbergii) but
likewise all the rest of the Plumatella species as well as Cri-
statella, both of which will in time presumably be found in the
arctic region, and which in our latitudes all produce larvæ
abundantly, only propagate asexually in the far north. This
would seem the more probable, as the arctic conditions un-

questionably shorten the growth period of the Bryozoa. From
his researches in Tilisuna- and Lüner-See ca. 2000 m. above
sea level Zschokke (1900 p. 117) remarks, that the period of
active growth in Alpine lakes can only be estimated at 8—10
weeks, whereas in low countries at 20—22 weeks. The pro-
duction of the statoblasts does not take place until ca. 9—10°
C., i. e. in the latter part of July, and already in Oct. the
colonies are dead. During the period Oct.—July only the germs
winter in the statoblasts. According to Rink’s statement as
to the mean temperature of Jacobshavn it appears, that the
above mentioned lake has hardly been free from ice for more
than three months. “Generally speaking the ice begins to form
at the end of Sept., and in the course of Oct. the lakes are
quite frozen over; the ice does not wholly vanish until the
beginning of July or even later” (Rink I, p.76). The period of the
year when the temperature exceeds са. 9—10° С. is undoubtedly
very short. Notwithstanding the severity of the climate the
colony might in all probability survive the winter in the case
of a favorable locality; in 1899 p. 45 Lampert mentions the
Fredericella as being the only Bryozoa positively known to be
able to live beneath the ice.

A few years ago (1904 p. 337) Zykoff was able to report
Estheridæ as having been found оп Kolgujew-Island at са. 70°
N. with an isotherm of ca. 7—8° C. in July. This discovery
at one stroke extended the limits of distribution of these or-
ganisms from regions bordering on the Mediterranean, from
the Hungarian steppes and from the Mongolian as far north
as to the arctic zone. The discovery of the Esteride along
with that of the fresh-water Bryozoa treated of in this paper
in the first place goes to show how very little we at present
know as to the arctic fresh-water fauna. It has of late be-
come customary, from a knowledge of the lowest July tem-
perature at which a given organism at the present time is
supposed to be able: to live, to draw conclusions as to the

temperature at which those strata in which the fossil specimens
of the species now occur. For several reasons I consider
these conclusions as being of small worth; more especially on
account of our want of knowledge as to the northernmost limits
of the lower fresh-water fauna.

Literatur,
1856. Allman (P.): A Monograph of the Fresh-water Polyzoa.
1904. Amberg (B.): Limnologische Untersuchungen des Vierwaldstättersees.
Physical. Teil.
1890. Braem (F.): Untersuchungen über die Bryozoen des süssen Wassers.
Bibliotheca zoologica.

1895. = Was ist ein Keimblatt? Biolog. Centralbl. 1895. p. 427
and 491.
1896. — Die geschlechtliche Entwicklung von Paludicella Ehren-

bergii. Zool. Anz. 19, p.54.

1904. Chirica (C.): Notes sur les Bryozoaires de Roumanie. Annales scienti-

fiques de l'Université de Yassy.

1847—48. Dalyell: Rare and remarkable Animals of Scotland, represented
from living subjects. London.

1904. Davenport (C.): Report on the fresh-water Bryozoa of the United States.

Proceed. United Stat. National Mus. Washington. 27, p. 211.

1901. Forel (F.): Le Léman. T. Ш.

1903 —4. Halbfass (W.): Die Morphometrie der Europäischen Seen. Zeitschr.
d. Geselsch. f. Erdkunde zu Berlin, p. 592 og 205.

1887—92. Kraepelin (K.): Die Deutschen Süsswasserbryozoen. 1. Abh. aus
dem Gebiete der Naturw. Hamburg. 10, 1887 and II. Ent-
wickelungsgeschichtlichen Teil. ibid 12, 1892.

1899. Lampert (K.): Das Leben der Binnengewasser. Leipzig.

1901. Levander (K.): Beiträge zur Fauna- und Algenflora der заззеп Ge-

wässer an der Murmanküste. Acta Soc. pro Fauna et
Flora Fennica. 20, No. 8.

1905. — Zur Kenntniss des Planktons einiger Binnenseen in
Russisch-Lapland. Festschrift f. Palmén. Helsing-
fors. No. 11. |

1883. Nathorst (А. G.): Nya bidrag til kännedomen om Spetsbergens kärl-

växter. Kongl. Svensk. Vetensk. Acad. Handl. 20, No. 6.

1901. Ostenfeld (C.): Phytogeographical-studies based upon observations of
Phanerogame and Pteridophyta. Botany of the Faröes
I. Copenhagen p. 100.

—1
or

1906. Ostenfeld (C.): Planteveksten paa Færøerne. Dissert. København.
1897. Richard (J.): Entomostracés recueillis par M. Ch. Rabot a Jan Mayen
et au Spitzberg. Bull. de la Soc. zool. de France. 24, No. 5.
1857. Rink (H.): Grønland geografisk og statistisk beskrevet. København.
2. Bd.
1907. Roux (M. le): Recherches biologiques sur le lac d'Annecy. Annales
de Biologie lacustre. 2, p. 220.
1898. Stenroos (K.): Das Thierleben im Nurmijårwi-See. Acta soc. pro fauna
et flora. Fennica. Helsingfors 15, No. 2.
1904. Warming (E.): Den danske Planteverdens Historie efter Istiden. Ind-
bydelsesskr. til Kjøbenhavns Universitet.
1896a. Wesenberg-Lund (C.): Om Ferskvandsfaunaens Kitin- og Kisellev-
ninger i Tørvelagene. Meddel. fra dansk geolog.
Foren. København 3, p. 51.
1896b. — Biologiske Studier over Ferskvandsbryozoer.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Naturhist. Foren. 58, p.252.
1900. Zschokke (F.): Die Tierwelt der Hochgebirgsseen. Denkschr. d. Schweiz.
naturf. Gesellsch. Zürich 37, p. 1.
1905. — Die Tiefenfauna des Vierwaldstätter-Sees. Verhandl. 4.
Schweiz. Gesellsch. Luzern p. 1.
1905. Zykoff (W.): Zur Crustaceenfauna der Insel Kolgujew. Zool. Anz.
28, p. 337.
Freshwater-biological laboratory of the University
Copenhagen 18/IX 1907.

HAS

114 ig Flys Ae) aX, MERE Sey CR Are 1

SATIRE NE iy Ha: Maid) 25

it козла ann eth ER à tot

‘de AUS RM dad |

| va : s 4 4
Bray IN| AE ee tad da Sede

ul nth nl D dann

É 7 И
HOUR PEUR TENTE 3

ep '
№ quid оу Fit UE ars jth “aes tik
ae ae: ae ka

FRR EST | i tah re
Wit: cata ge Må al

SE LE ВИ ara is

Nita ti) i И. x Nie ie

re During SINGS HU ag

tesa tabs, Bir

вне: ft YA ah PL KMS
hart i NA

stå rer

14
aw}
|

TI.

Medfødte Misdannelser m. m. hos
den grønlandske Befolkning.

Ved

Gustav Meldorf.

1907.

XXXIV. 6

I det efterfølgende har jeg samlet, hvad jeg selv har set,
samt hvad jeg i Literaturen og i Distriktslægernes indberet-
ninger fra Grønland har kunnet finde angåaende medfødte Mis-
dannelsers Forekomst hos Befolkningen i Grønland. — Skjøndt
Materialet til Belysning af dette Forhold ikke er stort, synes
det dog tilstrækkeligt til at vise, at de fleste af de fra andre
Nationer bekendte almindeligste Misdannelser ogsaa træffes hos
Grønlænderne, og jeg skulde næsten tro, at de endda er for-
holdsvis hyppige hos den grønlandske Befolkning.

Man vil i det efterfølgende finde Exempler paa: ufuld-
stændig Lukning af føtale Spalter i Ansigtet, ufuldstændig
Lukning af Cerebrospinalaxens Hulheder, Cyklopi, Hermafrodi-
tisme, fejlagtig Dannelse af anus, fejlagtig eller mangelfuld
Dannelse af Extremiteter m. m. — Om Dobbeltmisfostre og
hjærteløse Misfostre (Acardiaci) foreligger ingen Oplysninger.

En Mola hydatidosa, der fremkaldte stærke Blødninger
og paafølgende Abort i 3die—4de Maaned, saa jeg hos en 31
Aar gl., gift Grønlænderinde ved Julianehaab d. 7”/s 1897. —
I 1896 behandlede Fritz Jørgensen, ligeledes ved Juliane-
haab, en «Metrorrhagia gravissima, Mola hydatidosa» (manuel
Fjernelse af Mola).

Et Exempel paa ufuldstendig Lukning af fotale
Spalter i Ansigtet saa jeg hos en ca. 18-aarig, ugift, for-
ældreles Kvinde fra Grønlands Østkyst, der i Eftersommeren
1900 indvandrede til den sydlige Del af Vestkysten tilligemed
37 andre Beboere af Ostkystens sydlige Del for at bosætte sig

paa Vestkysten. Jeg traf og vaccinerede disse Ostgronlendere
ved Udstedet Pamiagdluk 4. 7“/s—?*/9 1900 og har nærmere
beskrevet mit Sammentræf med dem i en lille Afhandling i
«Meddelelser om Gronland» XXV Hefte, Kbhvn. 1902, betitlet:
«Fra en Vaccinationsrejse i Egnen omkring Kap Farvel i Efter-
aaret 1900». Hos den ovennævnte Ostgronlenderinde saas en
medfodt mangelfuld Tiliukning af den fotale Spalte imellem den
af forste Visceralbue dannede Over- og Underkæbelap paa
begge Sider.

Paa venstre Side var denne Spalte forbleven helt aaben-
staaende paa et længere Stykke, saaledes at Mundspalten strakte
sig i transversel Retning lige hen til, hvor de ægte Kindtænder
begyndte (Fissura buccalis transversalis, Macrostoma). Længere
bagtil havde Tillukningen af denne fotale Spalte paa venstre
Side for starste Delen fundet Sted; dog saas endnu ca. 1 Tomme
nedenfor og foran venstre Oregang en lille, spalteformet Kanal,
i hvis Lumen, der var saa stort og saaledes formet, at en Hul-
sonde kunde trænge derind, den normale Hudbeklædning strakte
sig ned, saa langt man kunde se. Lige bagved denne spalte-
formede Aabning i Huden saas en lille nogenlunde oreformet
Hudlap, der i Forening med Kanalen foran dannede ligesom et
Miniaturere med den tilhørende Oregang noget nedenfor og
foran det normale Øre.

Paa Ansigtets hojre Side var Mundspalten ikke forlænget
udover det normale, men her saas to lignende Kanaler (spalte-
formede Aabninger) i Huden som den ovenfor beskrevne enkelte
paa venstre Side. Paa Kinden omtrent midt imellem højre
Mundvig og højre Øregang saas den ene af de nævnte to smaa,
spalteformede Aabninger og bagved denne en ærtestor, lidt oval,
fibromlignende Lap. Endvidere saas en noget større Hudlap
foran Lobulus af højre Øre, og foran og lidt opadtil for denne
saas den anden spalteformede Aabning at strække sig ned i
Huden.

Misdannelser af Hovedet о. а. Legemsdele i højere

Grad synes at have været tilstede i et Par af Paul Egede
(«Continuation af Relationerne» etc., 1734—1740, Kbhvn. 1741)
beskrevne Tilfælde af medfodte Misdannelser, nemlig:

«Den 28de» (Marts 1738) «blev ved Isefjorden fod et
Monstrum, hvilket havde Øjnene paa Siden af Nesen, Munden
var som en spids Hunde-Snud; havde ingen Ørn. Og i Stedet
for Hænder og Fødder havde det ikkun Laller og store tykke
Laar. Over Panden var det begroet med Rens-Diurs Haar.
Paa Siden af det var det at se til som et Stykke Hvidfiskeskind.
Et andet Barn, sagde de, var fød der i Nærværelsen og havde
lugtet af Orme. Aarsagen til slige Vanskabninger, foregive
Angekut, at være, at Moderen har ladet sig bruge af de Døde».

«Den 9de» (Maj 1739) «blev født et Monstrum 2 Mile
herfra uden Hoved, med fire Ben, store Negler, Mund påa
Brystet og Klør paa Ryggen. Slige og andre Vanskabninger
fødes tit her i Bugten».

Under mit 6-aarige Ophold ved Julianehaab fik jeg Lejlighed
til at se to Tilfælde af medfødt Spaltning af Spinalkanalen
(Rachischisis, Hydrorhachis ext., Spina bifida lumbo-
sacralis) hos Grønlænderbørn.

I det første af disse Tilfælde var Patienten et 2 Aar gl.
Pigebarn ved Udstedet Sydprøven med Coxitis og «Tabes
meseraica» tillige, hvem jeg kaldtes til d.‘/9 1898. Det spinale
Meningocele havde en bred Basis og var blodt og vandpude-
agtigt at fole paa; opadtil og bagtil lob det ud i en Spids,
hvortil yderligere var fæstet et lille morkerodt, ved Tilheftningen
til Meningocelet indsneret, kodet Appendix. ‘Tumor var med-
fodt og var vistnok voxet noget siden Fodslen. Intumescensens
Længdeaxe var fra Basis og til den fri Spids af det omtalte
lille Appendix 51/2 Centimeter; heraf udgjorde det sidste 7/4 Cen-
timeter. En aragtig Indtrekning saas i Huden nedenfor Me-
ningocelet. Indenfor Basis af Tumor foltes tydelig Defekten i
Hvirvelbuerne (manglende processus spinosi osv.). Den dækkende
Hud af naturligt Udseende. — Barnet, hvis Forældre var meget

fattige, var i elendig Ernæringstilstand og overmaade slet soig-
neret; det døde senere (4/2 1899).

Den anden Patient, et 11/2 Maaned gl. Barn (Dreng) fra
Udstedet Narssak (Nordproven), blev indlagt paa Sygehuset ved
Julianehaab d. >7/s 1899. Meningocelets Basis var her 5 Cen-
timeter i Diameter; den dækkende Hud var rodviolet, stærkt
udspilet, slimhindeagtig i Midtpartiet, blank og spejlende. Kon-
sistensen spændt og fluktuerende. Svulsten punkteredes ved
Dieulafoi’s Aspirationsapparat, og der udtomtes en ret betydelig
Mengde aldeles vandklar Vedske, hvorefter Sekken faldt sam-
men, og Defekten i Hvirvelbuerne kunde nu overordentlig tydelig
foles herigennem. Men Vedsken reproduceredes trods Trykfor-
binding meget snart, og Sækken blev atter udspilet heraf.
Barnet befandt sig vel under og efter Punkturen. Forældrene
vilde ikke indlade sig paa, at storre Indgreb blev foretaget og
havde bestemt at rejse fra Kolonien allerede d. *°/s med Barnet.
Dette, der altsaa kun opholdt sig 4 Dage ved Kolonien, døde
d. !*/ıı ved Bristning af Sækken, hvilken Bristning Barnet over-
levede i 2 Dage.

Et Tilfelde af Cyklopi omtales af Distriktslege Pfaff,
Nord-Gronland, i hans Indberetning for Aaret 1867: Ved Jakobs-
havn fødtes i Stutningen af Juni Maaned «et dodfadt Misfoster.
Øjnene vare sammensmeltede ved Næseroden. Næsebenene
manglede, men ned over det sammensmeltede Øje hang fast-
hæftet til Neserodens Hudbedekning en kødet, af en Aabning
perforeret Klump. Paa ventre Fod fandtes 6 Teer, iøvrigt var
Barnet fuldbaaarent og velskabt».

Under mit Ophold i Grønland blev det mig fortalt (1899),
at 3 Tilfælde af Kryptophthalmus? skal være sete ved Nanor-
talik for en Del Aar siden, idet en gift Grønlænderinde, der
først havde født et Par sunde Børn, derefter fødte tre Børn,
det ene efter det andet, hvor Øjelaagsspalten (rima) helt eller
delvist manglede paa begge Sider. — Hos det første Barn skal
Tillukningen have været saa fuldstændig, at man aldeles intet

kunde se af Bulbi, hos de to andre Born saas derimod et lille
Parti af Cornea («saa meget som et Spurveoje») at skinne frem
i Midten af de iøvrigt tillukkede Ojelaagsspalter. — Alle tre
Bern skal have haft Lyssands (drejede Hovedet efter Lyset); de
dode alle i en ret sped Alder, og Moderen fodte senere atter
sunde Born.

Af Hermafroditisme saa Distriktslege Otto Jessen
ved Julianehaab et Tilfælde, der omtales i hans Medicinalberet-
ning for September 1872—September 1873: «Som Merkver-
dighed vil jeg kun tilføje til min Indberetning, at der i den
tyske Menighed er bleven fedt et Barn med saa hermaphroditisk
misdannede Genitalia, at der var Strid, om det skulde dobes
Carl eller Marie, men Missionæren døbte det som Dreng. Da
jeg paa min Rejse undersøgte det, var han 3 Maaneder gl.;
Clitoris var udviklet til en ca. > Tomme lang Penis, næsten
uden paaviselig Preputium, men forholdsvis stor Glans med fin,
næsten hypospadiær Urethralaabning, derunder en Aabning, saa
stor, at man kunde stikke en ikke meget fin Sonde */4 Tomme
i Dybet; begge Testes foltes med Funiculi i Labia majora».

Muligvis kan der have veret Tale om Hermafroditisme i
sterre eller mindre Grad i et Par af Paul og Niels Egede
omtalte Tilfælde. lalfald som Kuriosum synes jeg, at de for-
tjener at anfores her:

Paul Egede fortæller i «Continuation af Relationerne»
om еп Kone, der 4. 23de Marts 1738 sagde til ham: «Jeg fødte
dette Barn i Sommer og var en Dreng, det forste han kom ud,
men han revnede og blev til en Pige; uden Tvivl er Luften
bleven vred for noget, jeg maa have forset mig udi». — — —
«Г hvor meget jeg end søgte at igendrive hende, stod hun dog
paa sit, og sagde: Det var en Dreng, men revnet». —

I «Tredie Continuation af Relationerne» etc. 1739—1743,
Kbhvn. 1744, skriver Niels Egede for d. Tde December 1741:
«Iblandt andet sagde en Kone, at den lille Pige, som hun nu
havde, var en Dreng, da hun blev fodt, som de alle saa, men

da Jorde-Moderen havde forset sig i noget, idet hun ikke havde
taget alle Angekokkens Regler iagt, sprak han itu og blev til
en Pige, som duser’)». Niels Egede var da rejst Nord paa
til Isefjorden, hvor dette foregik.

| December 1739 omtaler Niels Egede en Brud, der
Brudenatten blev forvandlet til en ung Karl.

Bataillonschirurg Rudolf, Nord-Gronland, angiver i Aaret
‘lz 1845—30/в 1846 at have behandlet et Tilfælde af Atresia
urethræ; om medfodt eller erhvervet angives ikke.

Et Tilfelde af Atresia ani omtales i Distriktslege F.
Block’s Medicinalberetning for Godthaab Lægedistrikt for 1/7
1840—*°/6 1841: Anus imperforatus, medfødt: «en tynd Hinde
tilsluttede Aabningen, men ved en sterk Nisus depressonus
anden Dagen efter Fødslen sprang denne Hinde itu paa to
Steder. Anus blev dog herved ualmindelig lille og maatte i 5-
Aars-Alderen dilateres blodigt. Barnet sagdes da ikke at have
haft Aabning i 5 Uger!, og der udtemtes efter Operationen
(uden Clysma eller andre Afforingsmidler) Masser af Feces».
Barnet var en Dreng. Hudstrimmelen gennemskares med Fistel-
kniv.

Exempler paa fejlagtig eller mangelfuld Dannelse
af Extremiteter er allerede nævnte i det foregaaende (under
Omtalen af Misdannelser paa Hovedet og Cyklopi). I det efter-
folgende skal anfores flere andre Exempler herpaa:

Distriktslege Pfaff, Nord-Gronland, fortæller i sin Medicinal-
beretning for Aaret 1872 om en Fodfodsel, hvor Moderen døde
3 Timer efter Fodslen, da Jordemoderen ikke var i Stand til at

1) Om en lignende formodet Forvandling fra Dreng til Pige (allerede i
Foetallivet) paa Grønlands Østkyst meddeler Kommandør С. Holm i
«Ethnologisk Skizze af Angmagsalikerne» (Den ostgrenl. Expedition
1883—85, Side 134, Meddel. om Grenland, X Hefte, Kbhvn. 1888): En
Angekok havde forudsagt en Kone, at hun vilde fode en Sen. Barnet
blev imidlertid en Pige. Senere fandt Angekok’en ud af, at Spaadommen
vilde være gaaet i Opfyldelse, hvis Konen ikke ved Uforsigtighed engang
var falden, hvorved der var gaaet en Revne i Fosteret».

faa Efterbyrden frem. (Pfaff formoder, at der har veret ud-
bredte Adhærencedannelser tilstede). «Bemeldte Barselkone
havde fodt flere Born, og ikke faa af dem have haft Abnormi-
teter saaledes Fingrene forenede ved Svommehud eller aldeles
manglende; det nyfodte Barn manglede saaledes Tommelfingeren
paa hojre Haand».

Knud Poulsen anforer i «Contributions to the anthropo-
logy and nosology of the East-Greenlanders» (Meddelelser om
_Grenland XXVIII Hæfte. Kbhvn. 1905): «More considerable
deformities are certainly very rare, children with such being
as a rule undoubtedly killed shortly after having been born.
The only one I saw was a young man, whose left hand was
somewhat deformed, being first nearly 4 Ctm. shorter than the
right one; the outermost points of the three middlemost fingers
were besides stiff, and between these, being very delicate, a
web was distended reaching nearly the outermost point». —

I «Ethnologisk Skizze af Angmagsalikerne» skriver Kom-
mander G. Holm om Ostgronlænderne: «Det er vistnok ingen
Sjeldenhed, at der fodes vanskabte Born. Disse tilligemed syge
Born, som antages ikke at kunne leve, ligesom ogsaa Born, hvis
Moder dor under Fodslen, og hvem ingen anden kan give Die,
blive kastede udenfor paa Jorden eller i Havet for at om-
komme». — —

Hos en nogle og fyrretyve-aarig, gift Gronlænder, Fanger
fra Bopladsen Kangermiutsiait i Nærheden af Kolonien Juliane-
haab, som kom til Lægebehandling for en anden Lidelse d. ?/6
1902, saa jeg et Exempel раа Syndaktyli, idet Ade og 5te
Taa paa venstre Fod var fuldstændig sammenvoxede i hele Be-
roringsfladernes Udstrækning. Sammensmeltningen, der var med-
fodt, indbefattede Huden, ikke Muskler, Sener eller Knogler.
De sammensmeltede Tæer saa ud som en enkelt meget bred
Taa med 2 Negle. Paa 4de Taa var Neglen veludviklet; paa
dte Taa var den uregelmæssig kort og bred, rudimenter.

Polydaktyli saa jeg d. 30/4 1902 hos en ca. 5 Aar gl.

Gronlænderdreng fra Bopladsen Niakornak, Nord for Kolonien
Julianehaab. Barnet havde to Tommelfingre paa venstre Haand,
hvoraf den ene (den yderste) dog kun var са. Из saa stor som
den anden (den egentlige Tommelfinger). De var begge ind-
leddede (ved Ledforbindelse) paa forste Mellemhaandsben. Den
lille overflødige Tommel havde (ligesom den storre) 2 Phalanx-
Knogler, og der var Bevegelighed i alle Led (ogsaa Metacarpo-
phalangeal-Leddet). Yderste Phalanx var dog skudt ned paa
Ulnarsiden af 1ste Phalanx, saa at den lille Tommels yderste
Led vendte imod den storre Tommelfinger. Patienten kunde
selv bevæge i alle Led. Begge Fingre bar vel udviklede Negle;
paa den lille Tommelfinger var Neglen lang og smal.

Niels Egede («Tredie Continuation af Relationerne»)
skriver i August 1739: «Sidst i denne Maaned kom en Gren-
lænder langt Sonden fra, som var vanskabt, hans Mave ragte
lige fra hans Hals, og kunde jeg ikke fole til noget Brystben
paa ham, Albuen var nærved Skulderbladet, Laarene vare om-
trent en fjerdedel Alen, og hans Hojde i sig selv var som et
ordinært Menneske. Han talede uforstaaeligt, hans Kammerat
sagde, at han kunde spise 5 Sælhunde op i et Maaltid, de
indbildte sig og, at han havde en Spaadoms-Aand og kunde
sige tilkommende Ting. Hans Moder fortalte mig, at da hun
engang var paa Jagt og af Mathed lagde sig ned ved en stor
Sten for at faa Hvile, drømte hun, at en Trold laa hos hende,
og da hun af Alteration vaagnede, var hun ganske mat og
merkte ved sig selv, at hun var besvangret».

»Hun bad mig, at jeg vilde tale til Gud for hende, at den
vanskabte Sen maatte enten blive som andre eller og maatte
de, thi han fortærte al hendes Ejendom og kyste Livet af hans
andre Soskende».

Kommandør G. Holm nævner i »Den ostgronlandske
Expedition», Side 87, en Ostgronlænder ved Imarsivik, «som
var Dverg». — Hans Datter roede i Kajak og fangede godt.

En gift Gronlænder ved Kolonien Julianehaab, født i Aaret

1874, lider af dobbeltsidig pes equinus samt genu valgum,
medfodt eller da i alt Fald udviklet i den tidlige Barnealder.

Af mindre væsentlige medfødte Anomalier skal
jeg nævne: en for vidt gaaende Tilheftning af Tungen til Bun-
den af Mundhulen (Ankyloglosson), en for vidt gaaende Til-
heftning af Overleben til Overkebens Gingiva samt to Tilfælde
af Molluscum fibrosum pendulens faciei, det ene hos et dansk,
det andet hos et gronlandsk Barn ved Kolonien Julianehaab.
De to sidstnevnte Tilfælde stod vistnok i Forhold til den fotale
Spalte imellem Over- og Underkæbelappen; der var dog intet
Tegn til Makrostomi hos noget af disse to Born.

Ankyloglosson saa jeg hos et 14 Maaneder gl. Barn,
Datter af Enke, ved Udstedet Narssak (Nordproven) d. "7/7 1900.
Barnets Tungebaand (Frenulum lingue) var tilheftet meget langt
fortil paa Undersiden af Tungen, næsten helt hen til Tunge-
spidsen, saa at Tungen kun kunde loftes ganske lidt op fra
Mundhulens Bund og ikke rekkes frem af Munden.

Hos et andet Gronlenderbarn, 8 Maaneder gl., Son af Ko-
lonist ved Julianehaab, som jeg 4. !Y/s 1901 ВК under Behand-
ling, var Tungens Bevegelser ligeledes stærkt indskrænkede paa
Grund af Tungebaandets Tilheftning altfor langt fortil paa Tun-
gens Underside.

Hos begge Born foretoges «Løsning af Tungen» ved Indklip-
ning med Sax i Tungebaandet. Efter den lille Operation blev
Tungens Bevegelighed betydelig mere fri. — Hos begge Born saas
tillige en hvidlig Plet (Stomatitis aphthosa), der hos det forst omtalte
Barn var 10-Оге stor og havde sit Sede paa Tungespidsen; hos det
sidstnevnte Barn var Pletten godt ertestor og havde sit Sede
lige foran Tungebaandets overste og forreste Tilheftning (halvt
paa Tungebaandet og halvt paa Tungens Underside); Moderen
havde bemærket denne Piet siden 4. 2/1 1901. Under flittig
Pensling af Pletten med Tinct. myrrhe & galle aa tabte den

sig mere og mere og var næsten helt forsvunden i Slutningen
af Marts.

Det synes næsten, som om saadanne strammende Baand i
Mundhulen, der ikke heves ved artificiel Behandling, er serlig
udsatte for at angribes og — ialtfald delvis — destrueres ved at
blive Sædet for Betændelsesprocesser (Aphthe о. Ign.), hvorved
der indtreder en Slags Naturhelbredelse af Anomalien. Jeg
har set det i flere Tilfælde, ogsaa naar Frenulum imellem Over-
leben og Gingiva har strakt sig helt ned til Fortænderne. For-
modentlig finder dette Forhold sin Forklaring ved, at en saadan
fri Rand stadig er udsat for Stramning og Irritation under
Tungens og Overlebens Bevegelser.

Fibroma (Molluscum fibrosum), medfodt, saa jeg
hos et Grenlenderbarn ved Julianehaab, født 4. */6 1901, Son af
Fanger. Tæt foran højre Ore (i Højde med Crus helicis, altsaa
lidt ovenfor Øregangsaabningen) saas en rundagtig, lidt mere
end hampefrøstor, stilket Tumor, bestaaende af normal Hud
med Lanugohaar (Cutis pendula). Stilken var tyndest lidt
ovenfor den øvrige Huds Niveau.

Hos et dansk Pigebarn ved Julianehaab, der fødtes i April
S. Å., altsaa et Par Maaneder i Forvejen, saas et lignende med-
født Molluscum fibrosum foran venstre Øre. Umiddelbart foran
Tragus (paa Overgangen mellem denne og Tindinge-Egnen) fandtes
et 4 Millimeter langt Appendix af blød Konsistens, bestaaende af
normal Hud.. Det havde Cylinderform, og Cylindrens Diameter
var 2 Millimeter. Cylindren var indsnævret lidt ovenfor Huden.

Begge disse smaa Tumores fjernedes let ved Afklipning med
Sax (henholdsvis d. ?/1 1902 og d. ”/10 1901), og i Løbet af
faa Dage var Snitfladen legt og dækket af Epidermis.

Phimosis er yderlig almindelig hos Drengebørn og voxne
Grønlændere.

Af Hydrocele congenita har jeg set et enkelt Tilfælde
hos en Grønlænderdreng.

Skjendt det efterfølgende egentlig ikke kan komme ind under
Betegnelsen: medfodte Anomalier, vil jeg dog tillade mig i Til-
slutning til Omtalen af disse at anfore et Par lagttagelser over
Forhold hos Gronlænderborn, der ligger lidt udenfor det helt
almindelige og dagligdags.

Da jeg 4. 17/5 1901 opholdt mig paa Embedsrejse ved An-
leget Nanortalik i Julianehaab Distrikt, fremstillede en ugift
Gronlenderinde sin 9-aarige Datter for mig for at faa fjernet
en frembrydende Tand, der generede Barnet en Del under Tyg-
ningen m. m., idet den var kommen frem paa den haarde Gane
en Centimeter bagved Mellemrummet imellem de to mediale
Fortender i Overkeben, altsaa i Legemets Midtlinie (Sagittalplanet).

Foruden denne Tand havde Barnet 12 Tender i Overkeben
(2 Fortender, 1 Hjornetand og 3 Kindtender i hver Kæbehalvdel).
| Undermunden saas de tilsvarende 12 Tender, og desuden var
2den Molar i sterkt Frembrud i venstre Side. De to Hjorne-
tender i Underkæben var ved at blive erstattede af to frembry-
dende, blivende Hjornetænder. Disse var komne godt frem over
Tandkødet paa den ydre Side af Mælketænderne (lidt udenfor
dem), saa at Barnet da havde 4 Hjørnetænder i Underkæben.
De to Hjørne-Mælketænder kunde kun rokkes forholdsvis lidt.

Den lille, hvide, frembrydende Tandkrone, der saas i Midt-
linien af den haarde Gane, havde nærmest Form som en For-
tand (mejseldannet med en Køl paa den bagtil vendende Flade).
Dens Størrelse var lidt mindre end Fortændernes. Efter Ud-
trækningen med Tandtang viste den sig at være 9 Millimeter
lang, heraf udgjorde Kronen 6 Millimeter. Kronens Bredde
var 4—5 Millim.; forfra—bagtil var den 3—4 Millim. Roden
var afrundet af Form. Tanden kunde før Udtrækningen rokkes lidt.

«Hexemelk» træffes undertiden hos de smaa Grønlænder-
bern. Hos en lille Pige, født d.!/1 1905, Datter af Fanger ved
Julianehaab, kunde der saaledes, da jeg i Dagene omkring d.
6/;—18/1 s. A. undersøgte Barnet, fra begge Papiile mamm let
udtrykkes nøgle Draaber tynd, halvklar, hvidlig, mælkeagtig Vædske.

On Gyrolite from Greenland.

0. B. Boggild.

1908.

So far as can be ascertained, gyrolite was first observed
by К. L. Giesecxe in the year 1811. He gives the following
description of a mineral from Niakornat in the district of
Umanak, Greenland, which evidently refers to this species"):

«Ist aber Mandelstein ein Gemengtheil dieses Conglomerats,
so sieht man in demselben Quarz, Chalcedon, faserigen Mesotyp
in Nieren von verschiedener Grösse. Der letztere geht oft ins
krummblätterige über, ist schiefrig, hat einen starken Perlen-
mutter-, oft beinahe metallischen (Silber-) Glanz, und braust
etwas mit Salpetersäure. Seine Krystallisation scheint die sechs-
seitige Tafel zu sein.»

Gyrolite seems to be again indicated by Giesecke in 1814,
when, in describing the minerals of Disko, he writes?):

«The Apophyllite also occurs in a radiated form similar
to stilbite, but with a more brilliant lustre, and presenting on
the surface a crystallisation similar to the cock’s-comb barytes.»

In this passage the relationship with apophyllite is clearly
recognized; but later writers confounded the mineral with me-
sole (thomsonite) and even with the radiated zeolites. Thus
Haidinger writing in 1827°) describes eight specimens of
‘‘Mesole” from Arran’s collection (now in the British Museum,
London), and remarks that "these varieties show a very great

1) GIESECKE, Mineralogiske Rejse i Grønland, Copenhagen, 1878, р. 245.
?) GIESECKE, On the minerals of Disko Island, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin.,
IX, 1816, p. 271.
3) Edinbourgh Journal of Science, УП, р. 19.
XXXIV. 7

resemblance to certain kinds of Apophyllite, so much so, that
Sir Charles Giesecke, who discovered them in the island of
Disco, in Greenland, was induced to consider them as a parti-
cular subspecies of it, the micaceous apophyllite”. The first
five specimens described in this paper by Hamincer are mesole
(or faröelite, i. e. lamellar radiated thomsonite) from Nolsö in
Ferée, while No. 6, ‘‘discovered by Sir Charles Giesecke at
Nia Kornak in the island of Disco, Greenland” !) had a specific
gravity of 2°382, and is said to have occurred in reniform
groups, the individuals being “similar to those of var. 4, but
larger’: it was most probably therefore mesole. But the two
last specimens described by Harrncer are, there can hardly be
any doubt, gyrolite, as was pointed out by M. Е. Heddle?).
They are thus characterized by Haidinger:

«7. The size of the plates is here between a quarter of
an inch and half an inch. They have a bright pearly lustre
on their cleavage planes, and the whole aggregate resembles
in no small degree the crystallized spermaceti. The colour of
this variety is white, slightly yellowish. It forms part of the
inside of a geode detached from one of the vesicular cavities
of basalt. It is from Karartut, near Godhavn, in the island
of Disco.

8. Large individuals aggregated and coarsely forming reni-
form shapes. The surface is dark yellowish-grey, the colour
on the cleavage planes almost straw-yellow; the whole ap-
parently decomposed. Cleavage is very easily obtained, and
the laminæ show some elasticity when we attempt to separate
them. This specimen is a native of Nia Kornak in the Ome-
naksfiord, like the preceding in the island of Disco.»

It is no doubt also gyrolite which is referred to by Lévy”)

1) More properly Niakornat. This locality is not on Disko but on the
peninsula Nugsuak, Umanak-Fjord.

?) The Mineralogy of Scotland, 2, 1901, p. 79.

3) Description d'une collection de minéraux formée par M. Henri Heuland
et appartenant à M. Ch. Hampden Turner, 1828, 2, pp. 272 and 274.

a year later, under the description ‘‘apophyllite globuliforme”,
with mesolite and apophyllite, ‘‘Waygat, ile de Disco, Groen-
land”; and apophyllite laminaire .... blanc et nacré, globuli-
forme radié; Niarkornak, Groenland”.

In the year 1851 the mineral species gyrolite was named
and described by Anpverson'); the locality was Storr in the
island of Skye, one of the Hebrides.

The occurrence of gyrolite in Greenland was for the first
time expressly stated by Grec and Lertsom?), who concerning
that mineral write: ‘‘specimens of it (arranged in Mr. Allan’s
collection as mesole by Haidinger) without doubt occur at
Karartut, near Godhavn in Disco Island, Greenland; also at
Niakomak, Omensnaksfiord, Disco”.

With greater certainty gyrolite was proved to be a Green-
land mineral by Heppte (see above) and by J. Currie”) who
points out some localities in Greenland, where Gresecke may
have found the mineral. Of these Niakornat has been named
above; from Tarajungitsok Gisecke!) mentions: ‘‘kugelichten
Glimmerzeolith in feinen, fast zerreiblichen Blättern”, and by
this description gyrolite without doubt must be meant, so much
the more as this mineral in reality has been collected by СтезЕскЕ
at this place (see later on). From Tupausarsuit (= Tua-
pagsuit) Gimsecxe®) mentions “der mehrmals berührte glim-
merige Zeolith — blätterig und in Kuben”; here it is also al-
most quite certain that he has meant gyrolite. Finally Currie
names the locality of Akiarut from which Giesecke®) mentions
massive apophyllite” and ‘‘pearl white radiated mesole”; of
these the former, in my opinion, may be apophyllite, the latter
thomsonite.

1) Phil. mag. I, p. 111.

*) Manual of the Mineralogy of Great Britain and Ireland. 1858, p. 217.

3) Min. Mag. 14, 1905, p. 95.

SEE een 329.

SKC Ъ. 254

5) A descriptive Catalogue of a new Collection of Minerals in the Museum
of the Royal Dublin Society. Dublin, 1832, pp. 54, 55.

When I wrote the ‘‘Mineralogia Groenlandica”, in 19051),
I had never seen gyrolite and of the above cited works of
Harwincer and Неорте | knew nothing; I thought then, that the
occurrence of gyrolite in Greenland could not be considered
as certain, so much the more as there did not exist any ana-
lysis of the Greenland mineral. Subsequently Mr. Currie made
me acquainted with the above cited works and drew my atten-
tion to Levy’s description. He also sent me specimens of gyro-
lite from different localities, by comparison with which I soon
found the mineral in specimens from several localities in the
Greenland collections of the Museum of Copenhagen. On a
closer examination of these I found that the mineral from
Niakornat showed such highly interesting crystallographical
and physical development, and in most respects differed so
much not only from every formerly known gyrolite but also
from almost all other zeolites, that it deserved а special
description.

In the following, then, I shall first describe the mineral
from Niakornat, and afterwards that from the other Green-
land localities.

In conclusion I have to pay my best thanks to Mr. J. Currie
for his kind assistance to me without which I should never have
come to make the following examinations.

I. Gyrolite from Niakornat.

Occurrence. About the occurrence we only know what
GieseckE, who alone of all has collected the mineral at this
place, states”). The rock is a basaltic breccia (tufa) in which
the size of the fragments varies from that of a pea to the
weight of several hundred pounds; thev consist of basalt or
“Wacke” or amygdaloid, the last of which contains quarz
chalcedony and the “faseriger Mesotyp’. Upon the specimens

1) Medd. om Grenl. 32.
2) ie: р. 245.

in the Museum of Copenhagen we can see that the cavities
which contain the gyrolite must have been of a considerable
size, at least 1—2 dm in diameter.

The minerals which accompany the gyrolite are mesolite
and apophyllite, and the succession of these is very distinetly
the following: mesolite, gyrolite, apophyllite. The mesolite is
developed in spherical radiated aggregations of a diameter of
с. I cm which cover the walls of the cavities and from which
free needles protrude into the gyrolite but only attain the length
of about I mm. The gyrolite forms a stratum on the inner
side of the mesolite and the thickness of that stratum varies
from 1 to at least 5 cm; from that some folia protrude into
the apophyllite, which mineral is only found in one specimen
and which consists of one very large individual (about 5 cm
in diameter) without distinct crystalline faces; it seems that
its form has been partly influenced through contact with other
individuals of the same mineral which no longer exist.

The gyrolite is, as is otherwise the case, crystallized in
radiated, foliated groups; the common size of the folia varies
from 0:5 to 2 cm, the arrangement of the folia is however not
so regular as commonly, for distinct spherical aggregates are
not to be found, and the folia are often seen to intersect each
other and in some places to form quite a complicated network.

Here and there freely developed folia are seen to protrude
into small cavities and these have given me the material for
crystallographical examination.

Crystalline form. The crystals have the habit of very
thin hexagonal tables, the edge of which is mostly, by altera-
tion as I think, quite uneven and without distinct faces; in
some cavities it is possible to find better developed crystals
with rather plane and shining marginal faces, which have al-
lowed the following measurements to be made.

What is so far known of the crystalline form of gyrolite
is very little. Giesecke describes the form as hexagonal tables;

Неррте |) obtained from the Treshinish Islands six-sided
plates with the plane angles с. 128° 50’ and 115°; I cannot
understand how he has got these angles, which harmonize so
little with the fact that the mineral is uniaxial. Heddle de-
scribes, too, one or two bewelling faces on the edges, which
he mentions as very brilliant and smooth; unfortunately he
has not measured the position of these faces.

For the gyrolite from Niakornat I have found the
following:

Crystalline form rhombohedral tetartohedral (rhombohedral
class of Grora); the tetartohedrism is only to be seen by the
etching figures.

Axis с —) 19360.

The following forms have been found: c {0001}, r {1011},

u {1012}, determined by the measurements:

Average Variatic Number of Calculated
value APES measurements value

rie = (1011): (0001) = 65° 54’ 64°19'-67°23' 5
и:с = (1012): (0001) = 48° 3’ 47°25'-48°42' 3 48° 11'
rir = (1011): (0111) = 75° 58' 1 Ton
As will be seen the values are divergent to a rather high
degree, so that they cannot be considered as very exact. This
arises from the fact that the faces are not well adapted for
measurements; the
faces of ce {0001} are
large and shining but

mostly curved in dif-

Fig. 1. Gyrolite, Niakornat.

ferent directions so
that they give a number of signals in the goniometer. The rhom-
bohedral faces are sometimes shining enough, but they are al-
ways very small and furthermore somewhat curved; the reflec-
tions, which they give, are of course mostly very indistinct.
There cannot, however, exist any doubt about the correctness

1) Min. Mag. 8, 1889, p. 272.

of the two determined rhombohedra, allthough the form {1012}
is in other cases one of the rarest of all.

The complete form of the crystals is given in figure 1.

On some crystals there can be seen small, very indistinet
negative rhombohedra but these give no reflections.

No twins were observed.

Etching figures are readily produced with the aid of cold
hydrofluorie acid or hot diluted hydrochloric acid, in both
cases the effect lasts at the most only a few seconds. The

Fig. 2. Gyrolite, Niakornat. The etching figures on the

upper and lower basis are direeted opposite to each other;

the former ones have the point of the triangle turned down-
wards. — The enlargment 1:45.

figures are of a sharp triangular form, most commonly with
concave edges as will be seen on figures 2 and 3. On the
first of these we see that the etching figures on the lower and
upper basis are directed opposite to each other. When etching
figures are made upon a crystal with rhombohedral faces we
see that the sides of the triangle produced by etching are not
quite parallel to the edges between с {0001} and и {1012} but

100

are turned about 10° from that direction, to the right or to
the left on the two opposite faces of c{0001}. This turning
is distinctly shown on Fig. 3 where the directions of the edges
(0001) : (1012) are clearly represented by the rays of the per-
cussion figure. From this
phenomenon it may be seen
that this gyrolite belongs
to a tetartohedral class,
either the trapezohedral or
the rhombohedral, and from
the above named fact that
the figures on the two basal
planes are orientated in
absolutely opposite direc-

tions one may conclude
Fig.3. Gyrolite, Niakornat. Etching figures; that the mineral belongs
the sides of the triangles are turned about 10°
from the directions of the rays of the per- to the latter of these
cussion figure. — The enlargment 1:120. BE EDEN
Physical properties. The cleavage along с{0001} is very
strong so that gyrolite in that respect takes a place between
gypsum and mica; the cleavage folia are almost perfectly ine-
lastic and break very easily into pieces of quite irregular form;
in that respect there is a small difference between the mineral
from Niakornat and other forms of gyrolite which are, as a
rule, somewhat flexible. A fine percussion figure can readily
be made with the apparatus described by К. J. V. Sreensrrup !)
and consists of a six-rayed star, a part of which is seen on
figure 3. The lustre of e {0001} is strong pearly, of the other
faces vitreous. The colour is on the fresh crystals grayish or
silvery white, on the somewhat altered crystals yellowish white.
The purest crystals are perfectly transparent, but mostly they
are somewhat dull and, seen under the microscope, traversed

by numerous stripes which are curved and pass in all directions

1) Geol. Foren. Fôrh., Stockholm, 10, 1888, p. 113.

101

quite irregularly; so far as can be seen because of their small-
ness, they consist of fluid inclusions. The specific gravity has
been determined by Thoulets solution; for the purest pieces it
is 2'578, while it decreases gradually with the increasing
quantity of the above named inclusions; for [one of the more
impure pieces it has been determined at 2°463.

Gyrolite is, as stated by Descroizeavx') optically negative.
| have succeeded in determining the indices of refraction by
the total reflectometer, using a very even face of с {0001}; the
boundary lines were quite sharp and distinct; I have found:

Е бо:
= — 11-5590.

For the analysis I have selected cleavage pieces of the
most perfect transparency; as the mineral is always overgrown
with wery small crystals of calcite I have washed it with dilute
acetic acid. The analysis was made by cand. polyt. Car. Curi-
STENSEN With the following result:

Quotients. Theor. I. Theor. IL.
SiO, 54-83 0-914 56:42 55-28
Al,O, 458 0:045 4°56
CaO 3115 0:556 3511 31-06
Na,O 174 0-028
H,O 814 0°452 8-47 9-10

Total 100°44.

Of the water 2°45 pCt. goes away by heating to 100°; по
trace of fluorine is found.

As will be seen the quantities of the different constituents
do not stand in any simple relation to each other. The com-
mon formula for gyrolite, 3 H,O, 2 CaO, 3 SiO,, cannot be
adopted here, as the quantity of water is but half so large as
required. What part the alumina plays is not easy to see; it
cannot, I think, belong to any foreign mineral e.g. feldspar as

ANR.) 13, 1867!

102

no trace of any such impurity is to be seen on a micro-
scopical examination of the analysed substance, possibly a
small amount of kaolin or bauxite could conceal itself amongst
the gyrolite, though I do not think it very probable; I have,
however calculated the theoretical value (see above No. II) for
a mixture of 11°55 pCt. kaolin and 88°45 pCt. gyrolite of the
composition 350.5, 2 CaO, 1/2 H,0. On the other side,
when the A/,O, is added to the CaO and Na,O, the ratio
between the bases and the silica will be a little greater than
2:3; I have, also, calculated the theoretical value (see No. I)
for the composition 3505, 2Ca0, 11/2 H,O; we see that
these values agree tolerably well with those found, and the
last named formula thus most probably represents the com-
position of the mineral.

As one third of the water goes away at 100° it must be
assumed to be water of crystallization and we thus have the
following formula for this gyrolite:

H, Ca, (StO3), + 4/2 H,O
with a small part of the Ca replaced by Na or Al.

Before the blowpipe the gyrolite from Niakornat exfoliates
and fuses rather easily (fusibility 3'/2) to a white enamel. The
same I have found to be the case with the mineral from all
other localities including the original from Storr so that the
statement commonly found in all handbooks that the mineral
fuses with difficulty is, according to my experience, not
quite exact.

The consideration of the relation between gyrolite and
other minerals | shall defer until | have mentioned the mineral
from other localities.

II. Gyrolite from other Greenland localities.

1. Iglorsuit on Ubekendt @ (Unknown Island),
district of Umanak. Here the gyrolite was collected by
К. J. V. Steenstrup and is found in cavities with. saponite

103

and apophyllite; the saponite is the first formed mineral but
is only found in some places as small spots on the walls
of the cavity; the gyrolite forms a stratum, whose thickness
varies from !/2 to 2 cm, and upon that stratum the apophyllite
is found as rather large (1—2 cm) cubelike crystals, which
quite fill up all the spaces between the gyrolite so that freely
developed crystals of that mineral are not to be found. The
gyrolite, itself, is as usual crystallized in foliated masses ar-
ranged rather irregularly; the surfaces of the cleavage folia are
rather strongly curved in all directions. I have not succeeded
in producing percussion or etching figures upon them; the
specific gravity of the purest material is 2°446.

2. Nusak, on the southside of the peninsula of Nug-
suak, the district of Ritenbenk. The specimens are col-
lected by Risk and the rock seems to be a breccia with numerous
cavities in which are found: (1) a radiated columnar mineral pro-
bably scolecite in the form of globular masses of a diameter up
to 2 cm, (2) gyrolite forming a stratum of 1 to 3 cm thickness
and (3) small grains of quartz of quite irregular form implanted
upon the gyrolite and probably younger than this mineral; the
gyrolite is crystallized in radiating foliated aggregations and it
is possible to cleave out quite regular and even folia of a
diameter up to I cm; crystalline faces are not found. Percus-
sion figures cannot be made and the etching figures, produced
by hydrofluoric acid, are quite marked but of a rounded, almost
circular, form. The specific gravity is 2'412.

3. Niakornarsuk, near the foregoing place. From here
we have a small specimen collected by Sreensrrur with a single
cavity (6 cm) the walls of which are covered with а thin
(1—2 mm) stratum of thomsonite arranged in globular masses
as is commonly the case; upon that mineral saponite or gyrolite
is found, where they are found together the gyrolite is the
younger of the two. Upon all the three other minerals are
implanted flat crystals of apophyllite (see the figure 101 in

104

Mineralogia Groenlandica) which, however, do not cover them
altogether. The gyrolite has the ordinary shape of small
(1—3 mm) radiating tables which are partly freely protruding
in the cavity; the cleavage folia which can be formed are very
uneven and small and I have not tried to produce percussion
or etching figures; on a microscopical examination it will be
seen that their interior is very impure. Under the circum-
stances the specific gravity can have no very exact value; for
one of the purest pieces I have found 2'383.

4. Iganek, on the northside of Disco, distriet of Ri-
tenbenk. Here Sreexsrru has found some small cavities (8
to 10 cm in diameter) the walls of which are covered with a
thin (c. 1 mm) layer of thomsonite, on which is a quite un-
interrupted layer (3 mm) of gyrolite; this mineral is in it turn,
partly covered with cubelike crystals of apophylite; in a single
place, too, there are found small botryoideal masses with ex-
ceedingly small crystals of calcite. A part of the gyrolite freely
protrudes in the cavities as small crystal tables which are so
much altered that they have no distinct crystalline faces. The
cleavage folia of the gyrolite are rather irregular and curved
and it is not possible to produce percussion and etching figures
upon them. The specific gravity of the purest variety is 2'387.
5. The distriet of Ritenbenk without more exact indica-
tion of the locality (collected by Ring). The gyrolite is in cavities
of a diameter up to 5 cm, without surrounding rock. Ощег-
most in the cavities there is mostly a thin layer of saponite
whereafter follows another thin layer (с. 1 mm) of a mineral
which has much resemblance to gyrolite; as it is, however
optically biaxial, it is more probably thomsonite. Next follows
a layer (c. 5 mm) of a fine-grained or somewhat fibrous snow-
white substance which I cannot more exactly determine, and
thereafter a layer, of almost the same thickness, of gyrolite;
later formed zeolites are not found here but the gyrolite is
covered with some very small calcite crystals without distinct

105

form. The gyrolite is partly protruding in the innermost cavity
as small crystal tables without determinable faces. The cleavage
folia of the gyrolite are rather even and etching figures can
be formed upon them of a quite rounded shape; the substance
is rather impure and the specific gravity is 2'383.

6. Ivnarsuit (Skarvefjeld) and Karartut on the south
side of Disco, district of Godhavn. Here have at very different
times, been collected some specimens of the mineral, which
show so much resemblance to each other that they must be
considered as having come from the same place, the two loca-
lities being, in fact, very close together. The gyrolite is found
in cavities in dolerite, the diameter of the cavities is up to
1 dm. The first formed mineral is natrolite, formed as very
regular radiating masses from which fine needles protrude
through the other minerals. Upon the natrolite the gyrolite
is formed, covering directly the walls of the cavities where
the natrolite is wanting. Innermost there are large (2—3 cm)
crystals of apophyllite implanted on the two first formed mi-
nerals. The gyrolite has the form of fine spherical masses
(с. 1 cm in diameter) sometimes traversed by natrolite needles
but mostly very pure; crystalline faces are found on the out-
side but they are too small to be determined. The cleavage
folia are somewhat curved and it is not possible to produce
regular percussion figures проп! Фет; etching figures of a quite
circular form can be produced with hydrofluoric acid. The
specific gravity, which, owing to the purity of the mineral, can
be determined very exactly, is 2°418. Optically this gyrolite
is sometimes feebly biaxial, the axial angle, 2 E, going up
tonc. 10°.

7. Karusuit in Disco-Fjord, district of Godhavn. The
gyrolite from here, collected by Rısk, is one of the finest and
best developed examples of the mineral. The first formed mi-
neral is in some places radiating fibrous masses, perhaps me-
solite, in other places a rather hard, white, quite homogeneous,

106

almost opal-like substance; in general the gyrolite itself covers
the walls of the cavities. The inner space of the cavities is
sometimes filled up by apophyllite in large-grained masses,
sometimes the gyrolite is covered by a very thin (с. 0:1 mm.)
layer of an opaque yellow substance, and when this is removed
crystalline faces can be seen. The gyrolite itself has the com-
mon structure of foliated masses, the single folia reaching the
diameter of I cm, it seems to be very pure and has a fine
pearly lustre. The terminal faces are very small and curved;
in the goniometer they can however be determined as the
fundamental rhombohedron > {1011}. The faces are very im-
perfectly developed; the base is bright and shining but highly
curved so that it gives no single signal in the goniometer; the
faces of r {1011} are more even but very small and their re-
flexions of course very weak; for the angles I have got the

following values:

Average ео Number of Calculated
value arlations measurements value

r:c = (1011):(0001) = 65° 55’ 64°06’-67°08 4 65° 57’

The average value and the variations agree very well with
those of the mineral from Niakornat; no trace of the rhom-
bohedron u {1012} is found. The physical properties are the
same as from the foregoing locality, the gyrolite here being
also, in many cases, optically biaxial. The specific gravity
is 2417.

8. Another gyrolite from Disco-Fjord without more spe-
cific locality shows a very great similarity to the preceding and
may, perhaps, originate from the same place.

III. General remarks.

As will be seen from the foregoing most of the Greenland
gyrolites show, in almost all respects, very small variations,
and the same is according to what I have seen in the literature
and for a great part confirmed by my own observations, the
case with the gyrolite from all other countries. The only ex-

107

ception is the mineral from Niakornat, wich possesses so
many particular properties that it may, perhaps, be somewhat
doubtful if it in reality belongs to gyrolite. In the following
remarks | shall point out the resemblances and the differences
between the gyrolite from Niakornat and other gyrolites.

The occurrence is very uniform and characteristic. The
mineral is always found in cavities in basalt or basaltic tufa;
the first formed minerals associated with it in these cavities is
for the Greenland localities one of the zeolites natrolite, meso-
lite, scolecite or thomsonite and in some cases saponite alone
or together with one of the named zeolites; the last formed
mineral ist mostly apophyllite and in a few cases calcite
or quarz.

For the Scottish gyrolites Currie has given me the following
scheme where is collected all what is known about the mineral
associations 4):

1. Faroelite-Scolecite-Gyrolite (Treshnish Islands).

2. Mesolite-Gyrolite ( — un)

3. Mesolite-Gyrolite-Apophyllite ( — — ).

4. Faroelite-Gyrolite ( = NME

5. Mesolite-Gyrolite-Apophyllite (Rudha па h’Airde Glaise,
Portree, Skye).

6. Mesolite-Gyrolite ( — — — |

7. Faroelite-Gyrolite ( — — — №

5. Gyrolite-Apophyllite (Quiraing, Storr, Skye).

9. Faroelite-Gyrolite ( — — — ).

10. Faroelite-Mesolite-Gyrolite ( — — — ).

11. Scoleeite (?)-Gyrolite (Rudha nan Clach, Skye).

12. Mesolite (?)-Gyrolite (Sanday, Canna).

13. Mesolite (?)-Analcime-Gyrolite (Sgeir Dearg, Mull).

14. Gyrolite-Xonotlite (Gribun, Mull).

1) 1—4, Heppze: Min. Mag. 8, р. 130; 5—6, HeppLe: Trans. Geol. Soc.
Edinb. 7, 1899, р. 331; 7—13, CURRIE (private information); 14, HEDDLE:
Min. Mag. 5, 1882, p. 4

108

From other places in the world very little is recorded
about gyrolite; at Sundelaget in the F&röes, it is found’)
with apophyllite superimposed and the same is the case with
the gyrolite from New Almaden, California’), while it in
Nova Scotia?) is stated to be younger than the apophyllite.

As a rule, however, we find that the succession of minerals
is the following.

1. One of the zeolites: natrolite, mesolite, scolecite or thomsonite.
2. Gyrolite.
3. Apophyllite.

This association seems very difficult, if not impossible, to
explain; it is highly surprising that the zeolites of the group 1
which contain the most alumina of all zeolites are found to-
gether with the gyrolite and the apophyllite which contain little
or no alumina while all the other zeolites very rarely occur
with them, further, the order of formation is very obvious
when we take into consideration the amount of lime in the
three groups; it is for the first group O—14 pCt., for the
gyrolite 30—33 and for the apophyllite c. 25 pCt. For the
sake of comparison I give the composition of the three groups
in the following scheme:

1. 2» 3.
SiO, 36—49 51—55 51—53
AIO. 25—52 [5 01
CaO 0—14 30—33 24—96
Nas ON 016 (5 0—1
ОО 0—5 4—6
НО ROERE 8—15 16° 17
F 0 0—1 02

The only constituents wich seem to be able to produce
that succession are the alumina wich is decreasing and the

1) CURRIE: 1. с. p. 94.
?) CLARKE: Am. Journ. Sci. 38, 1898, р 128.
3) How.: Am. Journ. Sci. 32, 1861, p. 13.

109

potash and fluorine which are increasing as we go from the
first to the last formed minerals.

The crystalline form is only known for the gyrolite from
Niakornat and Karusuit; it is in both cases the same, with
the one exception that the crystals from Niakornat sometimes
have the rhombohedron u {1012} which is entirely wanting on
the crystals from the other locality. The form of the aggre-
gations and the common habit of the mineral is also almost
the same in all known gyrolites.

On the other side there are in the following respects very
marked differences between the gyrolite from Niakornat and
that from other localities: i

1. The etching and percussion figures can be made very
easily upon the gyrolite from Niakornat while both are very
imperfect on all other gyrolites or are not formed at all.

2. The specific gravity is for the pure gyrolite from Nia-
kornat 2'578; in other gyrolites it varies from 2°383 to 2'446.

3. The composition. As I have no analyses of the Green-
land gyrolites with the exception of that from Niakornat I
shall for a comparison use the older analyses of the mineral
from Skye"), Nova Scotia”), New Almaden?), Fort Point‘)
in California and Brazil’).

Analyses of gyrolite:

Niakornat Skye N. Scotia N. Almaden Fort Point Brazil
SiO, 54°83 50°70 51°90 52°54 53:47 52:77

41,0, 458 1-48 1-27 0-71 0-22 0.73
CaO 31:15 33°24 29°95 29:97 32-00 33:04
MO — 0:18 0:08 — = —

и О — 1:60 1:56 = 0-41
Na,O 1-74 1e Ba 0:27 1:25 0:35
О 94 418 0015 05 18606 5182 9258
Е — = — 0-65 = =

1) ANDERSEN: Phil. Mag. 1, 1851, p. 111.

2) How: 1. с.

3) CLARKE: |. ©.

1) SCHALLER: Bull. U. $. Geol. Surv. 262, 1905, р. 124.
5) Hussak: Centralbl. f. Min. 1906, р. 330.

XXXIV. 8

110

As will be seen the greatest difference consists in the
amount of water which is much smaller in the gyrolite from
Niakornat than in the others; accordingly the amount of the
other constituents must, in general, be somewhat larger; an-
other difference, which however cannot be considered as very
essential, is that comparatively much of the CaO is replaced
Бу Al,O, and Na,O. The formule of the minerals can, quite
exactly, be expressed as follows: I
Gyrolite from Niakornat 3 S10,, 2 CaO, 14/2 H,0,
Gyrolite from Skye, N. Scotia, N. Almaden

3 Si0,, 2 CaO, 21/2—3 H,01,
Gyrolite from Brazil and Fort Point
3010, SAC AO KDE ASE 0

As long as we have not found transitions between the
different forms it is not possible exactly to decide if they are
in reality the same mineral; I find it very probable that the
gyrolite from Niakornat represents the fresh state of the
mineral and that all the other gyrolites are altered by assorption
of water, by that alteration the specific gravity must, of course,
be lowered; the crystalline structure has been so much de-
formed that the etching and percussion figures cannot be made
in the altered mineral, while the optical properties seem to
be almost the same in both varieties, all forms of gyrolite
being optically negative and either perfectly uniaxial or occa-
sionally weakly biaxial. It is true that no similar alteration in
other minerals seems to be known; but the great similarity
between the different varieties of gyrolite in respect of occur-
rence and erystalline form seems to show that they belong to
the same mineral species.

1) In the case of the mineral from Skye, ANDERSEN observed already in
1857 that onethird of the water goes off at 100°. The formula there-
fore for the Skye mineral — and presumably for other gyrolites with
the same proportion of H,O — should empirically be written H,Ca,
Si,0,, + H,O.

111

Relations to zeophyllite!) and other minerals.

The only mineral to which gyrolite is somewhat closely
related is, as far as I can see, the zeophyllite from Grosz-
Priesen?) and Alter Berg) in Bohemia. I shall in the
following give a short account of the properties of that mineral,
as far as they can contribute to clear up the relation between
it and gyrolite.

The succession of minerals is very different in the two
zeophyllite localities; at Grosz-Priesen it overlies natrolite
and at Alter Berg it overlies calcite or hyalite and apophyllite
and is overlaid by hyalite; we thus see, that the occurrence of
zeophyllite is not quite similar to that of gyrolite, but as the
last named mineral varies somewhat in that respect it is not
possible to regard that fact as conclusive.

The crystalline form is by Perxax described as rhombo-
hedral with the base, a prism and a rhombohedron forming
an angle of almost 78° with the base; Cornu has not more
closely examined the mineral in that respect, upon a specimen
from Alter Berg in the Museum of Copenhagen I have,
however, found quite the same form. As the base is very
badly developed I have measured the angle between the prism
(of second order) and the rhombohedron and determined it to
31° 45’ as a mean of 6 values varying from), 31° 15” 10 32° 05°
‘from this the angle between the rhombohedron and the base
is calculated to be 79° 05’, and if we assume that the rhom-
bohedron is s{0221} we get the axial ratio for the zeophyllite :

C= 22451
while for the gyrolite:
с = 1°9360.
As the measurement of the angles are for neither of the

1) This relation is mentioned by Cornu: Centralbl. f. Min. 1906, p. 80.
2) PELIKAN: Sitzb. 4. К. Akad. 4. Wiss. Wien, 111, 1902, р. 336.
3) Cornu: Tschermaks Min. und Petr. Mitt. 24, 1905, p. 127.

112

minerals very exact they can perhaps be considered as iso-
morphous.

The common combination of the zeophyllite, viz c {0001},
a {1120} and s{0221} is represented on figure 4.

The etching figures
ue a are described by РЕ-
[5] le] LIKAN and show that
the zeophyllite is te-
tartohedral; I think it
most probable that it belongs to the same class as gyrolite,

Fig. 4 Zeophyllite, Alter Berg, Bohemia.

viz. the rhombohedral.

The aggregations, the cleavage and the common habit of
the two minerals are quite similar; the optical properties are
almost the same too, the zeophyllite being negative but exhi-
biting more optical anomalies than the gyrolite; the index of
refraction is for the zeophyllite somewhat smaller the w being
determined by Cornu at 1°545.

The specific gravity is for the pure zeophyllite 2°748—
2°765 while it for the gyrolite from - Niakornat is 2°578.

The composition is given by Perikan for the zeophyllite:

DO баре
for the gyrolite from Niakornat it is:
SiO SACHE,
so that we find in that respect a great difference between the:
two minerals.

Although there are many similarities between the zeo-
phyllite and the gyrolite they must be considered, as two well
defined minerals which are, most probably, isomorphous and
form a very interesting group of the calcium zeolites; un-
fortunately these are, with the exception of apophyllite, very
imperfectly known and consequently it is difficult if not quite
impossible to point out the relations between them. Some of
them come very near to gyrolite in composition and are, per-
haps, only a very fine grained form of that mineral. The most

113

interesting of these minerals seems to be the centrallassite !)
which in physical properties viz. laminar structure and strong
pearly lustre, seems to be identical with the gyrolite and in
respect to specific gravity (= 2°45—2°46) and chemical com-
position directly to form a transition between the two forms
of gyrolite. Most of the analyses, to the sure, contain more
SiO, than the gyrotite, but one of them has only 5472 р. ct.
Si0, and perhaps the other may be impure from some free
silica as is assumed to be the case with the variety of cen-
trallassite named cyanolite; in other respects (47,0, 1—2 р. ct.
and H,O с. 11°5 р. ct.) the mineral will be seen to take a
position between the gyrolite from Niakornat and the other
gyrolites.

Another mineral which is very nearly related to gyrolite is
tobermorite*); in physical respects it is so fine grained an
aggregate that cleavage etc. cannot be observed; the specific
gravity is 2'423. The analyses show that the amount of 50,
(46°51—46°62 р. сё.) is smaller than in gyrolite, but in respect
to CaO, Al,O, and H,O it closely resembles centrallassite.

Okenite does not stand very far from gyrolite in com-
position, but here the physical properties show that the two
minerals cannot be very nearly related to each other.

The rest of the calcium zeolites, viz. the chalcomorphite,
the plombierite, the louisite and the zonotlite, differ in com-
position very much from gyrolite; chalcomorphite*) is found as
very small hexagonal crystals with the axis с = 1°9091 (it is
almost the same as in gyrolite); as the mineral is, however,
holohedric and the cleavage parallel to the base is only de-
scribed as ‘distinct” it is most probable that the similarity
of the axial ratios must be considered as quite accidental.

1) How: Ed. п. phil. Journ. 10, 1859, р. 84 and Phil. Mag. 1, 1876, р. 128.
*) HEDDLE: Min. Mag. 4, 1890, р. 119.
3) С. у. Ravn: Pogg. Ann. 1873: Erg.-Bd. 6, р. 376.

H
H

114

Appendix.

After the above paper was written I received from Cornu)
a very interesting treatise upon gyrolite and related minerals.
According to this the mineral from Niakornat is a new
mineral species and it is named reyerite and besides the dif-
ferences between it and gyrolite, which I had already found,
there is also stated to be a small difference in respect to the
index of refraction, the w of the gyrolite being determined at
1-54—1°55 while for the reyerite it is 1°5645. The reyerite is,
stated to originate from Disco as well as from Niakornat;
it may, however, be the same locality as Niakornat was
formerly described as a locality upon Disco, as we have seen
above. As the paper by Cornu is stated to be a preliminary
one a more exact description of the specimens will, perhaps,
clear up this point.

As Greenland localities for gyrolite there are named:

1. Korosoak (= Kororsuak near Godhavn): from
that place I have found no gyrolite; Cornu describes three
different varieties all occurring together with apophyllite partly
older and partly younger than that mineral.

2. Karatut near Godhavn (= Karartut, see above
p. 105) here the gyrolite is described as implanted upon apo-
phyllite, while, on the specimen examined by me it is distinctly
older than that mineral; the form described as small spheres,
also shows that the specimens are quite different from each other.

3. Niakornak. From that locality I have found no
gyrolite besides the above named which by Cornu has been
termed reyerite.

1) Tschermaks min. u. рег. Mitth. 25, 1907, Heft 6.

Geologiske og antikvariske Iagttagelser
1 Julianehaab Distrikt.

K. J. V. Steenstrup.

1909;

Paa forskellige Rejser, i Aarene 1874, 76, 77, 88 og 99,
har jeg haft Lejlighed til at undersøge Fjordene Tunugdliarfik,
Kangerdluarsuk og Igaliko ved Julianehaab. Hensigten med
disse Rejser var dels en Indsamling af de sjeldne Mineralier,
der der forekomme, dels at skaffe en almindelig Oversigt over
de geologiske Forhold. Fra Rejsen i 1876 foreligger en til
Professor Johnstrup indgiven forelebig Beretning, der blev
trykt uden hans og mit Viden, da den, som Bilag var indsendt
til Rigsdagen!); og i 2det Hefte af «Meddelelser om Gronland»
findes et geologisk Kort over denne Egn med Forklaring. |
1877 besogte jeg under et kortere Ophold igen denne Egn;
og, da alle Bjergartsproverne og den storste, om end ikke just
den vesentligste Del af de i Aarene 1876 og 77 indsamlede
Mineraler vare gaaede til Grunde ved Christianborgs Brand i
1884, besluttedes det i 1888 at jeg igen skulde rejse derop for
at forsøge paa at erstatte det tabte. Paa den Tid var Spergs-
maalet om Gasglodelyset sterkt fremme og Opmerksomheden
derved henvendt paa Eudialyten paa Grund af dens Indhold af
Zirkonsyre. Kryolith-Mine- og Handels-Selskabet sogte saa
Indenrigsministeriet om Tilladelse til at lade indsamle og bryde
et storre Parti Eudialyt for dermed at anstille Forsog. Da jeg
den Gang, paa Grund af mine tidligere Undersogelser, vel om-
trent var den eneste der vidste nogen Besked om den Maade,
hvorpaa Eudialyten forekom, henvendte Kryolithselskabet sig til

1) Tillæg В Ш Rigsdagstidenden for 1877 —78.

118

Professor Johnstrup, der dengang var Formand i Kommis-
sionen for Grønlands geologiske Undersøgelse, og bad om jeg
maatte lede den Expedition det agtede at udsende. — Dette gik
han med Glæde ind paa, da Kommissionens Opgave jo ikke
alene var videnskabelig at undersoge Gronland men ogsaa at
fremdrage de Naturprodukter, der kunne have teknisk Betyd-
ning, og derved mulig blive en Indtegtskilde for Landet, som
Kryolithen. — Vel vidste jeg nok hvor Eudialyten skulde soges,
men jeg havde dog ingen Anelse om i hvor stor en Mengde,
selv en overfladisk og loselig Indsamling kunde skaffe tilveje,
hvorfor jeg, da Selskabet spurgte mig om hvormeget jeg troede
en halv Snes Arbejdere i en halv Snes Dage kunde indsamle,
ikke turde love mere end nogle faa Tusinde Kilo. Resultatet
var imidlertid, at denne første Indsamling indbragte c. 15000
Kilo, hvoraf omtrent Halvdelen kunde anses for ren Eudialyt.
Uagtet det hed sig, at Eudialyten var usælgelig og at Sel-
skabet laa inde med hele Lageret, saaledes fortalte Professor
Thomsen mig, at de vel havde solgt et Parti, men faaet det
tilbage, da vedkommende Fabrik ikke vilde anerkende at det
indeholdt den Zirkonsyremængde der var forudsat; — saa be-
sluttede Kryolithselskabet dog igen i 1899, atter efter indhentet
Tilladelse, at lade foretage en lignende men noget større Ind-
samling af Eudialyt, og henvendte sig saa igen til mig om at
lede Expeditionen. Uagtet jeg havde besluttet ikke oftere at
rejse til Grønland, da jeg paa min sidste Rejse i 1898 til Nord-
Grønland havde følt at jeg ikke længere kunde taale de idelige
Bjergbestigninger der vare forbundne dermed, saa kunde jeg
dog ikke modstaa Professor Jul. Thomsens elskværdige Op-
fordring, hvorved jeg jo ogsaa endnu en Gang vilde faa Lej-
lighed til at færdes i denne, saavel i geologisk som i antikvarisk
Retning lige interessante Egn. — Resultatet var, at der denne
Gang hjemførtes с. 44000 Kilo uren Eudialyt. Dette Minerals
Forekomst vil senere i denne Beretning blive omtalt, hvorimod
selve den Maade, hvorpaa Eudialyten efter min Anvisning ind-

119

samledes og bredes ikke her omtales paa Grund af et ud-
trykkeligt udtalt Onske af Kryolithselskabets nuverende ledende
Direktor Dr. phil. H. Topsoe.

For Oversigtens Skyld ere mine lagttagelser fra de for-
skellige Rejser samlede i folgende 3 Afsnit:

1) De geologiske, særlig den gamle rede Sandsten. 2)
Mineralogiske lagttagelser og Indsamlinger, og 3) Antikvariske

lagttagelser.

1. Den rede Sandsten.

Allerede Hans Egede blev paa sin Rejse i 1723 for at
finde Osterbygden, af Grønlænderne gjort opmærksom paa, at
der inde i Fjorden Tunugdliarfik fandtes «en slags brunrød
Farve, desligeste rede Stene med hvide Spætter ид» 1); først
Peder Olsen Walloe paa sin Rejse til Ostkysten i 1751,
stiftede nærmere Bekendtskab med den røde Sandsten, da han
den 12te September s. A. kom Ш Sidlisit: «her blev mig anvist
2 Bjerge ner hos hinanden, som havde god Forraad af bruun-
red Farve; men i Udkanten af den ene var en Vinkel som be-
stod af kolorede Stene, годе med hvide Pletter og derfor kunde
lade sig udklove i store og smaa Fliser, saa meget man lystede».
Hertil fojer Otto Fabricius: Jeg besidder en Ргоуе af disse
Stene som til Nod kunne bruges som Hvedsestene, og deraf
har vel Stedet sit Navn: Sidlisit, betyder paa gronlandsk Hvesse-
sten”). Ogsaa Arctander, paa sin Rejse i 1777 besagte
efter Gronlendernes Anvisning dette Sted, ligesom han ogsaa
efter deres Anvisning besogte Stedet ved Ipiutak, hvor de mange
Kvartskrystaller findes >).

Giesecke omtaler paa sine Rejser i 1806 og 1809 flere
Steder, hvor den røde Sandsten forekommer i denne Egn, og

1) Omst. og udførl. Relation ang. den grønl. Mission. Kbhvn. 1738. S.115.

?) Ugebladet Samleren. 1. 1787. $. 172.

3) Ugebladet Samleren VI 1793. $. 1125; cfr. M. о. С. II. $. 37 og XXXII.
S. 72 og Tillæg B til Rigsdagstidende for 1877—78. S. 7.

120

fremhæver navnlig den inderlige Forbindelse der er mellem
Sandstenen og de den gennemkrydsende Gangmasser, der, f. Ex.
ved Igaliko, have et fuldstændigt lavalignende Udseende. Dog
gaar han vel vidt, naar han tilfojer: die Oberfläche des Gebirges
selbst hat durchaus ein verbranntes Aussehen!). I sin Af-
handling: «Greenland» i Brewsters «The Edinburgh Ency-
clopædie» kalder han Sandstenen Old red Sandstone?).

Dr. C. Pingel besagte i 1828 Igaliko og har i Vidensk.
Selsk. Skrifter”) givet en Beskrivelse af Sandstenen og de den
gennembrydende Porphyrganges Optræden. Paa Grund af dette
Forhold mellem den rode Sandsten og Porphyrgangene henforer
han den forste til Tyskernes: Rothes Todtes Liegende, altsaa
til den Permiske Formation. Da hans Undersegelser kun strakte
sig til Igalikos allernermeste Omegn og kun til en ringe Hojde
over Vandfladen, c. 200 m. have hans Inddelinger af Sandsten-
lagene og Porphyrgangene ikke den almindelige Betydning, som
man efter hans Fremstilling skulde tro.

Paa Holms og mit Kort fra 18767) har jeg angivet den
rede Sandstens Grense, saavidt jeg efter dette ene Aars Under-
sogelser kunde overse Forholdene, og mine senere Undersogelser
have ikke i nogen vesentlig Grad forandret noget deri, saa jeg
har ikke anset det for nødvendigt at tegne et nyt Kort; og saa-
lenge ikke et mere detailleret Kort foreligger, tror jeg heller
ikke at det behoves. Grenserne mod Fjordene ere jo angivne
med den Nojagtighed, hvormed disse ere aflagte og Grænserne
paa Land er det umuligt at angive med nogen Nojagtighed,
saalenge Terrainforholdene der kun ere saa lost skitserede, som
det for Øjeblikket er Tilfældet.

Som det ses af Kortet er det i det Indre af Halveen,

1) Dagbog 18|з 1806.

*) Optrykt af Johnstrup sammen med Gieseckes Dagbog S. 343.

3) Om den af Porphyrgange gennembrudte rede Sandsten i det sydlige
Grønland i X. Del {$. 299—317). (Naturv. math. Skrifter.)

Mz о. С. Ш. Tavel-

121

mellem Sermilik og Tunugdliarfik, at den rode Sandsten har
sin største Udbredelse, medens den de andre Steder hvor den
forekommer, som ved Igaliko og i Bunden af Kangerdluarsuk
kun optreder som mindre Partier, der paa Grund af serlig
Fasthed eller paa Grund af Terrainforholdene ere blevne delvist
skaanede for Iserosionen. Alle Isfurerne paa Klipperne vise
hen til, at Isbevegelsen er kommen fra Indlandet, fra NO., og
Isfurerne paa Toppen af Nunasarnausak (755 M.) og paa Toppen
af Nulupsaxak (812 m.) vise, at Isens Megtighed maa have været
saa stor, at selv saadanne Fjeldtoppe ikke have formaaet at
paavirke Isstrommens Retning; den er gaaet hen over dem,
som om det var uvesentlige Hindringer. I 1877 besteg da-
verende Lojtnant J. A. D. Jensen og jeg en af Ilimausaks
hojeste Toppe (1376 m.), hvor der dog, vistnok paa Grund af
Bjergartens sprengte Beskaffenhed, ingen Isfurer saas, men
derimod fandtes der indtil en Højde af с. 1200 m., en Mængde
afrundede Sten af forskellige Bjergarter. Selve Торреп er
Diabas 1.

Det maa altsaa have været en mægtig Isstrom, der i sin
Tid har gaaet hen over Narssak og Julianehaabs Halvoerne;
hvor kun enkelte Fjeldtoppe som Ilimausaks og Redekammens’”)
ragende op derover. Det er derfor naturligt, at den rede Stand-
sten, med de underordnede Lag af Diabas, flere Steder ere
nesten fuldstendig borteroderede, som i Lavningerne mellem
Sermilik og Tunugdliarfik og paa Overberestedet ved Igaliko.
Gaar man saaledes fra Kagsiarsuk over til Tassiusak i Sermilik,

1) Som et Bidrag til Kendskabet til den varme S@.-Vind, Fohnen, der saa
ofte omtales i Gronland, kan anfores, at det blæste en stormende varm
$0. ved Udstedet Narssak, den Dag, den 18. September, vi besteg den
ovennævnte Fjeldtop paa Ilimausak. Kl 8 Fm. var det ved Udstedet
16°,0 C., medens det paa Toppen af Fjeldet, Kl. 3 Em., var 10°,5 C.;
men en kold Vind med Snebyger gjorde Opholdet der meget ubehageligt.
— Ved Udstedet var det trykkende varmt hele Dagen. Barometret steg.
her i Dagens Lob fra 767,0 m til 767,4 m, si

2) Tilleg В til Rigsdagstidenden for, 1877—78. S. 9. VÆ №

/<G\CAZ

122

stoder man, i det her forholdsvis stærkt bevoxede Terrain, snart
paa Sandsten, snart paa Diabas og snart paa Granit, uden at
det er muligt at angive Grenserne mellem dem. Er det saa-
ledes kun muligt meget omtrentlig at kunne angive Grænserne
for den røde Sandsten, saa er det endnu vanskeligere at angive
dens oprindelige Megtighed for Isdenudationen. Vel kan man
vistnok sige, at man ingen Steder faar Indtrykket af, at den
gaar synderligt ned under Vandfladen, saa man maa antage, at
den er synlig i hele sin nuværende Megtighed; men paa den
anden Side faar man et ligesaa bestemt Indtryk af, at der maa,
vere eroderet saa meget bort af de overste Lag, at det er
umuligt at danne sig et Begreb om hvor stor Megtigheden har
været for Isen begyndte sin Erosion. Der findes jo heller ikke
Spor af, at Sandstenen har veret overlejret med yngre Dan-
nelser, saa heller ikke herfra kan der hentes Bidrag til For-
staaelsen af hvorledes denne Sandstensformations overste Lag
have veret beskafne.

Det hojeste Punkt jeg har maalt, hvor Sandstenen, eller
Kvarsiten, som den her nermest maa kaldes, er blottet, er i
Partiet indenfor Musartüt, hvor den naar op til en Højde af с.
800 m.; og da Graniten træder frem ved Kysten ner Vand-
linien, kan man altsaa sige at Formationen her er synlig i hele
sin nuverende Megtighed. Lejringen er sjelden ganske hori-
zontal, der er som oftest et Fald paa 5—10° og da særlig i
sydvestlig Retning; men deraf at ville udlede en Korrektion til
den ovenfor angivne Hojde, vil ingen Betydning have. Et andet
Forhold, der er af langt storre Betydning for Bedommelsen af
Sandstenens Megtighed, ere de mere eller mindre mægtige
Diabaslag der altid optræde mellem Sandstenlagene. Kornerups
Tegninger paa Tavle И i Hefte Il af M. о. G. kunne give et
Begreb om det Indtryk, man faar af disse Bjergarters indbyrdes
Forhold paa et Par af de mest karakteristiske Steder: Nuna-
sarnausak i Kangerdluarsuk og Nordkysten af Tunugdliarfik fra
Nunasarnak til Sidlisit. Ogsaa.Tavle VII, i dette Hefte, der

123

viser Nunasarnak set fra Odden ved Ipintak, kan tjene til at
anskueliggore dette Forhold. At udpege hvilke af de paa dette
Billede synlige Lag der ere Diabas eller Sandsten, er ikke mu-
ligt, da et nærmere Eftersyn paa selve Stedet viser, at det snart
er Sandstenen, snart Diabasen, der alt efter Strukturen danne
de stejlt affaldende Lag.

Sandstenens direkte Paalejring paa Graniten ses enkelte
Steder, som i Nunasarnausak, hvor Granitens overste Del da ег
opløst til en Arkose. Nederste Billede paa Tavle ХИ viser
Graniten paa en lille Odde mellem Sidlisit og Nugarsuk, altsaa
paa Grænsen mod Sandstenen, hvor Graniten er oplest til Grus;
men om dette Forhold skyldes det Tilfælde at man her, efter
Sandstenens Bortfjernelse, har den gamle forvittrede Overflade,
eller det skyldes Bjergartens Beskaffenhed saa den paa dette
Sted let henfalder til Grus, kunde jeg ikke se. Graniten her
og i Omegnen er i Reglen graafarvet af Feldspathen. Denne
forvittrer, kaoliniserer paa Overfladen, saa f. Ex. isskurede Fla-
der faa et hvidt Udseende, hvorfor saadanne Nes paa gron-
landsk kaldes kakortok; f. Ex. Hvide Nes ved Julianehaab.

Dr. С. Pingel skelnede i sin Tid mellem forskellige Sand-
stenlag ved Igaliko; men i det store og hele har det ikke veret
mig muligt at paavise vesentlige Forskelligheder mellem de Lag,
der dér ligge umiddelbart paa Graniten og de Lag, der ligge
everst, hvor Sandstenen, inklusive Diabaslagene naa en Meg-
tighed af c. 800 m.

Som Navnet udsiger, er Sandstenen i Reglen red, rodbrun
eller gulrod til graa; men mange Steder er den ogsaa hvid,
gran, violet eller svag rosared, og visse Lag ere fuldstændig
klare som Glas, saa de enkelte Sandkorn neppe eller endog
slet ikke kunne skelnes. Andre Steder ere hele Kvarsitlag kul-
sorte, og atter andre Steder er Sandstenen flammet af gronne,
rede, hvide og violette Striber; ikke at tale om at den er over-
fyldt med gule Pletter, saaledes som den nederste Figur paa
Tavle XIV viser det.

124

Sandstenen maa vistnok, som Helhed betragtet, betegnes
som en Kvarsitsandsten, og med Hensyn til Kornstorrelsen som
grovkornet, idet de enkelte Sandkorn i Almindelighed have en
Sterrelse af fra I til 3 mm. Bindemidlet er i Reglen kisel-
holdig, saa Fastheden som oftest er stor. Hertil maa dog be-
merkes, at paa Grund af den sterke Isdenudation, er det kun
sjeldent, at andre end de fasteste Partier ere blevne levnede.
Urent Jærnilte danner Bindemidlet i de løsere Partier, ligesom
det ogsaa findes udskilt i tynde Lag. Som ovenfor nævnt til-
trak disse Lag sig derfor Opmerksomheden i eldre Tid, da de
kunde anvendes til Farve. Ogsaa tynde Lag af en haard Red-
jernsten findes; og det er interessant at se, hvor spejlblanke
dens isskurede Flader endnu ere paa Stedet; hjembragte i Mu-
seet blive de efter et Par Aars Forlob matte og hensmuldre
tilsidst. 1 Sandstenen findes flere Steder hele Lag af næve-
store, sjeldent hovedstore Rullesten, hvis stærkt afrundede og
ofte noget flade Form, karakterisere dem som Strandsten. Disse
Lag naa dog sjeldent en Mægtighed af mere end et Par Meter,
og de synes hurtigt at kile ud, saa de tilsidst kun bestaa af et
enkelt Lag Rullesten. Disse bestaa som oftest af Sten, der
synes identiske med Sandstenen selv, dog findes ogsaa Rulle-
sten af Granit, Diabas, Agat og Jaspis. Disse Rullesten bere
ofte Merker af det uhyre Tryk, der maa have veret udevet paa
dem, idet de ofte ere sprengte og Brudstykkerne forskudte.
Disse Brudstykker ere saa igen sammenkittede med Kvarts.
Andre af disse Rullesten bere Merker af Indtryk af Nabo-
rullestenene.

Hvad Sandstenens Struktur angaar, da kan denne vere
meget forskellig, ligefra tyndskifret som i Slibestensfjeldet, (se
overste Figur paa Tavle ХШ og nederste Figur paa Tavle XIV)
til en saa kompakt Masse, at Lagdelingen kun fremtreder som
en Benkning, saaledes som denne kan vise sig hos Graniten.
Merkelig nok kan der, som paa de smaa Bratninger ved Van-
det ved Igaliko (der ses midt paa Billedet paa Tavle VI) i en

125

saadan haard kompakt isskuret Kvarsitsandsten, ved en god
Belysning ses svage Linier, der kun kunne tydes som om
Sandstenen bestod af en skarpkantet Breccie !.

Hvor Sandstenen bliver tyndskifret og finkornet, soger man
uvilkaarlig efter Forsteninger; men uagtet jeg har anvendt en
ikke ringe Tid paa at soge efter saadanne, lykkedes det mig
dog aldrig at finde nogen. Ved Musartüt er der ejendommelige
runde Kugler af Sandsten i Sandstenen, c. 3 cm. i Tversnit;
men de ere uden Struktur og sidde i Reglen saa fast, at det
kun lykkedes at faa enkelte lose.

Uregelmessige Partier af hvid storkrystallinsk Kalkspath
findes flere Steder i Sandstenen uden at det er klart hvorledes
de ere dannede.

Paa Spalter i Sandstenen findes flere Steder Kvartskrystaller,
oftest ejendommelig flade og skeve, ofte tillige overtrukne med
Jærnglimmer, som ved Ipiutak?), Iganek og Nunasarnausak.
Af Gronlenderne ved Igaliko modtog jeg i 1899 et haandstort
Stykke Tungspath, der skal vere fundet i Sandstenen ved
Musartüt.

Bolgeslagslinier findes overalt i Sandstenen, det vere sig
saa enten denne er tyndskifret eller saa fast og kompakt, at
ethvert Spor af Lagdeling er udvisket. Hvor store Flader ere
blottede, er det interessant at se, at Vindretningen, der har sat
Vandet og dermed Sandet i Bevegelse, under Tiden har veret
den samme medens flere Lag ere blevne afsatte; saaledes saas
det paa Hojderne ®. for Overberestedet ved Igaliko, at Nord-
ostvinden maa have veret fremherskende der paa Stedet gen-
nem lange Tidsrum.

Som Dr. C. Pingel fremhævede, er den rode Sandsten
saa inderlig forbunden med Gange og Lag af Diabas og Por-

1) En saadan saas ogsaa og langt tydeligere ved Musartüt. Se ogsaa Pingel
Hh Se ite

2) М. о. С. И, $. 37 og XXXII, S. 72. Tillæg В til Rigsdagstidenden 1877
—78. S. 7.

XXXIV. 9

126

phyr, at han derfor mente at maatte henfore den samlede Dan-
nelse til den nederste Afdeling af den permiske Formation. En
Anskuelse jeg efter mine Undersøgelser i 1876 mente at maatte
tiltrede!). Efter nyere Undersøgelser synes det derimod at
denne Sandsten maa henføres til endnu ældre Dannelser; hvor-
vel Spørgsmaalet næppe kan afgøres, før et heldigt Træf bringer
Forsteninger for Dagen. |
Petrografisk ere Diabaslagene og Porphyrgangene ikke ипаег-
sagte, saa der for Øjeblikket ikke kan siges noget om deres
mineralogiske Sammensætning og Samhørighed. Kun skal jeg be-
mærke, at de horizontale mere eller mindre mægtige Lag i Reglen
have Diabasstruktur; medens Gangene i Almindelighed have
Porphyrstruktur. Gangene gaa i Reglen lodret gennem baade
Sandsten og Diabaslagene, som om de stode dem begge lige
fjernt; dog ses det enkelte Steder, som f. Ex. ved Igaliko, hvor
en ejendommelig rødbrun Slaggemasse, som en 13 m. bred
lodret Gang, til begge Sider udsender 3 m. brede horizontale
Gange ind mellem Sandstenlagene, saa det ser ud, som om
disse Gange vare underordnede Lag i Sandstenen. I det Hele
tror jeg ikke, at Diabasen maa opfattes som optrædende i Lag,
det der synes saa, er vistnok kun horizontale Gange, intrusive
Lag; saaledes som jeg ogsaa i sin Tid søgte at hævde det, for
de Basaltlags Vedkommende, som Rink og Nordenskiöld
omtalte at der fandtes i de kulførende Dannelser i N.-Grøn-
land”). At Diabasen er yngre end Sandstenen, og som smeltede
Masser er brudt frem gennem den, er der ofte Bevis for, se
saaledes Tavle XV øverste Billede, der viser en lavalignende
Strøm, der er afsondret i smukke Søjler, og hvis Overflade har
et fuldstændig slaggeagtigt Udseende, Fig. 1. Derimod har jeg
ikke et eneste Sted set, at et Sandstenlag, der hviler paa Diabas,
i sin nederste Del er dannet af vejrsmuldret Diabas, saaledes
som det ses, hvor Sandstenen hviler paa Granit. Baade kemisk

1) Tillæg B til Rigsdagstidenden for 1877—78, S. 7.
Мо: С. ТУ, 5. 188.

127

og dynamisk have derimod baade Sandstenen og Diabasen paa-
virket hinanden. Saaledes kan Sandstenen baade blive skifret
og affarvet paa Grensen mod Gangene; medens Sandstenen
igen kan have paavirket Gangmassen, saa denne i Reglen er
tet mod Sidestenen, og først i Midten bliver storkrystallinsk
og porphyritisk. Rent mekanisk har Diabasgennembruddene
undertiden sterk paavirket Sandstenlagene, idet disse kunne
vere bojede til hele Buer, som i Tunugdliarfik, V. for Over-
berestedet, se nederste Figur paa Tavle XIII, eller som ved
Igaliko, hvor det ses, at Diabasgennembruddet har veret for-

Fig. 1. Diabasens slaggeagtige Overflade Musartüt. (1/2).

bundet med betydelige Spring og Forskydninger i Sandsten-
lagene. Se venstre Side af Billedet paa Tavle VI; det samme
ses paa nederste Billede af Tavle X, der viser Fjeldet Iganek
lige over for Igaliko. Atter andre Steder ser man Sandsten-
lagene ligesom tværede ud i hinanden.

I Sandstenlagene har jeg aidrig fundet kulholdige Skifere ;
men at der ikke desto mindre maa have fundet organiske Af-
lejringer Sted den Gang, det bevise ikke alene de sorte Kvarsit-
lag, der findes f. Ex. paa Nunasarnausak, men ogsaa et ejen-
dommeligt grafitholdigt Lag, der forekommer i et sterkt for-

andret Diabaslag i Iganek paa Ostsiden af Fjorden ved Igaliko.
9*

128

Paa Grund af den stærke Isdenudation, der har borttaget
alle de losere Partier af Sandstenen og Diabasen og afrundet
de fastere Partier, saa disse kun træde lidet frem, og endelig
paa Grund af den for Gronland forholdsvis frodige Vegetation,
er det vanskeligt at faa et almindeligt Overblik over disse Bjerg-
arters indbyrdes Optreden. Jeg skal derfor til Slutning nojes
med at anfore, hvad jeg paa forskellige Steder har noteret mig
om Sandsten og Diabaslagenes indbyrdes Forhold.

1. Nunasarnausak. Ved at gaa fra Siorarssuit i Tunug-
dliarfik op ad Nunarsarnausaks Nordside iagttoges folgende: |
selve Stranden er Syeniten fremherskende, men lidt Vest derfor
gaar den over i gron Hornsten, en nesten jaspisagtig Masse,
der igen gaar over i en hvidgron Kvarsit. Skraaningen op efter
er bedekket af forvittret Syenit, der ved et leragtigt Binde-
middel er herdnet til en grov los sandstenagtig Masse. I en
Hojde af 350 m. træder Sandstenen frem som afvexlende hvide
og sorte Lag, der dog ogsaa gaa over i hinanden. De hvide
Lag vare de tykkeste, c. 3 dm., de sorte noget tyndere, c. 2 dm.
I en Hojde af 392 M. saas et Conglomeratlag i Sandstenen med
indtil 2—3 Cubikdecimeter store Sten, der som oftest vare
knuste. Blandt dem fandtes nogle der havde et fuldstendigt
agatlignende Udseende. Dette Conglomeratlag stod med en
skarp lodret Grænse mod et tet blegrod Kvarsit. Fra 529—
560 m. saas et Kvarsitlag, der dækkede et Diabaslag, der igen
syntes at dække over en skifret graa Kvarcit. I en Hojde af
584 m. fandtes igen et 2,5 m. mægtigt Conglomeratlag, hvori
Stenene syntes at vere af samme Beskaffenhed som den om-
givende Sandsten. Ved 605 m. saas et Diabaslag der gennem-
brodes af en 1,5 m. megtig Porphyrgang. Lagene falde her
c. 10° i NNO. Det overste Parti af Nunasarnausak, der naar
op til en Hojde af 750 m., er Diabas med flere Porphyrgange,
hvoraf én, der var 8 m. megtig, udmerkede sig ved at vere
meget storkrystallinsk. Ved imidlertid at gaa op paa Nunas-
arnausak, paa andre Steder, har jeg fundet at Lagfolgen og

129

Megtigheden af Lagene var endel forskellig fra hvad her er
angivet.

2. Putdlisek, saaledes synes paa Tunugdliarfiks Sydside,
henimod Overberestedet, et Sted at kaldes, der tiltrekker sig
Opmærksomheden ved at Sandstenslagene ere meget stærkt
bojede, saa de danne hele Buer; se nederste Billede paa Tavle
XII. Foruden i de store Buer er Sandstenen knust og ud-
tveret til en Breccie med Kvarts til Bindemiddel. Denne sterke
Paavirkning synes fremkaldt af et Diabasgennembrud. Lidt
vestligere i Stranden bliver Sandstenen tyndskifret og hælder
under store Vinkler, saa man faar Indtrykket af, at det hele
kun er en Skal, der dekker det bagved liggende Grundfjeld.

3. Igaliko. Selve Underlaget af Sletten ved Igaliko er,
som Dr. С. Pingel i sin Afhandling anfører, Sandsten gen-
nembrudt af Porphyrgange, dog er der langt flere af disse, end
man efter hans Fremstilling skulde tro. Tavle VI viser Igaliko-
sletten set fra Skeret med Ruinen. Over Husene, der ses i
Midten af Billedet over den stejle Sandstenskrent ved Vandet,
heve Sandstenlagene sig i Afsatser, hvis Beskaffenhed bedst
undersøges i de mange Klofter, der gaa lodret paa Skraaningen.
Disse Klofter staa ofte i Forbindelse med Porphyrgangene og
Diabaslagene, og betydelige Spring og Forskydninger ses at staa
i Forbindelse med disses Gennembrud. Det er denne Fjeld-
skraaning, der strekker sig over den storste Del af Billedet
paa Tavle VI, og som naar en Højde af с. 200 m., Dr. С.
Pingel i sin Tid beskrev, og som han delte i 3 Afdelinger
efter Sandstenlagenes Beskaffenhed. Det gaar imidlertid her,
som ovenfor omtalt ved Nunasarnausak, at man kommer til
forskellige Resultater, hvad Bjergarternes Megtighed og Be-
skaffenhed angaar, efter som man gaar op i den ene eller den
anden Kloft.

Г en af disse, omtrent lige over Husene, var Sandstenen i
en Hojde af 150 m. skifret og dækket af et megtigt Tuflag,
der fuldstendig lignede en vulkansk Tuf, tildels med Slagge-

130

struktur og indeholdende Rullesten af Sandsten og Gnejs. I
en Hojde af 200 m. var Sandstenen sterk jærnholdig og fuld
af rullede Sten, hvoraf de fleste vare Sandsten men ogsaa
mange af Diabas. I en Hojde af 230 m. blev Sandstenen gro-
vere og indeholdt Rullesten af Sandsten og Kvarsit. Herunder
laa et mere eller mindre sandholdigt redjernstenholdigt Lag, der
havde en Megtighed af indtil 2 m. Ved at gaa op ad en anden
Kloft, Kurusuk kaldet, og som ses lengst til venstre paa Tavle
VI, saas folgende: Det nederste Diabaslag laa i en Hejde af
52 m. og havde en Megtighed af 6—7 m. Sandstenens Grense
mod den overliggende Diabas var, ligesom angreben og gennem-
trengt af pores Jærnilte. Diabasen var mod denne Grense
sterk skifret. Lagene paa begge Sider af Kloften viste, at der
her var sket en vertikal Forskydning af с. 8 m. Flere Porphyr-
gange gik lodret gennem Diabasen og Sandstenen. I en Hajde
af 98 m. saas i Sandstenen et c. 7 dm. megtigt Conglomerat-
lag, hvis Sten vesentlig bestode af en hvid og blaalig Kvarsit,
red, brun, violet og blegrod Sandsten og endvidere en red
Granit. Stenene vare ofte pressede og havde Indtryk af hin-
anden, eller knuste, saa Brudstykkerne vare forskudte. I den
neste Kloft mod N. lige ved Ujarartarfik ligger Overfladen af
den røde slaggeagtige Diabas i en Højde af 64 m.; ogsaa her
findes et Conglomeratlag. Lige over Ujarartarfik ser det ud
som om den rede slaggeagtige Diabas var flydt ud over et с.
1 m. mægtigt Lag af Rullesten. I en Højde af 149 m. findes
i en slaggeagtig Diabas Blokke af rod Sandsten, dels skarp-
kantede, dels helt afrundede. I en Højde af 236 т. saas et
Diabaslag, der var opfyldt af smaa runde Concretioner. Laget
var spaltet i smukke 6sidede Sojler, og gjorde Indtrykket af at
vere hærdet Tuf. I en Højde af 336 m. saas igen i Sandstenen
et Diabaslag. Paa Nullupkakak naar Sandstenen op til en Hojde
af c. 520 m.

4. Iganek. Dette 560 m. heje Fjeld, der ligger lige over
for Igaliko, paa den anden Side af Fjorden, ses nederst paa

131

Tavle X. Det er af lignende Beskaffenhed som Fjeldet over
Igaliko, men med endnu mere udprægede Spring og Forskyd-
ninger, hvilket ogsaa Billedet antyder. Foden af Fjeldet er Syenit,
og saavel gennem denne som gennem Sandstenen, der her
gennemgaaende er graa kvarsitagtig, gaa en Mengde rede Por-
phyrgange. Flere Diabaslag ses, og c. 50 m. under Toppen
findes en ejendommelig Kontaktdannelse, hvori Graphit og Apatit-
krystaller danne en karakteristisk Bestanddel.

5. Nunasarnak. Tavle VII viser dette karakteristiske
Fjeld set fra Ipiutak. Det bestaar af afvexlende Lag af Sand-
sten og Diabas. Selv har jeg ikke undersogt det, men da-
verende stud. polyt. Alb. Theilgaard, der ledsagede mig i
1899, har meddelt mig folgende Hejder fundne ved Barometer-
aflesninger under Bestigningen af Fjeldet:

Toppen af Fjeldet .. = 634 m.
Varden О rene 156.
Rod Sandsten...... — 471 m.
Hvid Kvarsit я = 451 m.
Diabasıın. eatin a. ots В an
Hvid Kvarsit .. :1.... == 330 m;
Rod Sandsten...... = 191 m
Diahasy sau, She — 1.192, m:

For jeg gaar nærmere ind paa de mineralogiske lagttagelser,
turde her være Stedet at omtale et Par lagttagelser angaaende
Isen.

Breen ved Kiagtüt. | 1876 besøgte jeg denne Bre første
Gang og i 1899 anden Gang og fandt, ved Hjælp af Fotografier
fra 1876, at denne Bre havde forandret sig en Del i de for-
lobne 23 Aar; men naturligvis véd jeg ikke, om denne For-
andring har været jævnt fordelt over disse Aar, eller om Breen
mulig har skudt sig frem og trukken sig tilbage flere Gange.
Foran Breen ligger en lille So, og medens Breen i 1876 gik
ud i denne med en sterk foroverbojet Rand, saa den kalvede
og dannede smaa Isfjelde, saa var Breenden i 1899 sunken

132

sammen og saa bedækket med Ler og Grus, at den knap kunde
skelnes fra Morænen. I det lerede Vand foran Enden af Breen
steg den under denne lobende Elv tilvejrs som en stærk ko-
gende Kilde. Selve Breens Tilbagegang var ikke serlig stor;
men kan ikke bestemmes nojere. Ved at tage mine Fotografier
med, vil Forandringen neste Gang bedre kunne bestemmes, da
et Par af dem ere tagne fra en Varde, der neppe vil vere
vanskelig at genfinde.

Som Bidrag til Kendskabet til Isens tidligere Udbredelse,
kan henvises til det overste. Billede paa Tavle XII, der viser
Isfjeldbarieren udenfor Mundingen af Isfjorden Korok. Vandet
skal efter Gronlændernes Sigende vere lavt paa denne tidligere
Endemorene; men paa Grund af Gronlendernes Ulyst tii at
ligge stille mellem de mange og ofte kalvende Isfjelde lykkedes
det mig ikke at faa oploddet en Linie tversover, uagtet jeg
havde alt parat dertil.

Medens Isfjelde med skarpe fantastiske Former saa ofte
ere afbildede og fotograferede, viser det overste Billede paa
Tavle IX et stort Isfjeld af et mere sjeldent Udseende. Det
bestaar af en Breccie af Isstykker og maa vere dannet om
Vinteren, da Breen stadig kalver, men de derved dannede Brud-
stykker kunne, paa Grund af Fjordisen ikke flyde bort, saa de
ophobes foran Breenden, saa de tilsidst naa dennes Højde.
Om Foraaret naar Fjordisen gaa bort udskydes saa disse Breccie-
isfjelde sammen med de der kun bestaa af et enkelt Stykke Is.
Dette Isfjeld er fotograferet i Tunugdliarfik ud for Udstedet
Narssak, men stammer rimeligvis fra Isfjorden Sermilik.

Det nederste Billede paa Tavle IX viser Bræisens ejen-
dommelige kornede Struktur, med de karakteristiske Finger-
aftryk lignende Figurer.

2. Mineralogiske Iagttagelser og Indsamlinger.

1. Eudialyt. Det eneste af de mange sjeldne Mineralier,
der findes i denne Egn, og som mulig kan faa teknisk Betydning,

133

er Eudialyten, paa Grund af dens Indhold af Zirkonsyre. Dette
Mineral findes næsten overalt i Sodalithsyeniten, dels som enkelte
Krystaller, dels som storre eller mindre elliptiske’) Masser og
dels udfyldende Spalter i Bjergarten, sammen med Arfvedsonit
og Feldspath.

Det Sted, hvor Eudialyten hidtil er funden i saa store
Mengder, at der kunde vere Tale om at vinde den teknisk, er
i Bunden af Fjorden Kangerdluarsuk.

Kortskitsen Figur 2 viser dette Sted. Dybdekurverne ere
dragne efter Kaptain C. F. Olsens Lodninger i 1888. Midt i
Fjorden, ud for Halvøen Niakonarsok og Øen Kekertak, begge
ved Foden af Fjeldet Nunasarnausak, er der en dyb Rende med
50—70 Favne Vand; Bunden er Mudder. Herfra er Grunden
iævnt opgaaende med Sten, kun ud for Elvene, navnlig Laxelven,
ег der større Sandflader med indtil 5 Favne Vand. I 1888 laa
«Fox», under Arbejdet med Indsamlingen af Eudialyten, for
Anker с. 100 Favne N. for Øen; i 1899 laa den derimod helt
inde i Bunden af Fjorden, saa ner ved Land, det for Lavvande
var muligt. >)

Sodalithsyeniten danner paa Grund af sin stærke Forvittring
vistnok den ødeste Egn i Grønland; thi næppe stort andet end
Lavarter forekomme paa de ikke helt til Grus henfaldne Partier,
og kun langs Vandløbene findes enkelte højere Planter. Foto-
grafierne paa Tavlerne XIX kunne maaske give et Begreb om
denne Egns Goldhed. Her i denne, over store Strækninger til
dybe Gruslag forandrede Bjergart, findes Eudialyten, dels ud-
fyldende Spalter i de haardere Partier, dels liggende løse, som
oftest i flade eller elliptiske Partier, der kunne naa en Vægt af
over 50 Kilo og som for en Del ere Rester af Pegmatitgangene.

1) I Mineralogisk Museums Forhal findes en udmærket Prøve paa et saadant
elliptisk Lag.

?) «Fox» kastede her en Del af sin Ballast over Bord, hvilket bemærkes
for at forebygge Misforstaaelse; thi denne Ballast bestod for en væsentlig
Del af Kryolith og de sammen med denne forekommende Mineralier,

134

Forgrunden i det averste Billede paa Tavle XX viser et saadant
Parti, hvor Overfladen af den faststaaende Sodalithsyenit næsten
er skjult af Forvittringsmaterialet, i og paa hvilket sidste der ег
fundet løse Eudialytstykker til en samlet Vægt af mange hun-
drede Kilo. Paa Kortskitsen Fig. 2 ere Eudialytlagene betegnede
ved en tyk sort Streg, medens de Strækninger, hvor de lese
Eudialytstykker ere samlede, ere betegnede ved Kors. En af de
storste og rigeste Pegmatitgange fandtes paa Ostsiden af den
lille ©. Gangen er 80 cm. bred, hvoraf de nederste 20 cm.
vesentlig er Eudialyt, medens den overste Del bestaar af Arfved-
sonit, Feldspath og Ægirin. Gangen gaar skraat ned under
Vandfladen og er ved Hojvande nesten dækket; medens den
ved Lavvande er blottet i en Lengde af c. 12 m. I nederste
Billede paa Tavle XX, ses det overste af denne Gang, hvor den
forøvrigt næsten er svunden ind til en Ubetydelighed.') Denne
Gang har ydet flere Tusinde Kilo Eudialyt. Circa 5000 Kilo
ydede fremdeles et Lag i Bunden af Fjorden, der laa i en
Afstand af са. 900 m. og i en Hojde af 200 m. over Vandfladen.
Ydede end disse og et Par andre, men mindre Gange og Lag
en betydelig Mengde Eudialyt, saa vandtes dog den langt over-
vejende Del af de hidtil hjembragte ca. 55000 Kilo ved paa
Rouserne at indsamle lose Stykker. Mange af disse sidste
bestode naturligvis langt fra af rent Mineral; men Regelen var,
at intet Stykke maatte medtages, hvori Eudialyten udgjorde
mindre end Halvdelen, efter at de vedhængende Mineralier vare
fjernede ved Hammeren. Arbejdet er jo i egentligste Forstand
Rovdrift; thi der toges alt hvad der fandtes, og da de enkelte
Pegmatitgange i Reglen snart kile ud, kan et planlagt Mine-
arbejde ikke anlegges paa et bestemt Sted.

Da Kryolith-Selskabet i 1888 overdrog mig Ledelsen af
Indsamlingen af Eudialyt og i den Anledning spurgte mig om,
hvormeget jeg mente at der kunde skaffes til Veje, turde jeg

1) Dette Billede, der er taget i 1899, viser ogsaa en Del af Tang- og Balan-
randen. Se Medd. om Gronl. ХХХШ.

135

Skitzekort over

Eudialytens Forekomst
i Bunden af Fjorden
Kangerdluarsuk.

Maalestok I: 60,000
2000 ель

Makonarsoky
= -

(ll

136

kun stille nogle faa Tusinde Kilo i Udsigt, og jeg tvivlede meget
om, at vi skulde kunne naa de 5000 Kilo, som Selskabet mente
var det mindste, der kunde vere Tale om at gjøre Forsøg med.
| Lobet af en Uge naaede vi imidlertid at faa samlet са. 15000
Kilo. Vi toge alt, hvad vi saa, saa theoretisk skulde der ikke
vere stort tilbage, og dog naaede vi, som nævnt, i 1899 endnu
at faa indsamlet ca. 44000 Kilo. Uagtet vi ogsaa da toge alt,
hvad vi saa, saa tvivler jeg dog ikke om, at der jo nok endnu
vil kunne samles adskillige Tusinde Kilo; men, det er jo klart,
at saaledes kan det ikke blive ved, engang maa Endialytmengden
ved en saadan overfladisk Indvinding hore op, eller i det mindste
kun forekomme i en saa ringe Mengde, at det ikke kan betale
de ikke ubetydelige Omkostninger, der ere forbundne dermed.
Jeg skal ikke her komme ind paa Sporgsmaalet, om ikke Ind-
vindingen af Eudialyt kunde foretages paa en billigere Maade
end den hidtil anvendte.

Skulde det vise sig, hvad der jo destoverre ikke for Qje-
blikket skal vere Udsigt til, at Eudialyten har en Fremtid for
sig i teknisk Henseende, bliver Sporgsmaalet: findes der ikke
andre Steder i Sodalithsyeniten, hvor Eudialyten optreder i
lignende Mengde som i Kangerdluarsuk; thi som enkelte Kry-
staller eller som nevestore Partier findes det, snart sagt, overalt.

Flere Steder kan der uden Tvivl ved nøjere Undersøgelse
findes en Del; men det eneste Sted, jeg har set, der saavel i
Eudialytmængde som i let Tilgængelighed kommer Bunden af
Kangerdluarsuk nær, er Tupersiatsiap ved Naujakasik i Tunugd-
liarfik. Her synes tilmed, ligesom i Kangerdluarsuk, at være
den Fordel, at et Skib som «Fox» maa kunne ligge dækket
mod de fleste Vinde, ligesom ogsaa for Isfjælde og Kalvis fra
Sermilik og Koruk. Hosstaaende Kortskitse Fig. 3, der dog kun
er baseret paa faa Pejlinger, kan tjene til at give et Begreb om
Forholdene paa dette Sted. Fotografiet øverst paa Tavle XXI
viser SV. — Siden af denne Bugt med Teltpladsen Tupersiatsiap
yderst til højre. Paa Kortskitsen betegner Streger og Kors de Ste-

137

der, hvor Eudialyten findes i storre Mængder. Fra Teltpladsen
og vestefter, henad Najakasik, findes indsprængt og temmelig
jævnt fordelt gjennem hele Bjergarten ikke ubetydelige Mængder
af Eudialyt; men hvis der skulde vere Tale om at indvinde
den her, maatte dette Minerals Verdi stige i en overordentlig
Grad. Øst for Teltpladsen og langs Bugtens hele Sydside fore-
kommer Eudialyten derimod under fuldstendig lignende Forhold
som i Kangerdluarsuk 9: dels som større og mindre lostliggende
Blokke og dels paa ЗраНег og i Lag. Saaledes findes der ved

RW.

y + Shar == Fudialyt i Lag

ххх 7,7 à lose Blokke
Najakasik

Tu?

Fig. 3.

den vestligste af de smaa Elve i Bunden af Bugten, og som er
let kjendelig derved, at den danner et smukt lille Vandfald, et
ca. 30 cm. megtigt Lag af meget rent Eudialyt, der, saavidt
det paa den stejle, af lost Materiale dekkede Skrent kunde ses,
havde en betydelig Udstrækning. Det nederste Fotografi paa
Tavle XXI er et Billede af denne stejle Fjældvæg, der danner
en Del af Sydsiden af Elvlejet. Det viser Sodalithsyenitens
«bænkede» Struktur, og endvidere hvorledes den er gjennem-
trængt af mere og mindre lodrette Sletter og Gange. Eudialyt-
laget findes enten ved den nederste eller maaske snarere ved
den næstnederste af de paa Billedet synlige horizontaie Kløv-

138

ninger. I Elvlejet laa flere, ja endog meget store Blokke af
nesten ren Eudialyt. Paa Vestsiden af den neste Elv, den
anden, fandtes ligeledes et Eudialytlag, der ikke alene havde en
Megtighed som det foregaaende Lag, men som endog var af-
dækket paa en større Flade, saa der uden Tvivl den Gang med
Lethed kunde have været taget flere tusinde ‚Kilo. Desuden
fandtes paa Skraaningerne ved begge Elve en Mengde lose
Blokke. |

2. Kvartskrystaller fra Narsasuk. Da jeg i 1888
var ved Igaliko, tilbod Gronlenderne mig en Mengde afbrudte
og ufuldstændige Ægirinkrystaller, der kun gjorde sig bemærket
ved deres store Mengde. I Begyndelsen tillagde jeg ikke disse
Krystaller nogen Betydning; men efterhaanden tiltrak deres store
Mængde sig min Opmærksomhed, og paa mit Spørgsmaal om,
hvorfra de stammede, nævnede de Narsasuk og pegte henimod
Kistefjeldet. Da jeg bad dem vise mig Stedet, førte de mig |
hen til et af de sædvanlig grusede Steder, som jeg kendte saa
godt fra mine Bestigninger af Kistefjeldet. Deri saa jeg intet
paafaldende, og da de fortalte mig, at Krystallerne fandtes ved
at gennemsøge Gruset, og jeg efter en kort Afsøgning ingen |
fandt, forlod jeg Stedet, da jeg mente, at Fundet af disse Kry-
staller, der ganske vist havde et noget forskelligt Udseende fra
Ægirinkrystallerne i Kangerdluarsuk, ikke havde nogen særlig
videnskabelig Betydning. Da jeg senere kom til Julianehaab,
viste Kolonibestyrer Lytzen mig en Del store og smukt udviklede
Ægirinkrystaller, som han tilbød Museet. Om de nye Mineralier,
som Neptunit о. s. v., som han maaske allerede da, eller i al
Fald snart efter sendte til svenske Mineraloger, nævnede han
dengang eller senere ikke et Ord. I 1897 undersøgte den svenske
Mineralog Gustaf Flink, hvem de lytzenske Samlinger vare
komne i Hænde, paa Kommissionens Bekostning Narsasuk og
fandt derved mange nye Mineralier, som han har beskrevet i
M. o. G. XIV og XXIV. I 1899 besøgte ogsaa jeg igen Stedet.

I Mineralogia Groenlandica er Materialet fra denne Indsam-

139

ling medtaget, og jeg skal derfor her kun omtale nogle Kvarts-
krystaller, der straks tiltrak sig min Opmerksomhed paa Grund
af, at de utvetydigt viste den basiske Flade, der jo horer til en
af de storste krystallografiske Sjeldenheder. Tavle XI, Fig. 1
viser en saadan Krystaldruse, der yderst bestaar af 6 symmetrisk
sammenvoxede Krystaller, i hvis Indre flere mindre ses og
hvoraf de fleste ere forsynede med Basis; der hos dem alle
spejle paa én Gang. Ses de under Lupen, iagttager man, at
disse Flader ere svagt krummede, saa at de paa Goniometret
ikke spejle som én Flade, saa deres Vinkel med Pyramide-
fladerne ikke kan maales med Nojagtighed. Endvidere ses det,
at disse Basisflader alle have et drueformet chalcedonagtigt
Ydre (Fig. 2). Kvartsen i disse Krystaller er i Reglen glasklar,
nesten hyalitagtig og spejler med en vandklar Friskhed, der
gør, at de se ud, som om de ere slikkede. Ikke alene pau de
enkelte, skarpt udpregede Krystaller findes disse ejendommelige
Flader; men de findes ogsaa i hele Samlinger paa de uformelige
Krystaldruser, som Dr. Flink") har omtalt som den mest almin-
delige Form: «namely in individuals that have been so strongly
attacked by solvents that one can no longer see whether they
were originally idiomorphic crystals or massive lumps. The
quartz crystals from Narsarsuk show all the stages of etching,
from its appearance as a mere trace to the total obliteration of
the original form.» Figurerne 3—5 paa Tavle XI vise de for-
skellige Sider paa en saadan «massiv lump», der findes i Dr.
Flinks Samling, og som efter hans Formening er fremkommen
ved Oplosning, men hvori jeg kun kan se en meget svagt indi-
vidueliseret Kvartskrystal, der er sammensat af en Mengde
Individer paa en noget lignende, men langt mere kompliceret
Maade, end som det ses i Fig. 1, Tavle XI. Fig. 4 paa denne
Tavle viser nemlig Prismet med sin horizontale Stribning.
Fig. 3 viser en Pyramideflade med sine karakteristiske Figurer

1) M. o. Gr. XXIV, S. 21.

140

og endelig viser Fig. 5 en paa Basis’s Plads værende Overflade,
der er sammensat af mange smaa Endeflader (de karakteristiske
med Vorterne) i Forbindelse med Tillob til Pyramideflader.
Fotografierne vise vel skarpt nok de forskellige Flader; men
kun, naar man kan tage disse usedvanlige Krystaller i Haanden
og bese dem fra alle Sider, faar man det rette Indtryk af dem.

Uagtet Basis er meget almindelig hos hexagonale Krystaller,
saa er der jo den Merkelighed ved Kvartsen, at denne Flade
kun yderst sjeldent optreder hos dette Mineral, og dertil kan
vel kun Grunden vere den, at Kvartsens Sammensetning eller
Struktur ikke i Almindelighed er gunstig for denne Flades
Fremkomst, og fremkommer den saa som her en enkelt Gang’),
forekommer det mig, at det er karakteristiskt at se, hvor ufuld-
kommen den er, idet den jo minder om Kvartsens mindre fuld-
komne Form: Chalcedonen. Det kan bemerkes, at disse Kvarts-
krystaller ere usædvanlig rige paa smukke, skarpt udprægede
hule Krystaller, der næsten alle synes at have en ubevægelig
Libelle.

3. Kvarts-Pseudomorphoser fra Ivinguit ved
Narsak. | 1876 samlede jeg paa dette Sted paa Spalter i en
tufagtig Diabasis en stor Mængde Krystaller, der bestode af
Kvarts, men som tydelig viste sig at vere Pseudomorphoser
efter et eller andet Mineral, hvilket, har det ligesaalidt strax
som senere veret muligt at bestemme, og det lykkes vel ogsaa
kun, naar der engang findes Rester af det oprindelige Mineral
idem. Alle de indsamlede Krystaller gik imidlertid til Grunde
ved Christiansborgs Brand; men i 1899, da jeg igen besøgte
Stedet, lykkedes det mig at skaffe en ny Samling, dog langt fra
saa stor som den forste.

Professor Ussing har undersogt disse Krystaller og givet
folgende Beskrivelse af dem: «Kvartsseudomorphoserne fra Ivin-
guit ved Narsak har et Udseende som gengivet paa hosstaaende

1) Det bemerkes, at det her ikke drejer sig om en enkelt Krystal, men at f
Fænomenet er gennemgaaende hos en stor Del af de fundne Krystaller.

141

Fig. 4. I Storrelse naar de som oftest c. 2 cm, enkelte af
Krystallerne endog indtil 6 cm. De optreder ofte som hele
Krystalblokke af tilnermelsesvis parallelt stillede Individer (se
Fotografiet); ved denne Anordning i Forbindelse med Krystal-
lernes Habitus fremkommer ofte en overfladisk Lighed med de
i alle Samlinger udbredte
Pragtstykker af krystal-
linsk Svovl fra Sicilien.
Efter de maalte Vink-
ler har jeg ikke kunnet
identificere disse Pseudo-
morphoser med nogen i
Mineralverdenen almin-

delig forekommende Kry-
stalform, og da Fladernes Fig. 4. Kvartspseudomorphose fra Ivinguit.
Beskaffenhed ikke tillader nejagtige Maalinger, og saaledes
heller ikke Sammenligninger med sjældnere Former, har For-
soget paa, gennem Formen at udfinde det oprindelige Mineral
maattet opgives. Her skal derfor kun anfores en ganske kort
Beskrivelse:

Pseudomorphosernes Habitus
ег rhombisk. Vinklerne maaltes
med Anlægsgoniometret og lod
sig bestemme med en Nojagtighed
paa 1 à 2°; der kunde ikke kon-
stateres nogen Afvigelse fra den

rhombiske Symmetri, men paa

Fig. 5. Grund af den nævnte Usikkerhed i
Maalingerne maa man regne med den Mulighed, at Krystallerne
i Virkeligheden tilhører det monokline eller trikline System.
Naar Formen betragtes som rhombisk og opstilles som Figur 5
viser, bliver de tilstedeværende Former at betegne som rhombisk
Dobbeltpyramide, Basis og andet Endefladepar eller

(111). (001) . (010).

XXXIV: 10

142

Den sidste Form var dog kun tilstede paa en Del af Krystallerne.
De fundne Vinkelværdier er:
111:111 = с. 46°:
111:111 — с. 91°
111:111 = с. 72°
Af de to forstnævnte Vinkler faas Akseforholdet:
(ÆDE KORS 052.1: 0

8. Iagttagelser i Kryolithbruddet ved Ivigtut.

Iblandt de Mineralier, der oftest er nævnet i Forbindelse
med Spergsmaalet om Kryolithens Dannelse, hører Topasen;
men uagtet jeg ofte, under mine Besog ved Ivigtut, har tænkt
paa, om dog ikke dette Mineral skulde findes der, saa har jeg
dog aldrig fundet noget, der kunde minde derom. Ved Gen-
nemsyn i Fjor af nogle Mineralprover, jeg i 1899 havde haft
med fra Ivigtut, men som vare blevne henstaaende ubestemte!),
var ogsaa et storre Stykke Kryolith, der var gennemtrengt af
en flere Centimeter bred Zone af sammenklumpede smaa straalet-
krystallinske Korn, som jeg, da jeg tog det, tænkte maatte vere
enten en Kvarts- eller Feldspathmasse. Ved nu at tage det frem
til nermere Undersogelse fandtes det let, at det ikke var nogen
af Delene. Det var mathvidt, med et svagt gulligt Sker, og
haardt, saa det ridsede Kvarts. Vegtfylden var, efter at Kryo-
lithen var fjernet ved Kogning med Kloralluminium, 3,51. Ved
svag Glodning blev det rosenredt. Efter Hr. Cand. polyt. Chr.
Christensens Analyse er Sammensætningen folgende:

SiO, == 30,02
Al,0, = 58,51
F — 19,53
107,06 —
Ш — = 7,80
99,26

1) [blandt de Praver af Kryolithmineralier, jeg i 1899 havde hjem med fra
Ivigtut, har Docent Boggild fundet et mindre Stykke Kryolitionit, som

143

Mineralet er altsaa Topas, hvad hverken Lysbrydningen eller
Dobbeltbrydningen modsiger.

Da Direktor Jarl paa «Øresund» saa Stykket, bemærkede
han, at dette Mineral kendte de godt paa Fabrikken. De Stykker,
der modtoges derfra, havde dog et noget andet Udseende, om-
endskont dets Forekomst i Kryolithen var overensstemmende
med Topasens. Det var blodt, Haardhed ca. 2; det var end-
videre graalig gult og blev sort ved Glodning. Ved 100° mistede
det 0,3 °/o Vand og ved svag Gladning endvidere 3 °/o. Vegt-
fylden var 2,83. Hr. Chr. Christensens Analyse gav folgende
Resultat:

SO Che epee ibd tie SSL
Al,0,(Fe, Us) = 37,0
TA a PC eT Cae == + 9,9
MIO uy: se fe: — 18
Tab ved Gledning.. = 3,3

39,7

Altsaa maa det betragtes som en speudomorphoseagtig For-
andring af Topasen!).

Таме VIII viser Vestenden af Kryolithbruddet, saaledes
som den saa ud i 1899. Hvad der særlig tiltrækker sig Op-
mærksomheden derved, er det morke rektangulære Parti, der
findes nederst i Midten af Billedet. Det er en Del af det ejen-
dommelige Parti af mørk «sort» Kryolith*) der paa skraat gaar

jeg havde medtaget, da jeg syntes, det lignede hverken Kryolith eller
Flusspath.

I Hintzes Mineralogie staar omtalt en i kemisk Henseende ganske lig-
nende Forandring af Topasen fra Stoneham. (Bd. Il, $. 127.)

Ogsaa under andre Forhold optræder en sort Kryolith; det er i Vestenden
af Bruddet, i det ejendommelige Kvarts-Feldspathparti, der dækker Kryo-
lithen mod Vest. Her optræder denne sorte Kryolith som Spalteudfyld-
ninger i Feldspathen; ja saa fuldstændig gennemtrænger den denne, at
Feldspathen pletvis ganske faar et skriftgranitagtigt Udseende. Her er
det aabenbart Feldspathen, der bestemmer «Bogstavernes» Fremkomst,
og ved at se dette spørger man uvilkaarlig sig selv: Skulde det samme
ikke ogsaa kunne være Tilfældet ved den almindelige Skriftgranit?

10°

=
—

144

gennem den hvide Kryolith. Det er som bekendt i denne
«sorte» Kryolith, at de ejendommelige store Flusspath Krystaller
findes, som Prof. Jul. Thomsen har undersogt og fundet, at
de indeholdt Helium"). Disse Flusspathkrystaller gaa 1 Al-
mindelighed under Navn af den rede eller redbrune Flusspath,
og Navnet er for saa vidt rigtigt nok, som de nesten altid ere
rodbrune af udskilt Jernglimmer eller Jærnilte. Det fore-
kommer mig imidlertid, at naar den har dette Udseende, maa
den vere sterkt forandret, da den er fuld af Sprekker, og disse
Sprekker er fulde af smaa Jernglimmerkrystaller. Lykkes det
derimod at faa en Krystal frem, der er uden Sprekker og Jern-
glimmer, er Farven graa eller brungron. De store Krystaller
vise en smuk zonal Struktur, og er Forvitringen skredet sterkt
frem, udviskes ogsaa denne tilligemed de smukke brunlige Farve-
toner, og Krystallerne bliver graa og faar en straalet Struktur.
Om denne Forandring staar i Forbindelse med Afgivelsen af
Helium er endnu ikke undersogt. Kryolithen er som bekendt
ikke ganske lidt opleselig i Vand; Johnstrup?) angiver at 1
Del deraf oploses ved 12°C. i 2730 Dele Vand, og det er der-
for merkeligt, at Bruddet, der ligger ganske ner Kysten, og
hvis Bund nu ligger omtrent 130 Fod*) under Havfladen, ег
ganske tor, kun noget Overfladevand maa daglig oppumpes.
Saa meget merkeligere er det, som Kryolithen er fuld af
haarfine Revner, der paa Krys og Tvers gennemskerer den;
men da der aldrig er paavist den ringeste Forskydning langs
disse Revner, tyder det jo paa, at der siden Massen stivnede,
ikke kan vere sket nogen vesentlig Forandring. Det at Brud-
det, uagtet Kryolithens Oploselighed og de mange haarfine
Revner, stadig vedbliver at vere tort, kan vel kun opfattes som
et Bevis for, at Kryolithen ikke direkte berøres af Havvandet,
men at det maa vere beskyttet af et Gnejsdekke. Forholdet

1) Kgl. D. Vidensk. Selsk. Forhl. 1898, S. 69 og 1904, S. 53.
2) Förhl. т. 4. Skand. Naturforsk. 12te Mode. Stockholm 1880. $. 250.
3) Ussing: Geografisk Tidskrift XIX, S. 195.

145

var et andet, da Isen og senere Vandet gik over Kryolithen.
Da dannedes der dybe Klofter langs Revnerne, der nu ere fyldte
med Morænemasse: Sand, Ler og store afrundede Sten. En
saadan Kloft ses i Midten af Billedet, til Hojre for den midterste
af Stigerne; og den Linie, der fra denne Kloft ses i Siksak at
fortsette sig hen under Enden af Rebstigen til Hojre, er en
tynd Spalte i Kloftens Forlengelse. Spalten er i Virkeligheden
lige, det er kun paa den buede Veg at den tegner sig i Siksak.
Selv har jeg kun set denne ene morænefyldte Kloft; men den
daverende Bestyrer, Hr. Edwards sagde at de havde truffet
flere ; de ere ikke vandforende.

Jeg skal ikke her komme ind paa Kryolithens Aflejrings-
maade; men kun henvise til det nederste Billede paa Tavle XV,
der er taget i Bunden af det Hul, der er brudt i Kryolithen
paa Grænsen mod Graniten, og som ses overst paa Tavle VIII,
og hvor Kryolithen paa denne Grense viser den ejendommelige
pladeformede Struktur, der er karakteristisk for, flydende Masser,
der ere stivnede ved Afkoling mod Sidestenen, og som saa ofte
ses ved plutoniske Gange, men som ikke forekommer hos
Masser der ere afsatte af Vandet.

Til Slutning maa det vere tilladt at henlede Opmerksom-
heden paa nogle farvede Pletter, jeg i 1899 fandt paa den Kry-
olith, der ved Ivigtüt stod stablet til Udskibning. Det var smaa
rosarede til rødviolette Pletter, der kun fandtes paa Kryolithen
paa de Steder, hvor denne var knust ved Slag med Hammeren.
Et Sted saas dog en saadan Plet paa Siden af et Borehul. Det
er ikke noget Farvestof der er paafort!), det er kun, ligesom at
et rodviolet Farvesker udgaar fra Stenen. Da Kryolithen altid er
knust paa det Sted, hvorpaa Farven findes, lader der sig ikke
slibe et Preparat deraf, og undersoges Pulveret under Mikro-
skopet, ses absolut intet. Farven er bestandig i Lyset; thi jeg
har haft et Stykke liggende i et Vindue mod Syd i flere Aar,

') De kunne heller ikke forvexles med de rødviolette Pletter, Fuglene af-
sætte paa den Tid af Aaret, de særlig leve af Ber.

146

uden at den har forandret sig det mindste; ligesaa er den
upaavirkelig af svage Syrer, Vinaand og Æther. Disse farvede
Pletter ere lette at finde, naar man forst er bleven opmerksom
paa dem; saaledes skrev jeg for nogle Aar siden til Bestyreren
af Bruddet og bad ham om at sende mig nogle Kryolithstykker
med disse Pletter paa, og pr. Omgaaende fik jeg en hel Del af
dem. Ogsaa Professor Ussing bragte fra sin Rejse i 1908
Ргоуег med deraf. Farven minder meget om den rodviolette
Farve, flere Mineralier, som Sodalith, Nephelin og ogsaa andre
Mineralier fra Sodalithsyeniten i Kangerdluarsuk ses at have,
i det Øjeblik de ved Klovning blottes; men som næsten oje-
blikkelig forsvinder i Dagslyset.

4. Antikvariske Iagttagelser.

Skjendt det aldrig har været min Opgave paa mine Rejser

særlig at undersoge de gamle Nordboruiner, saa har jeg dog:

altid med den storste Interesse iagttaget dem jeg traf paa.

А. Е. Nordenskiöld har fremhevet, at medens man i
Norge og Sverige ikke kender en eneste Husruin fra Slutningen
af Hedenskabet, saa findes saadanne i Grønland i Hundredevis 1).
Burde det end maaske for Grønlands Vedkommende snarere
hedde: fra de første Aarhundreder efter Kristendommens Ind-
førelse, saa forringer dette ikke Betydningen af det Faktum, at
Grønland virkelig er i Besiddelse af en Mængde Ruiner af Huse,
der ere opførte i Aarene c. 1000 til c. 1400, og som saa, vist-
nok forholdsvis hurtigt ere blevne overladte til sig selv, for
derefter, uden synderlig Indgriben fra den efterfølgende Befolk-
nings Side, at staa uforandret indtil vore Dage>).

1) Den andra Dicksonska expeditionen till Grönland. $. 367.

2) Selvfølgelig have Eskimoerne, strax efter Nordboernes Uddgen, plyndret
Husene for alt, Metal osv., som de kunde bruge, ligesom de naturligvis
ogsaa have borttaget Treverket. Spor til at saadant Treverk har veret
anvendt i gronlandske Huse eller Grave, vides dog merkelig nok, aldrig
at vere paavist. Ligeledes er det merkeligt, at der aldrig er fundet Spor
af ædle Metaller, thi disse kunne jo ikke helt forsvinde, selv om Eski-

‘piel TS ee eee

147

Blandt de Grunde, der kunne anføres mod den Opfattelse,
at de gamle Nordboere skulde vere gaaet op i Eskimoerne,
forekommer disse Ruiners Tilstand mig at vere en af de vesent-
ligste; thi allerede da Egede kom til Landet, stod Eskimoerne
fuldstændig fremmede over for dem. Aldrig have de direkte
benyttet dem; de have kun behandlet dem som andre naturlige
Stensamlinger, der kunne benyttes til at indrette Grave eller
Ildsteder i.

Nordboruinerne kunne passende deles i 3 Grupper; forst
Kakortokkirken ved Julianehaab, der ved sin Arkitektur adskiller
sig saa fuldstendig fra alle de andre Nordboruiner, at Tanken
uvilkaarlig anviser den Plads som opført i den allerseneste Tid,
hvori Kolonierne have bestaaet, saaledes som jo ogsaa allerede
Graah har antydet det. Den er vistnok langt yngre end den
Tid, vi kende fra de gronlandske Sagaer, og stammer vel fra
den sidste Tid, hvorom vi kun vide, at der sendtes Bisper til
Landet for mulig at redde Religionen og derigennem Befolk-
ningen. En saadan Biskop, der var fuldstændig fremmed for
Landet og Traditionen i Landet, kan meget vel tænkes at have
bygget en ny Kirke paa et saadant Sted, der ligger centralt for
hele Osterbygden, men som er uden Forbindelse med de gamle
Centrer: Gardar og Brattahlid. Havde Befolkningen selv skullet
bygge en ny moderne Kirke, vilde de naturligvis, Traditionen
tro, have bygget den paa et af de to sidstnevnte Steder. Kt
Udtryk for den Folelse af forholdsvis Nyhed som flere Rejsende
have faaet, er ogsaa det, at de have fremsat den Formodning,
at Kirken aldrig er bleven færdig. Sans comparaison spiller
altsaa denne Kirkeruin samme Rolle som Kirkeböruinen paa
Færøerne; men medens det i 1899 lykkedes at faa opklaret naar

moerne have benyttet dem; og hvorfor er der i Grenland aldrig fundet
hengemte Skatte?, der var dog, under de idelige Fejder og senere under
Kampene saavel med Eskimoerne som Seroverne, Grund nok til at hen-
gemme Verdigenstande. z

1) Privatboligen paa Island. S. 168.

148

denne Ruin er bygget, saa er Udsigten til at faa opklaret, naar
Kakortokruinen blev bygget jo desto verre vel omtrent lig Nul.

Efter Valtyr Gudmundsen omtales Vinduer med Glas, —
og man kan vel nok forudsette, at der har veret Glasvinduer i
Kakortokkirken, — paa Island forst ved Aaret 1195, og ser man
hen til Forholdet mellem Island og Gronland den Gang, kan
man vel. nok gaa ud fra, at Glasvinduer ere komne betydelig
senere til Grønland end til Island.

Endnu et Forhold tyder paa, at Kakortokkirken er af sen
Oprindelse, og det er det, at det er den eneste Nordboruin,
hvorom Eskimoerne have et Sagn om dens Opforelse.

Saaledes siger Giesecke'), og det samme siger Vahl”),
at Gronlænderne havde et Sagn om, at Stenene til Kakortok-
kirken vare tagne paa Ujarartarfik Øerne ud for Lichtenau-
Fjord.

Uagtet Giesecke til en Slags Bestyrkelse af dette Sagn
anfører: «Zum wenigstens sind die dortigen Bausteine, welche
ich sah, theils Glimmer — theils Hornblendeschiefer, welche
sich am Redekammen nicht so tauglich finden», saa er der dog
næppe nogen Tvivl om, at Stenene til Kirken, der forøvrigt slet
ikke er bygget af Glimmer eller Hornblendeskifer, ere tagne
ved Foden af det nærliggende Kirkefjeld. Derimod turde der
maaske ligge noget andet til Grund for Sagnet, nemlig det at
de gamle Nordboere mulig kunne have taget Kalksten paa
Ujarartarfik Øerne til Mørtel til "Kirken. Mortel findes der
nemlig, om end nu meget sparsomt i denne Ruin’), og det er
ogsaa den eneste hvori saadant er paavist, og paa Ujarartarfik
Øerne findes utvivlsomt en Kalksten; thi dels omtalte den nu
afdøde Peter Eberlin, at der fandtes Kalksten dér, og dels

1) Dagbog under 17de Juli 1809.

?) Ms. Dagbog i Botanisk Haves Bibliothek.

3) Ligesom Graah fandt ogsaa jeg nogle Stykker sandblandet Kalk mellem
Stenene i Kirkeruinen, og ligesom hans Stykker gik tabt, før de bleve
undersøgte, gik ogsaa mine Stykker tabt ved Christiansborgs Brand.

149

fik jeg i 1876 i Julianehaab flere Stykker Kalksten der angaves
at hidrøre derfra. — Angaaende Kirkeruinens Arkitektur har
Hr. Dr. phil. M. Mackeprang velvilligst meddelt folgende:

«Af selve Kirkeruinen!) er det vanskeligt at drage nogen
Slutning om dens Opforelsestid, da Formerne ere saa yderlig
simple. Hvad Grundplanen angaar, er det den fra Island laante
Form, hvor Skib og Kor danner et eneste ligehojt Rum. Den
optreder meget tidlig i Moderlandet Norge, men holder sig til
Gengeld lenge, helt ind i Gothiken. Det store fladbuede Vindue
paa Ostveggen kunde i og for sig tyde paa en sen Tid, men
der maa dog gores opmerksom paa, at i norsk Arkitektur
træffes Fladbuen baade i 12te og 13de Aarhundrede; og de
andre Aabningers Konstruktion med den flade Overligger peger
afgjort i denne Retning. Snarest skulde jeg derfor tro, at
Kirken var opfort i 12te, maaske 134е Aarhundrede. Jeg maa
dog tilfoje, at norsk kirkelig Stenarkitektur fra Middelalderens
sidste Aarhundreder endnu er et meget lidt opdyrket Felt.»

Nest den enestaaende Kirkeruin ved Kakortok, er det serlig
Ruinerne med de cyclopiske Mure, der tiltrekke sig Opmerk-
somheden. Dog kan det ikke siges, at Maalet med at sammen-
føje disse mægtige Sten, har noget Sted været at tilvejebringe
en hel cyclopisk Bygning; thi i Reglen er det kun den ene
Side eller den ene Ende af Bygningen der er bygget af saa
overordentlig store Sten, at man undres over at de har kunnet
magte dem; den anden Side eller Ende af Huset er da i Reglen
opført af somme Tider endog ret smaa Sten, saa disse Partier
nu som oftest ere nedfaldne. Exempler herpaa ere den be-
kendte store Ruin ved Stranden ved Igaliko, der i sin Tid gik
under Navnet Brattahliö, og Ruinen paa Øen ud fra Igaliko.
Nederste Billede paa Tavle XVI viser denne sidstnævnte Ruin,
hvor det, ved Sammenligning med Figuren ses, hvilke store

1) Angaaende Afbildninger af denne, da kan henvises til Tavlerne III—V
i Graahs Rejse til Gronlands Ostkyst; PI. I i Amerikanist Congressens
ste Mode i København 1883 og Tavlerne XVII—XX i M. о. G. VI.

150

Sten der her i denne, Ostenden: er anvendt; medens de to
Rum i Ruinens Vestende, ere opforte af mindre Sten, hvorfor
store Partier af denne forlengst ere faldne sammen.

Man faar Indtrykket af, at de gamle Nordboere have be-
nyttet de Sten, der fandtes paa det Sted, hvor de onskede at
bygge, og at de saa forst have stillet de storste Sten sammen,
eller endog bygget op ad den storste af dem, som om det var
en fast Klippe, og saa siden opfort Murene af mindre og mindre
Sten, eftersom de storre slap op, eller det blev for langt at
hente flere. Jo mindre Stenene bleve, jo mere synes Gres-
torvene at have været anvendte. Derved at der er benyttet en
stor Sten som fast Udgangspunkt, kan der ofte fremkomme
ejendommelige nisheformede Fordybninger i Murene, uden at
saadanne have veret tilsigtede. Saaledes f. Ex. den Nishe, der
1 М. о. G. ViggTavle XII er vist i Fig. Va. At der er tyet til
Stensamlingerne for at have Materialet til Husbygningen ved
Haanden er naturligt, hvorfor Ruinerne hyppigt findes i Ner-
heden af de fra Klipperne nedskredne eller de af Elvene sam-
menskyllede Sten. Men selv om Gletscherelvene senere kan
have forstyrret en eller anden Ruin, saa gaar Giesecke dog
for vidt, naar han tilskriver saadanne Forstyrrelser, helt eller
delvis, de gamle Kolonisters Tilintetgorelse !).

At der ogsaa kan være bygget huslignende Bygninger af

1) Giesecke: Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy Vol. XIV. 1825.
Antiquities. S. 50: All the ruins of Norwegian houses, and there were
more than fifty which I examined, were surrounded by immense masses
of rocks, probably precipitated from the summits of the adjacent moun-
tains, and heaped together in the most fantastic groups, the places of
fracture being sometimes so fresh, that the points from which they are
broken are distinctly observable. Places of desolation of this kind are
frequently met with in the mountains, connected with the sea by water-
falls, which are precipitated, with tremendous noise and destructive
velocity headlong from the rocks, covered with glaciers. I have no
doubt but that such a revolution, caused by bursting glaciers and fol-
lowing innundations, has affected this dreadful chaos; and that perhaps
the Norwegian settlers perished, and were buried with their cattle in
the ruins»,

151

ikke anden Grund end den, at et udmærket Materiale fandtes
paa Stedet, i Forbindelse med, at Stedet ved sin Beliggenhed
at «Ud-
kigsruinen» ved Umiausat i Tunugdliarfik er et Exempel paa’).

indbed til at bygge et «Lysthus», forekommer det mig,
Det er en c. 30 Meter bred Porphyrgang, der her gaar gennem
Graniten, og hvis blottede Partier ere sprengte i rektangulere
Stykker, der ligefrem indbyde til at «bygge Hus» af. Uden som
et Slags Lysthus for de nerboende Folk, kan denne Buin nemlig
neppe have haft nogen som helst Betydning, hverken som Pak-
hus eller «Fæstning». Udsigten herfra er fortrinlig, baade ud og
ind ad Fjorden. Naar der tidligere er brugt Udtrykket «Udkigs-
bus» om lignende fritliggende og раа fremspringende Punkter
liggende Ruiner, som ved Kagsiarsuk i Igaliko-Fjord og paa
Toppen af Kistefjeldet ved Igaliko*), da troer jeg ikke herved
Бог tænkes paa noget som helst krigerisk; men kun paa, at
det er naturligt, at der bygges skermende Mure mod Vinden
paa Steder, hvorfra der haves god Udsigt.

Hvad endelig Bygningsmaaden angaar, da er det interessant
at se, hvorledes den oftomtalte Ruin paa Skeret ved Igaliko er
opført. De to nederste Billeder paa Tavle X vise denne Ruin,
dels som den ligger paa dette Sker, der ved Hojvande er nesten
helt overfyldt, saa det ser ud som om den flød paa Vandet”),
og dels Sydmuren af selve Ruinen. Den østlige Halvdel er
nemlig opbygget af skarpkantede Sandstenblokke, der ere brudte
paa selve Skeret, der bestaar af Sandsten; medens den vestlige
Halvdel er opført af lose afrundede Blokke mest af Grund-
fjeldet*). Da det er utænkeligt, at der er slæbt store Rullesten

1) M. 0. G. VI. Таме УП og Compte Rendu du Congrès internat. des Amé-
ricanistes. 5te Session. Copenhague 1883. $. 110.

2M 076. ХУ Si 353.

3) М. о. С. II S. 40. Da jeg i 1899 besøgte dette Skær, 23 Aar efter at
jeg forst betraadte det, fandt jeg Forholdene fuldstændig uforandrede.
Tangranden strakte sig ind under Ruinens nederste Sten; men ikke én
Tangplante kunde jeg finde paa disse.

1) En Del af,den vestlige Halvdel af Ruinen ses til venstre paa Billedet.

152

ud paa dette Skær, for at bygge Hus af dem, kan man vel kun
tænke sig, at Skæret oprindelig var belagt med en Morænerest
af store Sten. Disse ere saa alle, paa en eneste nær, der ses
paa Billedet, benyttede til Opforelsen af Husets Vestende.
Enten kan man nu tænke sig, at Ruinen oprindelig ikke har
været storre end den Halvdel der er opfort af de lose afrundede
Sten, og at den saa senere er bleven udvidet, ved at der skaffedes
Materiale fra et Brud i Sandstenen; eller, man kan maaske ogsaa
tænke sig, at Bygningen er opfort samtidig af to Partier, et der
benyttede de lose Sten, der fandtes paa Skæret, og et der forst
maatte bryde Stenene. Da det vel er utænkeligt, at der senere
kan være fort Sten bort fra Skæret, kan man altsaa ogsaa være
sikker paa, at Huset ikke kan have været hojere end Ruinen
nu er!) Hvad Meningen kan have været med at bygge et Hus
paa dette Skær”), skal jeg ikke udtale mig om, men henpege
paa, at et lignende Forhold findes paa et andet Sted, men
rigtignok under noget andre Forhold. Det er den Ruin der
ses paa det overste Fotografi paa Tavle X og som findes i en
lille So, noget til Fjelds ved Ivsormiut i Tunugdliarfik?). Paa
Grund af at Terrainet om Søen er saa fladt, falder Øen paa
Fotografiet tildels sammen med Landet. Om denne Ruin, der
kun er tilgengelig ved Svomning, hvis man da ikke vil lade

1) Arktander fandt 1751 (Samleren VI. S. 1216) at Hojden var «3 Alen, en-
del Steder lidt derover»; og jeg har maalt, paa det Hojeste, 6 Fod 9
Tommer. I 1899 saa jeg ved Hjælp af mine Fotografier fra 1876, at
Ruinens Nordside, der er opfort af mindre Rullesten, var bleven noget
forstyrret i de mellemliggende 23 Aar.

Ogsaa ved den ovenfor omtalte Ruin, der findes paa Øen ved Siden af,
er Forholdet det, at Højvandet gaar til Ruinen. Tangranden ligger 2,5
Meter under den Helle hvorpaa Ruinens sydlige Hjørne hviler. End-
videre kan bemærkes, at paa den store Sten (ikke Sandsten) der ligger
Vest for Øen, naar Tang og Balanranden op til c. 6dm fra Toppen.
Naar Dr. C. Pingel (2det skandinaviske Naturforskermøde 1840. S. 354)
anfører et Sagn om, at Skæret skal have været større og været land-
fast, da vise Dybdeforholdene, at der ikke kan have ligget noget positivt
til Grund derfor.

3) Se Kapt. Bruun i M. o. G. XVI. S. 278.

be
—

153

Kajakker bære derop, beretter Cand. Theilgaard, at Vandet
om Øen er dybt; Ruinen er 10 Skridt lang og 6 Skridt bred,
udvendig maalt. Der er en Doraabning paa den sondre Lang-
side, nærmest den østre Ende. Ruinen staar tvers over Øen,
og begge Ender af den beskylles af Vandet. Ostenden er for-
trinlig bygget af godt tilpassede firkantede Granitkvadre. Vest-
enden er derimod sterkt sammenfalden. Hvorfor der her, saa
højt til Fjelds, ег opført en saa solid Bygning i en lille So, er
mærkeligt; thi vel er den vel nok over Halvdelen af Aaret til-
gengelig paa Isen, men en stor Del af Aaret maatte der Baad
til for at komme ud til den, hvis man da ikke, som Cand.
Theilgaard, vilde svomme derud. At der i Tidens Leb skulde
have dannet sig en So om Ruinen, som ikke havde veret der,
da den opfortes, er der Intet der tyder paa.

Oprindelig har vel alle disse Bygninger været opførte med
Grestory mellem Stenene, ligesom der ogsaa kan paavises Mure,
der helt ere opførte af Grestorv, hvilende paa et Underlag af
Sten. En saadan ses nederst paa Tavle XVII. Det er Muren
i den Ruin Kaptain D. Bruun udgravede i 1894, og som han
har afbildet S. 219 i M. о. G. XVI. I de 5 Aar der vare for-
lobne mellem Bruuns Udgravninger og mit Besøg i 1899, er
denne Græstorvmurs indre Struktur kommen frem, og Siksak-
linierne paa Fotografiet vise tydeligt, at Gr&storvene 1 sin Tid
bleve sammenstillede paa lignende Maade paa Gronland, som de
endnu opstilles paa Island).

Hvor Forholdene have været anderledes, har Murkonstruk-
tionen ogsaa været en anden. Saaledes paa den c. 26 m. høje
Havstok N. for Kordlortok i Nordenden af Tunugdliarfik. Her
har Materialet kun været mindre Sten og Grus, hvorfor Siderne
af Murene have været opførte af de største af Stenene, medens
den Indre har været udfyldt af Grus, saavidt man da kan dømme

1) Se D. Bruun: Gammel Bygningsskik paa de islandske Gaarde. Aars-
beretning for Foreningen til norske Fortidsmindesmærkers Bevaring.
1907. S. 8.

154

efter de ringe Grundvolde der findes. Der er ogsaa det ejen-
dommelige ved flere af disse Ruiner, at de ikke ligge parallel
med Havstokkens Retning, men lodret derpaa, saa den ene
Ende af Huset synes at have maattet ligge betydeligt lavere end
den anden.

Paa denne Havstok findes ogsaa nogle ejendommelige ellip-
tiske Stenlegninger; se overste Billede paa Tavle XVI, der
bringer Tanken hen paa, at de mulig kunne vere Begravelser.
Den her afbildede er dannet af skarptkantede Sten og meget
uregelmessig, hvorimod jeg paa en anden Havstok ved Hvæsse-
stensfjeld, har fundet dem fuldstændig regelmæssig dannet,
som langstrakte Ellipser. De vare dannede af større Sten end
dem, der var almindelige paa Havstokken, saa de traadte skarpt
frem. Stenene i 3 af dem bleve fjernede, og der blev søgt
indtil 14/2 m. ned i de underliggende Strandsten, men intet
fandtes").

1) I 1879 stødte jeg ved Cap Cranstown paa Svartenhuk-Halvø i Nord-
Grønland paa lignende elliptiske Stensætninger, M. о. С. У. $. 21.

19101909:

Таме VI.

Tavle VI.

Igaliko-Sletten set fra Skæret med Ruinen.

Over den midterste Sandstenshelle i Stranden skimtes,
paa Sletten inden derfor, Nordboruinerne og Gronlænder-
husene. Paa begge Sider af disse ses hævede Havstokke.
Navnlig til Venstre, ved Foden af Nulupkakak, ses de
karakteristiske Klofter, der gaa lodret paa Kysten og som
give god Anledning til at studere Sandstenens og Diabasens
indbyrdes Lejringsforhold.

au pam 79.49349 104} 428 U2/21S-OYUDÊT

“auo19 9 }ц084 :1d440404

Wa SE
"AIXXX PUEIUOIT) wo 19S[2[2PPaA

Tavle VII.

Fjeldet Nunasarnak set fra Odden ved Ipiutak
Tunugdliarfik.

‘yoynidyT pan uappQ V4] jas урилозрит м

*au0:9 7 14084 ‘1d4}0304

DHEA SEAL "AIXXX PUP[UØJE) Wo 19519] эррэу

Tavle VIII.

Vestenden af Kryolithbruddet, Ivigtüt. 1899.

Det morke, rektangulære Parti i Midten nær Grubens
Bund antyder omtrent den Maade, hvorpaa den sorte Kryo-
lith strækker sig gjennem den hvide.

Den smalle Kloft, der i Midten af Billedet ses til Hojre
for den lange Stige, er en Kloft, der er fyldt med Moræne-
masse og maa være dannet, da Isen gik hen derover. Den
siksakformede Stribe, der fra denne Kloft strekker sig hen
under Rebstigen, ег en smallere Fortsættelse af denne Kloft
og er i Virkeligheden retlinet; men paa Grund af Væggens
Krumninger tager den sig anderledes ud. Kløften øverst
Ш Højre for den korte Stige er et kunstigt Brud.

Meddelelser om Grønland XXXIV. Tav. VIII.

Fototypi. Pacht & Crone.

Vestenden af Kryolihtbruddet Ivigtut.

Tavle IX.

Overste Billede: Et storre Isfjeld, der er sammen-
sat af lutter kantede, paa Overfladen afrundede Isstykker.
Saadanne Isfjelde dannes om Vinteren, naar Kalvisen ikke
kan flyde bort paa Grund af, at Fjorden er frossen, og som
derfor maa ophobes foran Bræenden.

Nederste Billede viser Bræisens kornede Struktur,
saaledes som denne under Smeltningen viser sig 1 gjennem-
gaaende Lys. Karakteristisk ere de ejendommelige Finger-
endeaftryk lignende Figurer.

Meddelelser om Grønland XXXIV. Tav. IX.

< <

Et Breccie-Isfjeld.

Breisens kornede Struktur.

Fototypi. Pacht & Crone

Tavle X.

Overste Billede: Nordboruin paa et Skær i en lille
[1455 oppe paa Fjeldene ved Ivsormiut 1 Tunugdliarfik.

Nederste Billede: Nordboruin paa Skæret ved Igaliko.
I Baggrunden ses Fjeldet Iganek. Det bagved liggende
Kistefjeld er skjult af Taagen.

Det mellemste Billede viser den østlige Ende af
sidstnevnte Ruin. Denne Ende af Ruinen er opbygget af
skarpkantede Kvarsitblokke, der ere brudte paa Skæret,
medens Vestenden af Ruinen, hvoraf der ses en Del, er op-
fort af de lose, afrundede Morenesten, der fandtes paa Skæret.

Meddelelser om Grønland XXXIV. ау ме

Sie

Ruin paa et Skær i en Indso. Ivsormiut.

Ruin paa Skeret ved Igaliko.

Skeret med Ruinen ved Igaliko.

Fototypi. Pacht & Crone,

Tavle XI.

Tegninger og Fotografier af Kvartskrystaller fra Narsar-
suk ved Igaliko, der formentlig vise den sjeldne Basisflade.

Fig. | ег en Tegning af еп 6-sidig Kvartsdruse, hvor
svagt buede Flader ses paa Basis’ Plads.

Fig. 2 viser en saadan Flade forsterret с. 10 Gange.
Karakteristisk er det chalcedonagtige Udseende.

Fig. 3—5 ere Fotografier af en storre Krystal.

Fig. 3 viser en Pyramideflade.

Fig. 4 Prismefladen, og

Fig. 5 viser en ujævn Flade, der sidder paa Basis’
Plads, og som formentlig er sammensat af en Mengde
Basisflader, dem med de smaa Forhejninger, og endvidere
Tillob til Pyramideflader. (Tegningerne ere af Hr. stud. mag.
V. W. Petersson).

Meddelelser om Стошапа XXXIV. Там. ХТ.

Fig. 5. Basis. |,

Fototypi: Pacht & Crone,

Tavle XII.

Øverste Billede: Isbarrieren udenfor Mundingen af
den lille Isfjord Korok i Tunugdliarfik. Den dannes af Is-
fjelde, der ere strandede paa en formentlig Endemoræne.

Nederste Billede: En stærkt forvittrende Granit, der
danner en Odde mellem Nugarsuk og Sidlisit i Tunugdliarfik.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [K. J. V.Steenstrup.] Там MN

Isbariæren ved Koroks Isfjord.

Forvittrende Granit. Nær Sidlisit.

i |
res ze

u
-

=
Zu Fl
AJ

4
j sæ)
row

t=.
р

з. i FIN i
à 4 #
5
$
=
x -
.
в Ar
а Te
| Ps ы
ir
u
В
—

- № 7
и
Fr |
+
i i
. Fhe ze
|
LL 3
— - i NH
О A
«
a i -.
så т И |

Tavle XIII.

Begge Billeder vise den røde Sandsten; det øverste,
saaledes som denne viser sig i sin tyndskifrede Form og
uforstyrret Lejring i Slibestensfjeld, Sidlisit; og det neder-
ste, saaledes som Sandstenen undertiden kan vere steerkt
bøjet, sandsynligvis paavirket af den gjennembrydende Diabas.
Pudtlisek ved Igaliko.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [К. J. У. Steenstrup.] Tav. XIII.

Den rede Sandsten. Putdlisek. Igaliko.

Tavle XIV.

Den røde Sandsten.

Det øverste Billede viser det Landskab, der frem-
kommer, hvor denne Sandsten i horizontal Lejring findes
over storre Strækninger. Ipiutak i Tunugdliarfik.

Det nederste Billede viser Sandstenens Struktur og
giver en Forestilling om det ejendommelige Udseende, den
har, hvor den rede Farve pletvis er afbrudt af gule Pletter.
Sidlisit 1 Tunugdliarfik.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [K. J. У. Steenstrup.] Tav. XIV.

Den rede Sandsten. Ipiutak.

Den rede Sandsten. Sidlisit.

Tavle XV.

Øverste Billede: Sgjleformet Afsondring i Diabasen;
rimeligvis en Del af en intrusiv Gang. Musartüt i Tunug-
dliarfik.

Nederste Billede: Kryolithens pladeformede Struktur
mod den overliggende Granit; formentlig fremkommen ved
den smeltede Masses Afkoling mod Sidestenen. Kryolith-
bruddet. Ivigtüt (1899).

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [K. J. У. Steenstrup.] Тау. XV.

Sejleformel Struktur. Diabas. Musartüt.

Kryolithens lagdelle Struktur mod Graniten. Ivigtut. 1899.

Tavle XVI.

Øverste Billede: En af de ejendommelige elliptiske
Stenbelægninger, der af og til findes paa Havstokkene ved
Kysterne af Tunugdliarfik. Den her fremstillede er fra
Kagsiarsuk og er uregelmæssig sammensat af kantede Sten.
Andre som ved Slibestensfjeld, ere regelmæssig elliptiske
og sammensat af storre afrundede Sten, der fremtræde

skarpt mod Havstokkens mindre Sten.
$

Nederste Billede: @stenden af den lange Ruin paa
Øen (ikke Skeret) ved Igaliko.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [K. J. V. Steenstrup.] Tav. XVI.

Elliptisk Stensetning. Kagsiarsuk.

Oslenden af Ruinen paa Øen. Igaliko.

Tavle XVII.

Overste Billede: Et sjeldent stort Exemplar af en
krybende Birk paa Hellerne ved Kagsiarsuk 1 Tunugdliarfik.
Stammen var 8 m lang og ner Roden 29 cm i Omkreds.

Nederste Billede: Strukturen i en gammel Jordmur,
der viser, hvorledes denne har veret opfort af 1 Siksak
stillede Grestorv. Tingimiut 1 Sermilik.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [K. J. У. Steenstrup.] Tav. XVII.

Krybende Birketre. Kagsiarsuk.

Husmur af Grestorv. Tingimiul.

Tavle XVIII.

De gamle nordiske Ruiner i Grønland, navnlig dem
der direkte have tjent til Beboelse, ere i Reglen saa stærkt
sammenfaldne og bevoxede med Krat, at et Fotografi sjeldent
kan vise noget. Navnlig ere nogle af de mest karakteri-
stiske Bygninger, Staldene med Stenplader som Skillerum,
aldrig i en saadan Stand at de kunne fotograferes med
Udbytte. For at give et Begreb om, hvorledes en saadan
Stald og et tarveligt af Stenplader opbygget Hus med
Stengærde omkring, kunne se ud, hidsættes her to Bille-
der af saadanne Bygninger fra Hgjfjeldet ved Røros 1 Norge.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [K. J. V. Steenstrup.] Тау. XVIII.

Hus ved Reros. Norge.

Stald ved Reros. Norge.

Tavle XIX.

Overste Billede viser Hojlandet mellem Fjordene
Kangerdluarsuk og Tunugdliarfik og kan tjene til at give
et Billede af det ode Udseende, Landskabet her har paa
Grund af Sodalithsyenitens stærke Forvittring.

Nederste Billede viser Östsiden af Bunden af Kan-
gerdluarsuk. Fjeldet i Baggrunden er det nordligste af
Iviangusat-Fjeldene, der naar en Højde af с. 800m. Ogsaa
dette Parti bestaar af Sodalithsyenit, der er næsten fuld-
stændig uden Vegetation. De ejendommelige bolgede Linier
vise en Afvexling i Lagene af mørke og lyse Mineralier,
fremkomne under Afkolingen af de engang smeltede Masser.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [К. J. У. Steenstrup.] Tavs XIX

Fjeldparti mellem Kangerdluarsuk og Tunugdliarfik.

Fjeldside i Kangerdluarsuk.

Tavle XX.

ls
3

Tavle XX.

Overste Billede: I Baggrunden ses Fjeldet Nunasar-
nausak i Kangerdluarsuk, hvis nederste Del bestaar af
Granit, medens den gverste Del bestaar af afvexlende Sand-
sten og Diabas. Det lyse Parti i Forgrunden til højre er
den stærkt forvittrende Sodalithsyenit.

Nederste Billede: Parti af den lille ©, der ligger
ved Foden af Nunasarnausak, der danner Baggrunden. I
Midten ses den øverste udkilende Del af en Gang, der
fortsætter sig skraat ned under Vandfladen og som for en
stor Del er udfyldt med Eudialyt. For neden ses noget af
Tang- og Balanranden. (1899).

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [K. J. V. Steenstrup.] Tav. XX

Fra Oen i Kangerdluarsuk.

Tavle XXI.

Tavle XXI.
Overste Billede viser Vestsiden af Bugten ved Nau-
jakasik i Tunugdliarfik.

Nederste Billede viser Sodalithsyenitens bænkede
Struktur, saaledes som denne er blottet i en næsten lodret
Væg ved Naujakasik i Tunugdliarfik.

Medd. om Grenl. XXXIV. [K. J. V. Steenstrup.] Tav. XXI.

Fra Naujakasik. Tunugdliarfik.

1%
x D
ve,
LE er
we
1
1
à
ED
vil
..
N
i
Te
y
.
Ÿ ‘
{
4

\ z
ER

Beretning

Undersøgelserne af Jakobshavns-Isfjord
og dens Omgivelser

fra Foraaret 1903 til Efteraaret 1904.

M. С. Engell.

1909.

XXXIV. 11

Hensigten med Ekspeditionen var i Hovedsagen at fort-
sætte de Undersogelser, jeg havde paabegyndt i Sommeren 1902,
og om hvilke der er berettet her i Meddelelserne samt for et enkelt
Punkts Vedkommende tillige i Geographische Mitteilungen 1903.

Det var oprindelig bestemt, at jeg skulde rejse med Bark-
skibet «Geres». Men da dette allerede skulde afgaa fra Koben-
havn den 9de Maj, opnaaede jeg ved Hr. Direkter Rybergs
Velvilje at faa Tilladelse til at rejse med Direktoratets Damp-
skib «Godthaab». Afrejsen fandt først Sted den 5te Juni fra
Gronlandske Handels Plads. Uagtet jeg altsaa kom til at rejse
en Maaned senere fra Danmark, viste det sig, at jeg dog naaede
Egedesminde Dagen, for «Geres» passerede dette Sted.

Efter en i alle Henseender behagelig Rejse kom vi paa
Hojde med Kap Farvel den 184е Juni. Her laa Storisen et
langt Stykke til Sos, c. 18 Somil (33—34 km). Julianehaab-
Bugt helt op til Nunarssuit var ligeledes fyldt med Is,
saa langt man kunde se fra Udkigstenden. Kaptajn Bang for-
sogte desuagtet at komme gennem Isen for at kunne folge
Løbene langs Land. Forsøget maatte dog opgives, efter et
Etmaals Forløb, hovedsagelig paa Grund af Taage. For mig,
der aldrig tidligere havde set Storisen paa nærmere Hold, var
denne Tur gennem Isen meget interessant. For det meste var
de enkelte Stykker flade, med en ringe Højde over Havfladen
(‘/2 Meter eller mindre); Arealet varierede meget, men gennem-
gaaende var der ingen Stykker over 100 m. Nu og da saa
man en sort Plet paa Isflagerne ; Pletten viste sig at være Sæl-

LIE

158

hunde, der styrtede sig i Vandet, naar Skibet nærmede sig.
Forevrigt er den store Hastighed, hvormed en Isflage kan
skyde sig ud i de aabne Partier mellem Isen og saaledes
sperre Vejen for Skibet, forbloffende. Den viser, at der maa
vere sterke Stromninger i Vandet, hvorved der skabes Pres.
Med Undtagelse af Sæler bemærkedes ellers intet Dyreliv i
Storisen.

Det forste Sted, vi betraadte i Gronland, var Kolonien Godt-
haab, hvortil vi kom den 21de Juni, altsaa efter en Rejse paa
kun 16 Dage. Da Direktoren skulde inspicere Kolonien blev
Skibet liggende et Par Dage. For at udnytte Tiden foretog jeg
Dagen efter en Ekskursion til Lille Malene, en Gnejsknold,
der ligger tæt ved Godthaab, for at se lidt paa Vegetationen.

Vinteren havde i hele Grønland været meget stræng. Sent
paa Foraaret var der tillige faldet meget Sne. Overalt omkring
Godthaab og endog paa de smaa lave Øer udenfor laa der
endnu store Snedriver i Kløfter og paa Afsatser, og Nordskraa-
ningerne var næsten helt sneklædte. Paa Sydskraaningerne var
Sneen derimod ved at smelte bort, og Smeltevandet sivede
overalt nedover og gennem Vegetationsdækket. Som Følge af
disse Forhold var Plantevæksten endnu meget langt tilbage. Kun
faa Arter og Eksemplarer havde naaet at udvikle og udfolde
Knopper og Blomster og det endda kun paa de gunstigste Lo-
kaliteter — nemlig enkelte Sydskraaninger. Den Plante, der
var længst fremme, var selvfølgelig Empetrum nigrum; den
var nu næsten helt afblomstret; kun ganske enkelte Eksem-
plarer stod endnu med støvfyldte Knapper. Vaccinium uligi-
nosum og Salix groenlandica stod med modne Støvknapper,
ligeledes Salix herbacea. Paderokken, Æquisetum vulgare,
havde modne Sporer. Loisleuria procumbens og Diapensia
lapponica stod med Blomsterknopper færdige til at springe ud.
Betula nana stod i Knop; kun faa havde udfoldet Knopperne
og stod med modne Rakler. Salix glauca stod derimod næsten
allevegne kun i Knop. Ledum palustre og Phyllodoce coerulea

159

var ikke engang udstyrede med synlige Blomsterstande. Sammen-
ligner jeg dette med mine lagttagelser fra Jakobshavn den
22de Juni 1902, var der en meget betydelig Forskel i Plante-
vekstens Udvikling — i Godthaabs Disfavor — uagtet Jakobs-
havn ligger paa с. 69° п. Вг., medens Godthaab ligger раа 63°
n. Br. Ved Jakobshavn var paa samme Tid i 1902 alle de
ovenfor nævnte Planter meget lengere fremme.

Den 23de om Eftermiddagen lettede «Godthaab» og satte
Kursen mod den neste Koloni nord for Godthaab, Sukker-
toppen, hvortil vi ankom Dagen efter, den 24de, tidlig om
Morgenen. I Sukkertoppens umiddelbare Omegn var der
nesten ingen Sne, og Vegetationen var lengere fremme end det
1° sydligere liggende Godthaab. Dette beror hovedsagelig
paa, at Sukkertoppen ligger serdeles lunt, beskyttet mod
kolde Vinde af hoje Fjelde; men Havstromningerne udenfor
spiller sikkert ogsaa en Rolle.

Om Aftenen samme Dag, som vi var kommet, afgik Skibet
til de neste Kolonier: Holstensborg og Egedesminde; et
vedholdende Regnvejr forhindrede i Holstensborg en ner-
mere Besigtigelse af Vegetationen. Sne var her meget mindre
af end i Godthaab. Efter at vi den 27de om Eftermiddagen
var kommet til Egedesminde gik jeg fra Borde. «Godthaab»
skulde nemlig videre nord paa til Upernivik for at hente Be-

setningen fra et af Isen ituskruet Hvalfangerskib — forevrigt
det fra Nordenskiölds Færd saa berømte «Vega». — Forst
paa Tilbagevejen vilde «Godthaab» anlobe Jakobshavn.

Da jeg altsaa blev sat af her i Egedesminde — ganske
vist uformodet — besluttede jeg mig nu, da der maaske

var Lejlighed til at komme ind i Aulatsivik-Fjord. De
шаге Dele af denne Fjord er kun delvis kortlagt; Jensen
og Korneru р har passeret dens sydlige Gren. I den nord-
lige har Nordenskiöld været med «Sophie». Det var særlig
til denne Del af Fjorden, jeg gerne vilde frem. Dels havde det
sin Interesse at se, om Gletscheren havde forandret sin Beliggenhed

160

siden Nordenskiölds Tid, dels vilde jeg forsage at kort-
legge Grensen mellem Indlandsisen og Landet, hvorved jeg fik
Forbindelse mellem det i 1902 undersogte Orpigssôk. Ende-
lig vilde jeg forsoge at faa afgjort om det flade Land mellem
Aulatsivik-Fjord og Disko-Bugt havde en lignende Oprin-
delse som det flade Land syd for Klavshavn.

I Anledning af Direktørens Ankomst kom der adskillige
Konebaade til Kolonien fra Bopladserne i Omegnen: for saa
vidt var det ikke vanskeligt at faa fat i en Konebaad. En af de
Gronlendere, der var kommet til Kolonien med Konebaad og
som hørte hjemme i Kangarssuatsiak, Boplads mellem
Egedesminde og Aulatsivik-Fjord, sagde han kendte Fjor-
den rigtig godt og tilbod at vere Styrer. Som vi senere skal
se var enten hans Kendskab ikke stor eller ogsaa havde han
— diplomatisk — ikke udtalt sig nærmere om Fjorden; den
var nemlig, som jeg senere erfarede, paa denne Tid altid stu-
vende fuld af Is.

Den 29de rejste vi syd paa gennem Egedesminde Sker-
gaard og overnattede paa en mindre 9, Inugsutusut. Vejret
var ægte Strædevejr, raakoldt og taaget, meget forskelligt fra det
Vejr, jeg var vant til ved Jakobshavns-Isfjord. Sne var der her
iEgedesminde-Distriktet kun lidt tilbage af, hovedsagelig
kun paa Nordskraaninger og i Kløfter, hvor der var føget sær-
ligt meget sammen. Vegetationen var ogsaa her betydeligt
længere fremme end ved Godthaab; det maa dog samtidig
erindres, at Tiden var rykket en Uge frem. Salix glauca stod
med helt udfoldede Knopper og med modne Rakler, Betula
nana ligeledes. Silene acaulis blomstrede.

Fra Inugsutusut sejlede vi videre syd paa til Aulat-
sivik-Fjord, men allerede et Stykke indenfor Mundingen,
var den endnu saa fuldpakket af Kalvis og Vinteris, at Kone-
baadsstyreren havde Ret i, at det vilde være umuligt nu at
komme frem. For yderligere at overbevise os om det triste
i Situationen spildte vi — Konebaadsstyreren og jeg — næsten

161

en hel Dag med at komme op paa nogle hoje Bjergtoppe, fra
hvilke vi havde en god Udsigt over den ydre Del af Fjorden:
desverre Is overalt i Fjorden i saadan Mengde, at en Kone-
baad ikke vilde kunde klare sig. Forovrigt plejede Fjorden
ikke at vere nogenlunde isfri for i den sidste Del af Juli, bedst
er den at befare i August og til Dels i September — saaledes
fortalte man mig i Niakornak, en Boplads i Fjordens Mun-
ding. I den Henseende forholder altsaa Aulatsivik-Fjord
sig som andre Fjorde, i hvilke der gaar Isstramme ned f. Eks.
Torsukatak-Fjord. Under disse Forhold maatte jeg atter
vende tilbage til Egedesminde, hvorfra jeg sejlede videre
med Konebaad til Klavshavn, hvortil jeg kom den 6te Juli.
Jeg søgte at bevæge Konebaadsforeren til at legge Vejen over
Kitsigsunguit, af Danskerne kaldet «de grønne Øer» efter
den i Gronland usedvanlig tette Gresvekst, fremkaldt af den
utallige Mengde Terner, der ruger der; men Konebaadsforeren
frygtede det brede Farvand, vi skulde over og foreslog, at vi
hellere maatte tage over den lille @ Upernivik 9: Foraars-
stedet, fordi Gronlenderne i Forsommeren pleje at staa i
Telt her paa Fangst. Uagtet der ingen Gronlændere stod i
Telt, da jeg var paa Øen, var det let at se, at Øen var en
yndet Teltplads: Alopecurus alpinus, der er Bopladsernes ufra-
vigelige Ledsager, dannede et tæt og meget smukt Gronsver ;
de mange Gronlændergrave beviste. ogsaa, at Men var et søgt
Fangststed.

I Klavshavn var ved vor Ankomst Atak-Fangsten i fuld
Gang. Det kneb derfor meget med at skaffe Besætning og
Baad til den paatenkte Tur ind i Tasiussak. I Fangsttiden,
hvor der er rigeligt med Mad, holde de unge Knose, der
alligevel intet fanger, mere af at gaa og drive end at bestille
noget, et Forhold de eldre Gronlendere ikke er blinde for.
Omsider fik jeg dog samlet en Besætning sammen, og med
denne tog jeg saa ind til Tasiussak; men den for Forbin-
delsen vigtige Autdlarisap-Tasia var endnu islagt. Des-

162

verre var Isen for mor til, at man kunde gaa paa den. Naar
man satte Foden haardt i, oplostes Isen i henved decimeter-
lange Stengler. Denne stænglede Struktur af Is kan man som
bekendt ogsaa iagttage herhjemme. Konebaaden maatte altsaa
bæres helt syd om Seen og uden om Kiagusuk-Fjeld. Denne
Ombering er lang og besverlig og tager megen Tid. Medens
Mandskabet bar Baaden over, saa jeg lidt paa Vegetationen.
Det var iøjnefaldende, at Foraaret ogsaa her var kommet meget
sent. Sneen var ganske vist helt forsvunden, naar undtages
visse Steder, hvor der var foget Driver sammen. En Plante
Pyrola grandiflora, der 1902 stod i Blomst den 22de Juni,
var endnu ikke udsprunget den 74е Juli; selv Dryas integri-
folia var forst sprungen ud for nylig; kun faa Eksemplarer
stod i Blomstring. Ellers var de andre Hedeplanter nu i fuld
Blomstring: Rhododendron lapponicum, Silene acaulis о. a.;
Vaccinium uliginosum var endog nesten afblomstret.

Forst Dagen efter var Konebaad og Bagage naaet helt ned
til Tasiussak. Denne var paa dette Tidspunkt ganske fri for
Vinteris; Isfod var der intet at se af. Nu gik Roturen ind
gennem Tasiussak til Kekertarsunguit-Tupersua —
naturligvis med de nodvendige Ophold —. Her slog jeg Telt
og begav mig om Eftermiddagen paa en Fodtur til Teltplads-
knuden, idet jeg og mine Ledsagere gik over et Pas i Kekar-
tarsunguit-Kulà. Uagtet det var temmelig sent om Efter-
middagen vi begav os af Sted, var Myggene meget ubehagelige;
for hvert Skridt man tog, for der en Sverm op af Lyngen.
Overhovedet var Myggene denne Sommer næsten uudholdelige;
Aarsagen til den store Myggerigdom, som jeg slet ikke be-
mærkede i 1902, maa vist søges i det sene Foraar og rigelige
Nedslag om Vinteren; alle Huller var i Aar fulde af Vand. Om
Natten — for saa vidt man kan tale om Nat i den lyse Tid,
er Myggene temmelig fredelige, hvorfor man staar sig ved at
arbejde om Natten og sove om Dagen; ganske vist har Myg-

163

gene en fænomenal Evne i Retning af at finde et Hul, hvori-
gennem de kan komme ind i Teltet.

Fra Teltpladsknuden har man en udmerket Udsigt over
Jakobshavns-Isfjord og Enden af Jakobshavns-Gletscher.
Selve Isfjorden frembod det sædvanlige Skue: aldeles tætpakket
af større og mindre Kalvisstykker, mange af sædvanlige Isfjeldes
Dimensioner; alt er hvidt. Et eneste Isfjeld af samme Type
som de i min Beretning af 1902 omtalte fandtes. Det stod
med lodrette Sider og en takket ujævn Overflade af en mere
graalig Tone — hidrorende fra Støv, der fra Land er blest ud
paa Gletscheren, medens Isfjeldet var en Bestanddel af denne.
Da det har stor Interesse at faa Hojden af saadanne Isfjelde i
oprindelig Stilling sammenlignet med Hojderne af Gletscheren,
foretog jeg — foruden Nivellement med Haandniveau — et
trigonometrisk Nivellement, idet jeg udmaalte en Basis og fra
Endepunkterne foretog de nødvendige Vinkelmaalinger. Re-
sultatet gav, at Isfjeldet var 9 m lavere end det Parti af
Isstrommen paa det Sted, hvor Isfjeldet paa det nærmeste
maatte antages at have losnet sig. Denne Forskel betyder
dog ikke noget absolut, idet Fikspunktet paa saavel Isfjeldet
som Isstrommen maa tages nogenlunde tilfældigt som en
markeret Spids og udsiger altsaa intet nojagtigt om den gen-
nemsnitlige Hojde af saavel Isfjeld som Gletscher; men som vi
senere skal komme tilbage til, kan der ikke vere Tvivl om, at
disse Isfjelde i oprindelig Stilling losner sig fra Gletscheren
ved en Revne, og da ligge de nojagtigt i samme Niveau som
Gletscheren. Der kan altsaa ikke vere Tvivl om, at den yder-
ste Ende af Gletscheren flyder paa Vand efter de hydrostatiske
Love. Kalvningen af disse Isfjelde i oprindelig Stilling kan
altsaa ikke foregaa hverken ved Nedstyrtning eller Opdrift; men
maa foregaa derved, at der, under Isens uensartede Bevægelse
fra Randen af Fjorden og ud mod Midten, opstaar Spændings-
forskelle, der resulterer i Brud, og da de foran Isstrommen
liggende Ismasser ikke formaar at udove et tilstrækkeligt Tryk

164

mod det frasprængte Isstykke, vil dette ikke ved Regelation
atter fryse sammen med Gletscheren. Overhovedet spiller
maaske en Isfjords Pakning af Kalvis en betydelig Rolle med
Hensyn til den Maade paa hvilken Isstrømmen kalver. I den
Henseende er netop Jakobshavns-Isfjord ualmindeligt
stærkt pakket, idet der ved Mundingen af den ligger den be-
kendte Isfjeldsbanke, der næsten ganske stopper for Kalvisens
Udførelse af Fjorden. Hvis der nemlig ikke er noget Modtryk
af Kalvismassen mod Isstrømmens forreste Rand, kan man
vanskelig tænke sig, at Isstrømmen skulde kunne skyde sig saa
langt ud, at den kan flyde paa Fjorden; paa Grund af de oven-
for omtalte Spændinger maatte Enden af Isstrommen snart
springe itu, og da der intet er, der presser imod, vilde Regela-
tionen udeblive: Enden af Isstrømmen altsaa henfalde til mindre
Stykker, netop den Slags man ser i mindre tætpakkede Isfjorde
f. Ex. Torsukatak. Saa vidt jeg ved, har ingen tidligere be-
mærket disse Isfjelde i oprindelig Stilling i Nord-Grønland,
og efter al Rimelighed forekommer de her kun i Jakobs-
havns-Isfjord, som den mest ispakkede Fjord. Noget
nævneværdigt Udbytte af at studere Kalvningsfænomenerne i
Jakobshavns-Isfjord som Forbillede for Kalvningerne i
andre Fjorde har man altsaa ikke, fordi Forholdene der er saa
afvigende fra andre Isfjorde. )

Til en skarp Bestemmelse af Gletscherrandens Beliggenhed
egner Teltpladsknuden sig ikke mere, da Gletscherranden nu
har trukket sig længere mod Øst, hvorved man i altfor høj en
Grad kommer til at se Randen en face. Jeg tog dog et Foto-
grafi af Situationen, og fra Endepunkterne af en Basis tog jeg
med Teodolit Sigter til et Punkt i Gletscherranden omtrent
midtvejs mellem Midten af Gletscherranden og Fjordens Side.
En Udregning gav, at delte Punkt skulde ligge c. 350 m læn-
gere fremme end Gletscherranden gjorde det foregaaende Aar.
Det maa dog bemærkes, at den benyttede Trekant havde en
meget lille Basis i Forhold til Sidernes Længde, tilmed var den

165

meget skævvinklet. Forevrigt maa man erindre, at 350 m ikke
beiyder saa meget her, hvor alle Dimensioner er saa store, og
hvor Isens Hastighed er saa stor; blot der losner sig et Par
storre Isbjerge er tilstrækkeligt til, at Gletscherranden paa det
nermeste kommer til at ligge, hvor den laa det foregaaende
Aar. Randpartiet af Gletscheren havde nedenfor Teltpladsknuden
losnet sig; 1902 havde den her dannet ligesom en Bremme.
Dette kan sikkert tydes som en Tilbagegang af Gletscheren,
idet vi nemlig maa erindre, at Randpartierne af Gletscheren
bevege sig paa selve Bunden af Fjorden og saaledes ikke er
underkastet de samme Svinger som Midterpartierne af Gletscheren,
der flyder paa Vandet.

For at faa en nojagtigere Bestemmelse af Beliggenheden
af Gletscherenden forsøgte jeg at komme over til Nunataken.
Den Ely, der løber mellem de to Seer var stærkt opsvulmet,
saaledes at det var umuligt at vade over. Af det Ler og Slam,
som var afsat paa Stenene, kunde man se, at den for nylig
havde staaet endnu højere; i Løbet af en fjorten Dages Tid vilde
den være sunket saa meget, at man kunde komme over. Selve
Søerne var endnu delvis islagte, men Isen var fuldstændig mør.

Da jeg.altsaa alligevel ikke kunde naa over til Nunataken,
vendte jeg tilbage til Teltpladsen, Kekertarssunguit-Tuper-
sua. Herfra sejlede jeg med Konebaaden til Alangordlek-
Gletscher, for nærmere at undersøge om denne Gletscher
muligen ogsaa trak sig tilbage og for muligen at blive klar
over dens Maade at kalve påa.

Nogen Forandring i Beliggenheden af Gletscherens Ende
kunde jeg ganske vist ikke paapege. Men at Gletscheren er
enten stationær eller snarere i Tilbagegang, synes mig at fremgaa
deraf, at der langs Gletscheren findes en frisk, aldeles ube-
vokset Morænevold, en Endemoræne. Højden af Gletscherenden
over Havet overstiger næppe noget Sted 25 m. Hastigheden er
ringe, da der næsten ingen Kalvis dannes. Overalt luder

Gletscherenden frem over. Nogen Kalvning fandt ikke Sted;

166

heller ikke horte jeg under mit Ophold den kanonadeagtige
Stoj, der altid folger med Kalvningerne. De ganske smaa og
spredte Stykker Kalvis dannes vistnok simpelthen af Nedstyrt-
ninger.

Besætningen vilde nu tilbage til Klavshavn, hvilket jeg
maatte give Lov til; paa Tilbagevejen slog jeg atter Telt ved
Kekartarssunguit-Tupersua, hvorpaa jeg foretog en
ny Ekskursion til Teltpladsknuden; men nye Resultater frem-
kom ikke. Gletscherenden havde ikke forandret sig kendeligt
i den Uges Tid, jeg havde veret ved Alangordlek; kun var
der flere Steder styrtet betydelige Partier af Gletscherenden ned.
Det ovenfor omtalte Isfjeld var rykket lidt længere ud i Fjor-
den. Nunatap-Tasia var endnu delvis islagt.

Da Gronlenderne stadig klagede over, at deres Kamiker
var saa daarlige — et almindeligt brugt Paaskud, naar Gron-
lenderne ikke vil vere ude mere — maatte jeg opfylde deres
Onske om at komme tilbage til Kiavshavn.

Som allerede berort i min Beretning om Rejsen 1902 er
Klavshavns Befolkning ikke behagelig at have med paa en
lengere Tur. Det er en noget lad Befolkning. Man ser altid
i Klavshavn kraftige unge Mennesker, som slet intet bestiller
` ud over at ryge Tobak og glane ud over Havet. Der er ved
Klavshavn en god Fangst og efter gronlandsk Skik og Brug
falder der altid lidt af til dem, der intet har fanget; det er
derfor ikke nodvendigt at slide for Foden. Naboskabet til de
to Kolonier Jakobshavn og Kristianshaab har vel heller
ikke gavnet.

Meget behageligere at have med at gore er Gronlænderne
i Torsukatak og i Sydost-Bugt.

Da meget afhenger af den Besætning, man har med sig,
foretrak jeg at gaa videre mod Nord for der at skaffe en flink
Besætning. Desuden skulde jeg alligevel helst ind i Torsu-
katak-Fjord, for at undersoge om Gletscherne der var 1
Tilbage- eller i Fremgang.

167

Fra Klavshavn gik altsaa Rejsen over Jakobshavn,
hvor jeg hentede Proviant, til Rodebay, en mindre Boplads,
hvis Navn stammer fra den hollandske Hvalfangsttid. Hvorfor
den har faaet Navnet Rodebay 9: rode Bugt er usikkert. Fjel-
dene deromkring er ikke rodere end andre Steder. Paa gron-
landsk hedder den Okaitut (Skarvene); Navnet stammer fra,
at der i sin Tid i de stejle Fjelde bag den nuverende Boplads
rugede Skarve. Efter hvad en Gronlender meddelte, var disse
nu udryddet her. Bopladsen lig- \
ger ved en temmelig fladvandet
Bugt med god Ankergrund —
formodentlig Aarsagen til, at de
hollandske Hvalfangere holdt til
her —. Befolkningen er behage-
ligere at have med at gore end
Klavshavnerne og Jakobshavnerne.

Fra Rodebay gik Rejsen
videre til Klokkerhuk. Kone-
baadene plejer, naar Vejret er godt,
at gaa over det tre Mil brede
Farvand mellem Kangarssuk og
Sarkata, den sydligste lavere

Del af Arveprinsens-@ (paa
grønlandsk Agdlutok). Vejret
var lidt ustadigt denne Gang, og derfor gik Konebaadsstyreren
helt op til Niakornak, før han satte over. Da vi kom om-
kring Øens Sydspids begyndte det at friske op, saaledes at vi
maatte slaa os ned ved Klokkerhuk, hvor vi paa Grund af
daarligt Vejr maatte blive to Dage. Selve Klokkerhuk er en
lille knoldformet Halvø forbundet med Hovedlandet ved en flad
Strækning (Fig. 1). Denne Landtange er dannet ved, at de skiftende
nordlige og sydlige Vinde har kastet Grus og Sten op i en
Vold. For Øjeblikket bryder Havet ned, hvad det tidligere har
opbygget, formodentlig fordi Landet sænker sig. Tidligere var

168

Klokkerhuk en vigtig Boplads, fra hvilken der blev drevet
en ret betydelig Hvalfangst; et Minde om dens fordums Betyd-
ning har man i de mange Eskimograve i en eldre Strandvold.
Nu er Klokkerhuk ganske ubeboet, kun nu og da ligger der
en Baad fra Ritenbenk paa Fangst her. For at rejsende om
Vinteren kan søge Ly her, findes der opført et Hus, forøvrigt
ganske forfaldent og molesteret af Gronlenderne. Til nogen
storre Nytte er det neppe; de fleste Slederejser gaar i Reglen
ost om Øen, da Disko-Bugt i de senere Aar sjælden
lægger til.

Omsider bedagede Vejret sig, og vi kunde atter fortsætte
Rejsen til Ritenbenk. Allerede naar man kommer uden for
Klokkerhuk kan man se det hoje Forbjerg Kangek, lige
syd for Ritenbenk. Man tror man er ner ved, og dog er
der 3—4 Timers Rotur fra Klokkerhuk til Kangek. Vest-
kysten af Arveprinsens-Q, eller som den i ældre Tid kaldtes
Arveprinsens-Ejland er meget ensformet uden Pynter,
Sker og Bugter. Lagene helder ind ad og har Strygning pa-
rallel med Kysten, saaledes at der ikke bliver noget videre at
bearbejde. Tilmed findes der kun faa Веупег og Spring.
Kangek er netop opstaaet ved et saadant megtigt Spring.

Ritenbenk, skal efter hvad Dr. Steenstrup har oplyst,
vere dannet ved Omsætning af Bogstaverne i Berkentin
og har altsaa ikke noget med Ride, den tretaaede Maage, og
bank, Fuglefjeld at gore. Paa gronlandsk hedder Bopladsen
Agpat efter et Fuglefjeld tet ved, hvor der ruger et Utal af
Tejste af Danskerne kaldet Alke; den egentlige Alk, Klubalken
ruger ogsaa paa Fuglefjeldet, men er langt sjeldnere. Alke-
fjeldet her ved Ritenbenk er dog efter Beskrivelsen at
dømme meget mindre end Alkefjeldet ved Upernivik.

Fra Kangek og nordpaa er Arveprinsens-@ meget
indskaaret, som Folge af den meget uregelmessige Lejring af
Gnejsen; Sejladsen fra Ritenbenk nord paa er derfor meget
afvekslende. Efter en lille Dags Rotur naaede vi Kekertak

169

(«Øen») en lille ©, der ligger inde i en Sidebugt til Torsu-
katak, og hvor der findes en lille Boplads og et «Udligger-
sted». Paa de Fremspring, der danner Bugten, ligger to Bo-
pladser Nugak og Ekogfat. I den ydre Del af Torsukatak
saa vel som her i Kekertak-Bugt, laa der kun lidt Drivis.
Sejladsen ind gennem Fjorden gik derfor godt til at begynde
med, men i den mellemste Del nord for Kekertakasik (eller
som den her med Provinsudtale kaldes Kekertakasak) var
der dog saa megen Drivis, at vi maalte gaa syd om denne Ø
for at naa ind til Ana («dens — formodentlig [sens — Exkre-
ment»), et Navn der ogsaa forekommer i Upernivik-Distrikt
paa en lignende Halve, der skyder sig ud fra Indlandsisen.
Formodentlig sigtes der ved Navnet til, at Halvoen rager frem
fra den hvidlige Indlandsis som en mork Masse. Paa den
nordvestlige Spids af Halvoen ligger der en Boplads af samme
Navn som Halvøen. For Øjeblikket fandtes der kun to Huse;
for et Par Aar tilbage var der 3 Huse, men den ene Familie
flyttede til Arsivik, hvorfra der er lettere Forbindelse med
Handelspladsen Ata. Ved vor Ankomst var begge Familier
draget paa Fangst; kun et Spand Hunde var tilbage. Det var
forøvrigt min Hensigt at naa tværs over Fjorden til et For-
bjerg, Nuk, tet ved den nordlige Gletscher, hvor Dr. Steen-
strup har foretaget Hastighedsmaalinger af Gletscberen samt
fotograferet den. Det var imidlertid ganske umuligt at komme
igennem. Det er forøvrigt værd at bemærke, at der om Natten
selv i den varmeste Maaned danner sig Tyndis inde i Isfjor-
dene. For at faa Overblik over Gletscherforholdene besteg jeg
et Fjeld tet bag Bopladsen. Fjeldet hed Sagdliarusek, og
man har derfra en udmerket Udsigt over Isen og Fjorden. Paa
Toppen fandtes en Varde, helt mosgroet og altsaa af gammel
Dato; maaske er den stablet af Hammer 1883.

Nogen Forandring i Beliggenheden af de to Gletschere
kunde jeg ikke paavise ved at sammenligne Gletschernes nuve-
rende Stilling med Fotografier tagne af Dr. Steenstrup. Dog

170

maa den langs Siderne liggende Endemoræne, hvis lysegraa
Farve stikker saa stærkt af mod de morke, likenbevoksede Klippe-
vægge, tydes som et Tegn paa, at Gletscheren i Øjeblikket er i
Aftagende. Hele det indre af Torsukatak var fuldstendig
opfyldt af Kalvis, op af hvilken der her og der ragede enkelte
Isfjelde. Isfjelde i oprindelig Stilling, saaledes som jeg har
omtalt det for Jakobshavns-Isfjords Vedkommende, var
der intet at se af. Gletscherne skrider ned mod Havet med
et meget stærkere Fald end i Jakobshavns-Isfjord. Kalv-
ningen er derfor sandsynligvis helt forskellig de to Steder.
Medens vi opholdt os paa Fjeldet, maa der have fundet Kalv-
ninger Sted, da vi hørte den med Kalvningerne forbundne Støj;
men hvorledes Kalvningen foregik, fik vi ikke Lejlighed til at
iagttage.

Da jeg altsaa paa Grund af Ishindringen i Torsukatak
ikke kunde naa over til Nuk, sejlede jeg videre syd paa og
vilde have været i Land ved de to sydlige Gletschere Sermia
avanarlermata og Sermia kujadlermata; men Kone-
baadsstyreren, der var fra Ritenbenk, havde aldrig været i
Nærheden af Indlandsisen og turde ikke komme den nær. An-
tagelig vidste han, at der ved Kalvningerne opstaar stærk
Bølgegang; denne har han saa anset for at være farlig for Kone-
baaden, hvilket han ikke behøvede, da det slet ikke var min
Agt at komme Gletscherne såa nær med Konebaad. Maaske
har han ogsaa næret nogen overtroisk Frygt for Indlandsisen,
hvilket ikke er ualmindeligt hos de Gronlændere, der bor
fjernt. fra den. У! maatte derfor nøjes med at gaa i Land
paa Igdloluarssuit («de store Huse»), en Ø, der ikke er
mere end 400 m høj; men hvorfra man har en udmærket Ud-
sigt over de to nævnte Gletschere. Syd for den sydligste lig-
ger der langs med Landet, Nuna-Kigdlinga, i en Afstand
af c. 2 km en (5—6 km) lang Morænevold paa Indlandsisen.
Denne Bundmoræne maa opstaa ved, at Isen paa Grund af
Terrainets Form skyder sig op efter. Hammer omtaler ikke

171

denne ellers meget iojnefaldende Morenevold og heller ikke
Steenstrup. Maaske er det et Fenomen, der forst i den
senere Tid er fremkommet, i Lighed med Nunatakerne ved
Jakobshavns-Gletscher; hvis det er Tilfeldet, synes More-
nens Fremkomst at tyde paa, at Isen nu staar lavere end tidligere.

Fra vor Teltplads ved en lille Bugt, Omare, paa Øens
Vestside vendte vi tilbage til Kekertak. Farvandet mellem
Igdloluarssuit og Kekertakasik ег fuldt af lave Øer, og
Farvandet er vistnok ikke ret dybt; i hvert Fald er der en
meget sterk Strom her. Det samme syntes mig ogsaa at vere
Tilfeldet mellem Ana og Kekertakasik samt i Farvandet
mellem denne @ og Arsivik-Land. Da Indlandsisen havde
en større Megtighed end nu, har de to Gletschere inden for
Igdloluarssuit sikkert skudt sig ud gennem Atä-Sund,
fordi Torsukatak-Fjord har veret helt udfyldt af Torsu-
katak-Gletscher. Farvandet syd for Kekertakasik har
derfor ligget i Le og er ikke blevet eroderet. Men forevrigt
er det vanskeligt helt at komme paa det rene med disse For-
hold, saa lenge Isfjordene ikke er oploddede.

Efter at vere naaet tilbage til Kekertak foretog jeg en
Ekskursion til Sarkak-Gletscher.

Sarkak-Gletscher skyder ned fra det hoje sneklædte
Land, der iigger syd for de store Seer. Dens Fald er meget
betydeligt. Foran Gietscherne var der aflejret en betydelig,
ganske ubevokset, Morenevold. I Forhold til denne syntes det,
som Gletscheren har trukket sig noget tilbage. Snegrensen
synes her at ligge ganske paa samme Hojde som paa Plateauet
indenfor Kekertak-Bugt.

Selve Bopladsen Sarkak, der ligger lidt lengere mod
Vest, gor et meget tiltalende Indtryk. Den ligger ved en lille
Bugt, hvis Indlob beskyttes af en lille ©. I visse Henseender
minder den lidt от et dansk Fiskerleje; det er vel ogsaa den
mest velstillede Boplads ved Disko-Bugt. De megtige Is-

XXXIV. 12

172

fjelde, der driver ned gennem Vaigat, hidlokker Sælerne
og skaffer derved god Fangst.

Fra Sarkak vendte jeg tilbage til Ritenbenk, hvor jeg
skaffede mig en Besætning, der lovede at folge mig inde i
Tasiussak hele Sommeren. Begyndelsen var ganske lovende.
Turen fra Ritenbenk til Jakobshavn, 11 Mil, blev tilbage-
lagt paa en Dag, hvorpaa jeg drog ind i Sarkardlek-Fjord.
De Lodninger, jeg foretog her, gav til Resultat, at denne Arm
af Tasiussak ikke er videre dyb, c.90m. Ved at bestemme
Hojden af Gletscheren kom jeg til det Resultat, at de midterste
Dele af Gletscherenden havde en Højde af 30 m over Hav-
spejlet, enkelte Toppe hevede sig til 35 m. Man kan vel an-
tage, at den kompakte Ismasse ikke hæver sig over 30 m over
Havet. Hvis nu Drygalskis Teori om, at Gletscherne kalver
der, hvor de begynder at miste Fodfestet, er rigtig, saa skulde
Dybden af Fjorden ved Gletscherenden beløbe sig Ш с. 225 т,
idet vi antager, at den Del, der er under Vand, er 71/2 Gange
saa stor som den Del, der rager op over Vandet. Lodskuddene
viser imidlertid, at saa dybt er der langtfra i Fjorden. Dry-
galskis Teori om Kalvningen skulde altsaa herefter ikke vere
geldende. Dog bor det ikke lades ude af Betragtning, at der
kan tenkes den Mulighed, at Gletscheren ligger saaledes som
det ег anskueliggjort paa hosstaaende Tegning (Fig. 2). Meget
taler dog mod dette. Navnlig maatte da den Del af Gletscher-
enden, der beskyttet af Havets oplosende Virksomhed af den
foran aflejrede Moræne, springer stærkt frem under Vandet, paa
Grund af Opdriften sprænges fra og skyde op med en betydelig
Hastighed. Saadanne opskydende Ismasser har jeg aldrig iagt-
taget, og efter Beskrivelserne har heller ikke andre iagttaget
saadanne. Naar man har angivet, at Isfjelde har raget op over
Gletscheren og atter sunket tilbage, saa behover dette blot at
have veret Flager, der efter Losningen fra Gletscherenden under
deres Bestrebelse for at finde Ligevegtsstillingen med en Spids
har raget op over Gletscherens Overflade. At Isfjelde med en

173

Тор kan rage op over Gletscherens Overflade er forøvrigt alle-
rede omtalt i Meddelelser om Granland 26 Bd. Efter at jeg
har foretaget nævnte Lodninger, mener jeg altsaa, at man maa
forlade Drygalskis Hypotese.

Som jeg senere hen kommer tilbage til, tyder Forholdene
ved Kiakusuk paa, at en Gletscher kan staa meget lavere
med sin Underflade end den foranliggende Havbund. Men der-
med vere ingenlunde sagt, at Forholdene er saadan som an-
skueliggjort paa Figuren.

Sep ppm Er

Fig. 2.

Under Opholdet ved Sarkardlek var min Opmerksomhed
naturligvis i hej Grad henvendt paa Sporgsmaalet om, hvor-
ledes Gletscheren kalvede.

Man kan ikke undgaa at legge Merke til, at Gletscherenden
stadig stiller sig med fremadheldende Flade, og at den Del, der
ligger i Vandet, er meget afgnavet; dette ses tydeligst, naar det
er Lavvande (se forøvrigt hosstaaende Skema Fig. 3). Naar
Heldningen har naaet en vis Størrelse, omkring 10°, og der er
gnavet tilstrækkeligt meget bort af Vandet, kommer der et Qje-
blik, hvor Sammenhengskraften ikke lenger formaar at gore

sig geldende; men der skér en Bristning, og den flade Knold
i2*

174

falder ned i Vandet. Dette har jeg flere Gange haft Lejlighed
til at iagttage. Naar den Skive, der losnes, ikke gaar i Stykker,
hvilket hyppigst sker, falder den om paa Siden. Efter Kalv-
ningen staar Gletscherenden for det meste med lodrette Ende-
flader, ofte endda heldende en Smule bag over.

Vedbliver man at iagttage et saadant Parti, hvor der er sket
en Nedstyrtning, legger man Merke til, at Gletscherenden fra at
vere tilbageheldende bliver lodret og derefter fremadheldende ;
samtidig ser man Vandet oplese mere og mere af Isen i Vand-

LON, Win

skorpen. Naar saa Heldningen er blevet tilstrækkelig stor, og
Vandet har gnavet af Isen, sker der en ny Nedstyrtning, en
Kalvning; Tidspunktet afhenger af flere Ting, saaledes Rev-
nernes Dybde og Kalvninger i Nærheden. Hvis nemlig Rev-
nerne er serlig dybe, og der finder Kalvninger Sted i Nerheden,
kan der indtrede en Nedstyrtning, for der egentlig skulde.
Nogen Opskydning af Isfjelde har jeg ikke iagttaget; heller
ikke har jeg kunnet paavise noget Sammenheng mellem Kalv-
ning og Tidevande. Kalvning indtraadte saavel, naar det var
Hojvande, Lavvande, Slaptid og Springtid. Hvis Kalvningerne
hidrorer fra Opdriftens Virkning, skulde man vente de fleste

175

Kalvninger, naar det var Hojvande og da navnlig Springtid; men
noget saadant har jeg ikke kunnet paavise. Derimod var det
meget almindeligt, at en ringe Nedstyrtning var Signalet til be-
tydelige Nedstyrtninger i Nabolaget, hvilket ogsaa er forklarligt
nok, da Spaltedannelsen fremmes ved den opstaaede Rystelse.
At Kalvningerne til Tider kan vere meget heftig i Isfjordene,
har ogsaa andre bemerket.

For Sarkardlek-Gletscher er der neppe noget, der taler
for anden Maade at kalve paa end ved Nedstyrtning. |

Den Kalvis, der dannes, er meget ubetydelig og forsvinder
— naar undtages nogle enkelte Knolde — i Lobet af faa Dage.

Paa Gletscherens Overflade nogle faa Meter fra Land iagt-
tager man de af Nordenskiöld forst omtalte Kryokonit-

Cane

Fig. 4.

huller. Foruden disse lodrette Kryokonithuller havde jeg
Lejlighed til at iagttage, hvad de tyske Glacialgeologer
kalder Sonnenlöcher (Solhuller), om hvis Forekomst i Gron-
land der vist ikke foreligger nogen Beskrivelse. For det meste
var disse Huller temmelig store (henved 1 dm) og aldrig
kredsrunde, men altid mere eller mindre nyredannede. Jo
mindre i Tvermaal des mere nermede de sig til at vere kreds-
runde — omtrent som Figuren viser. Samtidig med, at de
nerme sig til at vere kredsrunde, gaa de over til at blive lod-
rette. (Fig. 4).

De nyredannede Huller var altid orienterede paa en be-
stemt Maade, nemlig saaledes, at et lodret Plan gennem Aksen
faldt sammen med Meridianplanet; denne bestemte Orientering
holdt altid Stik. Selve Aksen, der peger mod Syd, danner en
Vinkel paa c. 50° med Lodlinjen. (Fig. 5).

176

I Bunden af disse skraatstillede Huller fandtes, saa vidt
jeg kunde skønne, nøjagtig det samme Slam som i de smalle,
lodrette Huller. Der kan derfor næppe
være Tvivl om, at de maa have samme
Oprindelse som de Nordenskiöld-
ske Kryokonithuller. Med Hen-
syn til den skraa Stilling af Hullerne
er at bemærke, at denne ikke hid-
rører fra Bevægelsen af Gletscheren,
i saa Fald maatte man kunne paavise
en Overensstemmelse i Orienteringen

og Hovedretningen af Bevægelsen i

Fig. 5.

Gletscheren. Den skraa Retning kan
heller ikke fremkomme ved Forskellen i Bevægelseshastighed i de
forskellige Lag af Gletscheren. Da Hullerne ikke er mere end
1 à 2 dm dybe, vil der ikke der kunne være nogen væsentlig
Forskel i Bevægelseshastighed. Da Hullerne altid er orienterede
mod Syd, maa den skraa Stilling sikkert hidrøre fra Solstraa- —
lerne. Hvorledes disse store Kryokonithuller opstaar, er
usikkert; maaske opstaar de ved, at flere smaa og tætliggende
Kryokonithuller smelter sammen. Som bekendt opstaar
Kryokonithullerne ved, at Støv, der er blæst ud fra Land,
opsuger Varmestraaler og derved smelter sig Fordybninger i
Isen. For at forklare, hvorledes det gaar til, at Hullerne bliver
skraa, maa man antage, at det Støv, der ligger ved den sydlige
Kant, ligger i Skygge og derfor ikke smelter sig ned; derimod
vil det Støv, der ligger i den nordlige Del af Hullet træffes af
forholdsvis mange Solstraaler og derfor smelte sig ned i Isen.
Hullernes Nyreform staar sikkert i Forbindelse med Solens
daglige Bevægelse. Om Eftermiddagen, f. Eks., vil det Støv, der
ligger ved den sydvestlige Kant af Hullet, være i Skygge.

De store Kryokonithuller har jeg kun fundet i Nær-
heden af Land, formodentlig fordi der i Nærheden af Land af-
lejres saa meget Støv.

177

Sarkardlek-Gletscher er temmelig bred, men Megtig-
heden er næppe stor. Midt i Gletscheren (se Kortet) ligger
der en ret stor Nunatak, fra denne gaar der en Morenestribe
ud til Gletscherenden. Den Mengde Materiale, denne Morene-
stribe indeholder, er dog ikke meget betydeligt. Foruden denne
fra Nunataken kommende Morenestribe, findes der en Morene
til; den kommer fra en lille af Gletscheren overdækket Fjeld-
knold. Denne Morenestribe er noget rigere paa Materiale end
den fer omtalte.

Gletscherenden danner en lige Linje fra Sydsiden til Nuna-
taken, herfra og til Kavdlunap-Nuna danner den en Bue
og er tillige ganske lav. Øst for den omtalte Morenestribe
hæver Gletscheren sig op i en lav Kuppel og er paa dette Sted
meget sonderreven. Forovrigt er Overfladen i det hele meget
ujevn. Hovedretningen af Spalterne i Gletscherne gaar vinkel-
ret paa Bevegelsesretningen af Gletscheren; men foruden disse
Hovedspalter er der ogsaa andre mindre fremtredende Spalter,
der hidrore fra Ujevnheder i Undergrunden.

Saavel langs Gletscherens nordlige som dens sydlige Rand
flyder der en Smeltevandselv. Den paa den sydlige Side
er langt den storste.

Under mit Ophold her inde i Fjorden foretog jeg nogle
meteorologiske lagttagelser; selv om de ikke er systematisk
gennemførte, meddeler jeg dem dog:

PAUL: | 8. Aug. | 9. Aug | 10. Aug

(KL 2 1.9 | К KL2 | KL9|KLS|KL2| KL9| KI.S

Tort Term..... |. 10.6 | 5.4 | 9.5 | 10.6| 5.4 | 74/102) 42| 77

Vaadt Term.... | 7.6| 4.0 | 6.5 | 7.6 | 44 | р 90 220 eee

May: TOR ee Wie den ean Ом те LIOT Le

Min Terme 2204) AN PRE MO GPL ATEN Mio 45 DE) ne
| | | | | |

Vi ser altsaa, at selv helt inde ved Indlandsisen kan Tempera-
turen om Dagen den forste Del af Aug. stige til 12.6; men om
Natten kan Temperaturen naa 0 og derunder (— 0.8).

178

Foruden de oven for omtalte Undersøgelser benyttede jeg
Lejligheden til i saa stor Udstrekning, som jeg kunde, ved
Hjælp af Haandniveau og Barometer at indlægge Hojdekurver i
det af Hammer ved hans Opmaalinger skaffede Grundlag.

Derimod foretog jeg ingen Hastighedsbestemmelse af Glet-
scheren, da jeg ikke kunde skaffe en Basis, der laa hejt nok
til, at jeg kunde faa gode Sigter ud over Gletscheren.

For at faa udfort nogle Lodskud i Nunatap-Tasia lod
jeg Konebaaden bere over fra Kekertarssunguit-Ilua til
den lille Ferskvandsso Amitukujok og derfra atter over til
Nunatap-Tasia.

Amitukujok er forholdsvis flad — det dybeste Lodskud
var kun 14 m. Den Dal, Soen ligger i, er en Bruddal, ud-
foret af Morænemateriale, idet nemlig Dalens Retning gaar
vinkelret paa den Retning, Isen maa have haft, da den sked
sig ud over Yderlandet. Paa lignende Maade forholder det sig
temmelig sikkert ogsaa med Kunguak-Dal, der jo er parallel
med Amitukujok.

Nunatap-Tasia var derimod meget dybere. I den ost-
lige Del, hvor den aabenbart er dybest, belob Maximumsdybden
sig til 127 m.

Soens Dannelse skyldes vistnok i forste Instans Forvitring,
paa lignende Maade som jeg senere kommer til at omtale det
for Itivdlek’s Vedkommende. Men Forkastninger har sikkert
ogsaa haft deres Andel i Dannelsen; paa Hammers Teltplads-
knude lige vest for Soen er der et Par Steder Dale, der maa
opfattes som Bruddale, og som ligger temmelig noje i Ret-
ning af Nunatap-Tasias Hovedretning, ligesom man kan
forfolge en Forkastning her fra Nunatap-Tasia helt hen til
Tasiussak (Kajuta sugdlua). Det er netop denne Forkast-
ning, der danner den Randkæde der — afbrudt af Forkastnin-
ger i Nord-Syd — lober langs den sydlige Side af Jakobs-
havns-Isfjord, og hvoraf Nunataken er en Del. Naar
den ostlige Del er dybest, skyldes det maaske den Omstændig-

179

hed, at to Forkastningslinjer her skærer hinanden, nemlig For-
kastningslinjer i Ost-Vest og den Forkastningslinje, der har dan-
net Amitukujok-Dal.

Under den højere Stand af Indlandsisen, gik denne ind
gennem Nunatap-Tasia og har yderligere eroderet den.

Fra Vestenden af Nunataken ved Varden var det let at
konstatere, at Gletscheren nu laa lengere ost paa end i Juli.
Medens Gletscherenden af Sarkardlek for det meste stiller
sig med fremadheldende Endeflade, saa staar Enden af Jakobs-

My Mn

Fig. 6.

havns-Gletscher altid med lodret Veg eller maaske snarere
med Veggen lidt tilbageheldende. Undertiden blev det ned-
styrtede staaende paa Halvvejen, hvilket jeg ogsaa lagde Merke
til 1902. Dette beror sagtens paa, at saadanne storre Stykker
kommer til at hvile paa megtige Masser af sammenstuvet
Kalvis, der bærer dem oppe. Muligvis hidrorer Fænomenet
ogsaa fra, at den Del af Stykket, der rager ned i Vandet, af
dette bliver delvis opløst, saaledes at Opdriften bliver mindre.
Hosstaaende (Fig. 6) søger at anskueliggøre dette Forhold.
ndre Kalvninger end saadanne Nedstyrtninger fik jeg ikke

180

Lejlighed til at iagttage. Derimod bemærkede jeg paa selve
Gletscheren inden for Enden ruinagtige Partier 9: Omraader
hvor Spidserne tilsyneladende var faldet ned. Saadanne Partier
var ved deres hvide Farve afstikkende i Forhold til den graa
Farve, der ellers er herskende paa Gletschernes Overflade.

Paa Ostenden af Nunataken var der god Lejlighed til at
paavise, at Isen havde trukket sig tilbage. Isranden laa nu
35 m lavere, end den har gjort tidligere, idet dens tidligere
Stand jo markeres af en Morene, endnu kun sparsomt bevok-

Nu 10

is
Fig. 7.

set med Planter. Isens overste Rand laa i en Hojde af 195 m,
dens Fod i en Højde af 175. Gletschervæggen var altsaa 20 m
høj. Mellem den øverste Moræne og den nuværende Isrand,
der iovrigt ikke er ledsaget af nogen Morænevold, iagttog jeg
flere mere eller mindre udpregede Morenevolde: Beviser for,
at Isen ikke kan have trukket sig jevnt tilbage, men i lengere
eller kortere Tid har været stationær, hvor nu Moræne-
voldene ligger.

Mellem den ostlige Ende af Kekertarssunguit og
Nunatanguak skyder der sig en Gletscher ned. Den er

181

ganske jævn oven paa, og nogen videre Bevægelse kan der
næppe være i den. Formodentlig ligger den i Læ af Nuna-
takens Fortsættelse under Isen mod Ost. Ogsaa denne Glet-
scher er i Tilbagegang, hvilket de temmelig friske Morener,
der ligger langs dens Rand, tyder paa.

Ved Enden af Gletscheren er der et Delta, som forener
sig med en Gletscherelv, der lober mellem Nunatanguak og
Fastlandet, og som kommer fra en bred Gletscher, der
skyder sig ned mellem Nunatanguit og Ekaluit-Nunata;
ogsaa her har Isen trukket sig meget sterkt tilbage. Tempera-
turen i Elven Kl. 2 de sidste Dage i August var nojagtig 1°;
om Natten danner der sig Tyndis paa den Del af Nunatap-
Tasia, hvor den munder ud. Mængden af Slam den forer, er
ikke stor. En Bestemmelse gav kun 6 gr pr. Liter.

Her, hvor Deltaet løber tæt under Gletscherenden, vasker
den de nederste Dele bort, og det ovenoverliggende styrter da
ned. Gletscherenden kommer derfor til at staa med lodrette
Vegge ganske som de Gletschere, der gaa ud til Vandet i
Fjordene. Det synes mig, som dette Forhold giver et Finger-
peg til Forstaaelsen af Kalvningen i hvert Fald for Gletschere,
hvis Hastighed ikke er stor.

Paa Hammers Kort kaldes den Landstrekning, der ligger
inden for den store Gletscher og hen imod Ekaluit-Nunata,
for Tivsarigsok (Ире = Lugt, sak og gigpok). Oprindelig
betegnede Helland hermed Strekningen ved Kangerdlu-
kasik. Hammer flyttede det lengere mod Ost. Gronlendere,
som jeg spurgte ud om Stedbetegnelsen paa Landstrekningen
her, kendte ikke dette Navn. Overhovedet har de ikke nogen
Betegnelse netop for dette Omraade. Der maa formodentlig
have indsneget sig en Misforstaaelse, hvilket forøvrigt meget let
kan ske med gronlandske Stednavne, idet disse jo i Modsæt-
ning til Stednavnene i ældre Kulturstater har en Betydning, der
forstaas umiddelbart, og forskellige Gronlændere ofte "betegner

182

et og samme Sted forskelligt, efter hvad hver af dem synes, er
det mest karakteristiske for det.

Paa den vestlige Del af Nunataken opholdt jeg mig
meget for at faa Lejlighed til at iagttage Kalvninger af Glet-
scheren. Smaa Kalvninger, Losning af Flager og Nedstyrtnin-
ger var hyppige nok, men storre Kalvninger, der kunde give
nogen nermere Oplysning om, hvorledes de store Isfjelde
dannes, fandt ikke Sted, medens jeg var til Stede.

Der stod endnu tilbage, inden Vinteren kom, at foretage

en kort Ekskusion til Alangordlek-Gletscher — Ser-
mia alangordlia,- — som Grønlænderne kalder den. Efter
de Lodninger, som jeg foretog, — se Kortet — er Dybden i

Midten kun c. 50 m, langsomt aftagende ind mod Bredden.
Hojden af Gletscheren fandt jeg at vere 25 m eller i kompakt
Masse 20 m. Hvis Gletscheren skulde зуотте i Vandet med
sin Ende, — eller i hvert Fald vere lige ved det — maatte
Fjorddybden belobe sig til c. 150 m. Man kan naturligvis an-
tage, som jeg ogsaa gjorde det for Sarkardlek, at en ret
betydelig Endemoræne befinder sig ved Enden af Gletscheren.
En Endemorene paa 100 m er jo ret betydelig; men Forhol-
dene ved Keakusuk synes mig at tale noget til Gunst for en
saadan Opfattelse.

Bunden baade her og i Sarkardlek-Fjord bestaar af et
meget fint Ler; kun i Nærheden af Gletscheren viste Bund-
proverne sig mere sandede. Dette forklares ved, at den be-
tydelige Strom af Smeltevand forer Leret bort, og lader Sandet
ligge. Forevrigt gaar Hovedmassen af Smeltevandsstrommen op
langs Gletscherenden og driver derefter langs Overfladen af
Fjorden ud efter. Ved at skovle i Overfladen kan man jævnlig
faa det blaa, næsten klare Fjordvand at se.

Kalvningerne i Alangordlek frembyder ingen Forskel fra
Kalvningerne i Sarkardlek; men Gletscheren er endnu mindre
produktiv end Sarkardlek-Gletscher.

Paa begge Sider af Gletscherne laa der ret betydelige Ende-

183

morener; men forøvrigt var der intet, der tydede paa, at denne
Gletscher var i nogen stærk Aftagen. Paa Endemorænerne var
Papaver nudicaule, Stellaria alpina og enkelte andre indvandrede.

Fra det høje Land nord for Alangordlek-Gletscher,
har man en fortrinlig Udsigt over Gletscherne. Navnlig kan
man meget tydeligt forfølge Spalterne i Gletscherne. I det hele
gaar de paa tvers af Bevegelsesretningen. Afvigelserne beror
paa Ujevnheder i Undergrunden. Er der en Bakke under Isen,
hemmes Isens Bevegelse paa det Sted, og Spalterne kommer
derfor til at lobe skraat tilbage.

Fra Alangordlek-Fjord hever Landet nord for sig
meget brat. Naar man ferst naar op, er det meget jævnt, idet,
saa vidt man kan skonne, de oprindelige Dale er blevet ud-
fyldt af Morænemateriale. Op over Plateauet hever der sig
mod Nordost et kegledannet Fjeld, Omerslusat.

Fra Alangordlek roede vi til Ekaluit (Laksene). en i
Laksetiden besogt Teltplads ved den Elv, der lober ud fra
Ekaluit-Tasia (Laksesoen). De mange primitive Rogestil-
ladser er et Vidne om Virksomheden. Forevrigt er Laksene
smaa og heller ikke velsmagende. Umiaken blev baaret langs
den nordre Bred til Seen og sat i Vandet her. Om Efteraaret
staar Vandet næsten en Meter lavere end om Foraaret. Da
Soen modtager Tillob fra Smeltevandsfloder, der kommer fra
Indlandsisen, ег Vandet uklart ligesom i Nunatap-Tasia, og
ligesom der er Bredden fuld af skarpkantede Sten, som gør det
besverligt at sætte en Konebaad i Vandet. Paa en gammel
Morenevold paa den nordostlige Side af Seen slog vi Telt.

Desværre fik jeg ikke udfort nogen Lodning, da jeg ved
et Uheld havde mistet Lodlinen i Alangordlek. Formodentlig er
Seen temmelig flad i Modsætning til Nunatap-Tasia. Medens
Nunatap-Tasia i en forholdsvis sen Tid har veret udfyldt
af en Ismasse, der banede sig Vej syd om Nunataken, saa
har Ekaluit-Tasia ikke veret udfyldt af Is, siden denne
havde en langt betydeligere Udbredelse end nu.

184

Ved den ostlige Ende af Soen lober.der en Gletscherelv
ind. Bekken har skaaret sig ned i et tidligere Delta. Dette
maa altsaa vere dannet under en højere Stand af Søen. Sar-
kardlek- og Alangordlek-Gletscherne har formodentlig
i sin Tid skudt sig frem, saaledes at de helt har stemmet
Ekaluit-Tasia op. Rudimenter af det tidligere Gletscher-
delta staar tilbage som Kamme og Rygge. Elvedalen er flad
og fuld af Rullesten.

Ost for Søen oppe paa et Plateau hæver det for omtalte
Omerslusat-Fjeld sig; det ligger tet ude ved Indlandsisen,
og man har derfra en udmerket Udsigt i alle Retninger. Des-
verre sneede det, saaledes at Landskabet blev indhyllet i Sne;
det blev derfor vanskeligt at erkende Grensen mellem Land og
Indlandsis, altsaa at paavise, om Isen overhovedet havde trukket
sig tilbage. Paa nogle enkelte Steder kunde jeg dog paavise,
at der laa store nye Morænevolde; det maa vel derfor være
berettiget at antage, at ogsaa Isen her er i Aftagen. Langs
Isranden laa der opstemt mange Smaasøer; i adskellige af disse
ender Isen med lodrette Vægge.

Paa Isen laa der ret betydelige Moræner.

Egnen indenfor Ekaluit-Tasia er øde og besøges yderst
sjældent af Grønlænderne og kun om Vinteren ved Hjælp af
Hundeslæde, naar de vil paa Rensdyrjagt. Man kører ind ad
Tasiussak til Kangerdlukasik og over Tangen ind paa
Ekaluit-Tasia. Derpaa følger man den før omtalte Glet-
scherelv mod Nord og kommer saa ind paa Ekaluit-Nuna-
tap-Tasia (ikke at forveksle med Kekertarssunguit Nuna-
tap-Tasia). Rensdyrene er dog meget sjældne. Ganske vist
har jeg flere Gange i Egnene syd for Isfjorden set Rensdyrspor,
men kun en eneste Gang i.Sommeren 1902, set et ungt Dyr.
Forøvrigt er ogsaa andre Dyr sjældne herude, saaledes baade
Hare og Rype.

Nordøst for Søen strækker der sig en temmelig høj Bjerg-
kæde, fra hvis højeste Top man har en udmærket Udsigt. Man

185

ser over Jakobshavns-Gletscher til Nunatarssuak og
dennes Ostspids; man kan ligeledes se Dele af Ekaluit-
Nunatap-Tasia og Ekaluit-Nunatä. Disse topografiske
Enkeltheder er blevet indfort paa Kortet.

Ost for Seen findes et lille Omraade af Fjeldskraaninger,
der ikke er bevokset med Lav, og som derfor er lysegraat.
Rimeligvis har Isen for nylig med en Tunge hængt ned herover.
Stedet synes ogsaa at være antydet paa Hammers Kort.

Da Søen ligger saa aaben, er Vegetationen meget sparsom,
selv paa Nordsiden, der dog beskyttes af de ovenfor omtalte
Fjelde. Nogle enkelte Steder er dog Birkebuskene ret godt ud-
viklede, og i en Fure, som en lille Elv havde skaaret i en
Endemoræne, der strakte sig langs den nordlige Del af Søen,
voksede Salix glauca oprejst og naaede en Højde af 1.3 m. En
Skare Rødirisker holdt til i dens Grene. Vegetationen paa
Morænen var, saaledes som det altid er Tilfældet, meget spar-
som. Mest fremtrædende var den sorte traadede Liken, dernæst
enkelte Græsser og Halvgræsser, hist og her en Dryas, Saxi-
fraga tricuspidata, Silene acaulis og endnu sjældnere nogle
Eksemplarer af Salix glauca og Betula nana.

Efter et have faaet et foreløbigt Overblik over Egnen om-
kring Ekaluit vendte vi tilbage til Ekaluit-Tupersua.
Næste Morgen var Alangordlek saa langt, som vi kunde se,
tillagt med Tyndis. Grønlænderne blev naturligvis noget be-
kymrede ved Situationen og ønskede at komme af Sted, saa
snart ske kunde. Med Aarerne slog vi Isen itu og kom om-
sider ud i aabent Vand i Tasiussak. Her viste Vandet en
Temperatur af 1.2”. Det kolde Smeltevand i det indre af Is-
fjorden fremmer selvfølgelig i høj Grad Islæget. Om Aftenen
naaede vi Kekertarssunguit-Tuperssua, hvor vi slog
Telt. Den følgende Dag gik jeg over Kekertarssunguit-
Kulå til Teltpladsknuden for at iagttage Forandringer i Isfjor-
den. Der var forøvrigt ikke noget interessant at opdage; det
tidligere omtalte Isfjeld i oprindelig Stilling var forsvundet.

186

Derefter fortsatte vi Rejsen ud af Tasiussak, idet vi dog

anløb Upernivik ved Tasiussaks Udmunding i Isfjorden.

Her gik jeg op paa Fjeldene for at se, om det eftersøgte Is-

fjeld skulde vere at se.

Det var der ikke og maa altsaa vere

gaaet i Stykker; ud af Fjorden kan det i hvert Fald ikke vere

kommet.

Da nogle meteorologiske Observationer fra Egne, der ligger

ner Indlandsisen maaske kan have sin Interesse, meddeles her

nogle Fragmenter.

Nunatap-Tasia

25. Aug. | 26. Aug. 27. Aug. 29. Aug. | 30. Aug
9 Aft. | 8 Mg. ЗАН. | 8 Mg. |2Md./8 Aft. | 8 Mg. |2Md. Saft. | 8 Mg.
ker meer 3.5 3.9 | 0.6 а. 05 0.9) 5.2 --0.2 0.0
Vaadt Term. | PASS 0.7 3.6 | 0.2 | 0.1, 4.1 --1.8
Мах >. TORRES seuls Se 6.2 ete
Min! oe. | :. | +80 0.8 5.9
Kekertarssunguit Alangordlek
| 30. Aug. | 31. Aug. | 31. Aug. 1. Sept. 2. Sept.
| зав. | вм |2ma | 8 Aft. | 8 Mg. | 8 aft. | SMg. | 2 Md. | 8 Aft.
Term. ..... +15 | +24 |338 =06| 1705| 3041-12
Vaadt Term. Sor a 1.2 me
Max me ce Shs LD PARA |e 4.5
MT go += 8.0 | +-3.0 7
Alangordlek
3. Sept. 4. Sept. 5. Sept. 6. Sept.
| Mg. | 8 Aft. | 8 Mg. | 2 Md. | 8 Aft. | 8Mg. | 2Md. | 8 aft. | 8Mg. | 8 Aft.
|
Ч sere 1.7 ii Heat) Biss | 02, 201241 2.5 |, 1.8
Vaadt Term. |-=0.7 | 1.3 |-=1.2 1.2 —+1.2|--1.1| 2.0 | 1.0 TO 05
Max... ar AST ln 3.2 | 4.9 4.0 | 6.2
Mine... 4.9 3.9 —2.0|

187

EEE

Ekaluit-Tasia

7. Sept. | 8. Sept. ty »9 Sept; | 10. Sept.
a 2 Md. 8 Aft. | 8 Mg. Lo Ma. 8 Aft, 8 Mg. 2 Ma. 8 Aft. | 8 Mg. |2 Ma. 8 aft.
Term. ..... 31 74| 21| 4.0) 51) 28 | 31| 51| 21| 23 51| 0.4
Vaadt Term. | 0.6 41| 0.6/ 21) 3.3] .. |) .. 130 .:| 0.333:
Мах р-на | а ЭГ. echo [863 ee ee
Min. .... =. 11.0) ..|.. a урн лор xz u a he

Ekaluit-Tasia

11. Sept. 12. Sept. | 13. Sept. | 14. Sept. |15. Sept.
| met Ne le

| 8 Mg. | 2 ма. 8 Aft. | 8 Mg. 2ма. 8 Aft, Ne. | ka | at! | Me. ma. | anf | 8 Mg.

Vejret, der i den sidste Tid havde været koldt og vinter-
ligt, blev netop nu, da vi var ved at forlade Tasiussak,
næsten sommerligt — i hvert Fald om Dagen. — Jeg beslut-
tede derfor at gore en Ekskursion til Pakitok-Fjord for om
mulig at faa Lejlighed til at undersøge, om Indlandsisen ogsaa
her er i Tilbagegang. Som omtalt af Hammer er Indsejlingen
meget snæver og kan kun foretages i Nærheden af Middelvand-
stand og endda kun med Forsigtighed, Selve Udlebet har
skaaret sig igennem en Moreneaflejring, der, da den er flad
ovenpaa, synes at vere afsat under Vand. Konebaadsstyreren
var forovrigt ukendt her, og da vi sogte at naa frem ad den
sydlige Arm, lob Baaden paa Grund, hvorover Styreren blev
meget betænkelig. Vi vendte og slog Telt paa Akuliarusek,
hvorfra man har en ganske god Udsigt over de Gletschere, der
skyder sig ned. Flere Forhold tyder paa, at Isen var i Aftagende.

Paa Grund af det snævre Indlob beløber Forskellen mellem

Flod og Ebbe sig kun til en halv Meter i Pakitok-Ilua.
SOE 13

188

Da Vejret vedblev at være godt, og Konebaadsstyreren ikke
var bange for at slaa Telt i rimelig Nerhed af Isen, sejlede vi
ind gennem Ata-Sund og slog os ned i Bassinet syd for
Torsukatak ved Kugssuak, en Gletscherelv, der kommer
fra en Gletscher mellem Nunap-Kigdliga og Manitok.
Gletscheren styrter fra en Hojde af 350 m meget stejlt ned
mod Kugssuak-Dal. Paa denne Tid forte Elven ikke ret
meget Vand og var desuden delt i flere Arme, saaledes at man
uden større Besvær kunde komme over den. Nunap-Kig-
dliga bestaar af Glimmerskifer, der er stærkt forvitret. En
gammel Morene forteller, at Isen har staaet mere fremrykket
end nu. Men ellers kan man ikke sige, at Isen nu for Tiden
har trukket sig synderligt tilbage; hvis man overhovedet med
Sikkerhed kan tale om Tilbagegang her.

Paa Plateauet vest for Kugssuak ligger der adskillige
Seer, hvorfra Elvene styrter ned som brusende Vandfald.

Ved Teltpladsen laa en subfossilforende Lermasse. Mellem
Gneisoen og Fastlandet har den bevaret sig mod Denuda-
tionen; Bolgeslaget har dog gnavet den sterkt. Paa Klippe-
siderne ser man smukke Gletscherskrammer. Disse er hyppigt
krydsende. Selv om man nodvendigvis maa antage, at Ismas-
sen i umiddelbar Nerhed af Gletscherskrammen maa_ have
samme Retning som Skrammen, og at altsaa Ismasserne ved
Bunden ved krydsende Skrammer maa have haft en forskellig
Retning, saa er det dog ikke vist, at hele Ismassen helt op til
Overfladen har haft forskellige Bevegelsesretninger. En sterre
Megtighed af Isen er vistnok tilstrækkelig til at kunne frem-
kalde en forskelligartet Bevegelse af Ismasserne ved Bunden.

Paa Gletscheren stod Vandet frosset i Fordybningerne og
faldt ved sin asurblaa Farve stærkt i Øjnene. Langs Glet-
scheren, men dog fjernet nogle Meter derfra, laa en ældre Mo-
rene, sparsomt dekket af den Vegetation, man sædvanlig tref-
fer paa gamle Morener. Umiddelbart langs Gletscheren laa der
en anden ganske frisk Morene.

189

Den Del af Nunap-Kigdliga, der stoder op til Gletsche-
ren, frembyder en smuk Lagrekke. Nederst iagttager man en
typisk Gnejs tet gennemsat af Pegmatitgange. Derefter
kommer der et Lag Hornblende og endelig averst et Glimmer-
skiferlag; dette sidste er stærkt forvitret. Lagene falder
mod Øst.

Fra vor Teltplads her ved Niakornanguak formaaede
jeg Styreren til at sejle os til Nunataken. Denne har gan-
ske samme Lagfolge som Nunap-Kigdliga; dog er der ved et
Brud, der gaar tværs over Nunataken i est-vestlig Retning,
betydelig Forskel paa den nordlige og sydlige Del af Nuna-
taken. Den nordlige Del er meget hojere end den sydlige
Del, og da Lagene falder mod Øst, er den ved Forvitring delt
i Trappetrin, der lober i Nord-Syd, og som ger Marchen meget
besverlig. Uagtet Nunataken i og for sig ikke er videre stor,
tog det en uforholdsmessig lang Tid at naa op paa det hejeste
Punkt. Herfra har man en udmerket Udsigt til alle Sider.
Her tet ved Toppen fandt jeg et stort Rensdyrgevir. Det var
meget forvitret og stammede sandsynligvis fra den Tid, da
Rensdyrene fandtes i disse Egne. Nu er Rensdyrene udryd-
dede paa Strekningen mellem Torsukatak og Jakobshavns-
Isfjord. Landstrækningerne her er jo ogsaa kun smaa, og
Kysten er tæt befolket — efter grønlandske Forhold naturligvis.
Men allerede umiddelbart syd for Jakobshavns-Isfjord
og nord for Torsukatak findes der Rensdyr, paa det sidste
Sted er de endog ret hyppige. Da Dagene nu allerede var
korte, kom vi først hjem sent om Aftenen. Heldigvis var det
Maaneskin, ellers havde vi været nødt til at tilbringe en ret
kølig Efteraarsnat paa Klipperne; nu kunde vi med lidt For-
sigtighed langsomt bevæge os ned ad.

Den sydlige Del af Nunataken bestaar i sin øverste Del
af en stærkt forvitret Glimmerskifer ganske som paa Nunap-
Kigdliga, og ligesom paa denne var Overfladen temmelig jævn
og fuld af Forvitringsprodukter. Sermia-Kujadlek-Dal,'

190

saa vel som Brudlinjen mellem den nordlige og sydlige Del af
Nunataken samt Sermia-Avanardlek-Dal hører for-
modentlig alle til samme System af Forkloftninger. De to Glet-
cherdale er sterkt eroderede, derimod staar Bruddalen paa
Nunataken med skarpe Former og er fuld af Forvitrings-
produkter — nedfaldne og skarpkantede Sten og lignende.
Lagfolgen er meget regelmæssig: nederst Gnejs, saa Horn-
blende, saa Glimmerskifer; kun paa den nordlige Del af
Nunataken har et overste modstandsdygtigt Lag holdt sig;
derfor er ogsaa dette Parti det hojeste.

I Dalen mellem den nordlige og sydlige Del af Nuna-
taken lober der baade en lille Elv, der kommer fra Plateauet,
og en Gletscherelv, der kommer fra en lille Gletscherse, af
Gronlænderne betegnet Tasek-Ilulialik (tasek = So, iluliak
= Isfjeld, lik == forsynet med), fordi der dannes smaa Isfjelde i
den — formodentlig paa sædvanlig Maade ved Nedstyrtning.
Isen er her i Vinklen mellem de to Dele af Nunataken meget
jevn ganske som ovenfor Nunap-Kigdliga.

Uader Opholdet her inde i Bassinet syd for Torsukatak,
havde vi i Forhold til Aarstiden et ualmindeligt mildt Vejr.
Dette beroede paa, at Vinden stadig var ostlig-sydestlig, saa-
ledes at Vinden var en Fohnvind, til Tider endog udpreget
med hej Varme og sterke Vindsted. Men nu gik Vinden om
til syd og samtidig faldt Temperaturen. Vi forlod Nunataken
for at sætte over til Anä-Land, for at jeg kunde faa Lejlighed
til at studere Sermia-Avanardlek; vi passerede flere lave
Øer, Satut, (de tynde 9: de flade); den nordligste af dem,
Kekertak-Avanardlek, bestaar af to Gnejshoje, forbundne
ved en Morene. Vi slog Telt ved Niakornak (niakok — Ho-
vede). Med Omslaget i Vejret kom Taage, og om Natten faldt
der megen Sne; nu var det pludselig blevet Vinter. Vi blev
derfor enige om, at nu var det bedst at bryde op og naa ud
til Kysten, inden Tyndisen kom og sperrede for os. Paa Vejen
"tilbage passerede vi syd for Kekertakasak en lille ©, Poki-

191

tokujök (pokitok, lav); den var langstrakt og bestod ligesom
den nylig omtalte Kekertak-Avanardlek af to Gnejshoje,
forbundne ved Morenemateriale. Denne @ ligger saa lavt, at
Vandet ved Springflod gaar over Forbindelsespartiet. Hvis
Landet sænker sig saa hurtigt som formodet, maa denne ©, ved
at Tangen bliver overskyllet, snart blive delt i to.

Da vi kom til Torsukatak, laa der vidt og bredt Tyndis.
Vandet er jo i Forvejen afkolet til Frysepunktet; falder der saa
Frostsne, fryser Kalvisstykkerne let sammen. Vi var imidlertid
forberedt paa disse Vanskeligheder og havde taget tynde Bred-
der med. Disse blev fastbundne paa Umiaken i Vandlinjen,
saaledes at [sen skar paa Brædderne, medens Skindet blev be-
skyttet. Vi naaede derfor uden større Besvær Kekertak.

Medens vi sejlede gennem Torsukatak, sprang en tid-
ligere Strandlinje meget tydeligt frem navnlig paa den sydlige
Side. Paa min tidligere Rejse gennem Torsukatak havde jeg
ikke faaet Øje paa den; men Sneen bevirkede nu, at den
traadte tydeligt frem. Paa Slæderejserne den kommende Vinter
kunde jeg næsten allevegne i Torsukatak paavise Strandlinjen.
Paa den nordlige Side af Fjorden var den dog kun tydelig med
bestemt Belysning. Saa vidt jeg ved, er Dr. Steenstrup den
eneste, der tidligere har paavist, at man ogsaa andre Steder i
Grønland kan paavise saadanne Strandlinjer, der i Norge er ret
almindelige. ;

I Kekertak købte jeg Hunde, og med disse sejlede vi
den følgende Dag (d. 6. Okt.) til Ritenbenk, hvor jeg blev
boende til den 31. Januar. Da vi var kommet til Ritenbenk,
brød der en heftig Sydvest-Storm løs, ledsaget af et stærkt
Snefald. Men efter en Uges Forløb var Vejret atter smukt, og
Sneen forsvandt næsten ganske igen. løvrigt var Efteraaret
ikke koldt. Gennemgaaende havde vi en Temperatur af — 8°
fra midt i Oktober næsten til Udgangen af December. En Om-
stændighed, der forøvrigt havde den kedelige Virkning, at jeg
ikke kunde komme af Stedet, eftersom Islæget udeblev.

192

Da Ritenbenk ligger paa omtrent samme Bredde som
Ana, havde jeg efterladt nogle Termometre hos en Fanger der,
for at han i Efteraarsmaanederne skulde foretage Temperatur-
aflesninger. Det vilde jo vere af Interesse at sammenligne
Temperaturerne ved Indlandsisen og ude ved Havet. For at der
ikke skulde ske nogen Misforstaaelse, havde jeg anmodet en
gronlandskkyndig Mand om at forklare Fangeren Fremgangs-
maaden. Da jeg senere kom til Anä, viste det sig, at Manden
nok havde opskrevet nogle Tal, men disse var uden Verdi.

Da Forstaaelsen af Gronlændernes Betegnelse for Vind-
retningerne kan vere af Betydning for Rejsende, meddeles her
nogle Oplysninger, som sikkert yderligere kan suppleres og
maaske modificeres.

Vindretningerne i Gronland bliver stedse af Gronlænderne
angivet ved den Retning, hvorfra de komme. Da Grønlænderne
jo ikke har noget andet Middel end et Jugement af Solen til
at bestemme Verdenshjernerne, bliver Retningerne naturligvis
altid helt retvisende. Efter at Kompasset har fundet Indgang
blandt Grønlænderne, angives nu ogsaa Vindretningerne mis-
visende. Mange Steder benyttes naturligvis lokale Navne for
de fremherskende Vinde.

Som Følge af Insolationen om Dagen og den stærke Ud-
straaling om Natten er Land- og Søvinde meget almindelige i
Grønland. Landvinden — altsaa i Reglen den østlige Vind —
bliver kaldt Asarnek (af en mig ubekendt Rod) og de sæd-
vanlige Søvinde (Vestvinde) Imarsarnek (af Imak — Hav).

Af de Vinde, der opstaar ved større barometriske Minima,
er Norden- og Søndenvinden de vigtigste. Nordenvinden hedder
Avagnak, men Retningen er egentlig nærmest nordvest (ret-
visende). Den rigtig kolde Nordenvind betegnes Avanakasik
(Avanak — Norden og kasik — ussel, forbandet). Misvisende
bliver Avanakasik altsaa nordost, Avanak derimod nord.
Sydlig Vind betegnes Kigangak (misvisende altsaa. sydvest); i
Syd-Grønland betegnes denne Vind Nigek. Kujasik er en

193

sydlig Vind, der stryger langs Kystens Hovedretning, altsaa en
sydostlig Vind (misvisende Syd). De varme Fohnvinde, blev saa
vidt jeg forstod, kaldt Kiangnak (af Kiak = Varme) eller
Isangiak, naar man serlig vilde betegne Fohnvinden. Dan-
skerne i Grønland kalder Fohnvinden Sydost (misvisende).

En lokal Vind, der bleser gennem Vaigat kalder Gron-
lenderne Isersarnek, de Danske Vaigatsnorden. Det er
en svag Vind, der bringer smukt Vejr; den samme Vindretning
kaldes Avanak-utokak, naar det blæser stærkere, og Vejret
er enten taaget eller nedborbringende. Begge Vindretninger er
altsaa nordvestlige, men medens den forste vistnok oprindelig
er en Nordvind, er Avanak-utokak vistnok en vest sydvestlig
Vind, der stryger rundt om Disko ned gennem Vaigat og
derved faar Udseende af at vere en nordvestlig Vind. Det er
blevet mig meddelt, at denne vestlige Vind andre Steder kaldes
Avangnak-kananek. Kananek betyder egentlig en syd-
vestlig Vind. Nordenvinden, der stryger ned gennem Ata-
Sund (paa Gronlandsk Ikarasak), kaldes af Beboerne der om-
kring Ikarsarnek. En nordlig Vind, der stryger ned over God-
havn, gaar der under Navnet Pitorak. Forovrigt har Vindene
de forskellige Steder vistnok oftere Navne efter Fjelde eller Dale,
som de stryger hen over; ved Kristianshaab kaldes Fohnvinden
Sarkarsnek efter de hoje Fjelde mod Syd (Sarkak — Sydside).

I den mig af Commissionen for Gronlands geologiske og
geografiske Undersøgelser givne Instruks blev min Opmerksom-
hed henledet paa Dannelsen af Isfoden og dennes Indflydelse
paa Tangranden. Under mit Ophold i Ritenbenk havde jeg
netop god Lejlighed til at iagttage, hvorledes Isfoden anlægges.

Isfod betegner den Del af Isdækket paa Havet, der er fast-
frosset til Kysten. Om Vinteren danner den en Bræmme paa
en, to eller flere Meters Bredde, alt efter Kystens Form; jo
fladere Kysten er, des bredere er Bræmmen. Den fremkommer
ved, at Isdækket under Flod og Ebbe hæver sig op og ned;
kun en Isrand langs Land ligger fast. Det bevægelige Isdække

194

er skilt fra denne Rand ved Spalter. Ved Lavvande særlig
under Springtid kan Isdekket ligge saa lavt, at det er meget
besverligt at komme i Land; man maa ligefrem med Tok’en
hugge Trappetrin i Isfodens Kant; med Hundeslede er det
endnu besverligere. | Begyndelsen af Vinteren ved stejle Strand-
bredder kan der mellem Isfoden og Isdækket ved Lavvande og
navnlig under Springtid ligefrem vere en aaben Rende af Vand
(se Fig. 8c). Saaledes maatte vi i Februar en Aften vente i flere
Timer paa en Klippeside, inden vi kunde slippe ned paa Isen,
ellers vilde vi let i Morket vere faldet ned i Renden.

Isfodens Anleg finder Sted endnu for der har dannet sig
Isleg — fra Isfjordene ses der her bort. — Den begynder som
et tyndt Glassurovertrek paa Bredden, naar det er Ebbe og
naar fra Hojvandets overste Stand til omtrent laveste Ebbe.
Naar Vandet igen stiger, bliver den nederste Del af Over-
trekket igen oplost, hvilket jeg overbeviste mig om ved at fole
efter, dog finder denne Opløsning ikke Sted straks, men noget
efter, at Vandet er steget. Paa de overste Dele maa der
aabenbart ogsaa oploses noget — men ikke saa meget som 1
den nederste Del, fordi Vandets Indvirkning er meget kortere.
Naar Vandet atter falder, fryser der en ny Skorpe fast, og —
hvilket der vistnok er det vesentligste — Skorpen bliver sterkt
afkolet saaledes, at naar Vandet stiger, vil en Mængde Vanddele
fryse fast. I den nederste Del vil dog Vandet kunne faa Tid til at
tilfore saa megen Varme, at en Del atter oploses. Den overste
Del af Isfoden vokser derfor stærkere end den nederste. Derfor
danner Isfoden ikke en Figur som (b) men snarere som (c). (Fig. 8).

Naar Isen om Foraaret forsvinder, driver bort, ligger Is-
foden tilbage som en Bremme med nesten stejle Rande. Men
dette varer kun kort, thi Vandet, der nu, da Isdekket er borte,
kan komme i Bolgebevegelse, vil snart gnave sig ind, saaledes
at Isfoden kommer til at se ud som (e) og senere som (f).
Jeg har aldrig iagttaget, at Isfoden er brækket los fra Klippen;
derimod har jeg iagttaget, at dens yderste Spids kan brække

195

af (den punkterede Linje paa Fig.f), naar det er Ebbe, og naar
den underste Del af Isfoden er gnavet bort. Ved Kristianshaab
havde jeg Lejlighed til at iagttage, hvorledes en Fucus, der sad
indfrossen i Isfoden, blev fuldstendig fri, uden at den mistede
saa meget som en Flig. Dens morke Legeme absorberer Varme-
straaler saaledes, at der omkring den dannes Vand. Selv om
der skulde ske et Brud, vil den derfor knapt nok en Gang blive
beskadiget. Naar en stor veludviklet Alge ikke odelegges af
Isfoden, saa finder dette endnu mindre Sted med smaa Alger,

dé omde
Miadivande

Kawvomde

Hovis

Fig. 8.

hvilket mine lagttagelser ved Øerne ved Kristianshaab synes
at bekræfte. Isfoden har altsaa næppe nogen ødelæggende
Virkning paa Algevegetationen, og forsaavidt er der altsaa ikke
noget til Hinder for at bruge Tangranden til Bestemmelse af,
om Landet hæver eller sænker sig, saaledes som af Dr. Steen-
strup foreslaaet.

Foruden lagttagelser over Isfodens Dannelse studerede jeg
de grønlandske Stednavnes Etymologi samt foretog meteoro-
logiske Observationer samt Lysmaalinger ved Hjælp af Steen-
strups Lysmaaler. Resultaterne findes meddelt her.

Dato 8 2 8 Dato 8 2
|
Oktbr Term: 1.5 2.9 1140) Oktbr. 2.0
Max ere 3.0 årg
IH In ie ae: oe --3.5 | ..
9. 4! Vindstyrke .. Fy + * 16. 0 3
| Vindretning . $ 5 $ 50 SO
| Skydække ... | 10 | 10 8 0 0
Belysning ... ne fæ: ; ae 38
erm eae 2.0 3.0 2.0 0 0.1
| Мах: See Ga ais 4.7 | ome 9
Пе. 0.1 ae 2 32.0} ..

10. {| Vindstyrke .. | .. i | ий 6
Vindretning . = Fr RES Ps SV
Skydække ... 2e + ae 10 10
Belysning ... | .. Se + 34

| SON еде | 0.9 1.6 | —1.2 —4.0 | +0.5
MAX Py oy an 1134 PURE :

| Miner: ae 0.0 Hee ee I

11. {| Vindstyrke .. 3 Be is KOREA ES) 5

| Vindretning . | ØSØ | ØSØ |050 | NØ | NØ
| Skydække ... SE ae 1 | 1
| Belysning ... Sp 38 ar 38
Term ere +3.1 3.0 | 2 9 5.6 6.

| Max. 22... с г | 7:
Mini er 4.8 | ..

12. 2| Vindstyrke .. 2 7 4 MORE & Ü 9

14. Vindstyrke .. р 1 Sal, 1 1 1
Vindretning . [5] SO 0 NO NO NO
Skydække ... ee ee) 01) 1 0 0
Belysning ... 36 > 42
Term 0.2 2.0 0.4 +2.1| +1 | +2.0

1) Nordlys. ?) Diset. 3) Snevejr. 4) Det fugtige Term. viste Kl. 2 + 1.8.
5) Föhnklatter. 7) Sydostklatter om Morgenen.

197

Dato 8 2 8 Dato 8 2 8
Oktbr. ее. -4.1| --2.5 | —5.5 Oktbr 30-29 (LE 1.0
Mae tet, ce +2.2 (ase 1.0
Mine 2 +6.1 = sul. =
23. Vindstyrke .. | 2 2 2 30. 3 3 3
Vindretning . | SO | SO | SO N | N N
Skydekke ... 2 0 0 1) ZAG 10
Belysning ... 46 me | 34
Mérite À. +65) +5.5| +69 |+3.0 | +04
MAX Se ere ay 4.0 о MAR 0.4
И ею 7.3 | > | 4 | .. x
24. 7 Vindstyrke .. | 0 1 0 31. 2190408 3
Vindretning . 4 a Ne UN N
Skydekke... || 1 0 0 or ES 5
| Belysning ... 46 | (UE £
MET tu 7.7) 241] =3.5| Novbr.(=18| 11| ..
Mine le (lasso) Na … | 1.0
Misser —-9.0 de 235| .. Fe
25. Vindstyrke .. 0 1 3 TANT El 1 1
| Vindretning . || NO NO NO | N NO NO
| Skydække ... 0 0 0 2 0 0
| Belysning ... | .. 41 вы
Terms ir. --4.0 | +3.4) +5.0 |-=4.5 | +3.5| 4.0
Max... 2... : 3.4 dg: м. 1.0
Mines. --8.5 ая |-=5.1| .. Er
96. Vindstyrke .. 0 0 0 9% HO 0 0
Vindretning . | № | NO NO | NO | NO NO
| Skydække ... 1 2 1 [9 8 10
| Belysning ... | : 38 æn 29
ети. +5.6) +3.4| +5.3 --5.0 5.1) +40
(Maxi ere x ae —-3.0 Pea ый
| Mine —7.1| .. ae | +5.6 --5.6
21. Vindstyrke .. 0 PAS RO SR Al 0
| Vindretning . 0 вс AR МО
| Skydække .. 8 JL NO 2 2.11 2
| Belysning ... ES 32 16% 32 |
Term, 4. о EPST CU
Мы. SØ Sl Moi | +4
Min te —-8.0 3 % = 0.0 MS I Sea
28. ?| Vindstyrke .. 5 0 2 AD 3 8,21 19")
| Vindretning . | NO | NO NO | SO | SO SV
Skydække ... | 1 0 2 | 2 4 | 10
Belysning ... 37 AE TRE 0 |
Terms te 2,1 | —1.1| +1.0 |-=1.0 | —5.4| ..
Мах ue Ce ae --0.6 о аа
М = 5.5 Ae LI lee
29. 4| Vindstyrke .. 2 2 2 5. Гб Ot | A
M SER Sø Sø Sø | SV NV NV
Skydække ... 2 0 118} 9 4 2
| Belysning ... | . 38 ne 28

1) Fohnklatter.

2) Fohnklatter.

3) Fehnklatter Kl. 8 Morgen, Sne 8 Aften.

198

Dato 8 | 2 Dato 8 AES
|
|
|
a a hr |
Novbr: (| Term. ...... +83) =6.3 270) Novbr. | 28.9 |» 10.5 #11
| Max. El 6.1 | tay ler El Oe
Min Rass ek: 8.8 .. | 9.8 | - =
6. Vindstyrke .. Оо 13...2 22221 2 2
| Vindretning . Gi WO = | NO | NO №
| Skydække | 2 | 1 | 21038 0
| Belysning ... | 33 | 28
MA Wes 11 | Se . +6.5| +5.5| —6.0 +10.0 --8.0 | +8.7
Мах ne tee fees 5.5 = ref fo
aM.» Sete. se). 1290! .. | 121 .. м
1. {| Vindstyrke .. | 3 | 0 14. Золе 1
| Vindretning . | SO 0 NO | NO | NO | NO
Skydekke ... || 10 10 101) | 28 |) 286 2
| Belysning ... 25 La AREA 24
| Term —5.8 | 6.8 | 9.1 —-6.1 +5.0) --6.0
Max ES ER sb --5.6 ke .. | 46.0
МЕ... 6.9 .. 12.2 .. KE
8. 4| Vindstyrke .. 12 15. .< |942 1 0
| Vindretning . | SO | 5 IMSOMIMSO dr
| Skydække ...| 10 | 10 | 360 10 10*)
Belysning ... | .28 HET 22 af
| Term. ...... 17.4 |.=9.0| =8.6 | 6.5 = 7 | 6.8
I EXE 2 rer BR IN es [7.0 un. Wahn | E58
Min Eve: -102 .. О, =
9. 2| Vindstyrke .. 3 1 110. 2 eae 5
| Vindretning . | NO | NO | NO N NO
"куда кке г. | 211.20 2445. 2 05)
| Belysning ... 30 Re 30 X
ADEME cere. en! 7.7 +40! +3.0 15.5 | 6.1! —6.0
MA ne Sør .. | 3.0 I PISE
Min fons ra A TE Re Е
10. {| Vindstyrke .. 0 072122 le Сао 3
| Vindretning . a END | 9 | NO N
| Skydække ... | 10 10 8 5 7
Belysning ... | 27 | 20
| | | | |
Terms. 4.5 | +3.4) +2.7 | +6.5 | +7.5| +8.5
Max Ile | 2.7 | 5.3
Min ere. TON eee а 7.2 REIT ee
11. <| Vindstyrke .. 0:50 3 ken al 2 2 1
| Vindretning . i ae У $ $ SO
| Skydække ... 2 10 0?) | #40 10 36)
| Belysning ... 24 LME 20 N:
FETE AE er —+-5.0 | +-6.2 | +-6.1 |-= 11.5 |-=10.5| +-10.0
Мах. cose ng =—5.0 рые --9.5
Mine ease 5.6 Se 7 Kai eee a
12. „| Vindstyrke SKR а ( 19. 2 2 2
| Vindretning . N N Re 0 SO 0
| Skydekke... | 8 | 1 10°) Qs | 47
Belysning ... | 23 ete 23

1) Svagt Snefald.

4) Snevejr.

5) Diset om Morgenen.

6) Snevejr.

2) Diset om Morgenen, Snefald om Eftm.

3) Diset om Morgenen.
7) Diset om Aftenen.

199

Dato | 8 2 8 Dato 85519 8
Novbr. | Term . 5 10.5) -=8.5| Novbr. 5.7) 275
Max. oases: Sk 7.0 КИ | 6.1
| UE Are 12.5) NEE; 19.2| .. Fe
20. Vindstyrke .. | 2 2 2 21. SNA 1 1
| Vindretning . | © NO NO Mr ORE EG 9
| Skydække ... | 4 3 MES | 161828}. |. 10
| Belysning ... | 22 | Nas
Fermi... |-—7.0 | -+-6.6 | —7.8 |—7.0|-——6.7 | +-7.9
Max. le --6.6 Sea | 6.7
Mine tres ;. Bee 7 8.7! .. 2
21. Vindstyrke .. | 1 1 3 28. Seb INT 2
Vindretning . | N N NO Orit [2]
Skydække :.. | 10 | 10 | 51) 1012410 10
| Belysning ... | El aly) hs ЕН.
| | | |
баги... |-10.1| -12.6] .. +-11.1/-+10.6| +-8.0
Maxth into... fe Ft --10.5 ese M
Mine. I=115) .. ne 2A SE QE
22. 4| Vindstyrke .. || 3 2 Да Ye AA
| Vindretning . 9 | NO вт 38
| Skydække ... | .8 7/3 0 St 07
| Belysning ... | | 21 asser Er |
Term. . . |-+-14.5} --15.0/+-14.0 |-=0.5 | 0.0 О.
Mae An "AASE |-= 14.0 зи
Ми: 4... 18:9 0... | R0DE 12.4) 0... KA
23. {| Vindstyrke .. | 2 2 3 30. , 418115 6 2
Vindretning . | © 0 NO 050| $ | ONO
| Skydække ... | 4 4 5 11x10: 1510 | 103)
Belysning ... | 20 | NIORT
| Term IH-14.4 +-14.5, +15 | Decbr.f| 0.6 | +0.6| —1.5
Мах: .Ё.. oe .. |#-13.5 MERS. +1.8
Ming. sn 15.9 .. Re | +19! °.. ae
24. 4] Vindstyrke ..| 1 2 2 meh ETS IR AI 1
| Vindretning . | NO | NO NO SO N NO
| Skydække ... I: 2 3 4 | 4 2
Belysning ... | “4 920 | | 16 |
Тема}... 13.6 +7 13.2 | -=1.5 | 2.8 | 4.2
Maxi. Bs: We cee WI 7.0 SÅ HUE
| Mint 2.4. : 3-15.8) .. ae | 4.0; .. $.
25. «| Vindstyrke ..| 2 1 3 2. a pela SEA] 1
| Vindretning . | NO 0 0 ISA ES, 9
| Skydække ... | 2 2 0 10319210 | 10
| Belysning ... | .. 197) |
Berman. |--14.5| --13.0| +-6.9 --5.0 ==52 | =52
Max tes it Sl. +6.1 al
| Ming ds. 15.0. р | +5.8} .. г
26. Vindstyrke SA 9) ЕТ 5 3. га 3
Vindretning . | NO | NO NO En se >
Skydække |.. | 5 124 4?) О: 10 10
Belysning :..| .. 18 ce 10

1) Snevejr.

2) Diset.

3) Snevejr.

Dato 8 2 8 Dato el E2 8
Decbr. | Term. ...... +6.5| +8.5| +10 | Deebr. |. 951-104 +105
| Max zer ie de —7.1 of a: oe
Minh. 7.1) .. = -+105 .. a
4, Vindstyrke ae oe = IL 2 3 2
Vindretning . | NV N N NNO | NO 9
Skydække ... | 10 10 92) 0 4 4
Belysning ... ER 8 ip FAR el fe
Mera es lee 10.5) —10.9/--13.0 | -—7.0 | =-2.5 | —-2.0
Maker ar .. 101 | -=5.8 | .. i
Mine ae —11.2! .. Le 11.2) ©... а
5. Vindstyrke .. 5 2 1 12; 3 3 9
Vindretning . | NV [2] 0 9 950 | OSH
Skydekke ... ff 8 2 4 10 6
Belysning ... 8 Hal Sea 10
Term! ел... +-14.0) +-13.5|+-14.0 --2.2 | +2.9 | 1.4
MANS er. k .. (115 1.0! .. ag
| Minnie +149) .. ne | +72) .. oy
6. 2| Vindstyrke .. 2 3 1 IL 5 4 5
Vindretning . 0 NNO 9 | SSO 050
Skydække ... 4 4 2 4 4 2
Belysning ... 12 11 ax
Term... —12.5 +11.5/+11.8 | 1.3 | 40.6 | -—0.4
Max x : Se ЕО 3
Mint esc re +147) .. = 4.0! .. à
7. | Vindstyrke .. | 1 2 1 14, 21019 7 4
Vindretning . | ONO N N 9 9 | ONG
Skydække ... 4 2 0 10 6 2
Belysning ... 11 se И 9
OEMs ect +10.5 —9.0 | +6.8 +0.3 |--0.5 | 0.5
I ED Со: ER sæ: +6.8 О: 32
МВ не + Ae ae т 5: Ne
8 !| Vindstyrke .. | 2 2 3 15. Eos A
| Vindretning . | NO NO 050 GRAS $0
| Skydække ... 2 6 4 2 4 2
Belysning sst |... 12 re 9
lerne --1.5 | —+8.0| —8.1 | 2.0 | +3.0 | +3.5
Ма о бо 6.9 ELO a6 oe
Min Re SN я a=. Oi eee 2
9, }| Vindstyrke .. 3 1 5 16. ани 3
| Vindretning . | № | ONO | NNO | 050 9 0
| Skydække ... 6 6 2 | 2 2 2
| Belysning ... SÅ PACE 10 +
Ferme a. --9.4 | +82) +7.6 |+8.3|+38| +44
INMaxe see Wate SM -. | +58 |-+2.6) .. oe.
| Min ee 12.1 .. SE —6.7| .. i
10. 2) Vindstyrke .. 1 it 1 IEG al) © 2 4 4
| Vindretning . 9 50 NØ NO 0 ONG
| Skydekke ... 4 10 2 1242 4 0
| Belysning ... | .. 10 PRE 9

1) Snevejr.

Dato | SAT or EE Dato 8 2 8
Decbr. (| Term. ...... :5.8| +0.2| +1.8| Dechr. 105/205] +22
Max en ZEN 2. Ve | +0.9
Mint ee =7.0| .. 14.9! ..
18. <| Vindstyrke .. 2 7 8 25. 9 2 2
Vindretning . 9 ØSØ | ØSØ SØ | ØSØ 9
Skydzkke... | 2 8 2 1 1 13)
Belysning ... 8 : 9
Е rh. +2.2| --4.0 | 5.8 +-5.6 | +5.5 | +-7.5
| Маха. 20.3) .. ey | > MMS
(Mine |6. ых ay De зе
19. . Vindstyrke x 4 3 2 20:22 002 2 1
Vindretning . on ER Se | NØ | NO | №
Skydække ... 4 2 0 1 2 0
Belysning ... bd 8 $ 8
И 2. - 8.0 | —10.0/=-11.0 +7.8 | —6.6 | 5.4
Mass in. +21] .. + +44) .. ER
Minne ео 9.0! .. =O. Gili We
20. Vindstyrke .. EINE 1 21. 2 1 1
- || Vindretning . | 9 | ONO 9 | NO 9 9
Skydække ... 0 0 0 0 2 3
| Belysning ... 5% 8 9
Termin... +8.8 | 8.8 | +9.9 +2.0 | 0.7 | +-4.2
Masker, —7.5 ca +2.6| .. N
М: [11.2 .. er В.М. . oe
21. <! Vindstyrke .. 2 3 1 28. re 0 0
Vindretning . 9 9 9 | 050 st Ae
| Skydække ... 4 4 0 8 8 8
| Belysning . 9 ae 8
Termunet),.- :8.5 5.1: +23 15.7 | 8.0 | —-6.0
Max" |-=0.11 .. = | +1.7
EME |. > ME 7. DIRES в.
22. «| Vindstyrke .. 2 4 2 29. 1 1 1
| Vindretning . | NO | ONO 0 9 0 Sø
| Skydække ... 2 4 6 8 fs 10
| Belysning ... RES | 11
| | |
(hem ge. --0.1 | --1.0 | +2.5 77 --1.5 | 8.6
Мея +0.6| .. +54| .. Fe
Mine ee 9.0! .. 8: I9.0| .. =
23. Vindstyrke .. 5 M 6 30. 6 2 1
Vindretning . A A wa 0 S SO
| Skydække ... | 6 6 21) 2 10 44)
| Belysning ... к 7 ik
Terme |+-4.2| —3.0 | —1.0 Ka 9.5
Мах Ее | 0.1 | 7.0! ..
Mini ab | 6.4 se ЕС
24. Vindstyrke .. SO Roger Er 81. 2 3
Vindretning . | ONG № | ONO NO |- N
Skydække ... | 1 2 22) 10 105)
Belysning ... | | 10 ae "8
1) Sne om Morgenen, senere Fehnklatter. >) Fohnklatter. 3) Fohnklatter. *) Sne-

vejr.

5) Snevejr.

Dato | a8 | 28 Dato 2
| |
Januar | perm. 2.2.2. 210.6 2-11.2|-+-1.0] Januar |.
Мао. 1.6 ..
Minen. 122 .. År
ill Vindstyrke .. 2 3 1 8.
| Vindretning . | © 0 0
| Skydække ... | 7 2 2
Belysning ... | 10 |
Merman tr. = 120, 12 6/1 |
| Max sankt +-10.3) | 8.
Min ae se ok 13.01 .. ie
2. 3] Vindstyrke .. | 2 2 2 TPE]
| Vindretning . | © 0 16)
| Skydække ... 0 0 0 Sc
| Belysning ... | .. 10 ae
German tt |+-11.0| +-10.0] -::9.4 |-=- 18.2] =
Ma. ИИ | |
Mine eee ESS | ae BR |-13.9)
31 4 Vindstyrke . 1 2 3 1 10. -
| Vindretning . | © 0 0 | ONE
| Skydække ...| 3 | 8 10 |
| Belysning ... | | 5) lei
| Петь... -+9.4 | 7.5 |'+8.2 : |-:
[Maxie Ро. 8.7 = 12.
Ming sah: =O) ae + 51:
4. !| Vindstyrke .. 1 6 2 И.
Vindretning . | ONG | NV NNV |
| Skydække ... | 10 10 8 |
(Belysning ER te Per +. |
HET EN | +-7.8 | 8.0! +7.8 i+ > -:
Мах Re 0:9
| Mins a ke. 2104 |
5. 4| Vindstyrke ., PER RE 2 12,4
| Vindretning . | NNV | NNV | NNV |
| Skydække ... | 10 REN RS 12128
Belysning ... | .. 10
| Hernies e | +7.6) +-7.5| +8.0 :
Маха, 9... RS) |
М. Ih се || Ба
6. 2) Vindstyrke .. 1 5 2 18.
| Vindretning . | ММУ | ММУ 9 |
| Skydække ... | 10 10) ee OR) |
| Belysning ... a: 9 +
Kerns. 8,4 8.0 9.5
|: Ма. В 7.2
Mines re: 9.4) .. ce = at
7. <! Vindstyrke ., 2 2 1 14. À| 9
| Vindretning . | SO SV SO | M
Skydække ... 10 10 10 |
| Belysning ... | ... Så ze |

1) Snevejr. ?) Svagt Snefald.

203

Ming ane —12,1| .. |--25.2| : .. Fe

15. «| Vindstyrke .. 6 4 1 22 2 1 1
| Vindretning . | 550 | OSO 9 0 9 9 5)
| Skydække ... MW 2 3 5 422 2 2
| Belysning ... = 15 | 18

=
=
> .
un
>
a
=
=
©
bo
bo
bo
bo
ey)

162 <4 €
| Vindretning . | NV | NV | NV
| Skydække ... | 10 10 101)
| Belysning ... = 15 :

bo
Ha

IT.

Minute. 22" 19.0 ..
Vindstyrke .. 6 6 4 25.
Vindretning . SV 5 50
| Skydække ... | 10 10 103)
| Belysning ... Fe 12 :

Mine ent. 219, ..:
Vindstyrke .. 4 7 a
| Vindretning . | $0 | SSV 0
Skydække ... 10 10 10
Belysning ... xe 16

bo
=>

19.

bo iE bo

оны
< .

| Vindstyrke .. 6 3 3
| Vindretning . 50 SV SV
| Skydække ... | 10 10 10%)
Belysning ... ne 16

RO
=

21. Vindstyrke & 0 т 1
| Vindretning . 9 50 0
2 2

bo
OO

Skydække ...
| Belysning ... | .. 18

NO | NO | NO
1 5 4°)
Æ 24 SØ

1) Svagt Snefald. 2 Snefog. 3) Snevejr. 4) Snevejr. 5) Langs Disko Vaigaitsnorden.
8) Vaigaitsnorden langs Disko. 7) Svagt Snefald. *) Vaigaitsnorden langs Disko. 3) Vai-
gaitsnorden langs Disko.

XXXIV. 14

204

Dato 8 2 8 Dato 8 2 8
Januar | Term. ..... +27.0|27.6228.4| Fehr. (205 +10] +05
Max... sh. 23.0 .. 7 30.3) ..
Min... 270] ae, In —5.2| .. SE
29. Vindstyrke .. 0 1 0 4. 6 6 3
| Vindretning . SE 9 SO 50 SO
Skydække ... 0 0 0 8 8 10
| Belysning ... 25 | 24
Derm? ав. —-28.9| +28.6|+-26.5 —0.5 | 0.5 | +14
| Max --26.2 0.2 : i
Minen. + 28.2] .. 2.0! .. 24
30. {| Vindstyrke .. 1 2 0 5. 2 6 2
Vindretning . 9 NO Es $0 Sø Sø
Skydække ... | 4 4 01) 8 4 0+)
Belysning ... 25 = ВР 28 Le
Terme 28.0! -:28.0/-27.0 +4,1 | +3.5| 5.2
Maxes nl... --26.0 +0.2 . be
MIRE EE" | 283 .. oe |—-6.0! .. Rå
81. {| Vindstyrke ..| 2 1 1 6. №1 3 2
| Vindretning . | NO | N9 0 |) 0 [2]
Skydække ... 3 3 0?) 320 0 0
| Belysning ... 23 er 28
Febr.(| Term. ...... |-2-28.6| -+-27.0|-+-23.0 | +-9.0 | 9.0 | 10.0
Max....:.... |+-26.9 | 3834| .. Br
Mina: 28.8 .. = -+99| .. м
1. 4| Vindstyrke ..| 1 2 1 (> 1 1 2
Vindretning . | © 0 0 (LENS) 0 [2]
Skydække ... 0 8 03) 148 0 0
| Belysning ... | 25 ae 28 ae
| Term. ...... 219.5) Ol 7.0 |-+-14.5|-:-14.5| +-15.0
Max He <-12.8 |-=8.8 | ..
М 28.2 Er SE 15.8) .. ся:
2. 2| Vindstyrke .. | 4 | 4 6 8. 17 310 10 3
| Vindretning . | NO | 9 $0 | NO NO NO
Skydække ... | 4 6 8 [920 0 0
Belysning ... | 24 394 29
MIELE... 3.7 | =3.9| 3.5
Maxtor... +34 |
| МЕ... -- 14.0
3. Vindstyrke as <5) | ES ENS
Vindretning . | SØ SO | sø
| Skydække ...| 8 | 8 8
| Belysning ... | 26
1) Diset. 2) Diset. 3) Nordlys. 4) Nordlys:

14"

206

Belys-| Belys-
Dato a Vejret Dato nine Vejret
grad grad
Decbr. Januar
30 7 | Overtrukket (Snevejr). 20 16 | Lidt overtrukket.
31 8 | Overtrukket (svagt бпе-| 21 18 | Klart.
fald). 18
22 f Е Klart.
Januar Viol. 300.
16 |
1 10 Sweeuekyet. 23 { Q | Overtrukket.
2 | 10 | Klart. 24 | 19 | Klart.
3 9 | Lidt skyet. 95 99 | Klart
4 7 | Meget tet. 5 ie i
Е i 26 22 | Klart.
5 10 | Klart, lidt Skyer. 97 99 | Кан
6 9 | Overtrukket, Snevejr. 98 Si su
7, 9 | Overtrukket, Snevejr. 99 95 Kat
8 9 | Overtrukket. 20 95 Klart.
9 11 | Noget overtrukket. 31 93 Di i
2 13 ег.
10 12 | Noget overtrukket.
11 ТЫ ат
12 14 | Klart. Febr.
13 13 | Overtrukket, svagt Sne- i 25 | Klart.
fald. 2 23 | Diset.
14 13 | Overtrukket, Snefald. 3 26 | Klart.
15 15 | Klart, svagt skyet. 4 24 | Noget skyet.
16 15 | Overtrukket. 5 28, | Klart.
17 12 | Overtrukket, Snefog. 6 28 | Klart.
18 12 | Overtrukket, Snefald. ai 28 | Klart.
19 16 | Lidt overtrukket. 8 29 | Klart.

Ved Siden af disse Lysmaalinger foretog jeg ogsaa nogle

Lysmaalinger, hvor der over Skalaen var lagt et Gelatinestykke,

uigennemtrengeligt for de violette Lysstraaler.

Resultaterne var folgende:

Belysningsgrad Belysningsgrad
Dato uden absorberende |med absorberende DE uden absorberende (med absorberende
Gelatine Gelatine Gelatine Gelatine
Jan. Febr.
23 18 3 1l 25 14
24 16 0 2 23 11
25 22 7 3 26 о
26 22 8 4 24 8
27 22, 10 5 28 18
28 24 0) 6 28 18
29 25 10 7 28 18
30 25 iil 8 29 18
51 23 1111

207

Som omtalt var Efteraaret, hvilket ogsaa ses af vedfojede
Skema forholdsvis mildt. Forst i Begyndelsen af Januar sank
Temperaturen saa meget, at Disko-Bugt i Vige og Bugter
blev islagt; men dette Isleg var dog meget usikkert. Endelig
den sidste Uge af Januar blev Islæget saa sammenhængende,
at man kunde befare det med Hundeslæde.

Den 31. Januar brød jeg op med Torsukatak som Maal.
Vejen lagdes over Kekertak. Herfra korte jeg ind i det indre
af Torsukatak, hvor jeg slog mig ned hos en Gronlænder,
Vitus Petersen, i Anä. Jeg havde her god Lejlighed til
paa nermere Hold at studere Gronlendernes daglige Liv om
Vinteren.

Her ved Anä boede kun to Familier. Min Vært var en
udmærket Fanger, som ikke blot ernærede sin egen Familie,
men tillige underholdt den anden; til Gengæld maatte denne
gaa ham til Haande. Hans Kue (Spækhus) var altid stoppet
med Kod og Spæk. Da jeg ankom, fodrede han mine Hunde
med Selkod. Med en ikke uberettiget Stolthed kunde han
sige: «Se, det kan jeg tillade mig; havde det været i Kolonien,
saa var Gronlænderne kommet paa alle fire for at spise med».
Overhovedet kan man vel vanskelig undgaa at legge Mærke til,
at jo længere man kommer bort fra Civilisationen, repræsen-
teret af Butik og Præster, desto dygtigere er Gronlenderne. 1
det indre af Fjorden er der forøvrigt en usædvanlig god Fangst
paa Fjordsælen; men der er langt til nermeste Handelsplads.
Foruden Fjordsælen er den spættede Sæl ret hyppig i Torsu-
katak; den kommer derind i Juli Maaned for at kaste Unger.
Som Vitus Petersen fortalte, holder den til ved Nuna-
taken og ikke ved Kekertakasik, der findes altsaa nu
«Kasigisat ernivisat» og ikke lenger ved Kekertakasik,
hvor den i Steenstrups Tid plejede at yngle.

Det Hus, jeg boede i, var af Middelstorrelse med folgende
Dimensioner. Hojden var 2 m Dybden var 4.3 m, Læng-
den 2.9 m. Gangen var over 4 m lang — alt indvendigt

208

Maal. — Huset var som andre ægte Gronlenderhuse opført
af Græs- og Lyngtorv indvendigt beklædt med Brædder. Brik-
sen fandtes langs Nordvæggen, Vinduet mod Syd (Fig. 9). Langs
Ost- og Vestvæg fandtes Bænke, og i en Krog stod en Koge-
kakkelovn. Som her fremstillet er de fleste Gronlenderhuse
byggede; der kan selvfølgelig vere betydelig Forskel saavel
i Udstyrelse som i Indretning. Er Husejeren fattig, mangler
Gulvbrædderne, den bare Jord tjener da til Gulv; hyppig er
Væggene heller ikke beklædte med Bræåder, saaledes at man
ser den nøgne Tørvevæg. Kni-
ber det haardt, findes der i
Loftet ikke flere end de aller
nødvendigste Brædder, for at
Tørvene, der danner Taget, kan
bæres. Er Husejeren meget fat-

tig, mangler der naturligvis ogsaa
Glas i Vinduet. I Stedet for
Glas anvendes en tynd Hud,
og om Vintéren tilstopper man
helt Vinduet.

Ogsaa i Indretningen af
Vinduer og Husgang kan der,

som berørt, være en Del For-

Fig. 9. ;

aie skelligheder i det enkelte. Men
det er en fast Regel, at Vinduet vender mod Syd — naturligt
nok. — Husgangen er ikke afhengig af nogen bestemt Verdens

Retning, men det synes, som dens Beliggenhed er afhengig af
Landingsstedet. I de fleste Tilfælde gaar Husgangen mod
Kysten eller parallel med den. Doren sidder snart paa Siden af
Husgangen, snart for Enden; men ved mindre Bopladser vender
den altid ud til Landingsstedet. Om Husgangen lober mod
Landingsstedet eller parallel med Kysten afhænger vistnok af
Terrainforholdene. I Kolonierne og paa sterre Bopladser holder

209

denne Regel ikke Stik. Husene ligger her ofte langt borte fra
Kysten, og andre Betingelser gor sig gældende.

For en Europæer synes Husene at være smaa og ube-
kvemme; i Virkeligheden er de udmerket tilpassede til den
gronlandske Natur. Husets Opgave er her som alle Vegne at
beskytte Beboerne mod Vejrligets ubehagelige Sider. Kulden
er i Grønland den ubehageligste og mest paagaaende Faktor.
Midlet derimod, Brendsel, er ikke til Stede i Rigdom, tvert
imod. Kun paa enkelte Steder findes Kul. Ellers maa Gron-
lænderen se sig om efter andet Brændsel. Spæk er ganske
vist et godt Brændsel, men det er dyrt og i sløje Fangsttider
— f. Eks. den første Del af Vinteren — næsten ukendt. I Uper-
nivik-Distrikt, hvor det flere Steder er vanskeligt at faa
Brænde, maa man ty til Spæklampen. I den mellemste Del af
Grønland bruger man Hedekvas og Tørv, i den sydligste Del,
hvor der paa gunstigere Lokaliteter findes lidt vantreven Birke-
skov, træder rigtigt Brænde til. I det hele og store er Brænd-
selen sparsom og Kulden stærk; det gælder derfor om at gøre
det Rum, der skal opvarmes saa lille som muligt og tillige
saa lunt som muligt. Om Natten kan der forøvrigt i en saadan
Grønlænderhytte, naar dens Beboere optager næsten hver
Tomme, blive saa lummervarmt, at det næsten er uudholdeligt ;
for Ventilationen sørges der ved et Hul i Loftet, der ellers er
tilstoppet af en Græstot. Mod Regn er Grønlænderhuset daar-
ligere tilpasset. Imidlertid er Regnen jo forholdsvis sparsom
og falder kun om Sommeren, paa en Tid hvor- Husene ofte er
forladte, og Grønlænderne bor i Telt paa Sommertangstpladserne.
Naar det om Sommeren falder ind med en længere Regn-
periode eller med voldsommere Regnskyl, gaar Vandet gennem
de flade Tage. Ved at lave Tagene skraa vilde Grønlænderne
undgaa denne Ubehagelighed, men til Gengæld blev der højere
Ш Loftet, hvorved der udkrævedes mere Brændsel. Af to
Onder foretrækker Grønlænderne det mindste. Storm og Sne

210

kan ikke gore de lave, tætte Huse nogen Fortræd; Sneen bi-
drager forovrigt yderligere til at isolere Huset.

Efter de Erfaringer, jeg havde gjort iTasiussak, mente jeg,
at en Lodline paa 500 m vilde være tilstrekkelig til at maale
Dybderne i Torsukatak. Det viste sig imidlertid, at det ikke
var tilstrekkeligt, naar jeg kom ud til de midterste Partier af
Fjorden. Fra Kekertak fik jeg en ny Line. Resultatet af
Lodskuddene findes aflagt paa Kortet. Som man vil se, har
jeg ikke kunnet meddele Lodskud for den inderste Del af
Fjorden nærmest Indlandsisen. Isen var her saa fuld af Kalvis
og saa sammenskruet, at det næsten var umuligt at komme
frem. Tillige var det en ret farlig Sag at komme her, fordi
Isflager som Folge af Isstrommens Bevægelse ofte skrues lod-
ret i Vejret.

Uagtet vi endnu kun var i den forste Uge af Februar,
kunde man dog godt staa op allerede Kl. 6; inden man ВК
alting klaret, var der allerede saa megen Lysning, at man
kunde se at færdes paa Fjorden. Ofte maatte man tilbage-
legge et godt Stykke Vej, inden man naaede Arbejdspladsen.
Vejret var forøvrigt meget smukt; en Fohn havde afsmeltet det
meste Sne, saaledes at det ganske saa ud som Foraar —
sordlo upernak — som en af Gronlænderne sagde.

Den nordlige Gletscherarm ligger ugunstigt, naar det
gælder om at komme paa det rene med Kalvningen, fordi man
ikke fra Panekarajok kan komme til at iagttage Gletscher-
enden en profil; men for enkelte Partiers Vedkommende kan
der ikke vere Tvivl om, at de stiller sig med fremadheldende
Rande. Nogen Kalvning havde jeg ikke Lejlighed til at iagttage.

Saavel Helland som Steenstrup har foretaget Hastig-
hedsmaalinger fra Panekarajok. De af dem benyttede Basis-
punkter kunde jeg ikke finde, være sig enten fordi de Varder,
de har opstillet i Endepunkterne af Basis, er faldet ned, eller
fordi de overhovedet ikke har ofret nogen Tid paa Opforelse
af Varder. Paa Tilbagevejen over Panekarajok traf vi en

211

Flok Rensdyr paa 6 Stykker; efter Gronlendernes Udsagn be-
gynder forevrigt Rensdyrene ogsaa at blive sjældne i disse
Egne. Det lykkedes Gronlænderne at nedlegge et Dyr, men
det tog ganske vist saa megen Tid, at det var fuldstendig
merkt, inden vi naaede Strandbredden; yderligere maatte vi
vente to Timer, førend vi kunde komme ned paa Isen, da det
netop var Ebbe, da vi naaede Strandbredden.

Den sydlige Arm af Gletscheren frembyder forsaavidt bedre
Vilkaar for lagttagelse af Kalvning, som man her fra en Klippe-
ryg har udmerket Udsigt over Gletscherenden, i hvert Fald et
storre Parti af den. Her staar Gletscheren med fuldstændig lod-
rette Vegge, maaske snarere en lille Smule tilbageheldende paa
enkelte Steder. Desværre fandt der ingen sterre Kalvning Sted
under mit Ophold ved Gletscheren; kun rutchede der paa et
Sted et Parti ned; efter denne Kalvning stod Randen meget
sterkt tilbagelenet. De Steder, hvor, som omtalt, Randen staar
lidt tilbagelenet, er formodentlig Steder, hvor der fornylig har
fundet Kalvninger Sted. Nogle Dage senere opholdt jeg mig
atter ved Gletscheren; der fandt en Kalvning Sted noget hef-
tigere end den foregaaende Gang. Kalvningen bestod ogsaa
denne Gang i en Nedstyrtning. Umiddelbart efter begyndte der
en voldsom og vedholdende Kalvning af den nordligere Gletscher.

Hvor sterk Isskruningen kan vere her inde i den indre
Del af Fjorden, fik jeg Lejlighed til at iagttage paa Tilbagevejen.
Vi fulgte naturligvis vort forste Spor, men paa en Strekning
af over 30 m forsvandt Sporet aldeles; paa en lodretstillet Is-
flage saa jeg nogle af dem. Hele Bredden var paa et Sted,
hvor den skraanede jævnt ned mod Havet, fuldstændig barika-
deret med Isblokke og Flager, der var skruet ind over Bredden.
Efter Granlændernes Udsagn kan der hen paa Foraaret paa den
Maade dannes en Vold paa c. 10 m’s Hojde eller mere.

Baade paa den nordlige og sydlige Side af Fjorden findes
der Husruiner i det indre af Fjorden. Disse Omstendigheder
foranledigede min gronlandske Ledsager til at fortelle, at i tid-

212

ligere Tid havde Forholdene været helt anderledes; man havde
endog sejlet om Anå. Intet tyder paa, at dette er rigtigt.
Husresterne herinde stammer fra den mere oprindelige Tid, da
Grønlænderne boede mere spredt og ikke blev tiltrukket af de
danske Handelspladser; thi Forbindelsen med Omverdenen er
naturligvis meget vanskelig en stor Del af Aaret; bedst er den
om Vinteren.

Som Kortet viser, er det ret betydelige Dybder, der træffes
i det indre af Fjorden, 720 m. Der kan næppe være Tvivl om,
at. den store Dybde er tilvejebragt af Gletscheren, der i sin Tid
skød sig ud gennem Fjorden. Alle Sidegrene til Fjorden:
Kangerdluk og Ikarasak er ikke videre dybe — efter de
faa Lodskud at dømme. Der har ingen eroderende Virksom-
hed været, snarere er der blevet aflejret Morænemateriale. For-
øvrigt er det kun et beskedent Antal Lodskud, der staar til
Raadighed, vedrørende de grønlandske Fjordes Dybder. Dr.
Steenstrup har foretaget nogle Lodninger ved Umanak,
hvor Dybderne viser sig at være ringere end i Torsukatak.
Hammer har foretaget nogle Lodninger i Jakobshavns-Is-
fjord syd for Kingigtok, men for nær Land og i for ringe
Antal til at de kan give nogen Oplysning om Dybdeforholdene
i Jakobshavns-Isfjord. Jensen har foretaget Profil-
lodninger i sydgrønlandske Fjorde. Det havde været min Hen-
sigt at foretage nogle Lodninger i Ikarasak og derefter i det
store Basin syd for Ana og. Kekertakasik. Rimeligvis er
den nordlige Del temmelig lavvandet, fordi den er opfyldt af
Materiale fra Torsukatak-Gletscher. Derimod vil det for-
modentlig nok vise sig, at der i den sydlige Del kan paa-
vises en Rende, der er dannet af Gletscherne, der har skudt
sig videre frem gennem Ata-Sund. Ikarasak kunde imid-
lertid ikke befares. Isen er her paa Grund af den stærke
Strøm — der jo netop tyder paa, at Strædet er lavvandet —
usikker og stedvis fuld af Vaager. De faa Lodskud i Begyn-
delsen af Ikarasak tyder ogsaa paa, at Farvandet ikke er dybt.

213

Efter at have fremskaffet en Del Oplysninger om Dybde-
forholdene i det Indre af Torsukatak flyttede jeg sidst i Fe-
bruar længere ud og slog mig ned i Nugak; ogsaa her boede
jeg hos en Gronlender, der var Stedets Skolelærer, hvorved jeg
fik et godt Indblik i den Undervisning, som den opvoksende
Slegt i Granland faar.

Med Hensyn til Lodningerne er der at bemerke, at jeg
udforte dem med en temmelig tynd Line, 3-lebet Bindegarn.
Dette havde den Fordel, at_jeg kunde anvende et temmeligt
lille Lod, mellem 3—5 kg. Trods den ringe Tyngde kunde
man dog med Lethed merke, naar Loddet stedte mod Bund.
Uagtet Snoren var tynd og Loddet let, var det dog ret be-
sværligt at trekke Loddet op. Jeg forsogte forst at benytte
en Valse, men Linen frøs sammen, og at afvikle den var der-
ved umuligt. Valsen var forevrigt den samme, som den Dr.
Steenstrup benyttede 1879. At trække Loddet op med
Hænderne fra en Dybde af 700m var baade langsomt og tret-
tende. Derimod gik det meget nemt, naar man benyttede
Hundeslede. Naar Loddet skulde hives op, blev Linen bundet
til Hundesleden, hvorpaa man tog Retning mod det neste
Lodsted. Paa den Maade gik Ophivningen baade hurtigt og
let. For at Snoren ikke skulde skære sig ind i Isen, blev
Skaftet af Token lagt over Hullet. Trods det lille Lod brast
Linen dog ret jævnlig under Ophivningen paa Grund af Frik-
tionen med Vandet. Naar Loddet kom op, tog Gronlænderen
dette og vandrede hen til næste Lodsted. Medens Gronlen-
deren huggede Hul i Isen, bestemte jeg Stedet ved Hjælp af
et Pejlkompas. Paa den Maade var man i Stand til at ud-
føre et i Forhold til Dybderne ret anseligt Antal Maalinger.

Da Linen var temmelig tynd, var det nødvendigt ved Efter-
maaling at korrigere for Strækning. Denne Eftermaaling blev
udført med et Staalmaalebaand. Der er altsaa næppe større
Fejl paa Lodskuddene; men forøvrigt spiller det ikke nogen
nævneværdig Rolle, om der paa en Dybde af 700 m virkelig

214

skulde være en Fejl paa 2—3 Meter. Linen var inddelt i Læng-
der paa 25 m. Det forste Mærke var 1 Knude, det neste 2
o.s.v. Hundrederne var ligeledes mærket med tilheftede Knu-
der. Det var derfor let at foretage Aflæsningen.

Til Bestemmelse af Lodstedets Beliggenhed benyttede jeg
Tilbageskering. Forst benyttede jeg et Universalinstrument,
men da det var sent at manøvrere med, og da man i 30° Kulde
ikke kan holde ud ret lenge at staa med bare Hender og stille

paa Stilleskruer, foretrak jeg et Pejlkompas, der var hurtigere

Fig. 10.

at arbejde med. Til Sigtepunkter ved Tilbageskering anvendte
jeg Toppe og Pynter. Toppe giver en nojagtigere Bestemmelse
end Pynter (se Fig. 10).

Resultatet af Maalingerne i de ydre Dele af Torsukatak
var, at Dybderne var omtrent som i de indre Dele. Kun lengst
ude syd for Ekogfat blev Dybderne mindre; man kommer
uvilkaarlig til at tenke paa en Isfjeldsbanke som ved Jakobs-
havns-Isfjord, hvor der er mindre dybt end inde i Fjorden.

215

Det maa der nemlig vere; thi Isfjeldene driver uhindret ud
gennem Fjorden, men tager Grund ved Mundingen. Banken er
vel opstaaet som en Endemorene, da Jakobshavns-Glet-
scher naaede helt ud til Mundingen; paa samme Maade er
det rimeligt, at der uden for Torsukatak-Fjord maa ligge
en lignende Endemorene, over hvilken Vandet er mindre dybt
end inde i Fjorden. Forholdene minder altsaa meget om Ban-
kerne langs Syd-Grenland, hvor der ligeledes findes dybere
Vand indenfor. Bankerne er vel derfor i det store, hvad
Jakobshavns Banke og Banken uden for Torsukatak er i
det smaa. Ligesom Jakobshavns og Torsukataks Banke
er opstaaet, da Isen havde en videre Udstrekning end nu og
naaede helt ud til Mundingen af Fjorden, saaledes er for-
modentlig de store Banker opstaaet, da Indlandsisen som en
sammenhængende Kappe sked sig ud over Grenland. Disko-
Bugt har den Gang veret helt udfyldt af Is paa samme
Maade som de danske Farvande. Over Dybdeforholdene i
Disko-Bugt har vi næsten ingen Oplysninger. I den mid-
terste Del er der kun to Lodskud, der giver Dybder раа 400 т,
altsaa meget beskedne Dybder i Forhold til Dybderne inde i
Fjordene. Uden for Disko-Bugt er der et større Antal Lod-
skud. Efter disse ser det ud, som om Isen er gaaet ud over
«Rotten» i sydvestlig Retning. Nogen Is ег vel ogsaa gaaet
ud gennem Vaigat; i dettes Munding findes der et Lod-
skud paa 365 m, medens Dybderne uden for er mere beskedne,
90 m eller saa. Desværre findes der ikke noget Lodskud i
den mellemste og sydlige Del af Vaigat og heller ikke i de
tilgrænsende Dele af Disko-Bugt. Ellers vilde man maaske
kunne udlede, hvilken Vej Torsukatak-Gletscher har taget.
Vi var nu naaet til Midten af Marts, og Islæget var vel
nu paa det bedste. Jeg besluttede derfor at bryde op og køre
syd paa for at naa over Jakobshavns-Isfjord, der som be-
kendt, som Følge af den stærke Strøm fremkaldt af Tidevandet,
ofte er fuld af Vaager og Strømsteder i Mundingen. Paa Vejen

216

syd paa gjorde jeg holdt i Ata 9: det Land, der ligger under;
et Navn, der er meget treffende, fordi Ata netop er et lavt-
liggende Forland, ovenover hvilket selve Agdlutok hever sig
til 400 m. Denne Forskel paa Atä og Hovedlandet skyldes
sikkert en Forkastning, der lober i nordostlig Retning, markeret
af Søen Taserssuak og Bugten Kangerdluatsiak ved
Torsukatak.

Selve Bopladsen Ata er lille; der findes ialt kun fire Huse.
Beliggenheden er ogsaa daarlig, man vil nesten — med gron-
landske Erhvervsforhold for Oje — sige naturstridig, idet den
nemlig ligger i en Bugt. Fangsten er kun ringe; om Foraaret
er der dog nogen Utôk-Fangst. Aarsagen til, at Bopladsen
der er kommet til at ligge der, maa vel soges i, at For-
bindelsen med Omgivelserne er forholdsvis let, saaledes over
Taserssuak til Arsivik og videre over Torsukatak til
Nugak og over Agdlutok til Ritenbenk. Medens jeg var
ved Ata, benyttede jeg Lejligheden til at foretage nogle Lod-
ninger i Atä-Sund ([karasak).

Med Torsukatak in mente kunde man vente, at man ogsaa
i Atä-Sund vilde træffe store Dybder, dels er det jo temmelig
bredt, dels er det omgivet af hojt Land, der falder brat ned.
Saaledes var det dog ikke; Ata-Sund er i sin nordligere Del
ikke dybere end 300 т. Denne Dybde finder man temmelig
almindelig.

Ogsaa paa Søen bag Ata, Taserssuak, foretog jeg en
Lodning. Det var dog meget besverligt, da Isen var godt og
vel en Meter tyk; Dybden af Søen var næsten 100 m, en ret
betydelig Dybde i en Ferskvandsso. I forste Række skyldes
Dybden vel Forkastningen; men Isen har sikkert ogsaa veret
medvirkende, idet Gletscheren, da Isens Megtighed var storre,
er stemmet op af Agdlutok hoje Land og har beveget sig
ned langs dette og videre ud gennem Ata-Sund. Da det tog
en uforholdsmessig lang Tid at faa hugget Hul i Isen, foretog
jeg kun denne.ene Maaling i Taserssuak.

217

Derefter korte vi videre syd paa gennem Ata-Sund og
over den smalle Tange ved Kitsermiut til Pakitok, hvor
vi boede i et lille Hus, opført til Brug for de postrejsende.
Fra Niakornak kom der Gronlendere paa Besog. De oplyste
os om, at Trafiken over Jakobshavns Istjord havde veret meget
vanskelig i Aar; kun ganske faa Sleder var sluppet over. For
Ojeblikket var den ganske ufarbar. Jeg besluttede mig derfor
til at blive ved Pakitok en Uges Tid eller saa.

For at komme ind i det indre af Fjorden (Pakitup
Illua) maa man over en smal Landtunge, fordi der i den
snevre Munding er en meget sterk Strom, der forhindrer Is-
leget. Illua er, som alle Soer i det lave Land, dekket af store
Mengder Sne, som gor Korselen meget besverlig, fordi Sleden
skærer sig helt ned i Sneen. Denne Fjord bliver kun forholds-
vis sjeldent besegt og har derfor ogsaa kun faa Stednavne.
Kun nogle Øer og Forbjerge har Navn. Min grønlandske Led-
sager var dog godt kendt her; han var fodt i Pakitok og
havde boet der en lengere Rekke Aar, men var for faa Aar
tilbage flyttet Ш Ata. Pakitok ligger ikke godt for at vere
en god Fangstplads; den ligger nemlig paa en Maade i en
Bugt. Ganske vist ligger der et storre Farvand, Illua, bag ved.
For saa vidt kunde man tro, at Beliggenheden ikke var saa
daarlig. En Beliggenhed ved et Overgangssted mellem to
Havarme er netop en ikke ualmindelig Beliggenhed af Boplad-
ser i Gronland. Men Illua har ikke ret meget at byde paa;
ganske vist findes der mange Ænder; men disse er de sidste
Aar aftaget sterkt i Mengde. Det store Antal Edderfugle be-
ror paa, at Illua, — som vi skal se, — er temmelig flad.
I tidligere Aar var ogsaa den spraglede Sel almindelig i Yngle-
tiden. Saalenge Illua altsaa havde noget at byde paa, var
det naturligt nok, at der her ved Pakitok blev lagt en Bo-
plads. Stedet laa paa en Maade centralt, man kunde let
komme mod Øst, der bød paa Edderfugle og spraglede Sæler,
og mod Vest til Ikarasak (Atå-Sund) og Disko-Bugt,

218

hvor Fjordsælen holdt til. Desuden er der umiddelbart ved
Bopladsen et udmærket Torskefiskeri; — paa en god Time
fangede min Ledsager 56 Torsk. Da nu Edderfuglen blev mere
og mere sjælden, og den spraglede Sel ligeledes, har Fangsten
mod Ost ingen Betydning mere, og Stedet kommer derfor
erhvervsmæssig set til at ligge inde i en Bugt. Derfor er Be-
boerne rykket mod Vest ud til Niakornak, nogle er draget
til Ata; der findes nemlig en Butik; men ellers er Atas
Beliggenhed jo ikke gunstig. Selve Bopladsen ved Niakornak
hedder forovrigt Kilersiut (Haartoppen), fordi man aabenbart
har sammenlignet Halvoen med en Haartop, som er indsneret
paa Midten. Over denne Indsnoring gaar Sledevejen til Ja-
kobshavn. Bopladsen er forevrigt kun beskeden, idet der
kun findes fire smaa Huse. Der kommer for faa Isfjælde herop,
til at der kan vere mange Sælhunde. Der fanges Hajer, lidt
Kaleralik og Torsk. Omkring Niakornak er der paa Grund
af Tidevandet temmelig stærk Strom, og det synes, som om
Torsken gerne holder til, hvor der er Strem. Det er vel derfor,
at der netop ved Pakitok findes saa mange Torsk.

Pakitok afgiver et godt Eksempel paa, hvorledes en Bo-
plads’ Beliggenhed afhænger af Oplandet 9: dens Neringsgebet.
Saa vidt muligt søger en Boplads ikke blot i Grønland, men
ogsaa alle andre Steder, at legge sig saa centralt som muligt
i Næringsgebetet, og det gælder aabenbart lige saa godt om
store som om smaa Bopladser; kun bliver Forholdene for de
sterre Bopladser mere indviklede. Naar de ostjyske Kobsteder
ligger helt inde i Bugterne, spiller sikkert denne Beliggenhed
en bestemt Rolle lige overfor Byernes Opland; netop ved at
liege inde i det Inderste af Fjorden opnaar de at faa det størst
mulige Opland i Forbindelse med Adgang til Havet. Ser man
paa et Kort over Gronland i en nogenlunde stor Maalestok,
f. Eks. de fortrinlige Kort, der udgives af Sokortarkivet, kan
man ikke undgaa at legge Merke til, at de gronlandske Bo-
pladser, sterre og mindre, fortrinsvis ligger paa Spidsen af

249

Halveer og Øer, ikke just saaledes at forstaa, at Bopladsen
ligger paa den geometriske Spids, det gør den i mange Til-
feide ikke — af Grunde, som vi senere skal omtale — men
dog i umiddelbar Nerhed deraf. En Beliggenhed paa Spidsen
af en Halvo eller @ frembyder de bedste Betingelser for Fang-
sten. Fangerens Domicil skydes jo paa den Maade ligesom ud
i Fangstomraadet. Boede han nede paa Siden af en Halvo,
havde han kun en Halveirkel at jage i, nu derimod faar han
det meste af en Cirkel. Kan han ikke sætte Kajaken i Vandet
paa Grund af Bolgeslag fra den ene Side af Halvoen, saa kan
han uden stor Ulejlighed gore det fra den anden. Overhovedet
har Fangeren Mulighed for at kunne vende sig til to Sider, alt
efter Forholdene. Ved at bo paa en lige Kyst maa han altid
vende sig til en og samme Side. Som berort spiller Landings-
forholdene — Havneforholdene for de storre Bopladser, Byer
— en vigtig Rolle, netop fordi Eskimoen i saa hoj en Grad er
henvist til at soge sit Erhverv paa Seen. Af den Grund
kommer Bopladserne ikke netop til at ligge paa selve Spidsen;
denne er maaske stejl, et Stykke derfra er der maaske en bedre
Landingsplads, følgelig kommer Bopladsen til at ligge der og
ikke paa den geometriske Spids. Paa et Kort i middelstor
Maalestok f. Eks. Sokortene projiceres dog Bopladsen som
liggende paa Spidsen — man kunde nesten kalde det den
geografiske Spids — Maalestokken tillader ikke nogen Afvigelse.
Selvfolgelig gives der Undtagelser — endda mange Undtagelser
fra denne Regel. Disse vil vel meget ofte vise sig at ligge i,
at der paa Spidsen og dens nermeste Omegn er daarlige Lan-
dingssteder, maaske mangler ogsaa Drikkevand. Inde i Bugter
er det i hvert Fald ikke almindeligt at treffe Bopladser, med
mindre der er et nemt Overgangssted til et andet og godt
Jagtomraade. 1 Fjorde, i hvilke der gaar Gletschere ned, og
hvor der dannes rigeligt med Isfjælde, kan man dog treffe Bo-
pladser, saaledes inde i Torsukatak. Men ogsaa her er der
en Tilbojelighed til at legge Bopladsen paa еп Pynt; Ana og
XXXIV. 15

220

Nugak er Eksempler herpaa, ligeledes Husruinerne paa den
nordlige og sydlige Side af Torsukatak.

For de Bopladsers Vedkommende, der ikke ligger paa Pyn-
ter eller i umiddelbar Nærhed deraf, maa man ikke lade sig
forlede til at tro, at de har en tilfældig eller endog unaturlig
Beliggenhed. Som Eksempel kan jeg nævne Klavshavn; man
skulde tro, at Eke, naar man blot ser paa Kortet, har en
naturligere 9. bedre Beliggenhed, og dog findes der kun tre
Huse, medens Klavshavn jo er en efter gronlandske Forhold
stor Boplads. Tilsyneladende er Eke beliggende paa en Spids.
Det er dog ikke ganske rigtigt, naar man tager andre Forhold
med end de rent kartografiske. For det forste er Isfjorden for
det meste saa pakket med Is, at den er ganske ufarbar, og
dernest ligger der en megtig Isfjeldsbanke uden for Mundingen.
Erhvervsmæssigt set ligger Eke snarere i en Bugt end paa
en Pynt.

Karakteristisk nok betyder Eke netop Vig, Bugt. I Virkelig-
heden ligger Klavshavn gunstigere, herfra kan Fangerne dels
nyde godt af Isfjældenes Nerhed, dels har de Tasiussak i
Ryggen. Tasiussak spiller for Klavshavn en vigtig Rolle:
om Sommeren er der et rigt Fugleliv og noget Laksefiskeri,
om Vinteren er der godt Kaleralikfiskeri og lidt Selhundefangst.
Paa samme Maade vil man formodentlig ogsaa for de andre
Bopladser, der ikke ligger paa Pynter, kunne gere Rede for
Aarsagen til, at de ligger netop paa det Sted. Saaledes er det
let at klarlegge Forholdet mellem Kingigtok og Jakobs-
havn, der i alt væsentligt forholder sig som Eke og Klavs-
havn. Hvad den sidste har i Tasiussak, har Jakobshavn
i sin Havn, der har gjort Bopladsen til en Koloni med de
deraf flydende Fordele. Overhovedet indtager Kolonier og
Handelspladser en særlig Stilling; her er det saa at sige
udelukkende Havneforholdene, der er det afgørende, medens
Fangstforholdene ikke ved Valget har den afgørende Betydning.
Som Følge deraf ligger et stort Antal Kolonier og Handels-

221

pladser slet ikke paa Pynter, hvor der jo sjælden vil være gode
Havne. Men Handelen med Danmark er jo ikke nogen oprin-
delig eskimoisk Erhvervsgren, selv om‘ den i vore Dage over
stor Indflydelse.

Som hos alle primitive Folk, der lever af Jagt og Fiskeri,
er Opholdsstedet ikke af stor Varighed. Naar Fangsten af en
eller anden Grund ikke mere giver tilstrækkeligt af sig et Sted,
vandre Beboerne til andre og, som de haaber, bedre Fangst-
pladser. 1 tidligere Tid har saadanne Vandringer ret ofte fundet
Sted (sé Holms Konebaadsekspedition). Man finder i det indre
af Fjordene Ruiner nesten alle Vegne, hvor Forholdene har
veret egnede til Boplads. Opforelsen af Husene danner ingen
større Vanskeligheder eller Udgifter; den Smule Tommer, der
fandtes i det forladte Hus, kan jo fores med og benyttes paa
ny. Nu er Beboerne vistnok mere stavnsbundne, og helst vil
de bo et Sted, hvor der ikke er for langt til Butiken. Da
Handelspladserne ligger ved Kysten, har Gronlenderne mere og
mere klumpet sig sammen der, hvilket er naturstridigt. Et
Jagt- og Fiskerfolk skal ligesom Rovdyr bo saa spredt som
muligt, derved bliver der det størst mulige Jagtomraade til
hvert Individ.

Foruden i det nævnte Hus ved Pakitok boede jeg i Telt
inde ved Indlandsisen og ude ved Atå-Sund. Indretningen af
et Vintertelt er ganske simpel. Af to almindelige Sommertelte,
saaledes som de bruges paa de af Kommissionen udsendte
Ekspeditioner, havde jeg gjort det ene en Smule mindre. Paa
de Teltstænger, der bar det ydre Telt, havde jeg anbragt to
Klodser, paa hvilke den Rygstang hvilede, der bar det indre
Telt. Ved Snore var der sørget for, at det indre Telt holdtes
i en Afstand af omtrent et Kvarter fra det ydre. Naar Primus-
apparatet var tændt, kunde der blive saa varmt, at man kunde
sidde uden Overtøj; oppe under Teltryggen var der helt varmt,
hvilket var godt til Tørring af Kamiker. Om Natten kneb

det mere; da gik Primusapparatet ud af Mangel paa Pumpning.
15°

222

Havde man haft et lille Dowlastelt, der kunde have hvilet paa
en Snor, udspændt mellem Teltstængerne, saaledes at man
altsaa havde lavet sig et tredobbelt Telt, havde det sikkert
veret behageligere. Hvad et saadant Dobbelttelt vejede ved jeg
ikke. Men foruden Teltet kunde jeg have to tætpakkede
Kasser paa Sleden, i hvert Fald paa Isen, paa Land, navnlig i
couperet Terrain, kunde Hundene vanskelig trekke saa meget.

I Avanardlek-Dal fandt jeg omtrent midt i Dalen to
Gletscherskrammer, som krydsedes. Den ene løb i Dalretnin-
gen, NÖ-SV, den anden i Ost-Vest. Hvilken af de to Skram-
mer, der var ældst, kunde ikke ved blot og bar lagttagelse af-
gores, saa ens var de. Men man maa vel antage, at Skrammen,
der havde Retningen Ost-Vest, var den ældste, dannet i den
Tid, da Indlandsisens Megtighed var saa stor, at den upaa-
virket af det underliggende Terrain bevegede sig ud over Yder-
landet i vestlig Retning. Den anden Skramme i Nordest-Syd-
vest henpeger paa den Tid, da Indlandsisen vel havde en sterre
Megtighed end nu, men dog i Hovedsagen maatte folge Ujevn-
hederne i Terrainet. Tidsrummet, som ligger mellem Frem-
bringelsen af disse to Skrammer, maa vere ret betydelig, og
Ismassen, som har beveget sig over Stedet i Mellemtiden, maa
have veret stor. Og dog har disse Ismængder ikke formaaet
at erodere saa meget i den faste Klippe, at den ældste Skramme
er bleven slebet bort. Dette viser, hvor ubetydelig selve Isens
eroderende Virkning er, naar den skal bearbejde en fuldstændig
kompakt Klippe.

Gletscheren, som skubber sig ned mod Avanardlek, har
trukket sig kendeligt tilbage. Paa en Strækning af en km
kunde man paavise, at Klipperne i Nerheden af Gletscheren
kun var sparsomt eller endog slet ikke bevoksede med Likener.
Langs Siderne laa en stor Endemorene; for Enden af Glet-
scheren manglede en saadan. Smeltevandet havde dannet en
megtig, ganske flad Flodseng. I denne Dal fandt jeg de fra
arktiske Lande kendte Hoje, der opstaar, ved at Grundvandet,

223

der ikke kan synke i Jorden, presser Isskorpen op næsten som
et Krater. Nogle af disse Høje var store, 3 m eller mere i
Diameter. Fra det hoje Land nord for Gletscheren har man
en vid Udsigt mod Nord og Vest. I en Lavning ved det hoje
Fjeldparti, hvor Indlandsisen sender en Tunge ind, rislede
Vandet frem under Gletscheren for dog straks efter at fryse.
Lufttemperaturen var — 26°.

Ogsaa den sydlige Gletscher havde trukket sig tilbage.
Dog var det vanskeligt nøjagtigt at bestemme, hvormeget Isen
havde trukket sig tilbage, da nyfalden Sne udviskede Græn-
serne. Saa vidt jeg kunde skønne, har vistnok Isen trukket
sig omtrent 200 m tilbage. At Gletscheren maa være noget i
Aftagen fremgaar ogsaa deraf, at en stejl Klippe rager frem
midt i Gletscheren, og denne Klippe er lysgraalig og ikke
sortegraa, saaledes som lichenbevoksede Klipper ellers er. Naar
den ikke er lichenbevokset, kan det vel kun skyldes den Om-
stændighed, at den tidligere har været dækket af Isen, men nu
er bleven fri.

I Gletscherens Sidepartier havde jeg Lejlighed til at iagt-
tage Gletscherkornene uden at behøve i Forvejen at farve med
Methylenblaat; slamholdigt Vand var i Sommerens Løb sivet
ind mellem Kornene og dannede nu et fint spindelvævsagtigt
Net. Man kunde derfor meget let se Kornenes Form og
Størrelse. Kornene var alle smaa, omkring 2 cm. Overhovedet
har alle de Gletscherkorn, jeg har haft Lejlighed til at iagttage
påa de forskellige Steder, altid været temmelig smaa. Fra
Bjergene syd for Kujadlek har man en god Udsigt endogsaa
helt ind i Tasiussak, naar det var klart Vejr.

Paa Illua foretog jeg nogle Dybdemaalinger. Mærkelig
nok viste Lodskuddene over en større Strækning i den cen-
trale Del samme Dybde, nemlig 325 m, en Dybde, der ganske
vist i Forhold til Dybderne i Torsukatak er beskeden, men
naar man tager Hensyn til, at Illua er et lukket Farvand, der
ikke en Gang naas af Gletscherne mere, er det dog en anselig

224

Dybde. Lodningerne var sene at udfore, da Isen var 0,8 m
tyk. Indad mod de to Sidefjorde tager Dybden af; den sydlige
af disse er endog saa flad, at man ikke kan befare den med
Konebaad. Illua er fuld af Smaager; om det er selve Klippe-
grunden, eller det er Gletschermateriale, aflejret, da Gletscheren
skød sig ud gennem Illua, ВК jeg ikke undersøgt.

Efter selv at have veret i Jakobshavn for at forhore
mig om Mulighed for at slippe over Jakobshavns-Isfjord,
foretog jeg позе Lodninger i den ydre Fjord, hvor Dybderne
er omtrent som i den indre Fjord, dog gennemgaaende noget
mindre. Vejret var stadigt meget uroligt, snart Taage, snart
Storm. Temperaturen var i nogle Dage relativ høj, — 12°.

Da det viste sig at være umuligt at slippe over Jakobs-
havns-Isfjord, vendte jeg mig atter mod Nord, idet jeg
først slog Telt ved Kitsermiut for at foretage nogle Lod-
ninger i den ydre Del af Atå-Sund; Dybden mellem Nug-
dluk og Kitsermiut var næsten 500 m (495 m). Ejendomme-
ligt er det forøvrigt, at Dybderne over forholdsvis store Stræk-
ninger er saa ens. Ikke mindre end 5 Lodskud gav samme
Resultat nemlig 495m. Inde i Pakitup-Illua gav 3 Lodskud,
der dog laa et godt Stykke fra hinanden, samme Resultat,
nemlig 325 m. I Atå-Sund uden for Kaerssorssuak
viste 3 Lodskud samme Dybde, 415 m. I Farvandet nord for
Okaitunguit er Dybden over en stor Strækning 375 m.
Noget lignende viste sig i Torsukatak. Man kan vanskelig
antage, at Gletscherne skulde kunne erodere Klippegrunden saa
mærkværdig jævn. Man føres snarere til den Antagelse, at
den eroderede Klippebund atter, da Isen trak sig tilbage, er
blevet udforet med Gletschermateriale; hvis dette er aflejret
under Vand, er det let forklarligt, at Smeltevandet vil brede
det jævnt ud.

Fra Kitsermiut drog jeg til Kaersorssuak, hvor jeg
døjede en Del af Kulden, trods vi nu var midt i April, og der-
fra til Atå efter først at have taget nogle Lodskud i Atå-

225

Sund og været inde i Kangerdluarsuk og oppe paa Kaer-
sorssuak Plateauet. Der ligger her flere store Soer paa
Plateauerne. Den sidste Uge af April begyndte Vejret at blive
mildere, og de sidste Dage i April saa jeg den forste Flok
Snespurve; Foraaret var altsaa ved at indfinde sig.

Paa en Udflugt til Natdluarssuk saa jeg Sporene af en
Isbjorn; den havde aabenbart gjort en heldig Fangst; thi et
Stykke derfra saa vi ved en Vaage Baglallen af en Selhund. Da
vi senere steg op ad Nuna-Kigdliga, saa vi Sporene af en
voksen Isbjørn og af en Unge. Om Natten havde den aflagt
Besøg ved Teltet, men om Morgenen var den borte; Sporene
tabte sig i en Vaage. En Uges Tid senere blev der i Tasi-
ussak set to Isbjørne, men da Fangerne i Klavshavn ikke
er Isbjørnejægere, drog hele Flokken ud, hvorved Bjørnene
naturligvis blev yderst forskrækkede og forsvandt. Det er for-
øvrigt meget sjældent, at Isbjørnen forvilder sig ind i Disko-
Bugt.

Da Afsmeltningen jo om Vinteren hører op, og Ablationen
udelukkende bestaar i Fordampning, breder Gletscheren sig.
Figur 11 forestiller et Tværsnit af Kanten af Ekip-Sermia.
Gletscheren hænger som en Flage ud over Morænevoldens Ryg.
Paa Undersiden af Flagen sad der fastfrosset Bundmoræne af
store Sten og alle Grader nedefter i Størrelse. Om Sommeren
smelter der saa meget af, at Gletscheren staar lavere.

Den forholdsvis høje Temperatur de sidste Dage havde
bevirket, at Isen var mindre sikker. Ved alle Pynter traf man
Strømsteder, hvor der enten var aabent Vand eller tynd Is.
Det var derfor nødvendigt at sætte over Torsukatak en af
de første Dage.

Den 30. April brød jeg op fra Atå og kørte over Atå
Taserssuà mod Nord, derpaa over en lille Tange, saa et
Stykke over Kangerdlukasik og endelig over Land til
Ulugsat. Sundet mellem Kekertakasik og Ulugsat var
nu ganske aabent. Maager, Edderfugle (baade mollis og specta-

226

bilis) og Skarven tumlede sig i Vandet. Paa Land var Sneen
mange Steder forsvundet; Transporten var derfor meget be-
sverlig, navnlig i Kororssuak (den store Dal), hvor Vejen
gaar meget stejlt op. Ved Ulugsat overnattede vi. Den neste
Dag satte vi over Torsukatak, hvor Isen mange Steder var
saa mor, at man kunde stikke Token lige igennem, og kom
velbeholden til Itivdliarsuk, en ganske lav Tange mellem
Torsukatak og Kekertap-Illua. Ved Itivdliarsuk findes

Fig. 11.

kun eet Hus. Gronlenderen, der er en Storfanger, har tillige
et Hus ved Ekogfat. Om Vinteren bor han ved Itivdliars-
suk, hvor han driver Utok- og Garnfangst inde i Fjorden.
Han var nu i Ferd med at bryde op og drage til Ekogfat for
at drive Fangst fra Kajak; ved Ekogfat var Vandet mod Vest
allerede aabent. Vi slog Telt ved Kugsarnek. Kugsarnek-
Dal løber næsten lige mod Nord. Langs denne kørte vi
op, indtil vi kom til en lille So, Amalortok; derpaa drejede
vi mod ®st og naaede ned til Taserssuak-Isortok,
der er en meget lang So, der strekker sig helt fra «Major-

227

vejen» til Kangerdluk inde ved Gletscheren. Her slog vi
Telt (et lille Rejsetelt). Derefter korte vi et Stykke op ad «Boyes
Vej»; men vendte forovrigt snart om, da Vejret, der hidtil
havde været mildt og smukt, antog en stormfuld Karakter.
Som omtalt tidligere lægger der sig paa Soer, der er beskyt-
tede af Fjelde, store Mængder Sne. Om Dagen, naar Solen
skinner, tor det overste Lag op, og Slæden skærer derfor
igennem, ligesom man ogsaa selv synker ned til midt paa Livet.
Det er derfor bedre at færdes om Natten; da fryser der atter
еп Skorpe paa Isen, saaledes at man kan kere og gaa uden
stadig at synke i. Derfor korte vi om Natten. Selv KI. 12 var
det nu saa lyst, at man ret tydeligt kunde skimte Fjældtoppene,
der laa omkring os, og dog var vi forst lige i Begyndelsen af
Maj. Det har ogsaa sin Fordel at hvile om Dagen, saa kan
man bedre udholde Kulden i Teltet. Fra Boyes Vej kerte vi
videre mod Øst et Stykke paa en Elv, hvor Elven danner Af-
løbet for Isortok og derpaa til Niakornak, hvor vi slog
Тен. Herfra kørte vi om ad Amalortokujok og tilbage.
Naar Torsukatak om Foraaret ikke længere kan befares paa
Grund af Stromsteder, anvender Grønlænderne fra Kekertak
og Nugak Vejen over Isortok ind til Kangerdluk for at
naa ind til det indre af Torsukatak, hvor der er rig Utok-
fangst. Helland, som besogte Torsukatak 1875, gik ogsaa
denne Vej.

| Kugsarnek-Dal fandtes der usedvanlig mange Вурег.
Nu i Begyndelsen af Maj var det deres Parringstid.

Da Vejret slog om til et efter Aarstiden sterkt Tovejr,
maatte jeg bryde op og kore til Kekertak for ikke at blive
afskaaret. Imidlertid blev det atter Frostvejr, og jeg tog saa
med en Gronlender til Nugssuak-Halvo for om muligt at
faa et Overblik over Forholdene i det шаге af Halvøen. Vi
korte den sædvanlige Vej ad «Majorvejen» op Ш Majorkar-
suatsiak, hvilket Fjeld af de Danske kaldes Majoren —
efter de to forste Stavelser; heraf har man saa atter dannet

228

Navnet paa Vejen, der forer lige forbi Fjeldet. Fra Major-
karsuatsiak drejede vi om til Tasek-Ujordlek, hvor vi for-
øvrigt traf en lille Skare Rensdyr. Sarkrap-Tasersua synes
at vere en meget flad So. — Lodninger fik jeg ikke foretaget,
da jeg ikke havde medtaget de nedvendige Dele; — overalt ser
man flade Øer og Banker, der, saa vidt jeg paa Grund af den
frosne Jord kunde afgore, bestaar af Grus, Sand og Ler. Maa-
ske har det oprindelig veret en dyb So, der i Tidens Lob er
blevet udfyldt af Gletschermateriale. Rundt om skyder der sig
Gletschere ned mod Seen. Fra Ujordlek korte vi over dennes
Sydspids tilbage til Majorvejen.

De to store Søer, Isortok og Ujordlek er vel at be-
tragte som Kloftdale. I det hele synes Nugssuak’s Tektonik at
bero paa Klovningssystemer, der løber i Nordvest-Sydost. Den
tidligere omtalte So, Taserssuak, ligger netop ogsaa i samme
Retning. Nugssuak er vel en Horst, hvis Randpartier er
sunkne.

Ved Ujordlek er Forvitringen meget sterk; store Klipper
ligger her nedstyrtede under de lodrette Klippevegge. Lagene
(Skifringen) synes her at ligge nesten lodret.

Paa Tilbagevejen var Isen paa Kekertap-Illua saa tynd,
at man kun med stor Forsigtighed kunde befare den. Jeg tog
derefter med Bagagen til Ekogfat, 19. Maj, og den folgende
Dag sejlede jeg med Konebaad til Ritenbenk forbi Jakobs-
havns og derfra til Klavshavn, paa hvilken Rejse jeg havde
rig Lejlighed til at iagttage Isfodens Oplosningsproces. Is-
dekket laa endnu paa Tasiussak; desverre var Isen saa
mer, at man ikke kunde kore paa den. Det var derfor umu-
ligt at komme ind til Jakobshavns Isstrom. Derimod gjorde
jeg nogle Ekskursioner til Isfjorden; navnlig interesserede det
mig, om der skulde kunne findes Isfjelde i oprindelig Stilling;
det fandtes der imidlertid ikke. Overhovedet havde Isfjorden
sit sedvanlige Udseende: tætpakket med Kalvis. Ved Indlobet

229

til Tasiussak var Farvandet aabent. Den stærke Strom, der
fremkommer her. som Folge af Tidevandet, skærer op i Isen.

De sidste Dage i Maj kunde man sige, at Sommeren var
i Anmarch. Den 29. Maj fandt jeg den forste blomstrende
Empetrum. Ogsaa Saxifraga oppositifolia stod med helt ud-
sprungne Blomster.

Salix glauca var i Knopbrud. Ælymus havde grønne Blade
ved Grunden.

Midt i Juni stod Loisleuria, Diapensia, Vaccimum uligi-
nosum i Blomst paa gunstige Steder. Paa Nordsiden blom-
strede Empetrum endnu ikke; paa enkelte gunstige Lokaliteter
blomstrede Dryas, Cassiope, Papaver, Rhododendron.

Under mit Ophold i Jakobshavn havde jeg Lejlighed til
at iagttage en «Kanel» i Havnen: «Kanel» er et Udtryk, som
de danske Funktionærer bruger om en voldsom Bølgebevægelse
i Havnen, der opstaar pludseligt, men som ogsaa forsvinder
lige saa hurtigt igen. Bølgegangen er ledsaget af en stærk
Brusen i det inderste af Havnen. Denne Brusen er ikke andet
end Vandets Udstrømning fra en smal Kløft, naar Bølgen
trækker sig tilbage. Denne voldsomme Udstrømning har, som
Hammer meddeler, foranlediget Grønlænderne til at tro, at
Havnen er forbundet med det indre af Jakobshavns-Isfjord
ved en underjordisk Gang. Det er dog ikke Tilfældet; den om-
talte Kløft, som Danskerne kalder Zimmers Kløft, er en
Fortsættelse af Havnen. Havnen ved Jakobshavn er vel at
opfatte som et Brud, yderligere eroderet af Indlandsisen, da
den bredte sig over Landet; dette Brud fortsættes altsaa af
Zimmers Kløft. Ad den kører Slæderne om Vinteren til
Natdluarsuk.

Til Forklaring af Fænomenet siger Hammer (Meddel. om
Grønland IV, p. 22): «Disse Fænomeners Forklaring er maaske
nærmest den, at Bølgerne, som ved Kalvningen bliver dannet i
Fjorden, bliver brudt mod Isbanken i Mundingen og kastet
tilbage mod Land, hvorved Vandbølgen bliver opstemmet i den

230

snævre og lidet dybe Havn og foraarsager en pludselig Stig-
ning i Vandstanden og en frem- og tilbagegaaende Bolgebeve-
gelse. Denne Vandbevegelse kan dog ogsaa undertiden vere
svag og er da maaske foraarsaget ved en Kalvning af et Is-
fjeld i Fjorden eller paa Banken. Man kan da ved hine sterke
Bevægelser i Vandet komme til Kendskab om, hvor hyppig
Kalvningen af Gletscheren finder Sted». Som vi ser tilskriver
altsaa Hammer Aarsagen til «Kanelen» Kalvninger enten af
Gletscheren eller af Isfjælde i Fjorden eller paa Banken. At
selv en beskeden Kalvning af et Isfjæld paa aaben Kyst kan
fremkalde Bølger påa 2—3 m Højde, har jeg haft Lejlighed til
at iagttage paa Agdlutoks Vestside. I Torsukatak-Is-
fjord har jeg ligeledes set en Kalvning, der frembragte meget
store Bølger. Naar et af de store Isfjælde, som staar paa
Grund ved Mundingen af Jakobshavns-Isfjord, kalver
eller endog fuldstændig brækker i Stykker, maa denne Proces
fremkalde et enormt Oprør i Vandet. Mange af de store
«Kaneler» i Jakobshavn og tillige de største har sikkert
sit Udspring fra Isbjærgenes Forstyrrelser ved Fjordmun-
dingen og ikke fra Gletscherens Kalvning. Dels ligger denne
с. 30 km fra Jakobshavn, og tilmed er Dannelsen af de
store Isfjælde, dem i naturlig Stilling, næppe videre vold-
som; her sker jo hverken nogen Nedstyrtning eller Kent-
ring og for Resten heller ikke nogen Opskyden, tvertimod
foregaar Dannelsen meget langsomt. Den storste Bolgebe-
vægelse jeg har set, hidrorte fra et Isfjæld, som kalvede og
derpaa kæntrede. Nedstyrtninger og Kentringer finder selv-
folgelig ofte Sted inde ved Gletscheren, men deres Virkning,
en heftig Bolgebevægelse, vil blive meget svekket, inden den
naar Jakobshavn, dels paa Grund af Afstanden, dels paa
Grund af den tetpakkede Ismasse, hvorved megen Energi for-
bruges til at overvinde Gnidningen mellem Isstykkerne. Jeg er
derfor tilbøjelig til at antage, at «Kanelen» hidrører fra Kalv-
ninger af Isfjelde, der ligger ner Jakobshavn, altsaa paa Is-

231

fjeldsbanken eller i umiddelbar Nærhed af denne. Det hænder
selvfølgelig ikke saa sjeldent, at der ligger Isfjælde uden for Mun-
dingen af Havnen. Naar et saadant Isfjeld kalver, vil der selv-
følgelig opstaa en heftig Bolgebevegelse i Havnen, altsaa en
«Kanel». Til Belysning af, hvor hyppig Gletscheren kalver,
kan man ikke bruge «Kanelen», eftersom den opstaar uafhengig
af Gletscherens Kalvninger.

Ved Klavshavn er Lagbygningen meget regelmessig,
idet de der stryge næsten vinkelret paa denne med et Fald
mod Nord paa 30°. Parallel med Kysten lober der et System
af Diaklaser. Kysten er altsaa en Brudkyst, opstaaet ved en
Sænkuing af Disko-Bugt Omraadet. Et ВИК paa Kortet viser,
at Kysten i store Hovedtræk lober omtrent i en lige Linje og
danner en Vinkel paa 10° med Meredianen. De mindre Af-
vigelser er vel opstaaet ved, at løsere og fastere Lag veksle,
og at de losere er blevet eroderet af Isen. Andre Spaltesy-
stemer spiller vel ogsaa en Rolle, f. Eks. netop ved Jakobs-
havn, hvor Lagene stryge parallel med Kysten, medens den
saakaldte Leverbugt, der ligger paa tvers af Havnen, altsaa i
Strygningens Retning, snarere er opstaaet ved Forvitring af løsere
Lag. I hvilken Grad Afvekslingen mellem blødere og haardere
Lag spiller en Rolle for Udformningen af Detaljerne i Terrainet,
ser man tydeligt ved Itivdlek, Overberingsstedet til Tasi-
ussak. Naar Vestkysten раа Agdlutok (Arveprinsens-®) har
et saa regelmæssigt Forleb, skyldes dette vistnok for en meget
væsentlig Del den Omstændighed, at Lagene stryge parallelt
med Kysten og med Fald mod denne. De Revner, der findes,
har Jsen ikke kunnet udnytte, da Kysten her laa i Lesiden,
den Gang Iskappen i sin Tid skod sig ud over Yderlandet.

For ikke i lengere Tid at ligge uvirksom rejste jeg den
27. Maj mod Syd. Det var min Hensigt at naa ind i Sydost-
Bugt til de Strekninger, der paa Hammers Kort er betegnet
ved Ler, altsaa Strekningerne mellem Tasiussarssuak og
Havet. Jeg haabede tillige at kunne komme ind i Orpigsok-

232

Fjord. Jeg kom ikke meget lengere end til Akugdlet; thi
i den inderste Del af Sydost-Bugt laa der endnu Is. Jeg
maatte derfor vende tilbage.

Da jeg var kommen tilbage til Klavshavn den 5. Juni,
fortalte Fangerne, at nu var Isen brudt op i Tasiussak.
Neste Dag brød jeg op for at naa ind i Tasiussak. Den for
Transporten saa vigtige Audtlarissa-Tasia var dog endnu
tilfrossen, eller rettere belagt med Is; denne var saa mer, at
man ikke kunde gaa paa den. Slog man paa den, gik den i
Stykker og faldt hen i de bekendte Isprismer. Konebaaden
maatte derfor bæres syd om Søen og syd om Keakusuk.
Dette er imidlertid meget besverligere end den sædvanlige
Transport, hvor man kan sejle over Autdlarissa-Tasia.
Overberingen tog derfor to Dage. Den Landtange, der ligger
mellem Enden af Tasiussak og Havet, er ganske flad og be-
vokset med Hedeplanter; forøvrigt fuldt af smaa Vandpytter.
Den bestaar paa Overfladen af Sand og Grus, Havbredden af
ganske fint Sand, sammenbundet af lidt Ler. Mod Tasiussak
var Materialet i det hele noget grovere. Landtangens Hojde
ligger mellem 30—40 m; saavel mod Tasiussak som mod
Havet ender den med stejle Brinker. Mod Tasiussak, hvor
Materialet er mere gruset, mangler Forsteninger ganske eller
nesten ganske. Saaledes har jeg i Klinten her kun fundet et
Fragment af en Balanskal. Grusmasserne er dog svagt lagdelt
og maa altsaa vere afsat i Vand. I Skrenterne ud mod Havet
er Masserne ogsaa lagdelt og indeholder en Mengde subfossile
Muslinger. Denne Forskel i Materialets Beskaffenhed ved Tasi-
ussak og ved Havet kunde tyde paa, at det er afsat i strøm-
mende Vand, der har beveget sig i Retningen fra Tasiussak
mod Havet. Kaster man et Tilbageblik paa Dybdeforholdene i
Tasiussak, kan man vel kun finde den Forklaring, at der en
Gang har staaet en Gletscher i Tasiussak, og at Landet den
Gang laa 30—40 m lavere end nu. Antager man dette, er de
forhaandenverende Kendsgerninger ganske godt forstaalige. Man

233

kan vel altsaa bedst opfatte disse flade Strækninger som et
Gletscherdelta, afsat i Havet; Smeltevandet har planeret og sor-
teret Materialet; de større Partikler findes ved Tasiussak, de
finere er fort lengere bort. Mod Tasiussak, hvor Vandet
var fersk, findes ingen Forsteninger, mod Havet, hvor Vandet
var salt, er der rigeligt med Forsteninger.

Gletscheren maa have staaet i lang Tid paa samme Sted
for at danne en saa stor Aflejring; men naar alpine Gletschere
mod Podalen har kunnet danne Moræner paa 600 m, er en Af-
lejring som den ved Keasuk ikke saa imponerende. Tet ved
Tasiussak treffer man en Morenevold med usorteret Mate-
riale, blandt andet sterre Sten. Denne Vold maa have veret
det sidste Stadium i Dannelsen. Sandsynligvis er Landet da
hevet saa hojt, at det ikke mere laa under Havet. Volden er
da at betragte som en usorteret Endemorene.

Vegetationen paa disse flade Strekninger er fortrinsvis
Lichener, navnlig sorte Skorpelicher — sort er den fremher-
skende Farve — eller, hvor Vegetationen er kraftigere, den
sorte Busklichen blandet med andre Lichener. Man kan altsaa
nærmest kalde den en Lichenhede. Af Phanerogamer var Saai-
fraga, Luzula, Poa, Artemisia, Silene, Stellaria, Papaver,
Rumex paa sine Steder ret hyppige. Paa saadanne Steder faar
vi altsaa en Fjeldmarkvegetation. Hedeplanter er derimod
sjeldne. Her og der finder man en Salix, Empetrum og,
hvor der er lidt fugtigere, Vaccinium uliginosum.

Lignende flade Strekninger traf jeg mod Syd ved Orpig-
sok med en iignende Højde. Sandsynligvis har de ‘en lignende
Dannelsesmaade, idet Gletscheren i sin Tid har strakt sig frem
gennem Søerne. Uden at have været paa Stedet er det rime-
ligt at antage, at de af Hammer omtalte flade Strekninger fra
Tasiussarssuak og til Havet (Sydost-Bugt) forholder sig paa
samme Maade. Forøvrigt vil sikkert en grundig Undersøgelse
af disse skalforende Aflejringer ikke blot her i Orpigsôk,
men ogsaa de andre nevnte Steder vere af Interesse, idet de

68°37.5

234

maaske kan give Oplysning om Forhold, der vil vere af Vigtig
hed for Forstaaelsen af Dannelsesmaaden af disse Aflejringer.
Paa medfolgende Kort er de skalforende Dannelser i Orpigsôk
aflagt.

Efter at vere kommet til Tasiussak naaede vi i et smukt

Sommervejr Teltpladsen ved Kunguak. Denne Teltplads har

|
|

|
А Srollinende zu

50°41, 5

Fig. 12.

en usedvanlig smuk Beliggenhed paa Vejen til Alangordlek,
men benyttes ikke videre af Gronlenderne. Kunguak-Dal
er udfyldt af en leragtig Moræne. Som saa ofte paa lerholdige
Morener er Vegetationen meget aaben, idet den har et maske-
agtigt Udseende. Denne nætformede Fordeling af Vegetationen
synes at vere et Resultat af Lerets Tilbojelighed ‘til at slaa
Revner, naar der om Sommeren indtreder Torke; i disse

235

Revner har Fra og Spirer lettere ved at komme op end i de
midterste Partier i Masken, hvor Leret er haardt som et Gulv.
Om Foraaret under Snesmeltningen forholder det øverste Lag
af Leret sig ganske som en halvflydende Masse. Træder man
paa Leret, synker man i til Foden standser ved det frosne Lag.
Paa Skraaninger kan man iagttage, at Leret beveger sig som
en sejgtflydende Masse.

I Søen ovenfor Teltpladsen er den smukke, lille Phalaropus
(Odinshene) meget almindelig.

Fra Kunguak roede vi den neste Dag til Kekertar-
ssunguit-Tupersua. Herfra foretog jeg den folgende Dag
en Ekskursion til Teltpladsknuden for at se, hvorledes det for-
holdt sig med Gletscheren og Tilstanden i Fjorden i det hele
taget. | Fjorden laa der 3 Isfjælde i oprindelig Stilling; det
ene af dem laa temmeligt langt ude i Fjorden, de andre to
nermere ved Gletscheren, det ene vel omtrent i Midten af
Fjorden, det andet noget nærmere Kekertarssunguit. I alle
andre Henseender saa Fjorden ud som sædvanligt. Gletscherens
Ende laa i det hele paa samme Sted som det foregaaende Aar,
nogle Partier havde en mere ostlig, andre en mere vestlig Be-
liggenhed end Aaret forud. Hvad der forsaavidt er vigtigere,
naar det gelder om at afgore, om Gletscheren trekker sig til-
bage eller ikke, er, at den Del af Randpartiet, der glider paa
Bunden langs Teltpladsknuden, havde trukket sig noget tilbage;
paa det allernærmeste laa den 40 m ostligere end Aaret for.
Det forekommer mig, at man i denne Omstendighed har et
Bevis for, at Gletscheren fremdeles er i Aftagen. Det kunde
jo nemlig tenkes, at Gletscheren allerede havde naaet sit Mini-
mum og nu atter var ved at skyde frem.

Derefter vendte jeg tilbage til Fjorden, hvor jeg foretog
nogle Lodninger. I det hele er Tasiussak ikke ner saa dyb
som Torsukatak, hvilket vel heller ikke var at vente, men
den er heller ikke saa dyb som Farvandene syd for Torsu-
katak, hvilke i flere Henseender kan sammenlignes med

XXXIV. 16

236

Tasiussak. Den største Dybde, jeg har fundet i Tasiussak,
ег 251 m, omtrent ud for Kunguak; men da Lodskuddet
ikke ligger midt i Fjorden, er det muligt, at der kan findes
lidt større Dybder. I Farvandet syd for Torsukatak var
Dybderne 375 m. Forevrigt er Dybdeforholdene i Tasiussak
i det héle temmelig ensformige. Ligesom i Torsukataks
Omraade finder man ogsaa her trugformede Fordybninger; en
saadan ligger netop uden for Kunguak. Bundens Art er her
som overalt i Fjorden en fin Ler; kun enkelte Gange har jeg
faaet et Gruskorn eller en lille Sten med op. Nogen videre
Vægt paa en systematisk Undersøgelse af Bundproverne lagde
jeg for Resten ikke.

Efter at jeg havde foretaget Lodningerne, gjorde jeg atter
en Udflugt til Isfjorden. De to Isfjælde, der laa nærmest Glet-
scheren, var nu skubbet lengere mod Vest og laa næsten uden
for Kakapalak. Det tredje Isfjæld kunde jeg ikke finde,
rimeligvis var det gaaet itu og omdannet til de sædvanlige Is-
fjelde. Ved Gletscheren maa der have fundet omfattende Kalv-
ninger Sted; Gletscherenden havde trukket sig noget tilbage.

Som omtalt i Beretningen for 1902 kan man meget tyde-
ligt i det torlagte Areal ved Nunatap-Tasia adskille to
Zoner. I den ene er der allerede en ret betydelig Plantevækst,
i den anden og laveste er Planteveksten endnu sparsom. I den
overste Zone finder man Rester af udgaaede Pianter netop
af det Udseende de faar, naar de er gaaet ud, ved at Stedet er
blevet oversvømmet. Jeg fandt saaledes ganske godt bevarede,
men udgaaede Mosser; Grene af Salix blev fundet. Alt tyder
paa, at den oprindelige Vegetation er bleven kvalt, ved at Vandet
er steget; siden er Vandet atter sunket, og en ny Vegetation
er da indvandret. Disse Svingninger i Vandstanden staar na-
turligvis paa det nøjeste i Forbindelse med Gletscherendens
Svingninger. Det er værd at lægge Mærke til, at der altsaa
maa have været en Periode, der aabenbart maa ligge forud for

237

Hammers Undersogelser, hvor der har været en lavere Vand-
stand, altsaa en ringere Megtighed af Isen.

Endnu stod tilbage at foretage en Undersogelse af Sikui-
juitok-Fjorden. 1902 gik jeg dertil fra Jakobshavn; men
det er en lang Vej. Denne Gang roede jeg til Rodebay,
hvorfra Vejen knapt er saa lang, og hvor man oven i Kobet
kan ro paa nogle Indsoer. I Kajak roede vi om Eftermiddagen
fra Rodebay til Kangersunek-Kingua og bar saa Kajaken
langs Perserajoitok-Kugssua til Kangersunek-Taser-
sua, hvor vi atter kunde ro et Stykke. Endnu to Gange maatte vi
bere over Land og naaede omsider det inderste af Dalstroget.
Paa en Skraaning mod Nordvest traf jeg paa en lille Plet den
smukke gulblomstrede Ranunculus. Gennem en Dal steg vi
langsomt tilvejrs og naaede omsider om Morgenen Kamhojden.

PEON Gunes ATO

Fig. 13.

Fra denne til Gletscheren var der endnu et godt Stykke. Forst
ved Middagstid naaede vi frem til selve Gletscheren. Ved at
betragte Kalvismasserne ser man snart, at Isstykkerne er meget
afenavede, alle Kanter og Spidser ег forsvundne. Et typisk
Stykke Is fra Sikuijuitok har omtrent Form som afbildet i
Fig. 13. Hojden kan vere storre eller mindre; man kan under-
tiden se ganske flade Stykker, ganske lig Vinteris. Kalvisen i
Sikuijuitok er heller ikke hvid, saaledes som Kalvis plejer
at vere. Den gulgraalige Nuance, Isen i denne Fjord har, ad-
skiller den meget fra Kalvisen i andre Fjorde. Denne snavset
hvide Farve hidrerer fra Stov, som navnlig om Efteraaret blæser
ud paa Isen. Kun i umiddelbar Nerhed af Gletscheren be-
merker man et smalt, hvidt Belte af mere uregelmessig formet
Kalvis. At Bæltet er smalt, tyder paa, at Gletscherens Kalv-
ning kun er ubetydelig. Ispakningen i Fjorden kan altsaa ikke

direkte hidrore fra Sikuijuitok-Gletscher; men maa
16*

238

hidrore fra andre Aarsager. Som omtalt i Beretningen af 1902
maa sikkert Jakobshavns-Isfjord vere den egentlige Aar-
sag. Den gulgraa Kalvismasse, som udfylder den inderste Del
af Sikuijuitok, strækker sig ogsaa langs Vestsiden af Nuna-
tarssuak. Nærmer man sig til Jakobshavns-Isfjord,
lægger man Mærke til, at Kalvisen efterhaanden faar sit sæd-
vanlige Udseende, hvid. Navnlig bemærker man, at et Belte
sniger sig tet omkring Natdluarsuk-Halvo og strækker sig
henimod Natdluarsuk-Bugt. Man kan vist forklare dette
paa den Maade, at Tidevandet, som strommer stærkest om
Natdluarsuk-Halvo, tager den Kalvis, som findes iJakobs-
havns-Isfjord ud for Sikuijuitok-Fjord med sig ind i
denne Fjord. Naar det atter bliver Ebbe, kan Isen ikke komme
ud, da Jakobshavns-Isfjord er stærkest pakket med Is.
Man kan vist ikke antage, at Kalvismassen direkte bliver presset
ind i Sikuijuitok, ellers maatte der ogsaa under Nuna-
tarssuak findes hvid Kalvis, med mindre der fra dennes syd-
vestlige Hjørne skulde udgaa en Revle, men det er der for-
øvrigt intet, der tyder paa. Forholdene er sikkert de samme
som i de sydlige Bifjorde, Kangerdlukasik og Tasiussak.
Ogsaa her driver Kalvismasserne ind, naar det er Flodtid; i
begge Bugter er Mundingen smal; i Kangerdlukasik er
Mundingen delvis lukket af en Ø. I begge Fjorde kommer der
derfor ikke saa megen Drivis ind som i Sikuijuitok, der har
en vid Munding. For Tasiussaks Vedkommende kommer der
hertil, at dens Overflade er saa stor, at Afsmeltningen af Is-
bjergene langt overgaar Tilforselen.

Sikuijuitok-Gletscher er lav; paa den sydlige Side er Hoj-
den c. 20 m, paa Nordsiden mindre; et lille Parti nermer sig
dog stærkt til at vere 20 пт’

For at faa en nojagtig Angivelse af Snegrensen, der bedst
kan bestemmes paa denne Aarstid, sejlede jeg til, efter at vere
vendt tilbage til Rodebay, til Kekertak og derfra til Asa-
sat for at bestige Asäsat-Ka. Asasat selv er et forvitret

239

jernholdigt Parti. Opstigningen sker i en Kloft, som er op-
staaet ved Forvitring, og som med sin rislende Bæk og frodige
Vegetation danner et smukt Parti. Paa den Veg af Kloften,
der vender mod Havet, ruger mange Maager. I det lille Delta,
som Bækken danner, var Stenhammaria ikke sjælden. Opstig-
ningen er ikke vanskelig; i Lobet af en Time naaede vi Pla-
teauet. Betula forsvandt i en Hojde af 360 m, og noget hojere
forsvandt Salix glauca (475 m). Vaccinium uliginosum Тог-
svandt i en Hojde af 560 m. De andre Hedeplanter holdt sig
endnu: jeg saa Diapensia, Loiseleuria, Dryas, Silene acaulis,
Luzula samt mange Mos- og Lavplanter. Efterhaanden bliver
Hedeplanterne sjældnere. Cussiope er nu den almindeligste
Plante. Paa Partier med mere Bundfugtighed fandtes den lille
sirlige Cassiope hypnoides. Salix og Syre fandtes endnu. Den
sidste Cassiope saa jeg ved 780 m. Allerede for denne Højde
fandtes spredte Snepletter; nogle af disse var dog meget tynde
og forsvinder maaske i gunstige Somre. De tykkere maa dog
anses for at vere vedvarende. Den lokale Snegrense kan
sættes til 700m. I en Hojde af 690m traf jeg temmelig store
Snepletter (7 m lange og 3 m brede). De laa bag ved en lav
Klipperand med sydlig Eksponering. Paa den gamle Sneskorpe
var aflejret et tyndt Lag nyfalden Sne — vi var sidst i Juli. —
Denne lave Snegrense skyldes formodentlig den Omstendighed,
at under Snefog fra Nord lægger Sneen sig her i megtige
Driver. Til Gengeld ligger Stedet rigtignok lige mod Syd. Den
egentlige Firn, som bedækker Toppen, begynder forst ved 850 m.
Højden af den tvedelte Top er 895 m for den sydlige og 910
for den nordligste. Fra den nordlige Top mod sydost er Faldet
meget sterkt, saaledes at Firnranden her ligger ved 700 m.
Randen af Firnen er her ledsaget af en Morenevold; paa sine
Steder var denne Morenevold fjernet 20—30 m fra den nuve-
rende Isrand, en Antydning af Isens Tilbagetrekning. Firnens
Overflade er ganske jevn og om Natten haard, saaledes at den
er let at gaa paa.

240

Nogle Dage senere besteg jeg Nakarajok, en isoleret
Top paa Nugssuak Vejens Vestside. Paa det flade Land tæt
ved Strandbredden ligger der en lille Vold, Arfiussak (af
arfek Hval og ussak lignende). Den blev ikke nærmere
undersogt og er vel sagtens en Strandvold og ikke nogen
Endemorene, hvilket ikke passer godt med Beliggenheden. Op-
stigniugen er ogsaa her ret let. Planterne forsvinder næsten i
samme Orden og i samme Hojde som ved Asasat-Kula.
Snegrænsen ligger dog her noget hojere, idet kun et lille Parti
af Toppen var bedekket med Sne. Firngrensen laa ved 885 m;
mod Nordest laa dog Firnen noget lavere, fordi den her var
i Bevegelse. Snegrensen laa altsaa paa Nakarajok i det hele
lidt hojere end paa Asäsat-Kä. Maaske beror dette paa, at
Sneen paa en lille isoleret Top lettere blæser bort end paa et
sterre Plateau.

Jeg havde haft til Hensigt endnu en Gang at gere en
Ekskursion til Gletscherne i Torsukatak, men uheldigvis var
Fjorden paa Grund af sydvestlig Vind saa fyldt med Kalvis, at
det var umuligt at komme frem med Konebaad. Efter forgæves
at have ventet paa Lejlighed til at komme ind i Torsukatak,
brød jeg op for at vende tilbage til Jakobshavns-Isfjord;
jeg blev ledsaget af Udliggeren i Kekertak, der fortalte,
at endnu 1885 laa der en lille Firn paa Niakornak-®;
tidligere havde den været endnu større, hvilket Udsagn blev
bekræftet af Grønlænderne; men da Niakornak næppe er
mere end 400 m, er der ingen Grund til foreløbig at tillægge
dette Udsagn nogen Betydning. Mere rimeligt er det, at Glet-
scheren ved Kingussak tidligere har haft en større Udbre-
delse end nu.

Ved Ankomsten til Jakobshavns-Gletscher iagttog
jeg, at denne havde slaaet en stor Revne nord for den vest-
lige Basisvarde. En smallere Revne gik i nordøstlig Retning
omtrent fra Nunatakens Vestspids til den sydlige Ende af
omtalte store Revne. Det var ikke muligt at iagttage nogen

241

Hojdeforskel paa de to Sider af Kloften. Heiler ikke da Kloften
var blevet noget bredere, var det muligt at paavise nogen For-
skel i Højde af Isfjæld — thi det er man berettiget til at kalde
den Del af Gletscheren, der laa vest for Kløften — og selve
Gletscheren. Derefter maa den af mig allerede tidligere paa
lagttagelser grundede Teori, om at Jakobshavns-Gletscher
flyder paa Vandet med sin yderste Ende, og at Kalv-
ningen her finder Sted, ved at der fraskilles Stykker af samme
Megtighed som Gletscheren selv, bestyrkes. Kalvning ved Opdrift
eller Nedstyrtning finder kun Sted for mindre Isfjældes Vedkom-
mende. De store Isfjælde gaa dog altid itu, inden de naar
Banken. De paa denne faststaaende Isfjælde er derfor Brud-
stykker uden den Гог Isfjældene i oprindelig Stilling karakteri-
stiske Overflade. Sporgsmaalet, om hvorledes Jakobshavns-
Gletscher kalver, maa derfor anses for at vere opklaret.

Endnu laa den smalle, sorte Rand tvers over Nunatap-
Tasias Munding. Om nogle Aar vil denne Bariere rimeligvis
forsvinde, og Nunatap-Tasia vil da for en Tid vere en Bugt
til Jakobshavns-Isfjord.

De tidligere omtalte Isfjelde i oprindelig Stilling var nu
presset mod Vest og stod omtrent uden for Tasiussaks
Munding.

For at faa en Forestilling om, hvor dybt Jorden tør op,
lod jeg foretage en Gravning i det løse Materiale ved Keaku-
suk. Resultatet var 1,7 m. Paa et andet og mere fugtigt
Sted fandt jeg, at Dybden fra Jordens Overflade til den frosne
Jord var 1,5 m. Forsøget blev anstillet midt i August, altsaa
paa en Tid, hvor Varmen maa have naaet sit Maximum i Ret-
ning af at naa ned.

Paa en Ekskursion til Eke lagde jeg Mærke til, at der nu
mellem Isfjorden og Klavshavn findes 3 Bopladser, nemlig
Narsarmiut med 6 Huse, Kaersormiut med 2 og Eke
med 3. Paa Hammers Tid var der kun en Boplads, Igdlor-
miut; i det mindste angives kun denne påa Hammers Kort.

Narsarmiut betyder dem, der bor ved Sletten. Der findes
nemlig Nord for Klavshavn mellem Fjeldene og Havet en
smal Slette, der i meget minder om Sletten ved Keakusuk,
og som maaske staar i Forbindelse med Jakobshavns-Glet-
scher, da denne sked sig helt ud gennem Fjorden. Minder
om den Tid har man ogsaa i Rudimenter af Endemorener, der
findes paa den nordlige Side af Fjorden. Forøvrigt har jeg
ogsaa ved Torsukatak fundet saadanne Rester af en Ende-
moræne paa Halvøen ved Nugak. Om disse Endemorener er
samtidige og samtidige med de store Aflejringer ved Enden af
Tasiussak, Orpigssok og Overgangen mellem Sydost-
Bugt og Tasiussarssuak lader sig endnu ikke afgore; men
hvis de gor det, henpeger de paa en af de mindre Istider,
der har fulgt efter den store Istid, da hele Gronland var over-
iset. Om Isfjeidsbanken er at opfatte som den daverende
Jakobshavns Gletschers Endemoræne, er vel tvivisomt.

20121909:

Appendix.

List of Vascular Plants

collected by Dr. М. ©. Engell

in the Vicinity of the Great Glacier of Jakobshavn,
about 69° lat. n.

Determinated by Morten P. Porsild.

During his journey to Greenland 1902 for geographical
and geological studies, Dr. Engell brought together a small
collection of plants, principally gathered in the neighbourhood
of Jakobshavn. At his request, I have determinated them and
as this part of Greenland, visited by Dr. Engell, has not
been much investigated botanically, it seems to be of some
interest to give a list of all the plants collected. The localities,
where the plants were found, may be found on the map of
M. С. Engell (Meddelelser om Grønland XXXIV, tab. II) with
exception of one, viz. Orpigssuit or Orpigssôk («the place with
numerous thickets») lying at 68° 35’ (Medd. om Gronl. XXVI,
tab. III). For the physical conditions of the soil, habit of the
vegetation etc. we may refer to a paper of the collector in
Medd. om Gronl. XXVI.

After the MS. 1906 of the following list was written, Dr.
Engell has looked over it and added some species and localities
to it. Those statements, of which I have not seen the plants,
are set in « —».

«Equisetum arvense L.
Tasiussak, common».

«Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh.
Tasiussak, common».

Woodsia ilvensis (L.) B. Br.
| a rufidula (Mich.) Koch.
Kunguak, Nunatak.

Lycopodium annotinum L.
var. pungens Desy.

Kunguak, fruiting specimen.

Juniperus communis L.
var. nana (Willd.).

Orpigssuit, about 68° 35’ lat. п. 50° 40' long. w., the
northern limit in Greenland. The northernmost locali-
ties for this species were hitherto S. Kangerdluarsuk near Holstens-
borg, about 67° 0’ lat. п. 53° 30’ long. w. (Warming & Holm)
and Sofiehamn, 68° 21’ lat. n. 51° 6’ long. w. (Berlin). Hence
its northern limit on inland stations lies about 11/2
degrees farther northward, than near the open coast.
The same is the case with another plant of southerly distribu-
tion, found at Orpigssuit viz. Gentiana tenella (С. Hartz
Medd. om Gronl. ХУ, р. 40).

«Alopecurus alpinus Sm.
Tasiussak, common on dwelling places».
Hicrochloa alpina (Liljebl.) В. & S.
Kunguak (several collection-numbers), Nunatap Tasia.

Phippsia algida (Sol.) R. Br.
Nunatap Tasia.

Calamogrostis arundinacea (L.) Roth.
var. purpurascens (В. Br.) Gel.
Kunguak.

Agrostis borealis Hartm. (A. rubra We.).
Nunatap Tasia, two specimens, the one small with
somewhat contracted spike-like panicle, the other
15—20 cm high with spreading panicle.

Trisetum subspicatum (L.) Beauv.
Nunatap Tasia.

Poa pratensis.

Kunguak.

Poa cenisia All.

Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia; several numbers collected,
the most of which with narrow leaves and with
pyramidal spreading panicles and deep purplish
spikelets.

Poa glauca M. Vahl.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia; various numbers collected,
some of which are small with narrow contracted
panicles, somewhat resembling P. abbreviata R. Br.

Glyceria maritima (Huds.) We.
var. vilfoidea (Anderss.) Gel.
Kekertarssunguit Ilua.

Glyceria distans (L.) We.
Tasiussak.

Festuca ovina E.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia; deep purplish and green
specimens.

Festuca rubra L.

Kunguak.

Elymus arenarius L.
var. villosus (Е. Меу.).
Kunguak, Tasiussak.

Eriophorum polystachyum L.
Nunatap Tasia.

Carex lagopina We.
Kunguak.

Carex rigida Good.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia (several specimens).

Carex rupestris All.
Kunguak.

Carex capillaris L.
Kunguak.

Juneus areticus Willd.
Nunatap Tasia.

Juncus castaneus Sm.

Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia; from the latter locality the
collection contains numerous numbers, being with-
out very common and characteristic for that place.
From Orpigssuit and from Aulatsivik-Fjord Hartz
and Berggren have mentioned Juncus castaneus
and J. arcticus as plants characterizing the vege-

tation of moist clayey soil.

Juncus triglumis L.

Nunatap Tasia, on heath.

Luzula areuata (We.) Sw.

confusa Lindeb.
Kunguak.

Tofieldia palustris Huds.
Kunguak.

Salix groenlandica (And.) Lundstr.
Kunguak; f. latifolia And. and angustifolia And.

occur in the collection.

two
>
—ı

Salix glauca L.
Kunguak.

Salix herbacea L.

Near the Ice-Fjord.
Betula nana L.

Kunguak.
«Oxyria digyna (L.) Campd.

Nunatap Tasia, common».

«Rumex Acetosella,
Itivdlek»; a rare plant in North-Greenland.

Polygonum viviparum L.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia; some of the specimens are
infested with Ustilago Bistortarum.

Koenigia islandica L.
Nunatap Tasia.

Sagina nivalis (Lindbl.) Fries.
Kunguak.

Alsine verna Bartl.
var. hirta (Wormskj.) Lge.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia.

Ammodenia peploides (L.) Rupr.

var. diffusa Horn.

Kunguak, several numbers.

Stellaria humifusa Rottb.

Kekertarssunguit Ilua.

Stellaria longipes Goldie.
Kunguak.

Cerastium alpinum L.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia; the collected specimens

are low and densely hairy: var. lanatum Lindbl.

Silene acaulis L.
Kunguak.

Viscaria alpina (L.) Fenzl.
Kunguak, a form with two longstalked two-flowered
cymes beneath the raceme-like inflorescence.

Melandrium involucratum (Ch. & Schl.).
var. affine (J. Vahl.) Rohrbach.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia.

Melandrium triflorum (B. Br.) J. Vahl.
Kunguak; many numbers were collected, generally
the specimens are tall and densely glandular-hairy.

Ranunculus hyperboreus Rottb.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia.

Ranunculus lapponicus L.
Nunatap Tasia.

Papaver radicatum Rottb.
Kunguak.

Cardamine bellidifolia L.
Kunguak.
Draba hirta L.

Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia.

Draba aretica J. Vahl.
Kunguak.

Sedum villosum L.
From Kunguak several numbers were collected; on
Disco it is a rare plant.

Rhodiola rosea L.
Akugdlek.

Saxifraga nivalis L.
Nunatap Tasia.

Saxifraga stellaris L.
var. comosa Poir.

Nunatap Tasia.

Saxifraga cernua L.
Nunatap Tasia.

Saxifraga rivularis L.
Nunatap Tasia, several numbers, one of which is à
etiolated shadow-form.

Saxifraga groenlandica L.
Kunguak, Nunatap Tasia; small specimens.

Saxifraga tricuspidata Rottb.
Nunatak, Itivdlek.
Saxifraga aizoides L.
Nunatap Tasia.
Saxifraga aizoon L.
Nunatap Tasia.
Saxifraga oppositifolia L.
Nunatap Tasia.
Dryas integrifolia M. Vahl.
Kunguak.
Potentilla nivea L.

Tasiussak.

Potentilla tridentata Sol.

Tasiussak; a very rare plant in North Greenland.
«Empetrum nigrum L.»

«Hippuris vulgaris» ; without doubt.
var. maritima Hartm.

«Tasiussak».

Chamaenerium latifolium (L.) Spach.
Kunguak.

Pirola grandiflora Radius.
Kunguak, Itivdlek.

Cassiope tetragona (L.) Don.
Nunatak, Kunguak, on mountains near the great
glacier; Taserssuak, «Tasiussak».

Phyllodoce coerulea (L.) Gr. & God.
Taserssuak near Claushavn, Kunguak.

Loiseleuria procumbens (L.) Desv.
Taserssuak near Claushavn.

Rhododendron lapponicum (L.) We.

Kunguak, Taserssuak near Claushavn.

Ledum palustre L.
var, decumbens Ait.
Kunguak.
Vaccinium uliginosum L.
* microphyllum Lge.
Kunguak, several numbers; Orpigssuit, infested with
Exobasidium Vaccinii.
Vaccinium Vitis Idaea L.
var. pumilum Horn.
Orpigssuit, «Nunatap Tasia, Sarkardlek»; rare in’
North Greenland.
Diapensia lapponica L.
Itivdlek near Claushavn, Kunguak.

Armeria sibirica Turcz.
Nunatap Tasia, Kunguak.
«Mertensia maritima (L.) 5. Е. Gray.
Kekertap Ilua (70° lat. n.j Itivdlek».
Euphrasia latifolia Pursh.
Dr. Engell has noticed: «Euphrasia officinalis, Ta-
siussak». This species is very rare in North-Greenland.

Pedicularis lapponica L.
Kunguak.

Pedicularis flammea L.
Kunguak.

Plantage maritima L.
Kunguak.

Plantago borealis L.
Kunguak.

Campanula rotundifola L.
var. arctica Lege.
Kunguak, Nunatak.

Antennaria alpina Gartn.
Kunguak.

Arnica alpina Murr.
Kunguak, Itivdlek.

Artemisia borealis Pall.
Kunguak, a rather great number of different speci-
mens was collected; otherwise this species seems
to be rare in North-Greenland.

Taraxacum croceum Dahlst.

Dr. Engell has noticed: «Taraxacum officinale, Ta-
siussak, Torsukatak»; I think this statement is
referable to the above named, the commonest of
the Greenland species at the given latitude.

20—12—1909.

XXXIV. 17

Medd. om Gronl XH

arme AS af р. 9 ; BE WA Øg S LE 72

need

ae
м о
TARO AN =

=>
Ka gp al

aS
xs
Q

и > 9 а Tow
- >: р Е ? р
$ a : / kid

JAKOBSHAVN. ISFJORD og TASIUSSAK

рае Grundlag af Hammers Kort completteret 1902-04
af
MC Engell.

1:400,000
re 3
Egaidistance 100 Meter

1 Tellplads
x forladt Boplads
~~~ Grænse for Pakis

Ton XXI].

ee” “Sy

mer,
> É
<
& :
ER .
в = F
2
tr
f
voa
"UE
I о
=
ame
KS me
LE
N hs
mt
, + vu
pe
É
ы i
À 4
. u
Е [a
ши.

à -

Zur. XX.

frfinssaky a P

м
Kekegarununk AN
ила К

og
А
A
wit

Kekertar sut _

7k
еле А:

3
l'A

RerÉg Kaka

= а ”

= Alignatup-Kula
Dont

асе

“==” Morane
E

ex cennrgse,

i Bingarssuake Yar i

rouges) À
Aer WaT

TORSUKATAK og IKARASAK

paa Grundlag al Hammers Kort completterel 1902-04 xd

Sanymissok
af
MC Engell.
1: 400,000

АЛЕ.
Корте:

VE tue Kakaït

>
De
р
a
f
‘
»
“ -
“ _ |
GE
.

VII.

Contributions

Ethnology and Anthropogeography of the
Polar Eskimos.

H. P. Steensby.

1910.

The Eskimo tribe, which is called here the Polar Eskimos,
lives on the north-west coast of Greenland, between 76° and
79° N.L., and is the most northern people on the globe. From
the West Greenlanders they are separated by the uninhabited
ice-shores of Melville Bay and from the natives of Ponds Inlet
on the northern part of Baffin Land by the likewise uninhab-
ited large islands of Ellesmere Land and North Devon.

The title ‘‘neighbours of the North Pole’, which E. Astrup
gives them, is theirs with right, not only because their land is
so near to the pole, but also on account of the great and
important help they have given in recent times to the Polar
expeditions. For a long time they were known under the
name ‘the arctic Highlanders”, a title given them by John
Ross, by which he intended to convey the impression both of
remarkable stature and also of the northerly and mountainous
nature of their land. Later, Bessels with small reason intro-
duced the name Itaner or Etah’er from the most northerly,
large settlement of the tribe, Ita or Etah. More frequently the
tribe has been named after their most southerly settlement the
Cape York Eskimos. The title Polar Eskimos has come into
use mainly since L. Mylius-Erichsen’s Danish Expedition of
1902—1904.

Although there is full reason to regard the tribe as an
ethnographic unit, owing to the apartness of its region from
that of all other Eskimos and owing to the special character-
istics of its culture, yet its numbers are extremely few. Ас-

256

cording to a census taken by Peary in the summer of 1895 the
tribe then numbered 253 individuals in all, of which 140 were
of the male sex and 113 female. Already two years later the
number had sunk to 234. And in 1906, when Peary again
made a census of all the natives, he found there only 207, of
which 119 were men, 85 women and 3 small children, of whose
sex Peary could obtain no information. These numbers, which
also agree with the observations of the Danish Expeditions, are
certainly correct. On the other hand, the estimates given by
Kane in 1854, of about 150, and by Hayes in 1861, of about
100, and by Bessels in 1873, of 112, were certainly incom-
plete.

It was so long ago as 1616, that William Baffin in his
small ship “Discovery” sailed along this part of the Greenland
coast, past Capes York, Atholl and Parry, and on the 5 of
July reached his furthest point, within sight of Cape Alexander.
Baffin narrates, that he was forced by the ice ‘‘to stand backe
some eight leagues to an island we called Hakluit’s [le — it
lyeth betweene two great Sounds, the one Whale Sound, and
the other Sir Thomas Smith’s Sound; this last runneth to the
06 02 182...’

We must pass over two hundred years, however, before
we learn anything of the inhabitants of this land. They were
first discovered in 1818 by John Ross. On the 9 of August,
while the two ships of John Ross were lying in the neighbour-
hood of Cape York, 18 natives visited them, approaching over
the ice. They had sledges and dogs, lances and knives, con-
cerning which Ross says, that they were made of meteoric
iron, said to occur in abundance in the neighbourhood of
Bushnan Island. Ross adds, further, that they apparently had
no idea of other people living to the south’.

1 The voyages of W. Baffin of 1612—22, ed. by C. R. Markham. Hakluyt
Society. London 1881, p 145.
2 John Ross: A voyage of discovery etc. London 1819.

John Ross’ voyage and in still higher degree W. Е. Parry’s
in 1819, during which Lancaster Sound was navigated, led to
the English and Scottish whalers pushing further north than
they previously had done. Baffin’s voyage in 1616 had been
the precursor of the whale-fishing in the Davis Strait, which
was begun already in 1619 by the Dutch, followed by the
English a few years later; but for 200 years the whalers had
kept to the southern parts of the Greenland coast.

After Ross and Parry better knowledge was obtained of
the movements of the whale in these waters, and the whalers
were not long in making use of this knowledge. In March the
large whales, with which we are here concerned, are met with
off the ice-edge at Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay. In
the beginning of May they go over to the Greenland coast,
where they are found in June south of Disko. From here they
return towards the north along the ice-edge in Melville Bay
and into the so-called ‘‘North Water” of the whalers, south of
Smith Sound between Greenland in the east and Ellesmere
Land in the west. Late in July and in the beginning of August
some are met with in Jones Sound and in Lancaster Sound,
but the main portion are found off the mouth of Ponds Inlet,
where the whale-fishing takes place. In September and October
the whales turn to the south between the coast of Baffins
Land and the western edge of the ‘‘middle pack’ !.

The movements of the whalers correspond with the mi-
grations of the whale. They arrive at the North Water late in
June or in the beginning of July, and often come into connec-
tion, as a rule off Cape York, with the Polar Eskimos, who
come out to the ships on the coastal ice which is still firm at
this time of year. During the past century the whalers have
thus traded occasionally with the Polar Eskimos, who in return
for their fox and bear skins received wood and iron implements.

' А.Р. Low: Report on the Dominion Government Expedition to Hudson
Bay and the arctic islands, 1903—04. Ottawa 1906.

258

On the other hand, the stay of the whalers in the North Water
has always been so short, that they have never come into such
close contact with the Polar Eskimos as, for example, with the
Eskimo tribe at Ponds Inlet, who to some extent have taken
part in the whale-fishing.

Fortunately, the English and Scottish whalers have never
adopted the methods employed by the American whalers in
Hudson Strait and in Hudson Bay. These latter, namely, em-
ploy the Eskimos to man their whaling-boats and for this pur-
pose carry away whole, small tribes to the fishing-grounds, to
exploit their powers and cleverness throughout the summer.
On the other hand, the English and Scotch depend wholly upon
their own white crew to man their boats.

The introduction of steam-power on the whaling vessels,
in the fifties or sixties, gave a fresh impetus to the whale-fishery
and for the Polar Eskimos this meant a closer connection with
civilisation. Almost at the same time the whole of the fishery
in Baffin Bay passed over into the hands of the Scotch alone,
who came from a single port, namely Dundee. From there
about half a score of vessels went yearly in the seventies to
Baffin Bay, but in 1903 and 1904 only 4 vessels went out and
in 1909, it is said that only a single vessel visited Baffins Bay.

The Polar Eskimos had no connection with the scientific
expeditions for a long period of years after their discovery. It
was only during the expeditions in search of Franklin that they
became better known. The ship “North Star” under the ship-
master Saunders, which was sent out in 1849 with provisions
for James C. Ross’ Search Expedition in Barrow Strait, was
prevented by ice from entering Lancaster Sound and had to
pass the winter of 1849—50 in the small North Star Bay on
the south side of Wolstenholm Sound.

In the middle of August 1850 the two large English exped-
itions under H. Austin and William Penny both came into
connection with the Polar Eskimos at Cape York. The last-

259

named had the Dane Carl Petersen on board as interpreter.
From Cape York Austin’s expedition took a young Polar Eskimo
to England, where he was baptised and became known under
the name of Erasmus York; he died however in the year 1856
at Newfoundland, where he was being educated to be a mission-
ary among the Labrador Eskimos.

Regarding the Polar Eskimos at Cape York Lieutenant
Sherard Osborn!, who was in charge of one of Austin’s ships,
narrates that they arrived in dog-sledges, which ‘‘were entirely
constructed of bone, and were small, neat looking vehicles; no

sledge had more than five dogs; some had only three ... They
are said, ... to have believed themselves to be the only people
in the world’. Carl Petersen? says, with regard to one of

these sledges, that it was bound together by thongs of all
kinds. The runners consisted of old whale-bone, and there
was but little wood in it.

In the years immediately following, the English expeditions
again came into connection with the Polar Eskimos. The only
one of importance in this regard is the expedition under
E. A. Inglefield, which discovered Inglefield Gulf and for the
first time sailed through Smith Sound. On August 2214 1852
Inglefield®> met Eskimos in the neighbourhood of the Petowik
Glacier, where they were bird-hunting among the cliffs by the
coast; “Nothing of European ware was found with these natives,
nor were kyacks seen”. Thereafter he visited the Eskimo settle-
ment Umanark, which was uninhabited at the time, as also a
likewise uninhabited winter-settlement (probably Netschilivik)
on Barden Bay, in the neighbourhood of which, however, Eski-
mos were dwelling in tents; at this settlement several examples
of European steel implements were found.

1 Sh. Osborn: Stray leaves from an arctic Journal. London 1852, p. 250.
2 Carl Petersen: Erindringer fra Polarlandene. København 1857, р. 29.
3 Е. A. Inglefield: A summer search for Franklin. London 1853, р. 46

et seq.

260

Inglefield’s discoveries were continued by the American
Expedition under E. K. Kane. From the autumn of 1853 to
late in May 1855, when the members of the expedition left
their ship to try and reach Upernivik by boat, they had their
fixed quarters in Rensselaer Harbour (78°37' N.L., 71° М. L.),
and as time went on came into close touch with the Polar
Eskimos. A part of the expedition, including Carl Petersen and
1. I. Hayes, which had made a futile attempt to reach Upernivik
by boat in August 1854 and had been obliged to live for some
time in a stone-hut on the coast between Booth Sound and
Granville Bay, would certainly have perished from hunger, if
the Polar Eskimos had not come to their assistance, and thus
enabled them to get back to their ship in December".

Kane? was the first to give a detailed account of the
Polar Eskimos. From his description we obtain a vivid picture
of their poverty in wood and iron. The shafts of the har-
poons were composed of several pieces of wood bound together.
The sledge-runners were made of pieces of bone fitted and
bound together. Pieces of barrel- hoops were used for knives.
It appeared further, that the Polar Eskimos did not at that
time hunt the herds of reindeer, which collected round about
on the coastal hills, nor did they know anything of the bow
and arrow. The salmon in the lakes and rivers were not
fished and they were unacquainted with the usual Eskimo me-
thods of fishing, with a three-pronged fork. Further, they did
not use the kayak, concerning which Kane says, that it ‘‘exists
among them only as a legendary word” >,

Kane’s interpreter, the Danish West Greenlander, Hans
Hendrik", left the expedition during the return voyage and

1 Isaac I. Hayes: An Arctic Boat Journey. Boston 1860, р. 139 et seq.
E. K. Kane: Arctic Explorations in the years 1853, 54, 55. Philadelphia
1856. Vols. I—II, Carl Petersen, 1. с.

+ Memoirs of Hans Hendrik, the arctic traveller, serving under Kane, Hayes,
Hall and Nares, 1853—1876. Edited by George Stephens. London 1878.

261

joined the Polar Eskimos, among whom he married and re-
mained until I. I. Hayes’ expedition found him at Cape York
on August 95 1860 and took him onboard with his wife and
child, to serve as interpreter. The winter of 1860—61 was
passed by the expedition in Foulke Fjord at Etah and they thus
came into close contact with the Polar Eskimos. Regarding
these, Hayes like Kane narrates, that they did not hunt the
reindeer, as the bow and arrow were unknown to them!.

A few years after Hayes’ stay among them, however, the
Polar Eskimos must have learnt not only reindeer-hunting and
the use of the bow and arrow, but also salmon fishing and
the building of kayaks, as well as the methods of hunting from
the kayaks; this learning they received from a tribe of immi-
grants from the American side of Smith Sound. About half a
century later Knud Rasmussen” obtained the story of this
immigration from two Polar Eskimos, namely, from Merkrusärk,
who was born on the American side, and from Panigpak,
whose father Itsukusuk was son of Kridlarssuark (i.e. the great
Kridlak), who was leader of the immigrants.

These seem to have numbered in all ca. 14 persons; but
after some years — Merkrusärk said 6 — the old Kridlarssuark
had the desire to return to his own country and again left the
Polar Eskimos along with his relatives, with exception of his
own son Itsukusuk and his family. During the journey, how-
ever, most of the party succumbed to hunger; some of them
committed cannibalism and only a few survived, to return 5
years later to the Polar Eskimos; amongst these was Merkrusärk.

For various reasons I am able to say, that this immigra-
tion took place in the beginning or the middle of the sixties.
When C.F. Hall’s expedition “Polaris” lay at Life-Boat Cove in
the neighbourhood of Etah during the winter of 1872—75,

Captain Budington happened to notice a tattooed woman and

1 Isaac I. Hayes: The Open Polar Sea. London 1867, р. 272.
? Knud Rasmussen: Nye Mennesker. Kobenhavn 1905, рр. 21—35.

262

learnt on further conversation, that she and her family belonged
to a party of western Eskimos, who had come over Smith
Sound ‘‘4 or 5 years before, and these were the only survivors.
They had introduced the use of the bow and arrow’?.

The husband of this woman was indeed Itsukusuk (pro-
nounced Itukusuk), as Knud Rasmussen, using the Danish-
West Greenland mode of writing, calls him — the American
authors write the name E-took’-a-jeu — and her little son then
was Panigpak (Pun’-e-pa).

The ‘4 or 5 years before”, given as the time for the last
immigration, must certainly not be taken literally. There are
other inaccuracies also in Budington’s information; thus, he
states, that they passed over Smith Sound in a woman’s boat
and 5 kayaks, whereas Merkrusark narrates, what is certainly
correct, that they came over the frozen Strait, thus on dog-
sledges, bringing their kayaks on these. Merkrusark’s report
gives one the impression of being correct on the main points.

The narrative of the expedition shows, however, that the
departure under the leadership of the old Kridlarssuark must
have taken place before 1872, since Itsukusuk with his family
alone remained. We may likewise conclude, that Merkrusark
and the few others, who were saved on the eventful return-
journey, had not yet come back again to the Polar Eskimos.
if we now calculate, that they could have returned at the ear-
liest shortly after the departure of the ‘‘Polaris” Expedition
from the Life-Boat Cove in June 1873, and make use of Mer-
krusärk’s statement of the 5 years as given above, the depar-
ture on the return-journey to the American side must have
occurred at the earliest in 1868 and at the latest on the spring-
ice of 1872. The time for the first immigration must therefore
lie between 1862 and 1866; but I believe that the first year
mentioned is nearest the mark.

1 С.Н. Davis: Narrative of the North Polar Expedition U.S. Ship “Polaris”,
Captain С. Е. Hall commanding. Washington 1876, рр. 450—451.

263

| base this view chiefly on the interesting fact, that Ме
Clintock’s Franklin-Expedition obtained information regarding
Kridlarssuark and his little tribe, whilst these were on their way
from their home-country to the coasts of Smith Sound. After
a fleeting connection with the Polar Eskimos at Cape York on
June 26 1858, Mc Clintock on his Franklin Search Expedition
with the ‘‘Fox” sailed westwards and later southwards from
Jones Sound along the east coast of North Devon; here, at
Cape Horsburgh, the most easterly point of North Devon or
more correctly of Philpots Island, he met Kridlarssuark on July
021858: -

Ме Clintock! is himself more brief in his report of this
meeting than his interpreter, the above-mentioned Dane Carl
Petersen”, for which reason I keep mostly to the account of
the latter, which agrees in all points with Mc Clintock’s.
Whilst the ‘Fox’ was passing a good distance off the edge
of the fixed ice, Mc Clintock heard some voices calling from
the ice through the still weather, and shortly after caught
sight of some figures. After anchoring to the fixed ice, 3 men,
3 women and 2 children came on board, whilst 4 persons re-
mained behind on the shore. Carl Petersen then narrates that
“they were all clothed in reindeer skin and quite resembled
our Greenlanders, and their language had also a considerable
resemblance to that of the latter Eskimos’. Their coat was
however somewhat longer than the Polar Eskimos’; the faces
of the women were tattooed. They asked Mc Clintock to wait,
as their sledges were on the way with narwhal and walrus
teeth, which they wanted to sell. They had come from Ponds
Inlet, where they had often been on board the English whaling-

vessels. Two years previously they had come over Lancaster

' Me Clintock: A Narrative of the Discovery of the fate of Sir John
Franklin. London 1857, pp. 143—144.

- Carl Petersen: , Den sidste Franklin-Expedition. Kobenhavn 1860,
pp. -92—93.

264

Sound on their dog-sledges, and they knew absolutely nothing
of the land to the west or north. ‘‘The oldest man among
them was very bald, which is a rarety, and was called Kre’tlak
(Mc Clintock: Kal-lek)”.

This Kre’tlak cannot be any other than Kridlarssuark, who
has grown to be a great figure in the folk-lore of the Polar
Eskimos. All doubt of his identity disappears when we learn
what Panigpak told Knud Rasmussen regarding his great grand-
father. ‘‘His hair was thin like the white men’s. His large
forehead was not covered by hair’. A more certain proof of
identity, when it shows an extremely rare characteristic among
Eskimos, we could not desire.

When we think of the length of time such a journey would
take under a constant struggle for existence, it seems very
probable, that 6—7 years passed during which the little group
of emigrating, Ponds Inlet Eskimos wandered along the east
coasts of North Devon and Ellesmere Land, before they
reached their distant, uncertain goal, the Northern Eskimos, of
whom they had heard from the whalers. I believe myself fairly
near the truth, in saying, that it was most probably the year
1862 or 1863. when the culture of the Polar Eskimos received
the many new impulses from their immigrant kinsmen.

The English Expedition of 1875—76 under G. Nares did
not touch the land-region of the Polar Eskimos on the voyage
up to Floeberg Beach on the coast of the Polar Ocean itself;
on the return voyage the ship of the Expedition entered Bardin
Bay on September 12% 1876 and saw there an Eskimo land-
settlement, but as the wind went round it was obliged to
hasten out to sea, without coming into connection with the
Eskimos, who were already streaming to the beach’.

The American Expedition of 1881—1884 under A. W. Greely?
has most interest in this conneetion, as it discovered Lake

Markham: The Great Frozen Sea. London 1880, p. 359.

нА. |.
2 А. W. Greely: Three years of arctic service. London 1886. Vols. I—II.

265

Hazen, which lies inland in the centre of the northernmost
part of Ellesmere Land, in a district rich in musk-ox. At this
lake, namely, the remains of Eskimos winter-houses were found,
a most astonishing find, which showed, that an Eskimo tribe
must have lived here in the extreme north; not only this, but
also thal they must have lived inland during the winter, whereas
the rule is that the Eskimos must remain on the sea-coast, in
order to obtain subsistence by seal-hunting on the ice. These
important discoveries regarding the earlier places of settlement
and lines of migration of the Eskimos over the most northerly
Polar islands, especially on the west coast of Ellesmere Land
and North Devon, were continued by the Norwegian Expedition
of 1898—1902 under the leadership of O. Sverdrup.

In 1891 Robert Peary began his long series of expeditions
and lengthy sojourns among the Polar Eskimos. In this way
the culture of the Polar Eskimos was once again enriched,
which has contributed undeniably to lighten their struggle for
existence. Thus, in exchange for fox and bear skins they ob-
tain weapons of the finest and best American manufacture, and
Peary by his frequent expeditions could keep them fairly regu-
larly provided with ammunition. They had never had much
advantage out of the few weapons, they had previously been
able to acquire in exchange from the whalers, as it was only
very occasionally that they could procure powder and shot.

Peary's first expedition passed the winter of 1891—92 al
Mc Cormick Bay and the second of 1893—95 at Bowdoin Bay,
which lies a little more to the east on the north side of Ingle-
field Gulf. The expeditions of 1896 and 1897 were only summer
voyages, to fetch the large blocks of iron, which Ross had
heard about as occurring in the neighbourhood of Cape York.
On his fifth expedition in 1898—1902 Peary began to make
his way right up to the northern end of the Smith Sound
Passage with his ship, and at the same time he began to fol-

low the example of the American whalers in Hudson Bay,

266

taking with him a number of Polar Eskimos on board the ship,
in order to make use of their powers and cleverness in hun-
ting and managing the sledges.

He employed the same procedure in 1905—06 and 1908—09.
On the first of these expeditions ca. 70 Polar Eskimos or one-
third of the whole tribe were taken on board. On the return-
journey late in August 1906, 8 of the Eskimo families became
discontented over a slight, compulsory reduction in the day’s
rations and left the ship in Lady Franklin Bay. These families
passed the winter in the region by Lake Hazen west of the
Robeson Channel. In the following spring, they journeyed over
the sea-ice down to the Etah country, where Knud Rasmussen
shortly after found them in the best of condition and health
after the long journey, which owing to the lack of dogs had
for a great part to be made on foot!.

In August 1907 the American Whitney's hunting expedition,
with Frederick A. Cook on board, came to the district about
Smith Sound. Cook passed the winter in Anoatok north of
Etah and started from there on his journey. His main inter-
rest for us here, however, is that he showed the Polar Eski-
mos the way to the musk-ox. hunting grounds on the west
coast of Ellesmere Land discovered by Sverdrup. In May 1909
he again left the Polar Eskimos and journeyed southwards over
Melville Bay.

From April 1903 to late in January 1904 the Danish, so-
called ‘‘Literary-Expedition” under L. Mylius-Erichsen, Grev
Harald Moltke and Knud Rasmussen lived among the Polar
Eskimos, for the most of the time on Saunders Island. In
recognition of the support received by the Expedition from the
natives, the Danish Government sent them valuable presents of
guns, ammunition, tools etc., which were brought to the Polar
Eskimos in the beginning of August 1905 by Captain H. Schouby,

7 В. Peary: Nearest the Pole. London 1907, р. 253. — Knud Rasmussen:
Berlingske Tidende, Nr. 181. København 1908.

267

on board the old ship of Me Clintock, the “Fox”, which is now
a coast steamer in Greenland.

From April 1907 till the end of May 1908 Knud Rasmussen
was again with the Polar Eskimos, living ‘‘as Eskimo among
the Eskimos”. In the summer of 1909 a Danish Missionary
Society commissioned Knud Rasmussen and H. Schouby to
found a permanent Mission Station at North Star Bay. The
expedition on board the S/S ‘‘Godthaab” also called in at Cape
York, both on its outward journey in July and on its return
in August.

Some scientists who were sojourning in West Greenland
at that time, namely, Chr. Refsaas, ethnologist in music,
Th. Thomsen, Eskimo archeologist, and the author, also ac-
companied the Expedition on the ‘“‘Godthaab”. The main ob-
ject of the first-named was to make a collection of the primitive
melodies of the Eskimos, which might serve as a valuable
supplement to the collections of folk-lore and ethnological
materials, made by Knud Rasmussen among the Polar Eskimos.
For the Danish National Museum, Th. Thomsen bought up a
collection of clothing and implements, an account of which
will probably be published by him. My own studies were
directed more to the manners and customs of the Polar Eski-
mos, and the results of my observations are discussed in the
following pages. |

To supplement my own observations and for the purpose
especially of giving a more complete picture of the life of the
Polar Eskimos throughout the year, | have made use of the
literature available, among which may be specially mentioned
the works of R. Peary, L. Mylius Erichsen and Knud Rasmussen.
From the last I have also received various items of information
by word of mouth.

XXXIV. 18

DIE

The region of the Polar Eskimos, in its more restricted
sense, is the west side of the broad peninsula, sometimes
called Hayes Peninsula, which from North-West Greenland ex-
tends towards the west between the Kane Basin in the north
and Melville Bay in the south. This western coast, which
extends over about 3 degrees of latitude from Cape Olsen to
Cape York and which is washed by the “пог water” of the
whalers as also by the 50 km. broad Smith Sound, is a
characteristic transverse coast with deep and branching bays.
The two main fjords are Wolstenholm Sound and Inglefield
Gulf. Numerous glaciers project out from the inland ice, so
that the narrow, ice-free foreland is split up into small parts.

The direction of this coast as a whole is from NW. to
SE., whilst the opposite coast of Ellesmere Land has a direc-
tion from NE. to SW. Together the two coasts form the
funnel-shaped outlet of the long, narrow passage, which con-
nects the Polar Sea with Baffins Bay. With regard to the
currents the conditions in Smith Sound are quite the same
as in Bering Strait or in the northernmost part of the At-
lantic between Greenland and Norway; a cold polar current
carrying masses of ice goes southwards along the west side of
the Sound, whilst a warmer aud ice-free current coming from
the south tries to force its way in along the east side. This
condition of the currents is directly connected with the revol-
ving of the globe, whlch induces the deflection of the water-

masses just as of the air-currents.

269

From Melville Bay and the east coast of North Devon to-
wards the south and as far as a line from Cape Russell to
Buchanan Bay towards the north, both coasts of Smith Sound
Passage consists of primitive kinds of rocks, whilst the nor-
thern continuation from Kane Basin to Robeson Channel is
bounded by coasts which are built up of formations chiefly
originating from the Cambrian, Silurian and Trias periods.

In agreement with the American geologists, who distinguish
between an older, Laurentian and a younger, Huronian group
among the primitive rocks, the southern part mentioned may
be said to consist of both groups. The older, harder, Lauren-
tian gneiss and granite form the coast on the Greenland side
from Melville Bay to Cape Atholl and from Foulke Fjord to
Cape Russell, while they constitute the whole of the opposite
coast of Ellesmere Land and North Devon with exception of a
part ca. 40 km long immediately south of Cape Isabella.

The Laurentian coast is of a uniform height and shows
few indentations, whilst the Huronic coast, which includes the
small stretch at Cape Isabella as also the Greenland coast
round Inglefield Gulf and Wolstenholm Sound, is more indented
as well as more diversified and changeable as regards height
and steepness. ‘‘A series of bedded rocks consisting of several
thousand feet of sandstones, limestones and other sediments,
occupies the coast and islands of the east side of Smith Sound,
from Cape Atholl northward to Foulke Fjord. These bedded
rocks are associated with dark coloured traps and diabase,
which are present in the form of sills between the bedding ;
as dikes cutting the bedding rocks and as large intrusive
masses.” !

On the Huronic coast also, more frequently than on the
Laurentian, we find a low beach which is specially suited to

' А.Р. Low: Report on the Dominion Government Expedition to Hudson
Bay and the Arctic Islands on Board the D.G.S. Neptune 1903—1904.
Ottawa 1906, p. 207.

18*

270

the building of the winter-houses of the Eskimos, as also for
landing, both with the kayak in summer and with the dog-
sledges from the sea-ice in winter. This is one of the rea-
sons why the buildings of the Eskimos are mainly found at
Inglefield Gulf and Wolstenholm Sound, and it is also one of
the conditions which make the Greenland coast more inhabi-
lable in contrast to the coast of Ellesmere Land.

А further advantage which the Greenland coast has in
biogeographical regards may also be mentioned here, namely,
that many of the high, in part precipitous, in part strongly
sloping coast-hills between Cape York and Cape Alexander on
Smith Sound are directed towards the south and south-west.
This has the result amongst others, that these coasts are spe-
cially selected by the birds, and in summer we find this coast
teeming with bird life. Chief among these are the Auk and
the considerably smaller Little Auk (Mergulus alle L.); less
numerous are the eider ducks, gulls, terns, fulmars and loons
(Colymbus).

Auk grounds occur at some few places where the slope
of the coast is steep; the largest and the one most frequented
by the Eskimos lies on the south-west coast of Saunder’s Is-
land, and the Eskimo name for the island, ‘‘Agpat”, is an
indication of the quantities of auk there. A second auk ground,
also called ‘‘Agpat”, is found further to the south on the
coast right opposite Conical Rock. The Little Auk occurs on
the less steep coastal cliffs, where it breeds amongst the stones.
The whole coast from Cape York Bay to Cape Atholl, the
south coast of Northumberland Island as also the stretch of
coast from the settlement Krana on the north side of Inglefield
Gulf westwards right round to Kane Basin, might also be con-
sidered a continuous row of Little Auk grounds. If we row
along such a place on a summer's day the air is full of flocks
of birds and noisy with the half chirping, half crackling sounds
they make; the sea also is covered with thousands of the

201

swimming black birds. It is only the sea-birds which are of
economical importance to the Eskimos; the ptarmigan is only
hunted and eaten in times of want; the raven, on the other
hand, which also occurs here, plays the part of a mystic
messenger in their tradition and folk-lore. |

As a consequence of this bird-life, the soil on the south-
ern slopes is naturally, owing to the good manuring, very
fertile, and we thus find at these places a comparatively luxur-
iant vegelation, consisting mainly of grass. And when we
find a specially abundant vegetation in these regions, we may
be sure in most cases, that it has developed just at one of
these bird-grounds with southerly exposure or round an old
settlement where the soil has been manured by blubber and
offal.

The vegetation leads to a considerable wealth of polar
hares, and the reindeer also finds here a good part of its
food in summer when it comes down from the inner hilly
regions. Further, the presence of the birds and hares means
a livelihood for a large number of foxes, especially of the blue
arctic fox. It seems to be a rule, that most of the blue foxes
are met with east of Smith Sound, whilst the white fox is
more common on Ellesmere Land. It is quite possible, that
this stands in connection with the difference in the food con-
ditions, the Greenland side having large quantities of birds,
whereas on Ellesmere Land the principal food of the fox is of
quite a different kind. Naturally the hares, reindeer and foxes
are not exclusively restricted to the districts frequented by the
birds, but occur everywhere on the narrow strips of ice-free
land between the coast and the inland ice; they may even
penetrate in on the Nunataks. A specially rich district for the
packs of reindeer is the inner parts round Olriks Fjord, where
the most extensive stretches of lichen vegetation are found.

These connected conditions have the result, that the coast

mentioned has a better vegetation and a richer animal-life than

any other place in the same latitudes on the globe. This also
leads to better conditions for human life and also helps to ex-
plain why it is that human beings have here pushed farthest
up towards the pole.

The chief conditions for Eskimo life have to be sought,
however, not on land but on the sea, and they concern the
marine mammals and the ice. The large whales, which still
visit the ‘‘North Water” now and then, though in earlier days
they must have been present in much greater numbers, have
never been of any great importance for the Polar Eskimos. The
latter have seized upon the carcases driven on land and revelled
in the rich quantities of flesh and blubber, but they have never
known how to carry on the systematic ‚hunling of the large
animals. The narwhal and the white whale are common and
are hunted from the ice and from kayaks; but both;of these im-
portant animals go down in winter to more southerly latitudes.
The chief source of food for the Eskimos is however the wal-
rus, which is met with the whole year round. In the summer
time it can be seen lying in the sun on the ice-floes right
inside the fjords and at the islands; in the autumn when the
fjords are frozen it is met with outside the ice-margin, and
through the winter it keeps in the always partially open water
in the middle of the North Water due south of Smith Sound
and Cape Alexander.

The commonest of the seals is however the fjord seal
(Phoca foetida, esk. netchik), which occurs throughout the
whole year. Phoca barbata (esk. ugsuk) is also found here but
in much smaller numbers. It is the first-named, the fjord
seal, which comes into the fjords in winter under the even
winter-ice and gives rise to the important ‘‘Maupok” hunting
at the breathing holes, which this seal constantly makes in the
ice. As the Polar Eskimos also hunt the walrus from the ice-
margin in the winter, the Maupok hunting is however not of
such importance here as is the case amongst some of the

273

arctic: Eskimo tribes on the coast of the American continent,
e. g. the Netchillick Eskimos on the Boothia Isthmus, the
Ugjulik Eskimos on King Williams Land and the tribes on
Coronation Gulf.

All hunting on the ice requires however an even surface
of ice, so that dog-sledges can be used. Irregular pack-ice
frozen in summer, such as is met with along the Ellesmere
coast and up through the narrow waters north of Smith Sound,
is a hindrance to hunting and sledging, and prevents any per-
manent settlement of the Eskimos.

The first to point out the vital importance of the winter
ice, formed in the course of the winter, for the Eskimo culture
was the celebrated American ethnographer Franz Boas of New
York! He demonstrated, that it is the nature of the ice
which determines the distribution of the Eskimos throughout
the greater part of the year, and he showed how the extension
of the winter ice depends chiefly on the configuration of the
coast, as also on the currents and tides, since a strong cur-
rent can prevent the formation of fixed ice. This is the case
for example, as already mentioned, in the middle of the North
Water, where the current flows out and in through Smith
Sound.

It is only inside the islands lying in the mouths of the
two large indentations that an even winter ice is formed, which
has the chance to lie unbroken throughout the greater part of
the year. As a rule this is formed in October and lies to the
beginning of July, in other words ca. 9 months in the year.
In 1903 Knud Rasmussen journeyed with dog-sledges from the
east side of Saunders Island to the mainland even so late as
July 17th,

If it should happen any autumn that the seas is unusu-

ally late in becoming frozen over, the hunting suffers, and

! Franz Boas: The Central Eskimo. 6th Annual Report of the Bureau of
Ethnology. Washington 1888, p. 417.

274

famine may ensue. Here and there the even surface of the
winter ice may be broken by an iceberg or an ice-pack which
is firmly fixed in the ice and surrounded by a snow-drive. It
happens frequently also that the changing wind may carry a
swimming ice-block forwards and backwards and thus a stretch
of open water is maintained, from the margins of which the
Eskimos can carry on their hunting.

Along the coasts a fixed ice-base is formed which is frozen
solidly to the land; its surface corresponds with the high-water
mark. Outside this ice-base the ice rises and falls with high
and low water, and the boundary is formed by а break and
sometimes also by washed-up ice-masses. Just above the ice-
base, on the fixed land, where the coast is low and has a
supply of stones for building material, the Eskimos set up
their winter-houses with the low passage and skin windows
towards the sea. It sometimes happens that this ice-base
remains throughout the summer; thus Kane found an ice-base
several years old which was 10 m thick and 40 m broad in
Smith Sound.

Several things would indicate that the lands round Smith
Sound are subject to a regular and slow sinking, in contrast
to the rising which is believed to have been noticed along the
north coast of North America from Coronation Gulf westwards’.
This sinking was already noticed by Kane and was strongly
maintained later by Peary. As evidence of the sinking Astrup
states, that he has seen remains of houses now under the sur-
face of the water on the south-western side of Saunders Island’.
Knud Rasmussen narrates that it is the Eskimos’ own view that
the land has sunk and that the sea is spreading. At the settle-

1 cited from G. Hartmann: Der Einfluss des Treibeisses auf die Bodengestalt
des Polargebiets. Leipzig 1891.

> H. H. Howorth: Recent Elevations of the Earth’s Surface in the Northern
Circumpolar Region. Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc. Vol. XLIII. London 1873.

‚ Е. Astrup: Blandt Nordpolens Naboer. Christiania 1895, р. 318. В. Peary:
Northward over the Great Ice. Vol. II, p. 173.

two
1
or

ment Umanark on the south side of Wolstenholm Sound, I have
myself seen how the sea is eating away the low, grass-covered
coastal Jand; houses can be seen there which have been dwelt
in within the memory of those now living, but there founda-
tions have now been half carried away by the waves. Whether
the ground has sunk before the foundations were carried away,
I cannot definitely determine, though it seems most probable.

It is not my intention to give here a complete description
of the geology of the region dealt with, its climate, animal
and plant life. I need only mention the conditions which are
of importante for the Eskimo culture, that is, of anthropo-
geographical interest. Most of these conditions have already
been mentioned and only a few additional remarks need be
made.

In earlier times the Polar Eskimos obtained materials from
the ground for their stone-knives and stone-axes and even on
Peary’s and Astrup's first visit these had not quite disappeared.
Slate has at any rate been used for such women’s knives (Ulo),
which were employed for scraping the blubber on the inner
side of seal-skin. As mentioned earlier, Ross narrates that
when he met the Polar Eskimos at Cape Yerk in 1818, he found
in their possession rude knives and harpoon points with cutting
edges of meteoric iron. So far as he conld understand from the
explanations of the Eskimos, this iron came from ап “iron-
mountain” on Melville Bay, north of Bushnan Island. The
place was found in the spring of 1894 by Peary by the help
of an Eskimo, who knew both the place where it occurred and
also the use of this natural iron, which is really of meteoric
origin in contrast to the Disko iron, which was originally deposited
in the basalt. Peary thus describes how the Eskimo found the
place: ‘‘Kicking aside the snow, he exposed more pieces,
saying this was a pile of the stones used in pounding frag-
ments from the ‘‘iron-mountain”. He then indicated a spot
four or five feet distant as the location of the long-sought

276

object”. The large block of iron was cleared of snow and the
Eskimo told Peary, "that the Innuits call the meteorite a woman
in a sitting position, and he says it used to be much larger
and higher than it is now, but that his people have gradually
worn it down, and that years ago natives from Peterahwik (on
the coast north of Inglefield Gulf) broke off the head and
carried it away. He also voluntarily told how the ancient
knives of his people used to be made, namely, by inserting
small flattened pieces of the metal in a bone or ivory back,
and then with a piece of trap lying near, showed me how the
flakes of iron were detached”. In 1895 Peary procured a
woman’s knive, which was found in an old winter house at
Netschilivik, as also a man’s knive from the old settlement
Kangerdlugsuark (Kangerdlooksoah), far in on the south side
of Inglefield Gulf, and both instruments were provided with an
edge of the natural iron!. This use of the natural iron can
scarcely have arisen at the place itself, but is certainly due to
some influence from outside. Possibly it came from the more
southerly west coast of Greenland over Melville Bay, or it may
have been learnt from the use which the Central Eskimos on
the North American continent make of the natural copper oc-
curring on the islands and coasts at Coronation Gulf. The
question cannot be further discussed here; for its solution we
require typological studies on archaeological material which is
still wanting.

Of minerals which are of cultural importance for the
Polar Eskimos we also find sulphur pyrites, used for making
fire, and soapstone, from which lamps and cooking utensils
are made. The principal locality for sulphur pyrites is the so-
called “ignerite” hill (fire-stone hill) at Fitz Clarence Rock in
Booth Sound. One of the principal soapstone quarries lies on
the coast some kilometers west of the Petowik Glacier.

+ В. Peary: Norhward ete. Vol. II, рр. 145—147, 612—614 (fig. of the two
knives).

ОТ

The lack of trees has been of vital importance for human
life on Smith Sound, and in earlier times this lack was even
one of the main reasons why they could not build boats. The
conditions are different here from those in South Greenland,
from Egedesminde and southwards, where the coast received
plenty of drift-wood. Extremely little of this occurs so far to
the north, even though small quantities certainly drift in fairly
regularly. Hall! found a piece of drift-wood which was about
{ m long as far north as Kennedy Channel, and another some-
what shorter piece; and Greely”? gives a list of the drift-wood
collected on his expedition, consisting almost entirely of willow,
pine and cedar.

Attention has only been paid hitherto to the more restricted
region of the Polar Eskimos from Cape York to Smith Sound;
this is the district where they have their fixed winter dwellings
and where they pass all the dark periods, as well as the times
of leisure and scarcity of food. The place is well-marked off
from natures side. Smith Sound is a little over 50km broad
at its narrowest part and in the winter is covered by a solid
layer of ice: according to the Eskimos it can be crossed at
this time not only by the polar bears, foxes, reindeer and
hares, but also by the musk-ox and the polar wolves. In spite
of this, the two last-mentioned animals do not occur at Ingle-
field Gulf and Wolstenholm Sound. The musk-ox is said never
to have been seen south of Cape Alexander; but the Polar
Eskimos have been from early times accustomed to cross over
Smith Sound and hunt them on the east coast of Ellesmere
Land about Bache Peninsula. A few polar wolves are some-
times met with at intervals of some years, probably roving
animals which have lost their way south of Cape Alexander.

The different occurrence of the two kinds of foxes on the

1 Е. Bessels: Die amerikanische Nordpol-Expedition. Leipzig 1879, р. 296.
? А. W. Greely: Report on the Proceedings of the U. $. Expedition to Lady
Bay, Grinnell Land. Washington. 1888. Vol. 1, рр. 313 and 534.

278

two sides of the Sound has already been mentioned. And it
is also peculiar that the races of reindeer differ in an almost
exactly parallel manner. On the east side we find the common
Greenland reindeer, which is closely related in all its structure
and appearance to the caribou of the North American Barren
Ground. On Ellesmere Land, on the other hand, we find a
smaller race (Rangifer pearyi Allen), which is also said to
differ in colour, form of the horns and anatomical features’.
The polar bear has quite a special importance for the
Polar Eskimos. It is their most dangerous enemy while hun-
ting and it has been in great degree their trainer in hardihood
‚ and ingenuity. Further, there is no Eskimo tribe which
requires and uses the skin of the bear for clothing to such
an extent, as the Polar Eskimo’s district falls within the
region of distribution of the polar bear; but it only occurs in
small numbers at the fjords. It is most abundant, on the
other hand, up in the Kane Basin at the Humboldt Glacier, as
also in Melville Bay off its many ice-streams, and the Polar
Eskimos sometimes sledge up to these localities to hunt for
the bear and provide themselves with its indispensable skin.
The areas visited by the Eskimos thus extend from the
Humboldt Glacier right down into Melville Bay. Sometimes
they have come so far down that the West Greenland bear
hunters have found the traces of their sledges; but, at any
rate during the period of the Danish colonisation in the district
of Upernivik, there was no connection with the more southern
Greenlanders before 1904. According to Knud Rasmussen the
Polar Eskimos tell of a bloody conflict they have had with the
latter, after which they no longer ventured to go so far to the
south. And there is scarcely any doubt that there has been
an occasional connection once upon a time, which for some
reason was broken off some generations ago, perhaps in the

1 Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. XVI. New York 1902, p. 409; and
Vol. XXIV, New York 1908, p. 487.

279

first half of the 18% century. В. Stein", who made a special
investigation of the extent of the original geographical know-
ledge of the tribe, came to the result, that it extended so far
to the south as even to include Upernivik, whereas to the
north it only went a little beyond the more restricted home-
district of the race (a little beyond 79° N.L.).

it is, in fact, an enormous extent of land and sea which
this handful of people, counting little more than 200 indivi-
duals, must toil over in order to procure for themselves what
is necessary for the maintenance and security of life. Ш is a
tract of 6—800 km. Towards the land its extension is of
course limited by the inland ice, which for the Eskimo is sur-
rounded by superstitious dread and mystery. Journeys over the
glaciers are however by no means unknown. It happens, that
open water off a projecting promontory must be avoided by
driving over the glacier-covered land with the dog-sledges.
And two sledge-routes pass over the marginal zone of the
inland ice in going to the principal reindeer district in Olriks
Fjord. The one goes from the settlement at Netschilivik up
towards the most northerly of the glaciers, which open on to
Barden Bay, and further in an easterly direction on the inland
ice. The other leads from North Star Bay up the valley, which
is the eastern continuation of the bay in towards the land, and
up on the inland ice; thereafter the route bends in a northerly
direction and leads towards the inner part of Olriks Fjord.
Both of these glacier-routes are used in the autumn, before
the long, river-like Olriks Fjord with its strong current is
frozen over, and even before the ice-free foreland is suitable
for sledging, so that the baggage must be carried up to the
margin of the glacier. -

All the wanderings aud journeys of the Eskimos are made
by sledge, as the period of open water is so short; and it is

В. Stein: Geographische Nomenclatur bei den Eskimos des Smith-Sundes.
Petermanns Mitteilungen 1902.

280

only within recent years that they have begun to construct
skin-boats, and even then only kayaks, not the larger women’s
boats or umiaks. A group of islands like the Carey Islands
seems never or seldom visited by the Eskimos either by sledge
or by boat, though the islands can be seen from the coast
of the mainland.

On Ellesmere Land the Polar Eskimos had earlier never
passed over the relatively narrow tract of land which extends
between the indentations on the east coast to Bay Fjord on
the west side of Ellesmere Land. Along the east coast they
have not gone very far north or south of the indentations on
Bache Peninsula. Nowadays, however, this has been altered
as the result of the influence of expeditions and the informa-
tion gained therefrom, and some Polars Eskimos have already
on their own initiative extended their horizon as far as Jones
Sound and the west side of Ellesmere Land.

III.

The state of culture of a tribe can express its primitive-
ness and lack of development mainly in two ways. There is
in the first place the division of labour; the more undeveloped,
the less the division. Every individual of a tribe in the state
of low culture does the same kind of work as every other.
The most primitive condition of all is, that the individual seeks
his food alone for himself without cooperation with others and
without giving others help; it is the individualistic mode of
life, which however one scarcely finds realised in all its purity
in any single case. The second direction in which primitive-
ness can display itself in a decisive manner is in the lack of
special apparatus and the lack of acquired, skilled methods in
obtaining a livelihood.

The expression ‘‘collectors” has been employed to denote
those tribes, which stand in the lowest stage of development
both as regards the individualism as also in the other direction

mentioned. At the present day true ‘collectors’ hardly exist.
as the industrial culture of all known tribes is based on spe-
cial acquirements or trained methods in using special apparatus.
This applies especially to the male sex, whereas the direct
participation of the female sex in obtaining the means of
sustenance consists as a rule merely in the collecting of every-
thing possible that might be eatable, as fruits, roots, eggs,
larvae etc., thus, things which can all be obtained without the
use of other apparatus than a pointed stick for digging up
roots. We might say, therefore, that among the hunting

peoples the woman still remains at the “collector” stage, whilst
the man has developed a special and higher form of culture.

Amongst the hunting peoples we may therefore with a
certain amount of right distinguish between two modes of liveli-
hood, namely, hunting, which is pursued by the men with
special weapons manipulated in a special, trained manner with
sport-like character, and secondly collecting, which is
carried on by women, children and old people or all those
who do not possess the strength or skill to take part in the
hunting. In the culture stage of the pure hunters, therefore,
hunting and collecting correspond partly to man’s and woman's
work; it is on this basis at any rate, for a very great part,
that the often sharp division between the work of man and
woman as also between their customs has been founded.

It is self-evident, that it would be wrong in a scientific
consideration of cultures to distinguish fishing from hunting
as а special or separate mode of livelihood. Fishing has to
be regarded as “hunting”, if it requires special apparatus in
conjunction with special methods of capture or great strength,
and in these cases it belongs to the activity of the men. On the
other hand, it is merely ‘collecting’, when a wealth of fish is so
easily obtainable that women and children can help in its capture.

Applying now these considerations to the culture of the
Polar Eskimos, we find that this, like that of the remaining
Eskimos, stands no higher in the direction of division of
labour in the making of their living that most of the other
hunting cultures throughout the world. Every man must be a
hunter, even the priests or angakoks, and there are no special
leaders or organisers in the tribe. On the other hand, their
industrial culture stands even very high as regards its wealth
of apparatus for various uses and as regards the acquired skill
and sportman’s craft and daring with which they are used,
even though the apparatus is only for the use of one person,
not of many together, i. e. individualism is predominant.

283

We can readily see that the Polar Eskimos have raised
themselves high above the level of the “collectors”. Further,
we also find that the sport-like hunting plays a more promi-
nent part than the simple collection of the means of life; the
natural conditions indeed do not give much opportunity for
the latter. Berried fruits and eatable insects hardly occur and
the beach is practically bare of edible shell-fish. Nevertheless
this essentially woman’s mode of livelihood does occur. И
appears typically in the case of the few, fresh plant-materials
which may be eaten, namely, some sweet-tasting flower-buds
and some sourish leaves, which are eaten either raw or after
boiling with a little water, and it is as a rule the women and
children who enjoy this kind of food. To balance matters the
men are able to obtain another kind of plant-food, as they eat
the contents found in the stomachs of reindeer; this is a very
favourite food and as only the men have access to the reindeer
meat stored in the depots, it is specially a man’s dish. Again,
the women take part in the catching of the Little Auk, which
takes place on the readily accessible, sloping cliffs by means
of a large net attached to a 2—3 meter long pole, the hunter
lying down among the stones and stretching up the net to
catch the birds as they sweep in thousands over his head. On
the other hand, the hunting of the Great Auk and the collec-
ting of its eggs on the steep sides of the cliffs, where the
hunter is let down from above by a rope, is purely man’s
work. Similarly it is for the man to fetch the eggs of the
eider duck from some small islands, e.g. from Dalrymple Rock.
In connection with these conditions we can also note a ten-
dency on the man’s part to make the eggs his own particular
property and to forbid the women touching this delicacy, which
is enjoyed even though the development of the embryo is far
advanced”.

! ef. Josephine Diebitsch-Peary: My Arctic Journal. London 1894,
pp. 163—164.
XXXIV. 19

The Polar Eskimos as well as the Eskimos in general are
distinctly nature people, in the sense that their direct depen-
dence on and adaptation to the natural conditions under which
they live, is distinctly apparent everywhere in the life of the
tribe. The varied hunting equipment and the highly developed
cleverness in hunting, however, place the Eskimos not among
the lowest but among the most developed hunting peoples the
world knows. If we divide the hunters into the two cultural
categories, lower and higher, we often find the Eskimos placed
in the lower class along with the bushmen, the dwarf negroes,
the Australian negroes and the Botocudos; but this is by no
means right. The Eskimos’ culture-apparatus for the main-
tenance and security of life is even specially well-developed
and entitles us to place them among the higher hunter peoples.

The Polar Eskimos belong to the group of Eskimos for
whom the summer and the winter bring very distinctly different
modes of livelihood, corresponding to the great changes in the
natural conditions. In winter the surface of the water is solid
ice and snow, in summer it is over the greater part a rolling
sea. We might indeed speak of a summer culture and a
winter culture. The summer culture is characterized by the
kayak, the kayak hunting and the summer tent, whilst the
winter culture is characterized by the dog-sledge, hunting on
the ice and the winter-house.

For the Polar Eskimos the summer activity is of very brief
duration, that of the winter long. As we go southwards along
the west coast of Greenland, the summer mode of life becomes
more prolonged and the winter mode more restricted. When
we come right down to South Greenland, south of the Polar
Circle, the dog-sledges and the hunting on the ice quite dis-
appear and during the whole year the product of the bunting
must be sought for in kayaks on the open sea. Quite a parallel
transition is met with along the west coast of Alaska, where

the Point Barrow Eskimos mainly pursue the ice-hunting, whilst

285

down towards the Aleutians the sea is open the whole year
round and we find a very higly developed kayak-hunting, just
as in South Greenland. There can be no doubt that the many
points of agreement between the Eskimo culture in South
Greenland and that in South Alaska have arisen from this
adaptation to the same kind of natural conditions. At both
these places the Eskimo culture has become subarctic, whilst
in the intermediate, more northerly regions from Point Barrow
to Baffin Bay it assumes more distinctly arctic forms’. The
Polar Eskimos are thus preeminently arctic people, but in cul-
tural regards not appreciably more so than the continental
Eskimo tribes from Coronation Gulf to Melville Peninsula. —
In addition to the division of the year into a period of 3
months with open water and another of 9 months with ice and
sledging, we find here also, owing to the situation so far
north of the Polar Circle, a dark period and a light period
with two intermediate periods when the sun comes up and
goes down. The dark period or the true winter time lasts from
about the 15t of November to the 11% of February, ог са. 102
days, in the regions about Cape York or more correctly
76° N.L. Then comes a kind of spring-time with day and
night, which lasts till about the 29% of April, after which the
sun no longer goes down until the 15 of August, i. e. for
about 109 days. Then follows the autumn period from the
middle of August to the beginning of November. The further
north we go the more do the real dark and light periods in-
crease in duration at the expense of the intermediate, arctic
spring and autumn; in Inglefield Gulf, for example, these
periods are each fully ten days longer than at Cape York.
These four polar seasons, which are each approximately
one-fourth of the year, determine the yearly changes in the
Eskimo life and the yearly hunting journeys, but the part they

1 ef. H. P. Steensby: Om Eskimokulturens Oprindelse. Kobenhavn 1905,
pp. 12 and 142 et seq.
19*

286

play is more indirect, in affecting the occurrence of the ani-
mals hunted.

The winter-houses, which stand empty through the summer
and are almost always partially unroofed, are made ready in the
course of September for dwelling in and begin to be used as
a rule in the latter half of September, after which — excluding
journeys — they are dwelt in until May. In setting the house
in order both men and women must take part. A family has
however no right of possession to a house, longer than they
are just resident there, unless it is expressly stated to the
other members of the tribe, that they will occupy the same
house next winter. Otherwise it can be taken by any one that
likes. The fact is, indeed, that the winter is not passed at
the same place each year. The family, which one winter has
lived at Cape York is perhaps met with next winter at one of
the most northern settlements of the tribe. Quite new winter
houses are however only built exceptionally, as it is more con-
venient to repair one already existing, and such deserted dwel-
lings are to be found at various localities along the whole
coast right from Bushnan Island to near the Humboldt Glacier.

The most southerly houses which are used during the
winter lie on the east side of Cape York (75°51’ №. 6.) between
the point of the promontory and the nearest glacier. A number
of winter-houses are collected here, built into the sloping in-
cline at the foot of the high, steep cliffs; the place is called
Ivnaganerk by the Eskimos. The northernmost place used has
long been Etah or Ita, which lies at Port Foulke at 78°15’ N.L.
At the time of Kane’s expedition and again within recent times
they have gone right round to Kane Basin to Anoatok or
Anoritork, which has become known through being the start-
ing-point for Fr. A. Cook’s expedition.

The other places most used between these two outermost
points are as follows, beginning from the north: Nerkré or as
the English and American authors (especially Peary) write it, as

287

a rule, Nerkey, which lies west of Robertson Bay; further,
Krana (Engl. Karnah), which is situated on the north side of
Inglefield Gulf between Mc Cormick Bay and Bowdoin Bay;
Narsark (Engl. Narksami), which lies on the south side of
Inglefield Gulf a little to the east of the mouth of Olriks Fjord
and which owing to its position is like a centre for the dwellers
on the Gulf; Itivdlerk (Engl. Ittiblu) on the south side of the
mouth of Olriks Fjord; Netschilivik (Engl. Netchiolumy) on
Barden Bay; Kiatark (Engl. Keaté or Kieti) on the south coast
of Northumberland Island; Umanark (Engl. North Omenak or
Oomunui), which receives its name from a neighbouring, table-
shaped mountain on the north side of North Star Bay and has
a similar importance for Wolstenholm Sound as Narsark for
Inglefield Gulf; Agpat (Engl. Akpan) on the south-west side of
Saunders Island; as also the small settlement Igfissork (Engl.
Ipsuischo, Ipsueshow), which lies on the small Parker Snow
Bay about halfway between Cape Atholl and Cape York. It
was at Umanark that the new Danish Mission Station was set
up in 1909.

The snow-houses are not actually used at any definite
period of the year, but only as lodges whilst hunting or on
journeys during the winter. These snow-houses, which require
suitable, hard, frozen snow, are built by the Eskimos in the
course of a very short time, the men with their long snow-
knives cutting blocks of snow from the drifts and placing them
in a spiral-line above one another, until the whole becomes an
arched dome. ‘Towards May, when the snow is less suited for
building purposes and the summer tent is already in order, a
combination of snow-house and tent is set up on the journeys,
a low snow-wall being first built and the tent in a folded con-
dition is then laid on the top to serve as roof. Sometimes
also, a mere wall is built for shelter or even this is quite
omitted and the Eskimos simply lie down and sleep on the
snow. Further, natural caves or overarching shelters in the

288

cliffs, several of which occur along the coast, are used both

on the sledge and kayak journeys, when the night
/
£
L р | ET
JSÅ . =.
/ À N À er Е À
; J

Fig. 1.

has to be

A snow-house seen from the side (drawn by the Eskimo woman
Alakrasina). Note how the rows lie obliquely, being arranged in
a spiral which ends at the top, where the smoke-hole is. On the
right of the house-passage stand two individuals, one of which is

a woman with a child in the “amaut”.

passed in the open or shelter sought for owing to bad weather.

A well-known cave, where some of the expeditions have sought

shelter on their journeys by sledge or

x boat, lies just to the north of the

/ \ Petowik Glacier about halfway between

N, sledges over the inland ice,

hunting out in Olriks Fjord,
/ \ Eskimos have come down with

aN the settlements in Wolstenholm Sound
| and at Cape York!. During the autumn

when the
their
a shelter

is built of stones and outstretched skins

See in which the women and children can

Fig. 2. live, while the men are out for days

Diagram of the interior of a
snow-house (drawn by the same

on the hunting grounds”, Much sought

person) = PiubberJampiste- after also, whilst on journeys or-hun-

presented as standing on each

of the side-platforms inside the ting, are the ruins of winter-houses.

house.

This collection of winter and sum-

mer dwellings, hunting lodges and improvised shelters on

journeys, which the Eskimos know how to construct, already

shows to what a high degree and in what a practical manner

they adapt themselves to the prevailing conditions.

1 Peary: Northward etc. Vol. Il, p. 139.

= Knud Rasmussen: Nye Mennesker. Kobenhavn 1905, р. 90.

289

This appears just as clearly also in their methods of
hunting and journeying at the different seasons of the year. It
is only possible naturally to sketch and describe the main fea-
tures of these, as there can be some differences from the
ordinary routine depending both on geographical conditions as
well as on personal conditions and pleasure.

The Eskimos are most bound to a definite spot during the
summer or more correctly in the months of July, August and
September, as they have open water then and their complete
lack of large boats for journeys (umiaks) prevents moving. The
earlier mentioned, American Eskimos, who immigrated to these
parts in the sixties, certainly knew the travelling or women’s
boat, and they seem also exceptionally to have used it. Thus
Knud Rasmussen! narrates that the Polar Eskimos tell of a
group of men, who were isolated during a bad hunting period
on Cape Melville in Melville Bay, and that, when the summer
came, they made a women’s boat from their tent-skins and
rowed away to better hunting places. However this report may
be judged from a purely historical standpoint, it bears witness
that the Eskimos have not been wholly unacquainted with the
idea of large skin-boats. At the present time, when the Eski-
mos have had access to wood for some years, it is probably
and mostly for practical reasons that they do not build such
boats. A umiak, namely, cannot be taken on the sledge, so
that in order to have any advantage from it, a family must end
its ice and winter life exactly at the same place where, 9
months previously when the sea became frozen over, it began;
such a women’s boat is however not so useful during the short
summer life, that the Polar Eskimos would willingly bind them-
selves in such a way. We find therefore that the few boats,
which the Eskimos have in the course of time come into pos-
session of from expeditions, have been permitted to lie without
being put to any appreciable use for the tribe.

aser р. 28.

290

In the old days, before kayaks were obtained, the summer
had to be passed on one of the grounds frequented by birds,
where life could be maintained at any rate until the ice-hunt-
ing began again. The Eskimos are not now so firmly bound .
to such localities; what they now seek for are the places where
the sea-mammals occur and where at the same time the sea
is calm in the shelter behind land and ice-fields. These con-
ditions are found inside in Cape York Bay, as also inside the
groups of islands at the mouths of Wolstenholm Sound and
Inglefield Gulf. At Cape York the white whale (Beluga), nar-
whal and seals (bearded seal and fjord seal) are almost the
only forms in the summer hunting, whilst at the two other
places as also at a third place right up at Etah, the walrus is
also present, as it has its summer haunts there at a certain
depth of water, where it lives upon the shell-fish of the bottom.

It is not the case here as in South Greenland, that the
settlements at the open sea are placed on the outer side of
the fringe of islands, where the open water is always near and
where the hunter can approach nearer the seals when the
water is rough than when it is smooth. Nor is the kayak of
the Polar Eskimos like the light, elegant boat of the South
Greenlander; it is clumsy, heavy and open, the hunter sitting
in an open space, whereas in South Greenland he becomes one
with his boat by means of a closely fitting fur-skin. The kayak,
which has become the main apparatus of the subarctic Eskimos,
is of quite subordinate importance among the Polar Eskimos,
whose main apparatus is the dog-sledge.

The places now preferred by the Polar Eskimos for the
months of July, August and September are in the main the
same as the winter dwelling-places at Cape York and Etah and
those which lie in the mouths of the two large indentations.
Some of the principal conditions for a summer settlement are
in fact the same as the conditions for setting up their winter
dwellings. In both cases they require calm and sheltered

291

water — in the one case for their kayaks, in the other for the
even surface of ice. Lastly, the conditions for landing from
the water with the kayak and from the ice with the dog-sledge
are very much the same, as they both require an even, slop-
ing beach.

The summer hunting from the kayak however is on the
whole not so very important. When the spoil has been killed,
it is towed on land, where the sealer himself skins it and
places it in the depot, when it is not at once divided up on
the spot for distribution at the settlement or among the parti-
cipators in the hunt and towing. The distribution takes place
according to fixed rules. The first harpooner or the one who
first struck the animal has the first right to take certain, spe-
cially good pieces; then come the second and third harpooners
and then the others taking part. The animal on being cut up
is divided into definite portions, the principal of which, accor-
ding to a drawing of a walrus accompanied by an explanation
which | received from Napsanguark, are the two breast-
pieces, the lateral halves of the back, the neck, head, the front
flippers, the two lateral halves of the body, the hind limbs, the
two rib-pieces, the two stomach-pieces, the two lumbar por-
tions, the tail with its root and the liver. The Eskimos have
an excellent knowledge of the anatomy of the animals and
divide up a walrus with surprising skill and speed.

That it is the man among the Polar Eskimos who skins
the animals, whereas this is distinctly woman’s work among
all the other Greenland Eskimos, finds its simple explanation
in this, that the usual spoils for the Polar Eskimos are much
larger animals, which cannot be brought home whole to the
settlement with the kavak or on the sledge, as is the case with
the smaller seals in South Greenland. This appears very
distinctly when we consider the Polar Eskimos’ ice-hunting of
the walrus, as will be described below.

Towards autumn, when the reindeer are fat and come

together in herds on the lichen-covered plateaus at Olriks
Fjord, a number of families move up there along the routes
already mentioned. Whilst the men are hunting the deer, the
women and children catch salmon in some few (certainly only
2 or 3) lakes which occur there. These lakes are already
covered by ice and the fishing is therefore carried on through
holes in the ice by means of an ice-fork. This is one of the
instruments which the American immigrants at that time taught
the Polar Eskimos. The above mentioned old man, Merkrusark,
who himself belonged to the immigrants, gave Mylius Erichsen!
the following account of their methods of salmon fishing. “Оп
a strong line we fix small pieces of narwhal’s teeth or walrus’
teeth, then drop it into the water and pull it up and down
until we catch the salmon, which we land with a two-pronged
fork’. The method is well-known at several other Eskimo
localities. The fish is eaten either boiled or frozen and is
kept in the frozen condition through the winter.

After satisfying its lust for hunting and its desire for
reindeer flesh and fish, and after storing the excess of food-
stuff in the depots, from which they are only fetched when the
dark period is over, the family journeys back again to the
coast, where the even winter-ice has already as a rule begun
to form. Apart from variations in the time for the appearance
of the ice-cover, the sledging on the fjord-ice generally begins
in October. The intermediate periods between open water and
solid ice, which may last a long time during storms, are actu-
ally barren periods, when the hunter is compelled to lead an
idle life in the winter-houses until the ice becomes solid; often
they are periods of famine when the depots are reduced.

Then begins the real arctic form of life with hunting on
the ice as the main activity. The walrus, white whale and
narwhal go out to the ice-free waters and the hunters at the

293

different settlements are accustomed, in the autumn or by
moonlight, to go out on sledges to the margin of the ice at the
groups of islands in the mouths of the fjords and hunt the
walrus on the newly formed ice. Inside the fjords there are
only the fjord-seals. These are first hunted when the winter
has set in, one of two methods being employed according as
the ice is smooth and bare or covered by a layer of snow.
When the ice is smooth, the hunting is carried on in the
manner known already from Umanaks Fjord in West Greenland,
as described by Rink!. In this method the hunter covers his
feet with hairy skin and can thus walk noiselessly on the
smooth ice, which he cannot do on a rough or snow-covered
surface that crackles as he goes along. If the hunter possesses
acute hearing, which can distinguish the sound and direction
of the breathing seal, and a sharp eye to detect the breathing
hole in the ice, he can silently run up and strike the harpoon
into the seal, just at the moment when it has sunk its head
and is about to leave the hole. In striking at this moment he
manages to do so in the neck or in the soft parts behind the
head, and not in the harder, more resisting part of the latter,
so that the harpoon penetrates deep and remains fast; the
seal is thus attached to the line which the hunter holds fast.
After some time the seal must come up again to breathe, but
is met by the lance and is in the end hauled up on the ice;
during the struggle the hole must as a rule be made some-
what larger. This smooth-ice hunting can give a considerable
yield in the beginning of winter, especially when a large num-
ber of hunters take part so that a watch can be set at all the
breathing-holes over a large area. Peary” describes it in the
first days of November 1894. ‘‘The natives are making’ the
most of the new ice in the Sound (i. e. the waters between

1 H. Rink: Grönland, geografisk og statistisk beskrevet. København
1852—57, 'Vol..l.
? Northward ete., Vol. II, рр. 402—403; cf. Knud Rasmussen, I. c., р. 242.

294

Herbert Island and the mainland) before snow comes to cover
it and bring the harvest to an end. Every man and boy that
can raise a ‘‘pussymut” (seal-spear) is living on the ice night
and day, clad in his heaviest furs, his feet muffled with noise-
less bearskin pads, and with his little three-legged stool, on
which at a pinch he sits for hours, waiting for the unsuspec-
ting seal to come to its breathing-hole, and receive the murder-
ous spear-thrust. In the afternoon Panikpak returns and tells
me he has killed sixteen seals off the Castle Cliffs, and
Koolootingwah an equal number. Over a hundred seals had
already been killed by the natives of Karnah and Koinisuni,
and if the snow holds off a few days longer, it is likely that,
in addition to their store of walrus and narwhal meat, there
will be two seals apiece for each man, woman and child at
_ these settlements.”
In general the stool mentioned is not used during the
smooth-ice hunting; but it is most probable that in Peary’s case
every single breathing-hole has been watched over by a hunter;
otherwise the stool is used when the ice is covered by snow,
in the true ‘‘Maupok” or ‘waiting’ method. This is carried
on over snow-covered ice, when the hunter dare not move
from fear of disturbing the seal; he must stand or sit still at
the breathing-hole and wait till the seal comes up to breathe,
A further difficulty with this method lies in finding the situa-
tion of the breathing-holes under the snow-cover. From the
Central Eskimo tribes we have the report that they employ a
specially trained dog, led on a line, to scent out the holes,
and it is probable that the Polar Eskimos know the same mode
of procedure!. In this Maupok hunting, however,. a three-
legged stool is used, whose ‘‘weak and thin legs composed of
many, small pieces of wood are elegantly stiffened by means
of thin, diagonally wound thongs”. This is the description

1 ef. L. Mylius Erichsen and Harald Moltke: Grønland. København 1906,
p. 524.

295

given by Astrup! of the Maupok stool of the Eskimos. Those
I have seen in 1909 quite agree with this, except that the legs
now consist of whole pieces of wood or sticks.

Fig. 3.
Strangers arrive at the winter settlement (drawing by the Eskimo Samik). Above, a snow-
house and below this a winter-house, which is only partially drawn. The smoke-hole is
seen on both houses. In front of the snow-house a woman is sitting with a child in the
“ата”; in front of the winter-house there are also two persons, whilst a third is sitting
on a sledge; the upright back at the hind-end of this is supposed to have a hunting-line
wound round it. The dogs of the settlement are fastened together in a clump to a stone,
but are trying to make towards the people in front of the houses, as they imagine they
are about to be fed; but it does not occur to them to make towards the new-comers;
Greenland dogs do not watch over the house, but only the sledge when they are harnessed
to it. The long, horizontal line in the picture represents the boundary between the land
and the sea-ice. The strangers have come half over this line and stopped. One dog does
a necessity on the ice; some others seek to settle their personal disputes and cannot be
distinguished from one another. The Eskimo man is standing behind the back of the sledge
with the whip in his hand, whilst the woman is sitting on the sledge and points towards
the fighting dogs.

Some time after the sun no longer rises above the hori-

zon, it is still light enough to be able to hunt on the ice,
but it gradually becomes darker and this puts an end to the

296

hunting. In the course of the 3 months’ winter-darkness there
is moonlight three times, and these occasions are used in
paying visits to other settlements, or sledge-journeys are made
to bring in food from the scattered depots; in cases of neces-
sity the Maupok hunting is also carried on at the breathing-
holes. Sometimes a wandering polar bear, scenting supplies
of food, may rove into the settlement, and in such a case
torches are lit and all join in hunting it. But, for the rest,
the dark period is a time of feasting, when the Polar Eskimos
come together, sing folk-songs and tell one another expansive
hunting stories and the latest news. In January 1895 Peary?
on a visit to the settlement Krana had the opportunity of
participating in such a visiting and feasting period. ‘‘In the
evening the village was a scene of feasting. А fetid seal-feed
was in progress in Kardah’s igloo; in Akpalisoaho’s a little-auk
spread was laid out; and in Ingeropahdoo’s another feasting
crowd was gathered about a large walrus-ham, which took up
nearly all the floor. Ootoomish and Tellikotinah, and their
wives, visitors from the south shore of the Sound, now on a
round of social visits, were making calls from igloo to igloo,
sampling all the feasts and gathering all the gossip.”

From the beginning of February, when the day-light again
appears, families from all the settlements between Cape
York to Inglefield Gulf start off on the journey up to the
coast at Cape Chalon and Cape Alexander, where the open
water in the middle of the North Water lies near the land and
a hunting lager is set up at places which may vary in different
years. In front of the ice-base along the land and just under
the bluffs the Eskimo families build their snow-houses with the
entrance and gut-skin windows towards the sea-ice. In the
latter half of March 1894 Peary? visited the hunting grounds
at Cape Chalon (Peterahwik) and found there over 40 snow-

1 Northward etc. Vol. II, pp. 389—390.
2 ibid. р. 419 et seq.

houses, which held more than */srds of the whole tribe. The
open North Water lay about 20 to 50 km, west or south-west
of the settlement, ‘‘and its edge shifts like the fringe of a
waving curtain. Two or three days of heavy wind will eat into
the ice and bring the water several miles nearer the shore. Then
during the following calm, the fierce temperatures of February
and March, the lowest of the year, bind the motionless water
with a zone of young ice, which in twenty-four hours will
support a sledge and team of dogs. Then is the hunter s time;
leaving the village at earliest daybreak he drives out to the
edge of the old ice where the dogs are fastened, and then on
foot with his harpoon, line and lance, he starts out upon the
black mirror of the new ice”.

It is important for the hunter to be able to reckon where
the walrus will rise to breathe. Usually he waits for it at a
hole already formed in the ice, but sometimes the animal
comes up at a new place, breaking through the ice. The
hunter then hastens guickly to the spot with the harpoon in the
right hand and the ca. 40 meter long line of seal-skin in the
left. The harpoon is not thrown, owing to the thickness of
the walrus hide, but is thrust in, and the pole hastily with-
drawn. The spike — formerly of bone, now usually of iron —
which is at the end of the pole and has served as base for
the loose point of the harpoon, is now planted in the ice, the
line is given a turn as far down as possible and the knee and
shoulder are brought strongly to bear as counterpoise. When
the line again slackens, it is fastened as quickly as possible
through two holes in the ice, and the animal as it reappears
is met with the lance of the hunter and his comrades, who
have hastened to his help. When the animal is dead, it is
lifted right up by a kind of tackle, formed by lines of seal’s
skin passed through two holes in the ice and a couple of holes
cut in the skin, and as the heavy animal, which may weigh up
to 1000 kg, is gradually lifted up over the water, pieces are

298

cut off and the whole booty finally driven in the dog-sledges
to the coast.

At the same time as the walrus hunling is going on, foxes
and hares are caught in amongst the coastal hills. The skin
of these animals is good and fit for use at this time of year,
and it is specially for the sake of the skin that they are hunted.
The foxes are nowadays taken in the modern American fox-
traps, but we still find everywhere the remains of the old
stone-traps. These consist of a small stone-box built of flat
stones on the surface of the ground; this is closed at one end
and just so long and so high that a fox can crawl into it, at-
tracted by a piece of blubber. This blubber is, however, con-
nected by means of a thong with a large, flat stone, which
falls down and closes the trap, as soon as the fox seizes hold
of the blubber. The hares are caught in running nooses, the
arrangement and make-up of which will be described later.

Towards the middle of April breaks occur in the ice at
several places nearer to the land, and the walrus are scattered
along the coast. The Eskimos again disperse, going as a rule
to various settlements in the outer parts of the fjords; at the
same time they keep to the bird-grounds, which are taken
possession of by the birds about the middle of May. One group,
for example, goes to Agpat or Saunders Island and remains
there hunting the walrus, seals and narwhal, and later bird-
catching, until the end of June; then just before the ice breaks
up they move in on the mainland to the settlement Umanark
at North Star Bay, where they pass the summer. Others set
up their snow-huts in the neighbourhood of Kiatark and go
later to one of the mainland settlements in the mouth of the
Inglefield Gulf; others pass the spring on the north side of
Inglefield Gulf.

During the spring hunting two characteristic methods of
hunting the seal are used. The one depends on the fact, that
the mother-seal, when calving, digs a hole in under the snow,

299

as a rule in a snow-drift close by an ice-field. From the hole
a large opening leads down through the ice, through which
the mother passes up and down, and there is a smaller opening
up through the snow-drift for the passage of air. A sharp
eye can detect these ‘‘seal-igloos” from outside; the Eskimo
walks softly up to it, and puts his ear close to the snow and
listens. If he hears any sign of life he jumps on the mound
as hard as he can, until it caves in, and then, with a kick in
the head, he dispatches the young one. If the mother is pre-
sent, he seeks first of all to plant the harpoon into her; if
she is away, he patiently awaits her reappearance up through
the hole in the ice, and then she meets the harpoon.

The second method is the likewise well-known Utok hunt-
ing, or the hunting of the seals when they lie and sun them-
selves on the surface of the ice. The Eskimo approaches his
watchful prey crawling on his stomach; at the present day he
uses fire-arms, but unlike the Eskimos in the more southern
parts of Greenland he does not have a small sledge with out-
stretched, white linen sail, behind which the hunter is able to
conceal himself. In earlier days it was necessary to approach
his unsuspecting prey so closely that he was able to stick a
harpoon into it. The method then was, to crawl up against
the wind and as far as possible imitate the movements of the
seal, lifting the head in the same manner, flapping the arms
just like the seal with its flippers and moving the legs as the
seal does the tail-end of its body. It is quite an art, which
the older Eskimos have all practised and can still practise, but
it is dying out in the younger generation.

In the latter half of this period, as a rule from the first
half of May, the Eskimos dwell in tents, as the snow-houses
become damp and wet. The sun is now above the horizon
during the whole twenty-fours hours. The Auks and Little
Auks have come and taken possession of the sides of the cliffs.
There is now abundance of food and it is a time of enjoyment

XXXIV. 20

300

for the Eskimos. During this period “there is no regular sleep
in an Eskimo camp; day and night are spent abroad when the
weather is good. A constantly burning fire summons the
people together at the public feeding-places of the camp, and
the constant interchange of men going to the hunt and others
returning maintains life and interest round about the fire at
all times of the day and night”!

The bird-hunting is carried on late in May and in the
course of June, and stores of birds are laid in, which entire
and with the feathers on are laid in blubber in a seal-skin,
also eggs, which are kept under small stone-heaps. In the old
days the whole summer had to be passed on one or other of
the birds-grounds, and these localities are still places of resort
for one or other poor and incapable family or for women, who
for some reason have lost their providers.

In this systematic review of the changes which take place
with the seasons in the industrial culture of the Polar Eskimos,
some interesting and important features of their hunting-life
have not yet been described, for the reason that they are not
of regular occurrence each year for all the hunters. These are
especially the hunting of the polar bear and musk-ox.

The places frequented for the polar bear hunting are Mel-
ville Bay and Kane Basin at the Humboldt Glacier. The great
extent of these hunting journeys to the southwards has already
been mentioned. The season at which they are undertaken is
the polar spring. Any one who intends to go bear hunting
must make his preparations already in the previous year,
in so far as he must obtain several dogs and train them
specially to face the bears. The hunting itself requires the
dog-sledges, the track of a bear being followed until the bear
is sighted; the dogs are then let loose and surround the fleeing
bear, keeping it back until the hunter can come up with it.

1 Knud Rasmussen, L. с. р. 46.

“poods nF ye Surgoeordde pue {eme aoyjıny aq 04 posoddns st oSpays Jomo oy, ‘oueq ® yuasaıdaı 0} pasoddus st yom ‘ainsg
эЗле| Алэл в имелр sey IsıLıe oY} Joddn oy} рищея ‘'598рэ[з g Jo лор og} ur djoug sogoeordde apis 1489 ay} woag ‘лево ay} Aq пу uooq sey 84/5
uostod ay} js11e oY} JO uoreuerdxe oy} 0} Зитрлороу ‘ле ou} poddozs pue pepunoxms элец ssop 9 "41047 OWL sa лерод ey} Aq umeap ‘Surjuny avog

‘+ SU =

wee nena

302

At the present time the rifle is the weapon used, but previ-
ously it was the lance. Bow and arrow could not possibly be
used, as the arrows cannot wound the animal sufficiently,
owing to its thick hide and fur. The hunting thus developed
into a fight at close quarters with the bear, in which the
hunter not rarely received some hard knocks. Some of the
Eskimos | saw, especially Masaitsiak and Samik, bore frightful
scars on their bodies as the result of wounds from the claws
of the bears.

The hunting of the musk-ox on the east coast of Elles-
mere Land is even more occasional. How this hunting was
carried on before the advent of the rifle, has not been clearly
explained. But it was even more impossible than in the bear-
hunting to employ the bow and arrow against the dense cover-
ing of thick, wooly hair of the musk-ox. We are not aware
whether the Polar Eskimos knew or employed the lassoo or
not, but it would seem practically impossible to catch a musk-
ox in this manner, owing to the shape of the fore-part of the
body, with the head sloping forwards from the neck and its
thick horns likewise projecting downwards and forwards. There
can hardly be talk of any other weapon but the lance, and
presumably the method of hunting has been almost the same
as that employed by Cook and his two Eskimos whilst wintering
at Cape Sparbo in 1908—09, when they enclosed or drove the
musk-ox on to ground covered by nothing but stones. On
such a ground two legs are better than four and the hunter
can approach quite near to the awkward musk-ox and easily
evade its fury; in hunting these, dogs are also probably used.

Both the bear and the musk-ox hunting are old among
ihe Polar Eskimos. This does not hold good, however, for the
reindeer hunting, which was first introduced by the immigrants
from the American side. A contributory reason, why they had
not previously troubled themselves about the profitable autumn
hunting of the reindeer in Olriks Fjord, may have been that

303

they always passed the summer on the bird-grounds, and thus
lived far from just those settlements, such as Umanark, Net-
schilivik, Itivdlerk and Narsark, from which there is access to
these hunting grounds over the inland ice. Until the time
when Peary began his expeditions, the bow and arrow were
the main weapons in hunting the reindeer. The Polar Eski-
mos became all at once keen deer-hunters and they seem to
have rapidly become just as expert and untiring in the hunt

Fig. 5.
Musk-ox hunting, drawn by the Eskimo Samik. According to his own explanation the
one individual has “fallen on the stones’. The other hunter (supposed to be Samik him-
self) attacks the first musk-ox, seeking to wound the animal in the heart with the lance
(or gun ?).

as Other Eskimo tribes. The long, converging rows of stakes,
between which the herds of deer are driven into an ambush and
which are so common among the other Eskimos, do not seem
to have been used by the Polar Eskimos. One of their hunting
methods and the most primitive meant simply finding a trail
and following it at a steady run, until the animal was approa-
ched so near that it could be struck by an arrow. With re-
gard to other methods, the Eskimo Imerarsuk told the following
to Knud Rasmussen, and I obtained a similar description from
the old angakok Masaitsiak. ‘‘The deer at that time followed

304

certain passes between the hills. We can still see up there
(i.e. on the hills at Olriks Fjord) the many hard-trodden paths.
The hunters knew!, therefore, which paths the animals would
follow, both in going down to the coast in the spring and in
returning to the hills in winter. They stretched long lines of
seal-hide across the deer paths, fixing the lines at short inter-
vals to small piles of stones which they built. When a herd
of deer came along and ran their heads against the line, they
never tried to jump over it but simply followed it along to one
of the ends. Here an archer was posted at both sides, sitting
within a sheltering wall of stone, so that the deer should not
suspect anything, and in this way the spoil was led to the
hunter. The custom was also for many to join in the hunt
and confuse the herds by cries, so that the deer were driven
from the one shooting-box to the other. But for this method
to succeed, the ground had not to be too Бгоа4” 1.

Fishing is of little importance for the Polar Eskimos. The
sea is not so rich in fish as further south. The salmon-fishing
of recent years has already been mentioned. Further, I have
seen sea-scorpions (Cottus) taken by a boy from his fathers
kayak with hook and line, and also a special kind of fishing-
apparatus, consisting of a ca. 8 cm long two-pronged fork,
with teeth on the inner side of the prongs, which was cut out
of a piece of narwhal or walrus bone and attached to a pole
quite 1m long. This apparatus was said to be used in fishing
for a small fish, probably a gadoid.

The considerable booty, the Polar Eskimo obtains as a
rule on his hunting tours, cannot possibly be taken along with
him to the settlement on his sledge, and still less in his kayak.
What he does, therefore, is to hide the surplus in a depot,
from which it can be fetched later. The natural conditions
during the greater part of the year make this method of pre-
serving easy, as the meat freezes, and if the seal or walrus

1 Knud Rasmussen, 1. с., р. 97.

305

flesh does become somewhat putrid, this does not matter so
much, as the Eskimos rather prefer the flesh when it is
“high”. Seals are even laid out in the spring so that they
should become high, and are eaten later as a delicacy. On
freezing at the low temperature the meat gradually undergoes
a change, so that it becomes soft; when it is then warmed
up to one or two degrees below freezing-point it forms quite
a nice dish. Pemmican is not prepared as among the North
American Indians, but it is a general thing to place birds and
the skin of the white whale and narwhal in blubber.

The many scattered depots lighten the long journeys for
the Eskimos to a considerable extent, the depots being regarded
as a kind of common feeding-places. This is one of the rea-
sons why they are able to make their sledge-journeys of many
miles in length with extremely little baggage and almost without
provisions. But the depots also have other obvious advantages ;
for example, in keeping their riches out of sight. If the whole
of the booty were brought to the settlement, ,the less fortu-
nate and the less capable hunters with their families would
share in the eating, so long as the food jlasted, instead of
going out themselves to hunt. Further, the depots far from
the settlements mean several good places for the fox-traps, as
the foxes always gather round the depots.

IV:

The small North Star Bay on the south side of Wolsten-
holm Sound is separated from the main fjord by a small
peninsula, lying chiefly in the direction from east to west.
Furthest west this peninsula ends in a characteristic hill, which
has the form of a broken cone with evenly sloping sides and
a horizontal level on the top of no small extent. This hill,
which is quite 200m high, is called by the Eskimos Umanark
_ (Umanak), a name which is commonly used all over Greenland
for such isolated, projecting mountains; the word is derived
from umat, heart, and would thus mean heart-shaped.

To the north-east of Umanark, but on the north-west side
of the small peninsula towards Wolstenholm Sound, lies the
settlement Umanark. It consists of some groups of winter-
houses, which lie scattered along the coast at intervals of some
few hundred meters. The most southerly group, which is
composed of 5 houses, seems to be the one most used at the
present time. In the summer time all the houses lay more or
less open, the skins were entirely or partially out of the win-
dows in all and in most the roof had been partially pulled
down. Further there were empty houses which had not been
used in recent years and also others which were so old, broken
down and overgrown with grass, that it was only from the cir-
cular elevation with the depression in the middle, that one
could conclude, a winter-hut had formerly been there. It was
evident that stones had been removed from these old places
to be used in building the new houses.

307

A peculiar thing was, that some of the oldest ruins were
considerably larger than the houses now used, and had a more
square-shaped ground-plan. How far these large houses belong
to a definite period in the earlier history of the Polar Eskimos,
or whether they have perhaps been built by quite a different
tribe of Eskimos, which has lived there previous to the present
tribe, it is difficult to determine. I thought of something
intermediate, that they were perhaps meeting-houses (kashims)
of a similar character to those met with among the Central
Eskimos on the mainland and among the Western Eskimos,
and the Polar Eskimos are certainly not unacquainted with the
custom, for those of a certain age to meet together in a
common house. Thus, we sometimes find at their settlements
a special meeting-house for the young people. For this pur-
pose, however, one of the ordinary winter-houses is used, a
special house’ of a larger type is not built. This would also
be practically impossible, as the Polar Eskimos, with their
present materials of nothing but stones and grass-turf and
with their modest technical appliances, have probably reached
the approximate limit for the size of their houses. On the
other hand, there is no doubt, that if the materials permitted
it, they would sometimes built larger houses than they now do.

These considerations lead us therefore on to a different
line with regard to the question of the large ruins. On Baffin
Land the natives at Ponds Inlet build fairly large houses, in
which the roof is not a stone-arch, but is formed from wood
or from whale-ribs, which those taking part in the Scottish
whale-fishing still have the opportunity to obtain. Some few
centuries ago, when the large whales occurred in great num-
bers, it must have been easy for the Polar Eskimos to procure
such bones for building materials, from the whales that were
stranded or driven on land, and thus to make their houses
somewhat larger than they can build them now. For the rest,
well-preserved ruins of such houses with cross-beams of whale-

308

ribs still occur at long-deserted settlements!; but unfortunately
we have no information regarding the size of these ruins.

For the sake of completeness it may be added, with regard
to these large ruins at Umanark, that the Polar Eskimos have
taken note of them and that they believe, they belong to an
ancient period of adventure, when ‘‘people might wish them-
selves somewhere else”. If there is anything in this of import-
ance for the solution of the question, it is of a purely negative
character, namely, that the Polar Eskimos do not ascribe these
ruins to any other tribe. Nor is it in opposition to my sup-
position, that they were merely the forerunners of the present-
day houses, built of material more adaptable to larger houses,
which has now been used up.

Fig. 6.
Part of a hare-barrier, consisting of 3 stone-heaps. Between the two left portions
the nooses are represented, between the two right a row of small stones.

One of the modern houses at Umanark lay quite uninha-
bited with tumbled-down roof. The reason was, that it con-
tained a corpse. When any one dies in a house, winter-house
or tent, it is forsaken, and a long time passes before such a
deserted house is again taken into use. Up from the settle-
ments about a couple of hundred meters from the shore there
were several old and more recent graves at a place with
numerous stone-boulders, but all had been disturbed, most
probably by foxes — if not by dogs — as also by the earlier
expeditions. At one of these lay the remains of implements;
it was the grave of a man, to judge from the remains of a
kayak. Even the skeletons and skulls had almost all been re-
moved from the graves. These consisted of stone-work above

1 Knud Rasmussen, 1. с., p.85. — cf. В. Peary, Northward etc., р. 380.

309

the ground or between the boulders on the cliff with a rect-
angular ground-plan, which was just so long and broad, that
the body could lie in a bent-up position, with the knees up
against the breast. The grave-implements lay, not in the grave
itself, but at the side, and from a distance the grave looked
like an ordinary heap of stones.

Round about among the cliffs along the coast we here and
there find piles of stones in an opening in the cliffs or be-
tween a pair of large stone-boulders; these somewhat resemble
graves but are in reality food-depots. The principle with these
is, that the stones must be so large and heavy that the foxes
and dogs cannot push them aside. When we therefore find a
cleft or hollow in a cliff, which might readily be covered over,
we will also regularly find that it has been used as food-depot
and not for a grave. Among the Polar Eskimos the interests
of the living are placed before those of the dead. Practically
‘speaking it is certainly impossible to make the depots secure
against the bears, so that it is fortunate that these animals are
not numerous in the more restricted hunting grounds of the
Polar Eskimos. Scattered round about the neighbourhood of
the settlement and at the depots along the coast we found al-
most everywhere more or less well-preserved, stone fox-traps.

Down on the coastal plains around the old and more re-
cent groups of houses at Umanark we find a very luxuriant
grass-vegetation in the summer-time, which has apparently a
very alluring influence on the hares in the winter and spring.
About half a kilometer from the coast the last outposts of
these grass-oases form some swampy, low-lying places with
less vegetation, which lie in the direction from west to east
and are bounded on the north and south sides by irregular,
stony ground, whilst on the east they change over into more
gravelly ground. On the east side of these depressions are
constructed one or in a single case two concentric half-circles
of small stone-heaps or oblong stones raised on end.

310

One of these semicircles of hare-barriers was quite 45 m
long, another 80 m long and the longest I saw had a length
of ca. 160m. The single stones or stone-heaps are placed at
a distance of 2'/2—5 m from one another and their height is
in general 30—45 cm. Sometimes, but by no means always,

Fig. 7.
View from the settlement Umanark. On the left a depot-pillar. On the right of this a
winter-house, seen from the side; on the right of the picture a second house, seen straight
in front with the opening to the passage below and the opening of the window above.
The beach is immediately to the left of the depot-pillar.

rows of small stones, the meaning of which is not quite clear,
are placed between these large stones. Horizontal strings of
seal’s hide can be stretched between the stone-heaps with rows
of running nooses hanging down from them. When a hare
comes down from the hills and seeks its way to the grass-
covered hollow or is returning from this to the hilis, it runs
up against these strings and nooses and begins to play with
them or to investigate them somewhat closely. The result in

311

many cases is, that it gets its head or a paw into a noose
and cannot free itself. As a rule these hare-traps are looked
after by the old men and the larger boys. It is in the polar
winter by moonlight and in the polar spring, while the hare-
skin is still usable, that this hunting is carried on. A trap for
hares, consisting of two converging rows of stones, was seen
by me 3—4 km east of the settlement up in the hills; it was
constructed in front of a greenish transverse hollow on a small
ridge.

About two km east of the settlement Umanark, on the
north side of the small peninsula, where this joins on to the
mainland, projects a small, low point out into the bay. On
this is situated a fairly well-preserved ruin of a house, and in
front of this there is a couple of half-fallen stone-pillars, which
have been used as a place of deposit for food. Two similar
depot-pillars occur at Umanark, where they also lie in, front
of the houses, so that they can be seen from the passage
and window of the house. They are circular, massive and
built up of fairly large stones, which are laid above one an-
other without any cementing material; the old blubber dropping
down from above helps however to bind the stones together.
The pillar has steep sides and a flat or slightly concave upper
surface, where the meat is laid. The height is judged, so that
the dogs should not be able to reach up to the food. The
one depot-pillar (to the left in figure 7) is 1,6 m high and
ca. 1,2m in diameter of cross-section. The other is of about
the same height but a trifle broader.

The winter-house of the Polar Eskimo is an extremely
interesting production of the small tribe and requires very spe-
cial attention. Seen from the outside it is an arched elevation
on the ground; a very excellent comparison of its form has
been made with that of a large turtle, with its head and neck
projecting forwards. The house itself has something of the

characteristic arching of the turtle-shell, and the low entrance-

312

passage might well be compared with the neck. Figs. 8, 9
and 10 show respectively the ground-plan, longitudinal section
and cross-section of a typical Polar Eskimo house.

Fig. 8.
Ground-plan of a winter-house. Only the inner part of the entrance-passage
is shown at A.

The ground-plan gives the front-part of the house, the
passage, and the circumference of the house itself. The pas-
sage A is closed above at В, which represents the oblong, flat
slab of slate which lies right across the entrance and separates
this from the window, forming at the same time the lower
border of the latter. The passage is thus continued under

313

this slab and opens into the room of the house between B
and C through an oblong, approximately rectangular opening,
which is shaded in the figure (on the longitudinal section, fig.
-it lies between с and 4). D
indicates the floor-place of
the house, which is surroun-
ded on the 3 sides by plat-
forms. The principal platform
GLH M takes up the whole
of the circular space at the
back, while the side-platforms
Е and УК occupy the two
smaller, round spaces at the
sides. On the side-platforms
are placed the two blubber-
lamps F and F’ with the less
convex side towards the main

Fig. 9.
Longitudinal section of winter house, ab passage; cd entrance-opening; m floor; п open space under the main platform ef. 2

platform, where the house-
mothers, who have to look

after the lamps, have their
seats at L and M. Each
house is occupied by at most
two families. The principal

LLY

platform is the living-room
of the family during the day

‚ and the sleeping-place at night, Nj
N

whilst the side-platforms are N
kept for the lamps and other |

WW
Comat

articles of the house, as also

ПГУ,

food, and are only exception-
ally used as sleeping-place for the children. Above the blubber
lamp hangs the cooking-pot, which is suspended by strings
from a horizontal drying-board which again hangs on lines
fastened to the roof.

314

The reason why the two recesses for the side- platforms E
and УК appear so prominent in the interior of the house, is that
the walls of the house at Z and M are specially heavy and built
somewhat inwards, in order to bear the upper structure and the
roof. For the Polar Eskimos have had the most difficult task in
forming a support for the heavy roof of stone and earth, as
they have had no wood at their disposal and no longer, at
least in recent centuries, have access to the large whale-bones,
which elsewhere form such an excellent building - material.
With regard to the manner in which they have solved this
problem, Peary, who was an engineer originally, remarks that

MD ED EIER
LL 2,
9422274
u LL

Fig. 10.

Cross-section of winter-house.

it corresponds to the modern cantilever-system in engineering,
which has been used chiefly in the building of bridges.

This original building-method of the Polar Eskimos is
illustrated in fig. 10, which represents a cross-section through
the house at LM (fig. 8), i.e. through the thickest parts of the
wall and across the front part of the main platform. The figure
shows, how a long stone on each side is fixed at its base in
the wall by means of other stones which act as counterpoise,
and how the free, inner ends of these projecting stones sup-
port a long and flat, central stone. I have seen several of
these top-stones of slate, which were about 1 m long, over
‘/2 m broad and some few ст thick. A third projecting stone
is placed further back in the middle line of the house (at f in
fig. 9), and there may also be a couple of these, as a rule

315

smaller, intermediate between the three mentioned, as also a
further pair at each of the side-platforms.

The position of all these projecting stones is schema-
tically represented on fig. 11. They enable us to understand
the developmental history of the house, as their situation in
pairs would indicate, that they must have arisen from a method
of building in which there were entire cross-beams going right
across the house. We can therefore imagine one of two things.
Either small houses were built originally, so that a single
stone could: reach across, or other materials besides stone
have been at the disposal of the builders. Of these two alter-
natives we can certainly exclude the first; houses of this kind
would be extremely
small, and we have
no evidence from
anywhere that they
have existed. On
the other hand, as SS | EAN

already mentioned, Fig. 11
DE ы

it 15 permissible to Diagram showing the position of the projecting stones in
believe, that the Po- Sania whe

lar Eskimos have had other building-materials, for example,
whale-bones. And it therefore seems reasonable to set up the
hypothesis, that at the places in the Polar Eskimos house,
where we now find the projecting stones, there have originally
been whale-ribs for the support of the roof. The house of
whale-bone has thus not only preceded in time the present
stone-house, but it has also been its technical precursor.

The longitudinal section fig. 9 shows on the left the house-
passage, which is formed of two vertical stone-walls with flat
flag-stones above, and furthest to the right the continuation of
the natural slope of the ground, out of which the house is to
some extent dug. The passage is so low that one must crawl

on going through it, or like the Eskimos bend the body at
XXXIV. 21

316

right angles to the legs; it slopes evenly outwards from 5 to a.
In winter it is sometimes further prolonged by means of an
arch of snow with the entrance on the one side, or a snow
wall is simply raised to serve as a screen against the wind.
The normal length of the passage is ca. 3m; its height inside
is 60—75 cm and its breadth 60—70cm. At the inner end of
the passage a sloping entrance between c and d leads up into
the house-room. The opening here is so small, that a well-
developed Eskimo must have the greatest difficulty in crawling
up through it. It is fairly rectangular and measures in a
longitudinal direction, transversely to the house, ‘/2—*/4 m,
whilst its breadth (from с to 4) is only about 35—40 cm.

This entrance-opening stands as a rule unclosed; but
sometimes a stone is placed over it to prevent the dogs from
coming into the house, or if the wind is very strong and is
blowing right in. The Eskimo creeps tbrough the entrance
into the house and is then on the floor of the room itself (m
in fig. 9), which is laid with flat flag-stones. The window with
its pane of gut-skin looks out on the roof of the passage; its
opening is completed above and below by long, narrow pieces
of slate, and at the sides by walls of heaped-up stones. The
square pane of gut-skin, which is represented on fig. 9 by the
dotted line at 7, is sewed tightly by means of tendons on to
a skin, in the centre of which a square opening of the size of
the gut-skin has been cut; this skin is indicated on the figure
by the thickened line at А and 7. The mode of fixing is, to
place the lower part of the skin at & outwards on the top-
stones of the entrance, securing it there by laying over it a
layer of earth and grass-turf. At the sides of the window the
skin is likewise made fast out under the covering of earth,
whilst at the top it is bent back over the top-stone of the
window and in under the earth and stone-covering of the roof.
In this way quite an air-tight and solid window-frame of skin
is obtained. The opening of the window is ca. 80cm high and

317

70cm. broad. Only a dull light comes through the gut-skin;
to be able to see out from the house there is a small peep-
hole in the centre.

The floor-place itself is not large. Its extent depends
partly on the size of the house, partly on the amount of space
occupied by the side-platforms. In one house, for example,

Fig. 12:

Photograph of a winter-house seen directly in front. Uppermost the remains of the
window opening and just under this the entrance from the passage. The two openings
to the right and left of this lead merely into store-rooms, which are built at the side of
the passage. In front of the house the ground is covered with refuse. The beach is

just in front.

the distance from the entrance to the main platform was 170 cm
and across from the one side-platform to the other likewise
170 cm; each of the latter was here only ca. 35 ст broad.
The whole breadth of the house in front, including these re-
cesses, was thus 240 cm. In another house the corresponding
dimensions of the floor were 130 and 175 cm; here the plat-
form to the left was 75 cm broad and that to the right as

318

much as 140 cm broad, the measurements being taken along
the middle line of the side-platforms (ЕК on fig. 8). The
whole breadth of the house was thus 39 m. The principal
platform in this house was as much as 205 cm long (from e
to f) and had in front a breadth of 210 cm; its height above
the floor was 30—35 cm in front (at e in fig. 9). The principal
platform always slopes evenly down towards the back and the
height of the side-platforms is normally the same as that of
the main platform in front. Both the main and the side-plat-
forms are formed of flat stones, which rest on stones set up
on end. In the back part of the main platform, however,
the stones lie directly on the ground.

Among the piled-up stones of the house-walls we not
rarely find, forming part and parcel of the walls, the vertebrae
and smaller bones of the large, now extinct or rare whales.
The skulls of walrus are also used for this purpose. Some of
the stones are so large that one can hardly understand, how
it was possible to move them. Pieces of pine or bone are
fixed in among the stones of the roof and between these strings
are hung, on which small articles of clothing and other objects
can be suspended.

In the front part of the roof there is a small and narrow
opening (at h) which can be closed above by a clod of grass;
this is called “позе” of the house by the Eskimos, and in the
still winter-frost the hot air can be seen streaming out like
white steam. At one place in Umanark two houses had been
built together, so that they had a common wall but were other-
wise quite like two houses. On fig. 9 we can also see the top-
stone g between the two central projecting stones; this helps
to supports the flag-stones of the roof. Over these lies the
layer of earth and grass-clods 0, and this is again covered by
a layer of stones (p).

The height of the house internally is not very considerable.
I have measured one house (the last of the two above-men-

319

tioned), in which the greatest height above the floor was
145 cm (at m); possibly, however, the roof had sunk a little

Fig. 13.
Photograph of the interior of a winter-house, from which the front part of the
roof has been removed, so that the light falls on the main platform. The photo-
graph was taken from the window-sill (to the right of B in fig. 8) and includes
nearly the section СЁН on fig.8. Below is seen the platform, composed of a thin
slab supported by blocks of stones. The projecting oblique stone seen on the
left above is not very large in this case, but to. make up for it the thin slab,
which forms the middle part of the roof, over the platform, is very large. On
the back wall of the house hang two coils of leather rope, made from walrus
skin; a similar coil lies on the platform.

in the summer, so that the height might really have been a little
greater, but it can hardly have exceeded 160 cm in any case, so

320

that a man of average height will not be able to stand upright
in it. In all the other houses the front part of the roof just
over the threshold had been removed for the sake of ventila-
tion. In this house the greatest height at the front part of
the platform was 95 cm, usually it will be about I m in the
centre and a little lower at the sides.

In the typical house of the Polar Eskimos the whole roof
is built up of stone-flags, and this is always the case with the
’ part which arches over the main platform. Оп the other hand,
it is not rare for the front part of the roof, just over the
floor, to be covered simply by skin, which is spread out over
cross-poles and covered outside by earth and stones. At Cape
York I saw a couple of houses of this kind, where the remains
of the covering skin still lay on the top of the house-wall.

In winter the interior walls and roof of the house are
covered with seal-skin, the hairy side being turned towards the
wall and the light-coloured inside out towards the room. The
flat, stony floor of the main platform is covered with a layer
of dry grass and above this are laid the skins of reindeer or
bear. Each member of the house has a definite place for sit-
ting and lying on the platform, counting from the front to the
back. He either sits, as a rule with crossed legs, in front on
the platform, or lies on this with the head always towards the
open room, so that the head is always highest. The place of
the wife is outermost at the wall of the house close to the
side-platform, the lamp on which she must constantly be look-
ing after. Usually, in addition to the two large lamps on the
side-platforms, there is also quite a small, third lamp on the
one platform; so far аз I could gather, its flame is nourished
by the blubber which drips down from the large lamp and is
collected in a special holder below this. The blubber-lamps, in
addition to warming up the house, give a very pleasant and
clear light.

One problem in the polar house-building, which the Polar

321

Eskimos have in common with practically all other Eskimos,
is to protect the dwelling-room against the wind and draughts,
or to obtain, without at the same time interfering with the
renewal of the air, a constant supply of the latter which can be
evenly and regularly warmed. This is attained in the first place
by the long, narrow passage, which stops the spread of the
air-pressure and causes it to become an even and quiet stream
of air, when it passes into the house, secondly, by the low-lying
position of the entrance to the passage and lastly, by placing the
lamps on a raised stand and not on the floor itself. As the result
of the two last-mentioned conditions, the cold air is able to
spread quietly along the floor. It is only when it comes to
the level of the platform that it is evenly warmed up by the
lamps and gradually rises, so that there is always a warmer
layer of air lying above. The products of combustion can
escape outwards, partly through the ‘‘nose” of the house,
partly through the peep-hole in the pane of gut-skin.

The arrangement of the long, low passage, which opens
into the house so low down, is thus in reality a kind of equi-
valent for the door and porch or lobby, by the help of which
the Europeans in cold lands keep the cold air from penetrating
directly into their dwelling-rooms. In the eskimo house it is
in reality the raised platform, which corresponds to the true
dwelling-room. And so cleverly therefore is this house built,
that the fresh air has the most unhindered entrance and yet
one is in the midst of an even warmth.

The Danish painter, Grev Harald Moltke’, who passed a
great part of the winter of 1903—04 in a winter-house of the
Polar Eskimos, has expressed his opinion on it as follows:
“Two things are surprising in this small, primitive hole — the
temperature and the good air. The cold air streams through
the passage, the entrance-hole and out over the floor, where

1 Mylius Erichsen og Moltke: Grønland, р. 589.

322

the temperature in winter is always below freezing-point, as a
rule from —10° to —20°C., so that the blocks of snow in-
tended for drinking-water can lie there without melting. The
lamps draw the air upwards, which is thus warmed and streams
out over the raised platform, where the temperature as a rule
is so high, that one cannot stand having clothes on and
quickly follows the example of the Eskimos and takes them
all off. Under the roof the air is, to put it plainly, very hot.
If we sit on the edge of the platform with the feet resting on
the floor, they will be surrounded by air at ca. —10°, whilst
the head reaches up into a tropical temperature. Only the
stomach is in a suitable and pleasant warmth, which explains
why no other position can be maintained for a long time in
here except lying down on the raised platform. However warm
it may become here, the air is nevertheless always pure and
good, and — in contrast to the atmosphere in many Danish-
Greenland houses — without smell. This is quite simply ex-
plained by the fact, that the fresh air always has unhindered
access to the house through the entrance-hole, where there is
no door’. In contrast to which we now find a door in the
Danish-Eskimo houses, which as a rule closes the passage
inwards.

Figs. 14 and 15 are two drawings by the eskimo woman
Alakrasina. The first represents the interior of the ordinary
winter-house with a main platform and two side-platforms, as
also the passage to the house and the outside structures in
front. On each of the side-platforms stands a large blubber-
lamp and at the side of this to the left a small lamp; a couple
of basins also stand on each of the side-platforms.

Fig. 15 is of very great interest. Among a number of
winter-houses, which Alakrasina drew of her own accord in my
drawing-book, were two of this type, though I found no re-
presentative of them, either at Umanark or at Cape York. We
see here two winter-houses built together, so that they have a

323

common floor-place and common passage; further, the two
adjacent side-platforms have likewise been joined to form a

и:

LTD

Gar.

Fig. 15

small, median platform, which stands out from the dividing
wall between the main platforms. This dividing wall, which

IKKS
KR SSS

SS Nee |
MW

7 Yj
yy
7”

sc nn,

CE "|
< INN Og NS
ss SKK
Sess IE: =
«<<
Fig. 16.

Ground-plan and cross-section of a long Eskimo house from Angmagsalik

(after Gustav Holm). т — main platform divided into family compartments

at the dotted lines; п — smaller platforms along front-wall; о — side-
tables with lamps.

324

seems very narrow and to end in a point, must in reality be
comparatively broad, as a considerable part of the roof's weight
must rest on it, both over the floor-space and the main plat-
forms.

The important thing about this house-type is, that it shows
us in quite a convincing manner, how the long winter-house
has arisen, which was used in West Greenland before the
Danish colonisation and which G. Holm! in 1884 still found
in use at Angmagsalik. The long, common-house in Green-
land is in fact nothing else than this house-type, built with
beams of drift-wood to support the roof instead of stones or
whale ribs. The fixed dividing wall becomes of no use and
disappears, aS soon as a more convenient mode of supporting
the roof, by means of beams resting on the side-walls, is found
(cf. fig. 16); but the small, middle platforms remain in the form
of a raised part or table, on which the lamps stand in front
of the main platform in the long house (о in fig. 16).

A house-type such as shown on fig. 15, which is intended
for 2 families, each having a separate, main platform and con-
siderably more space than if they shared a simple, single
house, has arisen as the expression of the Eskimo tendency
to crowd together, a tendency which is binding both in socio-
logical and psychological regards. As soon as the Eskimos
can obtain the drift-wood, they have been able to satisfy this
tendency and thus, on the basis of the known house-type,
build the long house with a single, long, main platform, on
which each family has its “Бег” or division, separated at the
sides only by a hanging skin.

In July—August 1909 there were 5 tents to the east of
the winter-houses at the settlement Umanark; these were oc-
cupied by 6 families of in all 29 members. The tents lay
scattered on the sides of a small valley-like depression and

! Gustav Holm: Etnologisk Skizze af Angmagsalikerne. Meddelelser om
Grønland X.

325

were most of them farther from the shore than the winter-
houses. The openings of the tents were not in any particular
direction, but so that the in-dwellers could in each single case
look out directly on the sea. The tents were placed on grassy
ground and not on a naked, rounded rock-surface, as we so
often find in the more southern parts of Greenland. The grass
is warmer and it is not filled with gnat-larvae, as may be the
case in the south. Outside the tents the dogs were leashed
4—5 together to one or other large stone boulder, whilst the
half-grown puppies were allowed to play about.

Of these 29 Eskimos 6 were married men, 6 married
women, one widow, a half-grown girl and boy and the rest
children’. The widow Krulé, an old, decrepit woman tottering
about with a stick made of two pieces of wood, did not live
in any of the 5 tents, though her married daughter occupied
one of them and could have housed her without difficulty. She
had no idea how old she was and the other Eskimos still less;
by their way of it, she had always existed so long as they
could remember. She herself answered the question as to
her age with such inconsequent remarks as, she was now no
longer of any use, or even, that she was so old that her lice
no longer had a good taste; she was probably about 60 —65
vears old. According to information from Knud Rasmussen
her tribesmen, who were tired of carrying such a useless ob-
ject about, had left her on one of the bird-grounds two years
previously, to look after herself or go under. Knud Rasmussen
happened by chance to pass that way and took her with him
on his sledge. Now she was eking out her existence here at
Umanark, going round about the tents and picking up odds
and ends of the food going. Her dwelling was made up of
some old skins laid over a couple of poles, in the form of a

! During the stay of the “Godthaab” at North Star Bay, two other families
and one unmarried, young man — in all 7 persons — were there;
they had been brought from Cape York and were taken back there again.

326

very small tent, the height of which outside was 1°3 m, length
1:7 m and the breadth 1'1 m. Inside the space was so re-
stricted that she had just room to sit up on the ground in
front. Of platform or lamp there was no sign; her bed was a
skin laid over a layer of grass. The diminutive tent opened
towards the large tents, so that Krulé could keep an eye on
what was going on.

The summer-tent of the Polar Eskimos, which I have had
the opportunity to see at Cape York and at Umanark, is in its
present form not nearly so interesting as the winter-house, as
the occurrence of wood in later years has had more effect on
the construction of the tent than on that of the winter-house.
The best hunters may have a tent-platform of wood, but we
still also see the older tent-platform, consisting of stones
placed together in a mosaic.

As example of a Polar Eskimo tent I may describe the
largest and best tent at Umanark. It was occupied by two
families (Uvdloriark and Itsukusuk) and was fairly new. The
first time I visited this tent, a sunny day in July, only
the inner covering was on, while the outer covering lay in a
heap in front of the tent. The inner covering consisted partly
of skins of the bearded seal without hairs, partly of the same
kind of skins with the hairy side inwards. On the front part
of the tent and even a little along the sides, this inner covering
was quite clear and slightly transparent, so that the sunshine
filled the tent with a peculiar, clear, yet soft and pleasant light.
The tent was turned towards the north, so that even at mid-
night the sun shone into the quite pleasing room. This clear

Fig. 17 shows Uvdloriark’s summer tent, seen from the side.
In the back-ground to the right, the view extends in towards the
eastern end of Wolstenholm Sound with the inland-ice behind.

Fig. 18 shows the old Krulé and her little tent. The view in
the background extends right across Wolstenholm Sound to the
mountains on the north side of this fjord.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.]

327

skin is the ‘‘meat-side” of the bearded seal’s skin, the hairy
side being carefully peeled off with an ‘‘ulo”; this is said to
be a very difficult task.

As it became colder a few days later, the outer covering
was put on. This has the hairy side outermost and is not
subjected to any special treatment in front. Both the inner
and outer coverings each form a single piece sewed together;
on the front, more upright part of the tent the coverings are
however not sewed together in the middle line, from the ground
up towards the top of the tent. The upper part of this slit is
laced together with seal thongs, and the lower part forms the
entrance to the tent. This is closed by flaps folding together
over one another. When no one is at home, heavy stones are
laid on the edges of the flaps, so that the dogs cannot break
in. Uvdloriark’s tent could further be closed by means of a
thick strap of seal’s skin, which at half the height of the en-
trance was fastened round the tent; behind, this strap was
attached on each side to another strap, which went over the
tent and was fastened at the ends by stones laid on it.

The framework of the tent consisted in front of a frame
or gallows of 3 poles, of which the one was borne horizontally
by the two others and supported the broad front-part of the
tent, which was about 1m broad. The two upright poles were
not on the ground but stood on a stone, the first of a con-
tinuous circle of stones, which went round the inner side of
the tent, with exception of the part at the entrance. The slop-
ing poles, 9 in all, the principal of which were bound fast to
the cross-beam of the top, rested at the other end on the
highest stones in the inner row mentioned. The framework of
the tent was thus quite loose, but the tent was moored by
bringing the lower edge of the covering out a little on the
ground and weighting it there with stones (cf. fig. 20).

The height of the inside of the tent from the ground to
the cross-beam of the top was 240 cm, but in the other tents

328

this and the other measurements were somewhat smaller. The
greatest length internally from the entrance to the back was
420 ст, whilst the greatest breadth just in front of the main
platform was 360 cm. The main platform itself, which in this
tent consisted of wooden beams laid transversely on the rows
of stones at the sides, was
in the centre 195 cm from
front to back. The side-
platform, which consisted
partly of wood, partly of
stone, was 120 cm. broad
on Uvdloriark’s side and pro-
jected 110 cm from the main
platform, whilst that on It-
sukusuk’s side was only
70 ст and projected 90 cm;
but Itsukusuk was not so
clever a hunter as Uvdlori-

Fie. 19 ark, being also younger and

Diagrammatic ground-plan of a tent for 2 fa- still without children. In
milies (as the tent shown in fig. 17). The two Е

skin-layers are indicated by а thicker and а front of the side-platforms
thinner line; the dotted part of the latter in
front indicates the clear portion. @ and Я are
the two front uprights, which support the hori-

zontal top-pole. Between B and C the main plat- box or small locked ieee
form, here considered to be of wood. At Е and the kind generally used in
F the side-platforms with the lamps; these plat- 2 R 3
forms are partly of wood, partly can D and Danish Greenland, in which
р’ are the tool-boxes. The cross (X) indicates the
spot, where the mother in photograph fig. 23 sits.

each of the two men had a

they kept their tools, cartrid-
ges and smaller instruments.

The boards of the main platform were covered with a
layer of dry grass and above this skins of the reindeer. Just
as described for the arrangement of the winter-houses, here
also the women had their place outermost at the sides of the
tent, where they sat by the side-platform and the lamp standing
on it. Here sat Kagssaluk, whom the photograph given on
fig. 23 shows in home-dress, managing to look after her small

329

children, whilst at the same time working with skins and at-
tending to the flame of the blubber-lamp.

The lamp stood on the boards of the side-platform, sup-
ported by 3 stones (cf. fig. 21). Soapstone is still used for the
lamps, but cooking utensils of soapstone are disappearing and
those of tin and iron are taking their place. In the bend on
the most convex side of the lamp lie as a rule shining lumps
of white, unmelted blubber, while the bottom of the lamp is

Fig. 20.
Diagrammatic longitudinal section of the same tent (i.e. through ABC in fig. 19).
ab is the sloping pole which in fig.19 is most nearly indicated by С; it rests оп а
stone at 6 and is attached to the top-pole at а. ad is the upright 4 (fig. 19),
indicated here by dots, as it lies outside the middle plane. The two coverings of
the tent are represented as in fig. 19, and the clear part of the inner covering is
also indicated by a dotted line. The manner in which the coverings are anchored
by stone-ballast is shown between b and e. bc is meant to represent the divided
main platform, only the wooden floor being shown.

covered by the melted, floating blubber. The flame is placed
within the bend on the less convex side of the lamp, which is
turned towards the main platform. If the lamp has to be
lighted and there is no melted blubber in it, the women have
to melt the blubber by chewing and then spit it out into the
lamp or directly on to a prepared wick of moss. The latter must
be rolled, namely, between the hands before it can be used,
until it makes a fine dust. Some of the moss is strewn along
the edge of the lamp where the flame is to be, whilst the rest
is sometimes laid as a reserve in one of the pointed corners

330

of the lamp, from which it is taken later between the thumb
and forefinger and strewn over the places, where the flame re-
quires brightening. With the lamp-stick, which as a rule is
an unprepared piece of bone or wood, the lamp-moss soaked
with the blubber is arranged in a series of pointed tufts. Then
these or at least some of them are lighted at the top and
allowed to burn for a while; the lamp-stick is now used to bring
them all into connection, and the tufts still not lit are added,
so that a long flame is obtained which burns at the back of a
low wall of moss (a cross-section of this with the flame is
shown to the left in the lamp on fig. 21). The magnitude of
the flame thus depends on how long the moss-wall is made

Z S
)
SS 4 Se,
LOT OT LIL LIL PL I IT LIT LTT LILLIA LL IL LIT IT PLV LLL LLL LLL.
Fig. 21.
Diagrammatic longitudinal section through a blubber-lamp, standing on the
stones of a side-platform. а is the flame above the moss-wall (wick); 6 the

melted blubber; с unmelted blubber; de is the leather-bowl to catch the
dripping blubber.

and further, on whether much heat is required for cooking or
warming or whether the room has simply to be lighted up
somewhat. In the former case, the flame may extend over at
least */aths of the one side of the lamp, whereas in the latter.
case it only requires to be a few cm. The size of the lamp
itself is extremely variable; the breadth of a cooking-lamp be-
tween its two pointed corners may be normally from 30 to
70 cm. While the lamp is burning, it must be constantly
attended to; with the stick the woman works along the moss-
wall smoothing and making it regular, so that the flame should
burn clear and evenly without smoking. This apparently so
simple treatment is in reality very difficult and requires so
much skill, experience and care, that none but an Eskimo

331

woman can exercise it. Just at the moment of lighting, the
flame may smoke somewhat, giving off a bluish smoke and
jumping a little, but as the heat rises it becomes quieter and
burns with a yellowish colour.

To make fire matches are now used, if they are to be
had; otherwise fire is made with an apparatus which consists
of a piece of sulphur pyrites and a piece of quartz, or even of
old steel. Further, a tuft of moss is used somewhat larger
than a closed hand and in a small hole on the top of this a
small clump of the woolly seed of the polar willow is placed.
When fire is to be made, the moss with the seed is placed in
front on the platform or on the knees and the sulphur is held
about 3 cm over the seed, into which the sparks fall when
the sulphur is struck. When the seed-wool has obtained a
spark that catches, it is blown upon until it spreads out in
the wool over a space of quite half a square cm. А small
piece of moss is now torn off, steeped in the melted or chewed
blubber and used as a lighter. In this manner the Polar
Eskimos can produce fire in less than a minute.

Over Kagssaluk’s lamp and about 90 cm from it hung the
horizontal, wooden grating for drying clothes, which was 96 cm
long and 50cm broad. It was suspended in strings from the
frame of the tent. A skin-strap, which passed up round a
couple of stakes in the board and could be moved along these,
suspended a cooking vessel consisting of an old metal pot.
The other house-utensils on the side-platform, which to a cer-
tain extent plays the part of kitchen, also spoke distinctly of
intercourse with Europeans and Americans. Thus, at a certain,
typical moment there stood on Kagssäluk’s side-platform, in
addition to the lamp, a large metal pot, a metal basin, a coffee
pot, a pot with seals’ intestines, an ‘‘ulo”, as also a large
piece of narwhal meat. Until quite recently, however, the
water-jars used were made of skin sewed together and made
water-tight at the seams by the blubber-mixed substance, which
is scraped from the ‘‘kamikker” on cleaning them.

XXXIV. 22

332

In addition to the care of the children, sewing and pre-
paring the skins, attending to the lamp and drying of the wet
clothes and kamikker, the woman has further the housewife’s
task of preparing the food. This task is however not so great,
as the man cuts up the booty and brings the pieces of meat
into the tent or winter-house. She has thus only to keep the
pot boiling, and the art of cooking among the Polar Eskimos
is not very developed. Frequently the meat is taken from the
pot and eaten before it is quite cooked. Quite raw meat is
also eaten in large quantities; the fondness for frozen and
rotten meat has already been mentioned. The skin of the
white whale and narwhal, the so-called Mattak, is eaten in large
amount and is a much-liked and quite pleasant dish. Fresh-
water is always used for cooking by the Polar Eskimos. For
about 9 months of the year all the drinking-water must be ob-
tained by melting freshwater ice over the blubber-lamp; the
ice is fairly easily obtained from the ice-bergs and ice-clumps,
which lie scattered about frozen in amongst the sea-ice.

Fig. 22. Photograph of the tent described, seen from in front.
The outer tent-covering is pushed aside on both sides; the inner one
only on the left. In front of the tent stand Itsukusuk and Kags-
зак, both in house-costume (except Itsukusuk’s Kamikker). It is
clearly seen, that Kagssäluk’s left breast is somewhat atrophied; this is
probably connected with the fact, that her place is always on the left
side of the main platform (at the cross on fig. 19), and that she has
her children on her right, in towards the middle of the tent, so that
as a rule only the right breast is used in giving milk (cf. fig. 23).

Fig. 23 shows Kagssaluk and her two children, sitting in house-
costume inside the tent at the place marked in fig. 19. The child
feeding is her and Uvdloriark’s daughter Natu (one year old); the
other is their son Inuterk. In the left hand she is holding an ulo.
In the back-ground the skin and poles of the tent. On the platform
is seen the skin-layer or cover and under this the layer of dried
grass, which is spread on the wood underneath. The side-platform
is to the right in the picture.

Medd. om{Grenl. XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.]

The practical sense, which is so apparent in the structure
of the Polar Eskimo house, reveals itself also in the skin-
clothing; and various features, which at first sight produce a
comic or incomplete impression, on closer acquaintance are
found to rest on practical adaptation to the climate or the ne-
cessities of the material.

The separate parts of the clothing are: kamikker (boots),
skin- stockings, trousers, under furcoat, over furcoat and mittens.

When the Polar Eskimos come into a winter-house or a
tent, where the lamps are lit and the room warm, all the clothes
are taken off with exception of the trousers. The women must
always keep the trousers on, but it is quite common for the
men to lie on the platform with nothing but paradisiac costume.

The trousers of the women, which are of blue foxes’ skin,
are but some few — about 10 — cm long and just come up
to the seat and the uppermost part of the thighs. As a rule
two skins of the blue fox are required for a pair of woman’s
trousers. The men’s trousers on the other hand are of bear’s
skin and of considerably greater length, extending from the
knees to the upper part of the thighs, where the band is pulled
together with a string which thus comes to rest on the troch-
anter major of the thigh-bone on each side. For a Euro-
pean it would be very difficult to keep up the trousers in this
manner; but for the Eskimos it is customary and natural. And
it is also very practical, in agreement with the material and
the conditions. If, namely, the band of the trousers, as with

22"

334

us, came above the hips, with the thick, stiff skin it would
seriously interfere with the suppleness and bending the joint
between the thigh and the hip-joint. The position in the kayak
with the legs stretched out in front, the lateral position on the
sledge, the sitting positions on the platform in the house, the
bent attitude on cutting up the
booty — all cases require the
clothing to respect the natural
jointing of the body, which is
at the hips and not in the middle-
line. The warm bearskins are
quite indispensable for trousers
in the cold climate; the only
kind of skin in polar regions,
which is just as warm, is that
of the musk-ox, which the Po-
lar Eskimos have also occasion-
ally used for trousers. But this
skin has practical disadvantages;
thus, where dirt, blubber and
blood can readily slip off from
the hairy covering of the bear-
skin, the musk-ox has such a

woolly covering, the hair is so

Fig. 24.

A boy with kamikker and bearskin trousers; dense, that the dirt rather gets

he is holding up his arms, so as to show
how the trousers are supported

glued on to it and sticks fast.
Practical arrangement also
characterises their other clothing. But it cannot be said that
the clothing for the feet and legs, which the women have, is
very practical or suited to movement. As their trousers do
not come far down over the thighs, the kamikker and stockings
must come far enough up to do so. For this reason the
women wear stout and long kamikker, which come far up
above the knee and make it appear as if they had the legs of

335

an elephant. The kamikker of the men, on the other hand,
only reach to just below the knee, where the upper edge is
fastened by a string round the skin-stockings. The kamikker
may also be drawn tight at the ankles by a leather thong,
which is passed through two leather loops fixed on the side of
the foot above the middle part.

The kamikker of both the men and the women are of
seal's skin, which is treated in warm water and then scraped,
so as to remove the hairs and the dark outer layer. Their
colour is thus light. On the other hand, it does not appear
that the Polar Eskimos, like the more southerly Greenlanders,
use urine for the tanning of the skins. On the feet of the
kamikker an extra sole of specially strong skin is sewed. This
sole-skin is first scraped on the upper side, i.e. the inner side

cs LE)

of the skin, by means of a curved blade of an ‘‘ulo”, so that
it should not be too thick and unbendable. After it is then
well-chewed once more, it is sewed along the edge which is
turned up a little. During the sewing the women constantly
use their teeth on the edge of the sole, to make it more pli-
able and easier to pierce with the needle. ‘The method of
sewing on the sole is quite the same as in attaching a patch
on a hole in the skin-boat. The stitches are not passed in
and out through the skin and foot of the kamik, but along
both skins, so that no stitch goes right through either of the
skins. On the outside the skin of the sole has a fine wrink-
ling, produced without the use of any special instrument.

The Polar Eskimos do not have any over-shoes, such as
were worn by the Eskimos in Southern Greenland up to the
18 century and which are mentioned by Roald Amundsen as
still occurring among the Netchillik Eskimos.

Under the kamikker are worn the skin stockings, which
have the same length as the men’s and women’s kamikker
respectively. They are of hare-skin, which is white the whole
year round in the polar regions. For this use the hare-skins

336

are said to far excel those of the fox and dog; they are softer
and more pliable, do not cause sweating of the feet so readily,
are more easily dried and never become so stiff and uncom-

Fig. 25. Fig. 26. Fig. 27.
Bone-scraper with wooden handle. A “softening scraper” with wooden
7,5 em long; 3,7—3,9 cm broad. handle and a piece of tin-plate from

a preserving tin. 10,5 ст long,
4,9—5,9 cm broad.

fortable. Dried grass is used as stopping between the kamikker
and hare-skin stockings, especially under the sole of the foot.
To keep their extremely high foot-ware stiff, the women further
use a piece of stiff seal’s skin of the form shown in fig. 25.
This is inserted in the kamik between this and the hare-skin
stocking and in front of the shin-
bone, so that it goes from the in-

step to the knee. Its length is ca.
35 cm and its breadth 16—18 cm.

My gees: . .
LE He: It is only possible to go some
few days with such skin foot-ware
Fig. 28.

Skin-seraper with bone-handle and Defore il becomes sodden with the

tron) plates Sen long, 62 т wet, ‘The: stockings) and) erass must
broad, the iron plate occupying

2.8 ст. On the bone handleacouple then be taken out of the kamikker
of holes can be seen, one of which р i 5

goes right through. and dried, and these must likewise

be cleaned, dried and made soft

again by rubbing (kamjute). In South Greenland it is common

first of all to wash the dirt from the kamikker, büt up here,

where water is a more costly commodity, they are scraped

clean with a bone instrument (fig. 26). After this a scraper

337

with a blade of iron and a short handle is used for the “Кат-
juting” (fig. 27). In scraping the hollow edge of the blade is
held forward.

These two instruments, the kamik cleaner and the soften-
ing scraper, must not be confused with the true skin-scraper,
which is also quite different from the ‘‘ulo” ог woman’s knive,
of which again there is a couple of forms. The blubber on
the inner side of the fresh skin is cut away by means of the
ulo. Then the skin is treated in warm water and afterwards
the hairy layer is scraped off with a skin-scraper with an iron
edge (fig. 28). Of the forms of шо (cf. figs. 53, 58, 61) the one
with the strong curved edge is used in cutting the skin and as
the usual instrument during sewing, in short it plays the part
of scissors. The women now and then sharpen this against a
stone or by using the sewing-needle as a ‘‘steel”.

On the upper part of the body, as mentioned, the men
and women wear innermost a pelt which is made of the skins
of the Auk or Little Auk, sewed together with the feather side
inmost towards the body. This bird-skin shirt is soft and
warm, but it has the disadvantage, that it is impossible to keep
it free from lice. A linen shirt was therefore the most highly
esteemed article of clothing one could offer a Polar Eskimo,
for the reason, so they said, that they could see the lice in it
It is not to be assumed, however, that they have quite given
up the fight against their small plagues in the bird-skin pelt,
as they have constructed a practical lice-catcher, consisting of
a stick 35—40 cm long, on the end of which a piece of bear-
skin is fastened; in this the insects get trapped when the
instrument is rubbed in under the feathers. Naturally, the
“catch” is eaten by the Polar Eskimos, as by most other na-
ture-folk. There is further a special skin-scratcher, consisting
of a wooden shaft with a head of bone.

To make a bird-skin shirt means very considerable work.
The skins are pulled off the birds whole, so that the feathers

338

come to be inside, and hung up for preserving and drying on
a thong, which is passed through a hole made with a bone
needle. When the skins are again taken down for treatment,
they are subjected to a very careful process of chewing; the
women place the skin in their mouths and chew it, turning it
round and round in the mouth, until every little bit of the skin
has been chewed. The skin is thus softened and made smooth,
and the fat sucked out. After drying it is then cut up.

F The process of cutting up is shown
on fig. 29, which represents a Little Auk
skin turned inside out, on which 1
have endeavoured by means of letters
and dots to show the lines along which
the skin is cut up with the ulo. First
the tail is cut off along the dotted line
Б В’, and then the ends of the two
skin-stumps of the legs A and A’ along
the dotted lines at 5 and с. The third
and fourth sections are made along
the profile of the figure from В to 6
and from В’ to c, so that the hind
end of the skin, instead of 3 small,

comes to have one large opening.

Fig. 29.

Then the skin of the one wing is cut
off along the line HK. The next cut begins in the middle of
the skin of the other wing at G, is carried from there up to
D and further to E. Thereafter the skin is cut along profile
line from К to A and then the middle line DF of the neck-
skin. As a rule the line GC, the uncut wing, is not cut until
the last. The skin is now folded out like a plate and can be
sewed together with others, for which purpose, however, it is
somewhat clipped along the edges. About 100 skins of the
Little Auk is used for one of these inner pelts, whilst of the
Auk not a fourth part of this number is required; but the pelt
of the Little Auk is said to be the softest and warmest.

339

The person from whom I had most opportunity to obtain
this information was a young, pregnant woman Inadtliak, who
was busy preparing for future use an ‘‘amaut”, or a pelt in
which to carry the child on her back. She had made a
shield-shaped piece of tanned sealskin for her new Little Auk
pelt, to be placed outside at the back, so that the pelt came
to stand out at the back and form a space for the expected

Fig. 30.
Inadtliak and her litte son. She is sitting in the open on some skins and, the sun being
warm, has for a moment taken off both her kamikker and bird-skin pelt for mending
purposes,

child, which would be lodged between her bare back and the
bird-skin. For the time being, she stopped up the space with
the hood of the skin-pelt, so that her back should not freeze.

Whilst the inner pelt has the feather side innermost, the
outer pelt, which is made of the skins of seals, foxes or rein-
deer, always has the hairy side outermost.. The sealskin pelt
is used in summer, whilst the others belong to the winter,
though the old Krulé went about in a fox-skin pelt during the

340

summer. On very sunny and warm days many persons only
wear the inner pelt. The pelt is provided with a hood, to be
pulled over the head, so that only the face is bare surrounded
by a skin border. The women, who are carrying a child in
the ‘‘amaut”, have however a loose, helmet-shaped skin hat,
which is fastened under the chin by a band; they use further

Fig. 31.
Kagssäluk with her two children, the girl Nata with the hood of the foxskin
pelt over her head sitting in the amaut of sealskin pelt and the boy Inuterk,
who like Natu is clad in a foxskin pelt.

a narrow, skin strap which is fastened at the one end in the
middle line of the pelt between the breasts; from here it is
carried round the back under the bag or pouch, to prevent the
child from sinking down, and is then brought right round the
other side and buttoned, the free end having a short cross-
piece of bone which is twisted under the fixed end on the
breast.

341

After their intercourse with the Danish Literary Expedition
of 1903—04, the men have found it practical to imitate the
Europeans and have a pocket on the front of the pelt. They
use it chiefly to hold their pipe and tobacco; sometimes it is
ornamented with a pearl-button. The upper parts of the pelt
over the shoulders and breast are sewn and cut according to

Fig. 32.

the same as fig 31.

a traditional custom, which will not be further considered here,
but a close comparison with materials from other tribes would
certainly give very interesting information regarding the devel-
opmental history of the dress. The same applies also to the
flaps or lappets, which end the pelt below, in front and behind;
they are a little larger behind than in front and somewhat
larger for the women than the men. With regard to these
lappets, however, I cannot refrain from one remark.

342

It is a well-known fact that their distribution agrees fairly
exactly with that of the Eskimos, whereas all other arctic
peoples have a quite rounded, straight-cut edge to their-coats,
even though this, as is most usual, reaches a good piece down
on the legs, sometimes even almost to the ankles. If we look
now at the skin-coats of the Eivillik and Kinipetu Eskimos on
the west side of Hudson Bay and Barren Grounds, which have
only become known within recent years through the figures of
Canadian travellers, especially A. P. Low, we are most struck by
the extent of these lappets, their breadth and length. The
lower edge of the pelt reaches at the sides only to the hips,
but from here the coat slopes down in front and at the back,
so that the side-edges meet at the level of the knees, or even
a little lower down, as they form a wide sweep below. In
such cases we might as well talk of notches at the sides of
the pelt as of lappets in the middle. And my idea is, that the
Eskimos have originally worn a fairly long, loose pelt, but that
this has proved to be unpractical in the narrow kayak, when
the Eskimos changed from the kneeling position in the birch
canoes to the sitting position in the kayak. In adapting them-
selves to the narrower space for sitting in, the men have then
got the coats made with the opening at the sides, whilst the
front and back parts have remained as large flaps, as there
was room for these in the kayak. Gradually, however, these
flaps, which were only useless rudiments, have decreased in
size to the small lappets, which we find among the Polar
Eskimos and which should thus be the last apparent reminders
of the long pelt. That the women’s coat has also passed
through the same developmental process does not contradict
the theory, as it would be a common correlation phenomenon,
that the flaps should also be the same in the woman’s coat.
And the fact, that the lappets among the Eskimos are always
greatest on the woman’s coat, just indicates that the develop-
ment may have proceeded along the lines described.

343

The Polar Eskimo coat and especially that of the men is thus
constructed on the articulated principle with bare skin at the
joints so as not to hinder the movements. For the sake of
warmth an edging of the long-haired bear-skin is often used
at the joints, for example, round the upper edge of the women’s
stockings and round the wrists; on the man’s pelt, probably
for similar reasons, there is a
small bear-skin flap, which sticks
out under the chin.

When it gets very cold, the
joints are bound round with fox-
tails, and it is also said that a
fox’s tail is hung over the nose
from the forehead. Short skin
mittens with one finger are worn
on the hands; they are filled
with dry grass. Even in summer
there were some among both the
men and the women who went
about with mittens on; thus the
old Masaitsiak wore them even
on mild, sunny days. When the
women are sitting down and their

hands are freezing, they stick
them down in the long kamikker

we | Fig. 33.
inside the hare-skin stockings. A boy in bearskin trousers and sealskin pelt.

The skins, which are to be
used as pelts and thus have the hair kept on, must also
undergo a long treatment. First as much blubber as possible
is cut and scraped off with the ulo; then the skin is stretched
out on the ground to dry, being held down by numerous
pieces of bone — 50 or more — which are stuck into the
ground through holes in the edges of the skin. The skin is
thus tightly stretched out with the inner side uppermost.

344

When it is quite dry, the women take the skin and chew it
thoroughly on its inner side, in order to get as much fat out
as possible and make it soft. Then it is dried once again and
scraped with the blunt-edged skin-scraper, so that it becomes
soft and flexible. There can be no doubt that the chewing of
these large skins is exceedingly hard work. A woman is said
to be able to chew two reindeer skins in a day, but she can-
not keep at it from day to day.

The cutting-up of the skins into pieces of clothing is
done by the women, quite freely with the curved ulo, without
using any measurer or model. The model they follow must be
so fixed by tradition and so much a matter of practice, that it
is used almost reflexly and unconsciously. The Eskimo works
with such ease at a skin-coat, that one gets the impression,
she does not use much brain-work on it. In sewing she sits
on the platform with the legs crossed, in the fashion of the
Turks. The skin is held with the feet, for example, by fixing
it between the big toe and the second toe on the right foot,
by holding it between the big toe of the right foot and the left
leg or by placing it between the left knee and the right foot.
The needle, which now is of European make, is carried from the
right to the left. With thicker skins a thimble is used on the
forefinger. The thread is unravelled as it is used from a
bundle of sinews, which is softened in the mouth. This is
constantly being used during the work, as the skin edges to
be sewn together are softened by chewing, and the finished
seam is treated in the same manner. A pin-cushion is some-
times used for keeping the needles in, made of a small skin-
bag containing some moss, and all the sewing requisites are
kept in a small skin-bag.

True ornaments or other colours than those naturally
possessed by the skins are not used to any extent on the
dress, nor on the implements. This comes partly from the
lack of ornamental materials, partly from the fact, that the

345

practical struggle for life — at any rate in earlier years —
engaged all their powers and interest, so that no energy was
left unused which could be converted into such uneconomical
things as ornaments. Among the Polar Eskimos all things are
judged by a purely practical standard; but as the struggle for
life has now been made easier for them in several ways, it will
be interesting to follow their future development and, for ex-
ample, observe how a desire for ornamentation with the use of
European buttons, pearls, bands etc., will also certainly develop
amongst them. A beginning of this kind was indeed already
to be noticed. Thus, one of the women (Fig. 30) was wearing
а narrow skin-ring round the neck and for 7/sths of its extent
the front edge of the ring was beset alternately with small,
black and white beads; further, three small fringes on the front
edge of the ring each ended in a large, glass bead and the
middle fringe was ornamented by a large, white button. I saw
a more indigenous case of ornamentation on the kamikker of
a young woman (Fig. 86). In the middle line above and in front
these had a 3—4 cm broad piece of black skin, which composed
more than !/srd of the length of the kamikker in front of the
leg and looked quite pretty. In answer to my question, I re-
ceived the explanation, that she had not had sufficient of the
light-coloured skin for the kamikker and had to eke it out with
the black; she had thought it best therefore to make both
kamikker in the same way. Nevertheless she had also under-
stood how to make them so as to look best. It is also pos-
sible, that the Polar Eskimos will in future simply take over
the West Greenland ornamentation, adapting it somewhat to
their special conditions.

As will appear from the photographs given here of the
Polar Eskimos, the men wear their hair long and usually hang-
ing loose down from the head, so that they are obliged every
moment to give a small toss with the head or take their hands
to clear their eyes. Sometimes, however, they use a thin

346

string of skin as hair-band, bringing it from the upper part
of the forehead round the temples to the back of the neck.
The women almost always have their hair bound up in a string
of skin like a chignon or a small top. Only one little girl had
obtained a red band for the hair, and there did not appear to
be any great desire to possess coloured bands.

The little older children were clothed in quite the same
way as the adults. The boys had the bearskin trousers, rea-
ching down to the knees, whilst the girls have the long ka-
mikker and the small, short foxskin trousers. The smallest
children seem however to wear generally a loose hood; I saw
two children with amulets round the neck, consisting of the
head and claws of a raven. The-very small children unable to
walk are constantly carried in the ‘‘amaut”, where they are
‘‘cradled and rocked”. It is only when the child has to have
milk that it is taken out of the back-pouch; this is done by
the mother leaning forward and carefully shaking the young
one out over the one shoulder. The youngest children are
suckled for a verv long time; I have seen a 5 years’ old boy
regularly taking milk at his mother’s breast, but even older
children are said to do the same.

Water is for the greater part of the year too costly a com-
modity to find any other use than drinking, so that neither the
children nor the older people have known what it is to be
washed. I have however seen a mother dry her child's dirty
fingers on a white gull’s skin. Such is also sometimes used
by the grown-up people in the tent, to clean their fingers after
they had eaten; possibly, however, this use is of more recent
origin.

In the previous pages of this chapter I have just touched
upon the question of the woman’s work and place among the
Polar Eskimos. In contrast to most other hunting-peoples in
milder parts of the globe, where the chief occupation of the
woman is the collection of easily obtained objects of food, here

347

in the Polar North her duties with the preparing of skins and
making of clothes mean work of a mechanical kind and lead
to a special development in various directions. If we enquire
what special kind of mechanical work it is that lays most claim
on the time and physical powers of the woman, we find that
it is such a primitive form of activity as the chewing of skins,
and next the scraping of skins. Then come cutting and sew-
ing with sharp instruments such as tke knive and needle.

The only division of labour practised among the Polar
Eskimos is that between man and wife. Each man and each
woman, to be considered as a fully qualified member of the
tribe, must be able to do and carry out all that may fall to
the lot of his or her sex. And this is by no means little.
There is perhaps no nature-people, where the requirements in
the way of mechanical production are greater than among the
Polar Eskimos. This is connected partly with the difficult
conditions of life in Polar lands, partly with the great varia-
tions in the seasons, which require not only different kinds of
dwellings and clothing, but also different apparatus for the
different seasons of the year.

Making of the apparatus falls to the man. The material
he chiefly works in is bone and wood, and now also metals,
which in earlier days were replaced by stone and by the
natural iron occurring in the region of Cape York. If we en-
quire, in the same manner as for the women, what is the spe-
cial, mechanical hand craft exercised by the men, we find
similarly that the sharp instruments for cutting and hewing
play in the Polar Eskimo’s occupations, compared with European
hand-worker’s, a less important part than such instruments as
are used for filing, sawing, scraping and boring. Even the
teeth also play a considerable role with the man, for example,
to soften the skin-thongs or straps, loosening of knots and as
a fixed holding-apparatus on numerous occasions.

The fact seems to be that the Polar Eskimos have not

XXXIV. 23

348

adapted themselves to the European methods to the same extent
as they have to the European apparatus. These have just been
taken over into the methods of the stone-age and naturally
have altered and modified this, but the underlying traditions
of the stone-age are constantly to be noticed. The transition
from the stone-age to the use of European iron apparatus had
already had a good preliminary before 1818 in the use of the
meteoric iron, and the transition proceeded slowly in the course
of a couple of generations, materials being introduced little by
little by intercourse with the whalers and expeditions as also
by wreckage and the forsaken ships of expeditions.

When Peary began his expeditions in 1891, the true stone-
age was already past, and the era he introduced, by providing
the Polar Eskimos with the most modern guns and other
apparatus for hunting, is best described by saying, that he
brought in among the Eskimos the keen production of modern
European-American civilisation. In this way a danger has
arisen for them, as it is conceivable that they will now be able
to destroy or at any rate greatly decimate the stock of the bears
and foxes especially. And without the skins of these animals
for clothing, their cold land will become almost uninhabitable.

It must not be believed, that any and every kind of Euro-
pean implement found a welcome in the eyes of the Polar
Eskimos. They have had a remarkably good understanding of
how to choose out the kinds and forms, which were best
suited for their requirements. The most useful European
instrument a Polar Eskimo can obtain is still a file. By means
of steel-files pieces of whalrus and narwhal teeth are worked
up into harpoon points, as foreshafts of the harpoons, as pro-
tectors under the sledge-runners and for several other purposes.
For sawing is used a ship’s saw, quite 30cm in length, of the
best American manufacture; the back-edge of the saw is ground
sharp and used for hewing and chopping. The steel-knife is
used for cutting up the animals taken in the hunt and plays the

349

part of both a cutting and scraping instrument in the making
of apparatus. For boring, on the other hand, there is still
used the Eskimo drill with a bone mouth-piece, the bow being
usually formed of a seal’s rib and a skin thong, and the point
is now always of metal.

It is in fact a point of no little cultural interest from the
historical side to make clear, what European apparatus can be
absorbed by a strange culture. We see very clearly among
the Polar Eskimos, that they have chosen the apparatus, which
for them meant a reduction of labour in their old modes of
procedure. But they have still held fast to their old methods
and the old forms, in so far as they were not obliged to
modify them in using the new apparatus.

The Polar Eskimos are thus to a certain extent still people
of the stone-age, who are employing the help yielded by the
modern mechanical methods, without adopting the mental ac-
companiments. For them iron is a material of similar kind to
bone, and they deal with bone and metal in quite the same
manner, with the file.

| found an interesting example of this in a harpoon-point
(fig. 34) of the Polar Eskimo Manigssok; every part of it had
been filed out of a massive piece of iron. As a rule only the
point is of iron, whilst the head-piece is of filed bone (cf.
fig. 35, which likewise shows the second of the two forms of
harpoon-points common among the Polar Eskimos; it is used
for the white whale and narwhal, whilst fig. 34 is for the walrus
and seal). The iron point, fig. 34, is in all details an exact
copy of the commonly used form. It is likewise a witness of
the surprising, technical skill of the Polar-Eskimos, as with-
out any other assistance whatsoever, with the file in the
right hand and the object in the left, they are able to make
such a uniform and faultless implement. During the work they
support the left hand on the knee or the thigh, but there is
no talk of making measurements or of copying from something

235

350

already completed. They produce so to speak by “heart” the
forms of apparatus they are accustomed to.

One cannot help being impressed by the ease, rapidity and
practical sense with which they work, in spite of the lack of
all the many means of assistance, which the European work-
shop affords our workers. I was present, for example, when
Samik sawed through a piece of an antler of a reindeer, long-
ways with a ship’s saw. First of all he chopped off the round
tines on two diametrically opposite sides by means of the sharp
back-edge of the saw, so that he was freed from cutting

Fig. 34. Fig. 35.
Harpoon point; a piece of leather Harpoon point of bone with a
thong passes through the cross- small iron tip, fixed by a nail.
hole. 7,6 ст long, up to 1,6 cm broad, 13,8 ст long, up to 3,7 cm broad,
1,5 cm thick. 2 cm thick.

through these parts. A hand-worker would do exactly the same.
Then he began to saw the antler, holding it in the left hand,
lightly supported on the left leg. Later also, he sawed off
some small pieces in the same manner. It looked most danger-
ous but was carried out with steadiness and accuracy.

They all seem to be able to use their hands with the same
cleverness and certainty. I can remember, for example, how
Uvdloriark sat outside his tent and with the back-edge of his
ship’s saw cut into shape a walrus-rib, which was to be used
as the frame of a drum. He held the bone enclosed in his left
hand, with the back of the hand resting on the legging of the
kamik of the left leg, and cut right down towards the index

551

finger which lay along the bone. He could bring the cutting
edge of the saw with force right in under the index finger
without cutting himself, and the accurately cut pieces being
chipped off the bone quickly acquired the desired form. Later,
the bone thus cut down was bent by alternately working with
the hands and dipping it in hot water.

After hunting the Polar Eskimos take the greatest interest
in hand-work. We cannot help noticing the attention and
intelligence, with which they take hold of and consider an
apparatus, they get into their hands, the use of which they
know. Nor would it be possible for them to sit and work at
their apparatus with the care and accuracy they employ, if a
certain amount of pleasure in working with the hands was not
present.

“Hand culture” stands very high among the Polar Eskimos
and it has scarcely at any time been higher than it is now.
On this point as on others there can be no talk of any
‘‘demoralisation” among them. On the contrary, their acquisi-
tion of the European aids has opened up the possibility of
further development of skill and ingenuity in overcomiug tech-
nical difficulties, which in the old days of the stone-inplements
could only be overcome by the employment of an enormous
amount of time and patience.

The child is taught partly by play and imitation, partly by
the direct instruction of the father. Toys for the smaller
children are made by the father from bone, in the shape of
figures representing animals and human beings. It is not im-
possible, however, that some of the figures do duty as a kind
of pedagogic means of instruction. The larger boys make for
themselves toy-harpoons, toy-sledges, toy-stools for Maupok-
hunting etc., and these are true copies of the apparatus of the
older Eskimos’.

Before the Polar Eskimos obtained guns, and before the
Ponds Inlet Eskimos taught them the use of the kayak and

352

the bow and arrow, about 1862—63, the dog-sledge, the har-
poon and the lance were their principal means of making a
livelihood, and they are still that. It has already been men-
tioned, how the first expeditions found these apparatus com-
posed of small pieces of bone and wood bound together.

At the present day the lack of wood is not so great; but
we can still see sledges on which the runners do not consist
of a single piece of wood, but of several pieces bound together
with thongs. For example, Ajorsalik had a sledge, in which
the one runner had 7, the other 5 pieces of wood, which were
exactly fitted to each other and securely lashed together. Each
of these sledge runners was 2,5 m long and 17,5 cm high;
of this however 1,5—2,8 cm went to the shoes of the runners,
which in front were thinner than behind. The breadth of the
shoe is ca. 2—2,5cm. In front the runners curve evenly up-
wards, and a little before the front end begin the cross-trees,
which in Ajorsalik’s sledge numbered 12 in all. The two up-
rights behind rise 75cm above the sledge and are connected
with one another by a cross-piece and a couple of intercrossing
straps. The breadth of the sledge from runner to runner was
only ca. 55 cm, whilst the cross-trees were 60 cm long and
thus extended a little beyond the runners. This long, narrow
form is characteristic for the Polar Eskimo’s sledge and dis-
tinguishes it for example from the shorter and broader sledges
used in West Greenland.

Instead of shoes of filed pieces of walrus and narwhal
teeth the Eskimos now also use iron-shoes. There are even a
few of the specially expert hunters who now keep two sledges,
one with ivory shoes and the other with iron shoes. The
former, namely, are said to be best on the wet ice in the au-
tumn and spring, whilst the iron shoes are best on the ice
during the rest of the winter and on land. The method of
giving the runners ice-shoes is also known, melting snow being
rubbed on them; it is chiefly used in the autumn. Early in

353

March 1892 Peary whilst on a sledge-journey observed a some
different procedure, which he describes as follows. ‘‘The bot-
toms of the runners (are first covered) with a continuous strip
of thick walrus hide, 2!/2 inches wide, with the hair on. This
was fastened on by rawhide lashings passed through slits cut
in the edges. When this was frozen hard, a coating of snow
dipped in warm urine was applied and shaped and pressed
with the hands, until the entire length of the runner was cov-
ered three-fourths of an inch to an inch thick. This, in turn,
was allowed to freeze solid, and then chipped and smoothed
with a knife, and finally rubbed down with the hand dipped in
water” 1.

Whilst the first expeditions usually met with small packs
of dogs it is now common for good hunters to have a consi-
derable number. A man like Samik has a score of dogs. A
single team may now consist of up to 12 dogs, though 6—8
is about the usual number. If a man has two teams, one of
them is often driven by a boy, a son or relative, who may
have almost the position of a servant. The method of driving
is highly developed and of the same kind as in West Green-
land. The team is directed with the long whip and with shouts
of definite meaning for stopping, turning to the one side and
the other, swifter movement, danger, bear and so on. These
signals are not common for all, but different for every one.
Each driver himself trains his dogs and teaches them his own
signals, so that it is very difficult for others to drive them.

The Polar Eskimo dogs belong to a specially large, fine
and strong race, which however stands near to the sledge-dog
of West Greenland. In West Greenland the dogs are always
allowed to go loose about the settlement; among the Polar
Eskimos they are always tied up, and they are better and more
systematically fed than in the south. The natives are simply

1 Northward etc. Vol. I, р. 228.

354

obliged to do this up there, where the dogs cannot themselves
go and seek for food on the beach, as they would then rob
the food-depots or break into the houses. Just as in the more
southerly West Greenland, the dogs are sometimes placed out
on the small islands in the summer, where they are permitted
to run about loose, but even here they are fed with a certain
amount of regularity, which however does not always mean
daily. Such a ‘‘dog-island” lies off the coast at the settlement
Umanark. In order that the dogs when fastened in the leashes
should not be able to free themselves by chewing through the
leather, it is said to be common for the dogs, when still pup-
pies, to have their molars crushed by means of a stone!.
Dog-flesh is only eaten in cases of want.

The two common forms of harpoon-points and their differ-
ent use have already been described above. It would be of
considerable interest to obtain an account of the different forms
of harpoons. I shall not attempt to give such an account here,
however, inter alia because I was unable during my short stay
to get the matter fully cleared up. I shall therefore content
myself with some few preparatory notes. A throwing board is
not used for any kind of harpoon. Instead, the shaft of the
harpoon, somewhat below the middle, has a small, firmly lashed
bone button, which serves as support for the hand in throwing
or striking, the button being held between the third and fourth
finger.

Quite provisionally for the sake of description and to give
a basis for future investigations, | may divide the harpoons
into heavy and light. The heavy harpoons have a shaft which
the hand can scarcely reach round; its length is usually about
1,5m, and to this has to be added a foreshaft of bone, the
length of which may vary somewhat greatly (ca. 20—40 cm).
Of the heavy harpoons again I have seen two kinds, namely,

1 Mylius-Erichsen og Moltke, 1. c., р. 232.

555

one with detachable foreshaft and another with а foreshaft
which is firmly lashed to the end of the harpoon. Of the light
harpoons I have only seen one kind with firmly lashed fore-
shaft and at the same time a little less in length than the
foregoing (in all about 1,5 m).

The heavy harpoon with detachable foreshaft is used from
the kayak; the line passes from the point up along the shaft
of the harpoon and is fastened by a bone-ring to a small but-
ton — now as a rule a nail without head — which is fixed
into the shaft a little beyond the. bone-button serving as sup-
port for the hand. As the foreshaft is broken by the struggles
of the wounded animal in the water, the point of the harpoon
is set free and also the line from the shaft, and the latter
floats up on the water. The various harpoons with fixed fore-
shaft seem on the other hand always to have another arrange-
ment to let the point and line free. Along the shaft lies a
fairly tight thong, about 75cm long, which is firmly attached
to the shaft at the ends and at one spot in between; a coil of
the harpoon line is now placed in under the thong and round
the middle fixed point in such a way, that it runs out at the
moment there is a pull upon the harpoon line. This mode of
attachment is specially practical in the case of harpoons, which
are not thrown but thrust into the animal and the shaft with-
drawn.

A heavy harpoon with fixed foreshaft is used in the walrus-
hunting on the ice in the spring. A light form of harpoon
with fixed foreshaft is used in the Utok hunting of the spring,
or the hunting of the seals which have crawled up on the ice.
Which forms of harpoons are employed in the other methods
of hunting, as for example on the smooth ice and in the Mau-
рок hunting, has not been cleared up with certainty. It will
be of importance especially to ascertain, whether a harpoon
with fixed or detachable foreshaft is used in the Maupok me-
thod. An interesting question is also, whether the Polar Eski-

356

mos, before they learnt the use of the kayak, perhaps did not
use harpoons with detachable foreshaft at all. These questions
may have significance for the solution of the whole problem
regarding the origin of the Eskimo culture.

Of the lances I have only seen the kayak lance; this has
a detachable foreshaft with firmly attached point. Its length is
a little less than that of the kayak harpoon, but it is thick and
heavy like the latter. The foreshaft is sometimes a long piece
of bone with an inserted, short and flat iron point, sometimes
quite a short piece of bone with a long iron point inserted on
it; the latter is filed out of a piece of iron bar. As this lance
is also used as a throwing implement from the kayak, a small
bladder may be fastened at the upper end of the shaft of the
lance, so that the lance floats on the water, when it breaks
loose from the animal struck. On fig. 36 this small bladder is
shown lying at the back of the kayak just in front of the large
hunting-bladder.

With regard to the bow and arrow and the kayak, the
Polar Eskimos use them just as the Central Eskimos and
especially the Baffin Landers do, as it was from Ponds Inlet,
аз | have shown above, that they have learnt the use of these
implements. The bow is what F. у. Luschan has called a ‘‘com-
posite and strengthened” bow to distinguish it from the true
“compound” bow, which has its finest representative in the
Asiatic, so-called Turkish bow. The Polar Eskimo bow consists
of 3 pieces of reindeer antler, the two meeting-places of which
are covered by an upper and under plate of the same material
and bound round by leather thongs; on the back of the bow
there is also a number of longitudinal leather thongs or, in very
fine examples, strings formed from plaited tendons of the narwhal.

The bow has now been displaced by the gun, but most of
the men have used the bow and arrow in the reindeer hunts
in their younger days, and they can still both manage and
make these things. In shooting the arrow is held between the

[Н.Р. Steensby.]

XXXIV.

Medd. om Gronl.

357

forefinger and middle finger of the right hand. The shaft of
the arrow is of wood with or without two laterally placed
steering-feathers, and to the fore-end of this shaft is lashed a
tine from the antlers of a deer, with or without an iron point
and also with or without barbs.

During our stay at North Star Bay in 1909 a small number
of bows with corresponding arrows were made at request by
the old Masaitsiak, who was probably one of the few who had
never hunted reindeer with any other weapon. As I observed
that the length of these bows, which were made by the same
man, was different, becoming gradually shorter, | made an at-
tempt to get information {regarding the more or less purposeful,
established custom for the size of the bow; it seemed to me
namely that there must be some principle or rule. Unfortunately
this as well as various other investigations were difficult to
carry through, owing to the fact that my interpreter from
West Greenland was not specially fit for the task.

It appeared however, in the first place, that Masaitsiak was
quite aware, thal these bows and arrows were not made really
for reindeer hunting, but only to satisfy the odd whims of the
strangers, so that they did not require to be exactly right, and
owing to the scarcity of material he was free to reduce their
length. It appeared, further, that the regulation length of the
bow was taken from the distance between the outstretched
finger-tips of the left hand and a little way beyond the middle
line of the breast; its length would be 79—80 cm in Masait-
siak’s case. The length of the arrow — excluding the bone
fore-part with the iron-point, which did not seem to have any
definite regulation length — was indicated by him by bending
the left arm at a right angle and stretching the fore-arm and
fingers straight out; the length of the arrow shaft would thus
be from the inner side of the elbow-joint to the tips of the
fingers. One of the arrows he made for me had the right
length (42 cm plus 12 cm for the bone fore-part and iron

SIM

558

point), but a second was too short, because — so
he said — he had not sufficient wood.

We have here a problem, the solution of which
would be of the greatest ethnographic interest. How
many pieces do the ethnographic collections not
contain, which would prove to be quite valueless
types if we knew exactly their previous history?
Every one believes himself capable of making an
ethnographic collection, in reality it is a highly deve-
loped and difficult task, if it is to be done satis-
factorily.

Fig. 36 is a drawing after a photograph of the
authors showing a Polar Eskimo in his kayak; it
will be seen that the man sits in an open space,
bounded in front by a rounded piece of wood, on
which the central part of the paddle rests in rowing.
In this figure the paddle is seen from the side, but
in fig. 37 it is seen from the surface. On both sides
of the middle piece of the paddle are the thinner
parts for the hands, about 8 cm long, while the
middle piece is ca 48 cm. Further out a leather-
strap is bound round both blades, so as to prevent
the water which runs down the blade from reaching
the hand; the length of the blade itself is ca. 77 cm
and the breadth up to 8cm. The whole length of
the paddle is about 260 cm and no part of it is
made of bone.

Fig. 36 shows the harpoon lying in front of the
kayak, with the foreshaft turned towards the man;
leather thongs hold it down to the kayak. Under
the harpoon are the coils of the line, which passes
from there to the right of the man and back to the
large bladder, which is seen lying behind on the kayak
immediately behind the already mentioned small bladder.

359

The large bladder is made from a skin of
the fjord seal and the shrivelled up front-
flippers of the seal are seen to be still at-
tached to the bladder. Under the hind part
of the large bladder lies a square wooden
frame, the bottom of which is covered by a
skin; this frame is thrown into the water
and is dragged along 3—4 m behind the
bladder by means of a string, which is at-
tached to the bladder at the same place as
the harpoon line. The speed of the attached
animal through the water is further hind-
ered by this contrivance. On the figure
can be seen some of the 8 strings which
are fastened to the frame; above the centre
of this the strings are fastened together on
one line which passes to the front end of
the large bladder. Behind the frame and
the bladders is seen the lance, which is held
fast under a pair of thongs on the left side
of the deck of the kayak.

Fig. 38 is a diagrammatic sketch of a
Polar Eskimo kayak seen from above; so
far as the lengths and breadths are concerned
the measurements are in the correct pro-
portions AB 5,3 m). The lashings which
keep the harpoon and lance in their place
are represented at C, D (2 straps bound
together at the middle), Ё and КР; abed is
the opening of the kayak. K is the rounded
wooden piece on which the paddle rests du-
ring rowing. С and H are a couple of
pieces of bone or wood, on which the har-
poon is placed when approaching the prey,

360

for convenience in seizing and slinging it out. In the
kayak itself or on the front deck a gun may nowadays also be
carried, sometimes lashed to the kayak by a thong so
that it should not be lost if it fell overboard. The Polar
Eskimos are very careless in their ways of keeping and looking
after their weapons. The well known Eskimo bird-dart is not
at all used.

As mentioned previously, this form of kayak is only in
small degree suited for use on the sea. And the Polar Eski-
mos for this reason took great interest in the West Greenland
kayaks, which the Expedition had brought with it, and a West
Greenland kayak which Knud Rasmussen had taken up on an
earlier occasion had even already produced an effect, which
could be traced in some of the kayaks at Umanark.

The open kayak of the Polar Eskimos or rather of the
Ponds Inlet Eskimos is more suited for use on rivers than on
the sea. The square, open frame is certainly also a relict of
the birch-bark canoe, which was only covered over in front
and behind. Models of the Canadian birch-bark canoes are to
be found in the ‘‘Museum für Völkerkunde” in Berlin and in
these the upper deck extends over */srds of the length of the
canoe, so that the middle third is open’. That the well of
the kayak has become narrower in front, is possibly connected
with the fixing of the wooden board mentioned as support for
the paddle, by which means the rowing is made easier.

The Polar Eskimo kayak described seems to agree well
with the figure Low gives of a kayak from Cape Haven south
of Cumberland Sound; on the other hand, it differs from some
figures gives by Boas? of the kayaks of the Central Eskimos
from the southern Baffin Land and Repulse Bay, as these have
round wells. In several respects it seems to differ from the

1 ef. А. Byham, Die Polarvölker. Leipzig 1909. PI. X, fig. 2.
2 The Central Eskimo. 6th Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology.
Washington 1888, p. 486 et seq.

361

river-kayak covered with deerskin, which is used by the Kini-
petu Eskimos, an inland tribe on the Barren Grounds, whom
А. Р. Low describes as follows’: “The Kinipetu kayak is extra-
ordinary in shape. It is long and narrow and quite deep, so
that the midship section is almost semicircular. The ends
terminate in long narrow points, of which the bow end slopes
downward towards the water and the stern end is inclined up-
wards. This kayak is so narrow that the combing of the well
sometimes projects beyond the sides. Being narrow and cranky,
a good deal of skill is required to handle these craft with
safety, and accidents caused by upsetting are not uncommon.
These kayaks are covered with parchment deerskin, and are the
only ones painted [in contrast to the kayaks used by the coast
Eskimos on Hudson Bay, in Labrador etc.], various colours
being obtained from oxide of iron found in the interior’. This
kayak is only used for inland hunting.

Low explains that the kayak form of these inland Eskimos
is peculiar to them, whereas the natives on the west coast of
Hudson Bay, especially the Eivillik Eskimos at Repulse Bay
and neighbourhood, have quite a different form of kayak, which
is more closely related to the kayaks of Labrador and Baffin
Land. This information is not without importance. Further,
it seems from Low's description of the Kinipetu kayak, though
somewhat general statements only are made, that this kayak
form possibly again stands somewhat nearer the small birch-
bark canoe; I am thinking here, namely, of the statements re-
garding its narrowness and its semicircular section.

This information does not quite agree, however, with that
given by Е. Boas”, according to which there seems to be greater
agreement between the Kinipetu implements and those used by
the Eivillik Eskimos. On the other hand, it quite agrees with

1, с., р. 154 et seq.
The Eskimo оп Baffin Land and Hudson Bay. Bulletin of the American
Museum of Natural History. Vol. XV. New York 1901.

1
2

362

James Anderson’s observations made on his journey in 1855!.
He also found that the kayaks were covered by deerskin, and
the Eskimos he met with were clothed partly in deerskin and
partly in musk-ox skin.

Partly from these and partly from other reports? it appears
with certainty, however, that there really still lives a tribe of
inland Eskimos on the Barren Grounds, which carries on the
hunting of the reindeer and musk-ox. The question is thus
only, whether these inland Eskimos have once dwelt by the
coast and have migrated from the coast into the interior, or
whether they have never been in closer touch with the sea,
but have always lived in the interior. in the latter case, they
are then to be regarded simply as the remains of the original
Eskimos before these changed over to the life on the sea coast.
Or more correctly, they are in such a case an intermediate
stage between the supposed, oldest stage, when they lived as
hunters in the birch and pine woods, and the present mode
of life on the sea-coasts of the Arctic. They have taken the
step from the woods out on to the tree-less tundras and have
thus, among other adaptations, been obliged to replace the
birch-bark covering of the boat with deerskin.

I shall not enter further into these interesting, but still
somewhat uncertain problems regarding the early history of
the Eskimo culture. I have already dealt with this question in
a work”, in which I have come to the result, that the Eskimo
culture must have developed on a sea-coast of the Arctic, and
I have shown, that the point of origin must probably be sought
for on the stretch between Hudson Bay and Coronation Golf.

' Journ. Roy. Geogr. Soc. Vols. 26 and 27. London 1856—57.

? ef. H. P. Steensby, Om Eskimokulturens Oprindelse. København 1905,
рр. 87—88.

Salze:

VI.

In the foregoing pages I have endeavoured among other
things to show, how the industrial culture of the Polar Eski-
mos, solely on the basis of adaptation to the natural geogra-
phical conditions, has attained a considerable height, which is
expressed partly in their apparatus partly in the ‘culture of
the hands”.

With regard to the sociology and psychology of the tribe,
to the understanding of which the myths, folk-lore and fables
collecled and in part published by Knud Rasmussen! will give
an essential contribution, [ shall express myself here quite
briefly.

The high development of individual skill in hunting and
hand-craft has led to a corresponding development of intelli-
gence in practical regards. So long as a situation merely re-
quires jugdment of the natural conditions or of those condi-
tions which lie within their practical experience, we can scarcely
find more intelligent people than the Polar Eskimos or people
with greater ingenuity and powers to get themselves out of
a difficult position. This combined with their hardihood makes
them incomparable helpers in the polar expeditions.

As an example of the Polar Eskimo’s ability to pursue a
line of reasoning, I may cite here an answer which Mylius
Erichsen received from the angakok Sorkrark to his question:
why not a single bear had yet appeared in the neighbourhood

! Nye Mennesker. København 1905. The people of the Polar North
London 1908.
XXXIV, 24

364

of Agpat late in the year. ‘No bears have come because there
is no ice, and there is no ice because there is too much wind,
and there is too much wind because we mortals have offended
the powers’. When Sorkrark’s practical experience fails, he
thus concludes with an anthropomorphism, and he imagined
further, that by means of his gut-skin drum and a Shamanistic
seance, he would be able to find out, why the ‘‘powers” felt
themselves offended, but owing to weakness he was obliged to
give up.

This example illustrates, if I may say so, the animistic
limits of the real comprehension of the Polar Eskimo; they are
wider than is the case with many other nature-peoples. On
the other hand, their horizon is greatly limited in sociological
regards, corresponding to the so primitive nature of their so-
cial organisation. Thus I may mention how extremely little
connected their notions are with regard to the idea of property.
What a man has made for himself is his own property, and
the idea that this right of possession can be transferred to
another has not developed. In their dealings with Europeans
they have, it is true, adapted themselves to a practice in this
direction; but cases are constantly arising which show their
true feelings in the matter. For example, it is impossible for
a European to buy an apparatus of a Polar Eskimo and then
hand it over to another Eskimo; the first will never be able
"to get rid of the idea that it is his property, and he will believe
himself entitled to take the apparatus back, as soon as he
does not wish the other to have the “loan” of it any longer.

Further, | have hitherto mostly laid emphasis on the
purely individualistic traits, which one constantly runs up
against among the Polar Eskimos, and which are so much the
more striking, as one is not accustomed among the more
southerly nature-peoples to meet with such a high individual
development in conjunction with so slight a social develop-
ment. Naturally the life of the Polar Eskimos is not wanting

365

in social features, but everything has contributed to retard the
development of the “society”, so that the tendency to work
and live together, which the Polar Eskimos are certainly also
in possession of, has never had the chance to develop.
Practically the only sort of cooperation or subordinate
kind of sociological formation we can talk of in the case of
the Polar Eskimos, is the settlement; but as this is constantly
on the move, sometimes scattering, sometimes concentrating

Fig. 39.
Scene from a summer settlement (drawn by the Eskimo woman Tukuminguark). To the
left of the tent are seen two persons in conversation; at least one of them is a woman.
To the right a Dane is approaching with his hands in his pockets and behind him an
Eskimo. 5 dogs fastened to a stone are welcoming the new-comers, and a 6th dog is
trying to get up on a depot-pillar with meat on its top. To the left a sledge and on
this, Tukuminguark said, her little son sits playing.

more or less, this unit is not very constant either. The basis
for this periodic meeting together at a settlement is in part
relationship, in part the comradeship of the hunt. On the
other hand, there is no such thing as true alliances or group-
ing according to age, probably on account of the small num-
bers and scattered nature of the tribe; nor are any ceremonies
or forms known on the attainment of maturity.

The feeling of relationship is not small. It expresses it-
self, for example, in greater gentleness towards relatives, in

24*

366

contrast to the absence of sympathy and the sharp criticism,
which the joke-loving Eskimos display towards everything and
everybody not belonging to their own family. The hard struggle
for existence has not permitted the Polar Eskimo to become
other than a confirmed egoist, who knows nothing of dis-
interestedness. Towards his enemies he is crafty and deceitful;
he does not attack them openly, but indulges in back-biting;
he will not meet his deadly enemy face to face, but will shoot
or harpoon him from behind. It is very necessary to remember
that these Polar Eskimos, who are so smilingly gentle and
friendly, even tactful, on meeting, are by no means ideal.

It is only during the hunt that a common interest and a
common danger engenders a deeper feeling of comradeship,
and this may lead to a few of the hunters of about the same
age agreeing to hunt together, journey together and remain at
the same settlement, perhaps even if possible live together in
the same house. If the natural conditions and the dangerous
struggle for existence have prevented the development of a more
solid social organisation, they have led on the other hand to
a kind of comradeship between the unattached and independent
individuals of the male sex. How serious this necessity for
comradeship may be, is shown hy an event of recent years.
The angakok Kajorapaluk (Peary’s Kyoahpadu or Kyo) was a
bad character and a bad comrade, who was always offending
the other members of the tribe in various ways; but what was
specially fatal was, that he was constantly lying and deceiving
them with regard to the hunting. Sometimes he amused him-
self by warning them of bad hunting and consequent famine,
in order to frighten them, sometimes he told them that he had
seen here or there, for example, the white whale or walrus;
but it was always falsehood. At last it became too much for
them; it gradually became the common feeling of the tribe,
that it would be best to get rid of such a troublesome indivi-
dual. He was killed by Uvdloriark and Masaitsiak, two of the

367

best men of the tribe, and the latter married the dead man’s
wife, whom he lives with till this day.

The ‘public opinion” has very great weight among the
Eskimos, and the individual is obliged to give way before it.
It maintains the unwritten laws or regulations, which form
the basis of the training and attitude towards others of every
Polar Eskimo. These fundamental laws are in the main the
same as rule among other Arctic Eskimo tribes. As regards
West Greenland these laws have been discussed by H. Rink,
and in a similar manner as he has done we can formulate
some of the principal rules governing the social life of the
Polar Eskimos.

(1) The requirement that no man except in case of natural
weakness can evade making his own living, and he is still less
permitted to interfere with others or prevent them from making
their living.

(2) The rule that no one can establish himself in a settle-
ment without the permission of those already settled there.

(3) The practice that the spoils of the hunt, when they are
not small, for example not less than a fjord seal among the
Polar Eskimos, are divided partly between those taking part in
the hunt, partly between the natives at the settlement, and
according to definite rules. In times of want the division of
the spoils and of the depots is made even more equal, but at
such times any person who is disliked runs the risk of being
excluded from receiving help.

The man that cannot completely make his own living,
owing to either bodily or mental shortcomings, cannot obtain
a wife and thus is unable to reproduce his kind. Similarly a
hunter who has lost his strength in one way or another, will
also as a rule loose his wife, as she will leave him and seek
for a better provider, if any such will have her. There is no
doubt that this natural selection plays a specially great part in
a small hunting community like the Polar Eskimos’ and it is

368

very probable, that one of the reasons why the Polar Eskimos
are so few in numbers is this, that their hunting life demands
so much strength and intelligence and requires such a high
grade of constant training, that only the very best can persist
in the struggle for life. A related reason for the small numbers
however is also the comparatively great difficulty of obtaining
objects of food, which might serve as “тезегуе” in times of
want; thus in the earlier days especially the Polar Eskimos to
a very great extent lived on the verge of starvation, and their

Fig. 40.
Drawing by the Eskimo woman Arnaruniark, representing the interior of a house, with
4 persons sitting on the main platform; the two outermost are sitting close to the side-
platform on which the lamps are indicated. The window is drawn in front, in the plane
of the paper. To the right of the house is a kneeling person busy stealing meat from a
depot, whilst his comrade is standing and keeping watch, so that no one should come
and surprise them in the act of thieving.

lore and stories bear witness, that families or groups were
not so seldom in want of food or died from the frost. On
such occasions cases of cannibalism have arisen, probably af-
fecting in the first instance the old and the feeble.

Marriage is regarded purely as a condition of property,
and chief weight is laid on the woman being able to work as
also to bear children. In cases of infertility the marriage
bond is very loose and will in many cases be dissolved by
discarding the woman. Special weight is laid on the woman
being able to bear the male children or the future hunters;
but the scarcity of women at the present time has led to their

369

having a more protected position than before. It has further
led to the woman being married at a much earlier age than
previously, even so early as 12—13 years, though she is said
not to develop appreciably earlier than the European woman.
On the other hand, the men do not marry before they are
fully developed hunters, that is, about twenty years of age or
more. At present there is said to be only one man in the
tribe who has 2 wives. The well-known Eskimo system of
exchanging wives is carried out under festive ceremonies and
is also a custom of practical importance; for example, if a man
wishes to undertake a journey and his wife for one reason or
another is unable to accompany him, the matter can be ar-
ranged by making an interim exchange with another man whose
wife has no such hindrances. Nevertheless, the Polar Eskimos
are to be reckoned among the nature-peoples of good morals;
a woman is judged very strictly if she gives herself away to
any other but her own husband, unless he commands her to
do so, and in their relations to strangers it is exceptional that
a man offers his wife in order to gain something by it.

When the Polar Eskimos are face to face with cases in
which the settled ‘“‘public opinion” cannot at once decide the
matter, or where a difficult case of sickness or want arises,
the “‘angakok” is called in to clear up the problem by exorcism.
In religious matters the Polar Eskimos relies exclusively on
the ‘‘angakok”, who by his art and genius and his conjura-
tions is supposed to make himself master over the powers
which rule over life and death, sickness and strength, weather
and the animals of the hunt. Knud Rasmussen’ once obtained
a characteristic answer from a Polar Eskimo: ‘‘We do not be-
lieve in any God as you do. We do not all understand the
things that are hid, but those who say, that they understand,
them we believe in. We believe in our ‘‘angakut” (plural of

1 Nye Mennesker. pp. 136—137.

370

angakok), in our conjurers, and we believe in them because we
wish to live long, and because we do not wish to run the risk
of famine. We believe for the sake of our lives and for the
sake of our food. If we did not believe in our priests, the
animals we hunt would not be apparent to us; if we did not
follow their advice we should become sick and die”.

Whilst in secular matters a chieftainship or a differentiated
social organism has never developed, the Polar Eskimos in
religious regards come under a leadership of developed Shama-
nism and are thus in so far a step further advanced in religious
than in sociological matters. This is certainly connected with
the fact, that they have to struggle almost exclusively against
nature and the misfortunes arising from the forces of nature,
whereas they have not known what it is to be obliged to fight
for themselves and their hunting-districts against hostile tribes.

The considerable communication which has existed be-
tween the last generations and expeditions has not failed to
influence the Polar Eskimos in regard to their views of the
world and the hidden powers. They now know that there are
many and densely populated lands in addition to their own.
And they no longer believe so directly in all the spirits, ‘‘tor-
narssuit”, they ascribe to all the localities — house-floor, space
behind the skin-walls, the lamp, house-entrance, refuse-heap
in front of the entrance, the fells, the sea — from which they
have special opportunities of receiving impressions and moods,
or in other words, to nearly everything for which they have
names. In earlier days they were afraid of these spirits and
believed that they had no good-will towards men. Now they
are somewhat more superior in these matters, though the be-
lief in spirits is by no means extinct’.

I am so fortunate as to be able to give an actual illus-
tration of the more open mind with regard to these matters

1 cf. Knud Rasmussen: Nye Mennesker, p. 148.

371

at the present day. Fig. 41 is reproduced from a drawing due
to the collaboration of Arnaruniark and her husband Samik.
Arnaruniark first drew a fully loaded sledge, with 6 dogs har-
nessed to it, meaning that it was her husband who was return-
ing home from a successful hunt. Then Samik himself drew
a “‘tornarssuk” in between the traces of the dogs, meaning in
jest that it was harnessed to the heavy sledge. Samik himself
is seen standing with the whip in his outstretched right hand
ready to strike at the ‘“tornarssuk”, but Arnaruniark standing

Fig. 41.
The “tornarssuk” fastened to the sledge (drawn by Samik).

behind with the child in the amaut takes hold of his arm to
keep him back. After obtaining this explanation from Samik I
asked him, if he had seen a ‘‘tornarssuk”. He replied no, he
had never seen him, but he had often heard him among the
fells.

It may be remarked expressly, that both this and the other
figures reproduced, with hardly any exception, were not drawn
by request; the subjects were chosen quite freely by the Polar
Eskimos. After I had got one person to make a drawing,
there were many willing to do so, and I only required to give

372

the one or the other a drawing-book and a pencil for a day,
and then have it returned with a couple of drawings of their
own making. Some of them could sit for hours and draw with
a seriousness, which showed that the work interested and oc-
cupied them. Others I saw asking the opinion of the sur-
rounding Eskimos, whether this or that position was quite
correct, whether the arm was held so far back on swinging
the whip and so on. Most of the drawings reproduced here
have been reduced. The explanatory text is based on informa-
tion, which I sought in every case to obtain as fully as possible
by means of the interpreter.

In the foregoing I have mentioned the feeling of kinship,
the comradeship in the hunt, the public opinion and institution
of the angakok as the most important, active forces in the
primitive Polar Eskimo community. Lastly, a couple of prac-
tical statutes were mentioned. But there are others factors,
however, which contribute to form the ideas and proceedings
of the Polar Eskimos. These are the stories and fables of the
tribe, which it has in common with other Eskimo tribes, but
in well-marked characteristic variations to an extent which has
not yet been sufficiently investigated. Some of these stories
and fables are purely descriptive and give an answer to one or
other question, for example, the creation of the world; but
others contain a rule of life or sketch supernaturally capable
hunters or great angakoks, who may stand as examples or types
worthy of imitation.

Lastly, there is a number of traditional customs and forms,
which have a regulating and determining influence in many
conditions of life. There are somewhat complicated customs
with regard to confinement and burial, and there are occasions
which require the prohibition of definite kinds of food and
certain actions. On the other hand, there are no special cere-
monies with regard to marriage. Further, amulets and con-
juring formulae are used in certain situations. In regard to

373

these things the Polar Eskimos do not exact the precise, well-
founded understanding as in the case of the actions which
have to do with earning their livelihood. They are carried out
simply because they have been prescribed in this way in the
old traditions, the origin of which is lost in the dim past.

We touch here on an interesting point, namely, the rela-
tion between their absolute, social freedom on the one side
and their dependence on tradition on the other. The Polar
Eskimo is his own master in everything he does, and he per-
mits no interference from others. He will only take up some-
thing new when it has been shown to him in such a manner,
that his desire to imitate has been roused. On the other
hand, if he is accustomed to do anything, he continues to
do it owing to man’s natural inertia, even after the rea-
soning has been forgotten. Even after such a tradition has
lost its practical significance, indeed after it has come into
conflict with practical interests, it may still be retained as a
survival or remnant.

The cultural history of the Polar Eskimos has in fact
shown examples of such survivals, which stand in direct con-
flict with the interests of the tribe. I may recall here firstly,
how they had earlier failed to hunt the reindeer, though their
neighbourhood was sometimes teeming with these animals, which
for most other Eskimos constitute such an important part of
the hunt. Further, how they did not fish for the salmon,
though they had the opportunity of observing every year, at
least in one lake at Etah, the great abundance of this fish,
which is also of importance for most other Eskimos. The
same thing applies to their ignorance of the kayak. There
can be no doubt that these cultural shortcomings must be
regarded as survivals of traditions from the time that the
Polar Eskimos lived under conditions, when the hunting of
the reindeer and the fishing for salmon had to be given up for
natural reasons.

374

How the folk-lore of the Polar Eskimos, their fables, forms,
customs, amulets, stand in relation to corresponding pheno-
mena among other Eskimo tribes, and how far their origin
can be traced back to other cultures and races of people, need
not be further discussed here. I may simply mention, that in
various cases we can still detect sometimes a natural instance
of adaptation, sometimes a simple analogy, under the influence
of which the custom has been formed. Reasoning by analogy
seems especially to play a
great part, a superficial point
of resemblance becoming
determinative of the whole
matter; for example, when
the women make up the soot
scraped from the bottom of

the cooking-pot into an amu-
let sewed into their neck-
band (Fig. 30), following the
reasoning, that lamp-soot is

Fig. 42.
Two women in conversation and a dog; stronger than the fire itself,
scene from the settlement (drawn by the
Eskimo woman Alakrasina). The woman
to the left has the hood of the outer
pelt drawn up over the head; the woman

as the fire has not been able
to destroy the soot, and con-

to the right has a child in the ‘“amaut” sequently that the lamp-sootis
and the loose, helmet-shaped hood on x
а the strongeststuff in the world

and able to give protection.

The method of reasoning of the Eskimos gives us the impres-
sion of being very superficial, because they are not accustomed to
retain what we call a definite line of reasoning or a single, isolated
subject for any length of time; their thoughts, namely, do not rise
to abstractions, or logical formulae, but keep to pictures, of ob-
servation or situations, which change according to laws we find it
difficult to follow. Their ability to draw is evidence of the nature of
this mode of thinking, as also their power of their own accord to
choose subjects for reproduction, in spite of the fact, that they never

375

draw, either on their implements or on natural objects. The
choice of subject does not seem to offer them the least diffi-
culty; it seemed to be natural, that as soon as they set the
pencil to paper, some one or other favourite mental picture,
which was extraordinarily clear to them, should begin to ap-
pear. In agreement with this also, it was chiefly the women
who drew house-apparatus and scenes from the settlement,
whilst the men chose to represent animals and scenes of the
hunt. One motive which both sexes have shown a predilec-
tion for, is a woman with a child in the ‘‘amaut”. Samik has
even drawn in one figure (fig. 43) a pregnant
woman, who at the same time carries a child in
the amaut. For Samik this situation represents
the acme of desirable fertility.

These drawings of the Polar Eskimos, a-
mong whom drawing is not a traditional exer-
cise, but is the occasional unfolding of a latent

talent, the presence of which is connected partly

with the special mode of thinking, partly with = ing
15. 45.
the “culture of the hands”, may be compared Pregnant woman
with child in the
“amaut” (drawn by

has been practised for generations, so that the Эа.

with drawings of nature-peoples, where drawing

art has already come under the influence of tradition. As ex-
ample the bushmen may be cited. We then see that there is
no difference in the power to conceive and reproduce, which
the Polar Eskimos display with regard to animals and to people.
These are reproduced in a manner which bears witness to an
almost equally sharp power of observation in both cases. This
seems to show, that the well-known tendency among other
hunting-peoples, accustomed to draw, to reproduce animals
better than men, is not due to the lack of observation of men,
but rather on the contrary to the fact, that the man’s figure
being easiest to recognize is the more readily subject to sim-
plification. Just as with the Polar Eskimos, the nature-peoples

376

do not draw in order to attain any high artistic level; they are
satisfied when it can be seen what their intention is.

With regard to the animals, the Polar Eskimos seem to
share the view prevailing among nature-peoples, that there is
no great line of division between the life and intelligence of
men and animals. As Karl v. d. Steinen expresses it, man is
rather to be regarded as primus inter pares than as an exist-
ence which is elevated high above or beyond ordinary living
things. The most intelligent of all the animals is the bear,
and the soul of the slain bear is also the most dangerous to
men; certain rules of precaution must therefore be taken, to
prevent the bear from returning to take revenge. These hunt-
ing customs are most developed and most comprehensive in
regard to the bear, but corresponding ideas exist to less extent
in the case of other animals.

The views and feeling of the Polar Eskimos with regard
to life are not refined by any kind of poetry or artistic tenden-
cies. If the translations of their folk-lore and tales into a
European language seem to give an impression of poetry, it is
we who read this into them. For the Polar Eskimos life is
deadly real and sober, a constant striving for food and warmth,
which is borne with good humour and all dispensations are
accepted as natural consequences, about which it is of no use
to reason or complain. Death also is accepted with the greatest
fortitude and occupies their daily thoughts to an extremely small
extent.

As already mentioned, the struggle for existence has been
made easier for the Polar Eskimos in our days owing to the
improved apparatus, even though it may still happen, as for
example in February 1903, that a considerable number of
individuals may perish — in the case referred to, half a score
perished on a journey over a glacier at Nerkré. The tribe now
has almost a flourishing appearance, and we now find, cer-
tainly in consequence of this greater prosperity, that the use-

371

less old people and cripples are maintained by the tribe year
in year out. In another matter, however, the conditions have
not permitted them to display humanity; this is in the case
of small children whose mother has died. They are killed by
the father, as he finds it impossible to obtain nourishment. for
them, unless quite exceptionally there may happen to be a
woman able to foster them in the settlement.

The Polar Eskimos have very little notion of time. No one
knows his own age. Even the age of the children can only
be given by the parents after they have sat down and calcu-
lated how many winters have passed since the child was born.
Except for the light period, the year is divided according to
the moons, each of which has its own peculiar name. During
the light period it seems to be chiefly the migration of the
birds which gives definite points for the determination of time.
The days passed, е. 5. on a journey, can only approximately be
given according to the number of times they have slept. Shorter
periods may be indicated, for example, by showing how great
a distance the sun will travel across the sky or, if the sun is
not to be seen, would travel in the time thought of. But we
must remember here, that these statements are chiefly made
in conversation with Europeans and in answer to their quest-
ions; for the Polar Eskimos themselves, the reckoning of time
has not the slightest importance.

Another matter is, that the change of the seasons seems to
have a fairly considerable influence on their temperament and
moods. А peculiar form of hysteria, more frequent among
women than men, is said to be strikingly common late in the
autumn, when the winter darkness is just coming on. Such
attacks, which last for some few minutes to about half an hour,
may however also appear at other times of the year, caused
by a sudden fright or other unusual mental shock. In July
1909 I was witness of such an attack in the woman Inadtliak
(fig. 30). It lasted 25 minutes. She sat on the ground with

378

the legs stretched out, swaying her body to and fro, sometimes
rapidly sometimes more slowly, from side to side and tortuous-
ly, whilst she kept her hands comparatively still and only now
and then moved her elbows in to her sides. She stared out
in front of her quite regardless of the surroundings, and sang
or screamed, occasionally changing the tone, iah-iah-iaha-ha.. .;
now and then she interjected a sentence, е. 5. that now the
Danish had at last come to them, and again the great happi-
ness this gave her now in the glad summer-time and so on.
Her two small children sat and played about her, whilst the
members of the tribe scarcely looked at her during the attack;
they seemed io be very well acquainted with such things. She
recovered quite suddenly and only some hectic, red spots on
her cheeks indicated anything unusual. Without so much as
looking about her or betraying a sign of anything unusual she
began, literally in the same moment, to give her youngest
child milk and then went quietly on to chew a skin. Accord-
ing to Knud Rasmussen’s experience this attack was com-
paratively mild; in other cases the sick person may have a
lust for destruction, and men frequently become very dangerous
to their surroundings.

The songs of the Polar Eskimos strike one as being very
monotonous especially in the beginning, but they improve on
closer knowledge, and according to Chr. Leden! they are of
very considerable musical interest from the historical side. The
rule is, that every man or woman who has the ability to sing
— for there are also unmusical Polar Eskimos, just as there
were a few who said that they had no notion how to draw —
themselves make up the melodies or ‘‘songs without words”,
which they sing. It is the exception for any one to sing the
melodies of others. I shall not express any opinion here as
to the difference between the songs of the men and the women;

1 On p. 267, line 12, Chr. Refsaas should also be Chr. Léden.

379

both are without words, but now and then a phrase may be woven
into them. In regard to voices, there is a great difference
between the roaring, open-air voices of the men and the thin,
somewhat soft speech and tones of the women, which speak
of adaptation to the business of the house and marriage
subjection.

The principal time when they sing is during the dark period,
and the real singers are the angakoks, who sing to the accom-
paniment of the beating of a small stick on the frame of the
gut-skin drum, which is of the same kind but on the whole
smaller than among other Eskimo tribes. In the beginning of
August 1909 I was present at an actual musical entertainment
at Umanark given by two angakoks, Masaitsiak and Ajorsalik.
At midnight the sun had already begun to go down behind the
mountains on the north side of Wolstenholm Sound, so that
there was a couple of hours twilight. On a night of this kind
Napsanguark had invited his kinsmen to a feast consisting of
a rotten seal, which had been caught on the spring-ice and
had since then lain in the depot to become rotten in the course
of the summer.

In front of Napsanguark’s tent a sledge was set up on end,
resting on the uprights, and a skin was hung between the tent
and the sledge, so as to give some shelter against the coolish
wind from the west. The seal was laid on the ground right
in the corner between this skin and the front of the tent. It
had just been cut open and the blubber had been removed and
placed on one side. The flesh lay swimming in the blood on
the skin and in the opened abdomen. The men stood or sat
round about, and now and then they reached forward to the
food and cut themselves a lump of the rotten flesh and stuffed
it into their mouths. The women and children, who kept
mostly inside the tent, also came forward now and then to
obtain their share, and the children especially looked quite
wild as they ran about with their faces all covered with blood.

XXXIV. 25

380

The smell of the rotten flesh was soon very unpleasant, but
one quickly became accustomed to it. Laughter and cheer-
fulness prevailed.

After the feast was over, Knud Rasmussen was successful
in persuading Masaitsiak and Ajorsalik to sing. They placed
themselves inside the densely packed tent, opposite one another
on the floor in front of the opening, and began their preparations.
But these took up some time, as they were both obviously
nervous. Like European virtuosi they complained that there
were various things which prevented their doing themselves
justice. It was too light and there were too few people, said
Masaitsiak. According to European taste there were already
far too many in the small space; but the Eskimos like best of
all to pack themselves so close together on the platform and
the floor in front, that one can hardly move.

At last Masaitsiak began to sing, beating the drum at the

same time: ‘...iah-iah-iah-ah-iah-ah-aha ...”, all still without
a word, and now and then the whole company joined in with
some tones as chorus. He kept his eyes closed the whole time,
and Ajorsalik later did the same thing. The expression of the
face gradually altered to the mood of the song, and the face
appeared to be turned more and more upwards. At the same
time he began to dance. This means, that the soles of the
feet remained firmly planted at the same spot, but the knees
bent and the body swung and turned on the hips. The different
movements were neither strong nor violent, and they were com-
bined, with constant changing of the manner, almost like the
few tones of the song. The drum was used at the same time,
being held in the left hand and beaten with more and more
force. So long as Masaitsiak sang and danced, he gave himself
up to it entirely and his whole body and all his movements
expressed the feeling of the song and dance. Ajorsalik stood
the whole time in front of him with a small stick ca. 15 cm
long in the hand. At the moment when Masaitsiak was about

381

to end his first song, Ajorsalik held up the stick between the
thumbs and forefingers of both hands, perpendicularly in front
of his face, and shook it rapidly from side to side with the
upper (right) hand, as if there were something that should be
shaken loose. As if waking up, with a gasp for breath and
quick nod of the head, Masaitsiak returned from his transport
to ordinary life, both he and Ajorsalik crying: “... waeih-waeih-
eh-eh...”. This performance was repeated at the end of every
song by one of the singers.

Masaitsiak sang again 3 or 4 times before Ajorsalik began
and his condition of ecstasy increased each time. The song
became stronger and the movements more violent and more
rapid; one quite forgot that it was the old, simple man whom
I had so often seen sitting and dozing over some hand-work
or another. Ajorsalik’s songs were feebler and his dancing
and beating of the drum much less imposing. He also sang
4—5 times, and then Masaitsiak began again, and in this way
thev relieved one another several times, until — not the sin-
gers, for they can keep it up for nights, once they have come
into the spirit of the thing — but the listeners, especially the
Europeans, became tired and got them to break off.

Fig. 44—59. Different figures of animals, of which figs. 44—
48 and 50—51 were drawn by Miterk, fig. 49 by Samik and
fig. 52 by the Eskimo woman Kagssäluk. Fig. 44 represents the
bearded seal, 45 the fjord seal, 46 the walrus, 47 the hare, 48 the
narwhal, 49 and 52 the dog, 50 the white whale (Beluga) and 51
the polar bear.

Figs. 53 —65. Different apparatus; figs. 53, 58, 60, 62, 63 and
64 were drawn by the Eskimo woman Tukuminguark, figs. 54, 56
57, 59 and 61 by the Eskimo girl Arnanguak, fig. 65 by Samik.
Fig. 55 was the only one of the figures given, which was drawn
at my direct request and from an available model; the figure re-
presents Kagssaluk’s blubber-lamp, and she drew it while sitting at
her place on the platform with the lamp standing on the side-plat.
form, the least curved side being turned towards herself; but she

25*

382

drew the reflection of the lamp with the strongest curved side down-
most. Fig. 53 is a ulo of a form which is said to be most used in
eating to cut off the meat in front of the lips, fig. 54 is a blubber-
lamp, 56 a cooking-vessel, 57 two tents seen from the side, 58 and
61 ulos for working with skins, 59 a skin-scraper, 60 a snow-knife,
62 poker for the lamp, 63 meat-tray, 64 drying-frame, 65 an
inspanned sledge, on which some individuals and children are sit- |
ting resting, and on the uprights of which is coiled a line of
seal’s hide.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.]

Fig. 44—52.

XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.]

Medd. om Gronl.

УП.

Daring our stay at North Star Bay I also made some
anthropological observations and measurements, in which 1
followed the methods taught by Professor F. v. Luschan of
Berlin.

_ As I only met with a small portion of the tribe, however,
— partly because so many of them were with Peary in the
Polar Sea — I shall not enter here upon a general account of
the anthropology of the Polar Eskimos, but restrict myself to
some of the main points in the observations along with the
photographs taken by me. At this moment also, there is less
reason for going too deeply into the subject, as the extensive
work on the anthropology of Greenland prepared by C. M. First
and F. C. C. Hansen is just about to be published.

When we get over the first impression of distaste towards
their dirtiness and less pleasant smell, the Polar Eskimos have
in reality a pleasing exterior and are specially remarkable for
their well-proportioned structure and fine, small hands and feet.
Those I met were on the whole small, but there are not a few
men in the tribe who are above the average height. It is said
that those who are descended from the Ponds Inlet Eskimos
belong to the tallest in the tribe. The men especially are very
muscular, but as both the men and the women must be con-
sidered as well-covered, their musculature is not very pronounced
or marked. The health seemed to be extremely good.

From the racial standpoint the first impression one obtains
of the tribe, when one comes from the more southerly West

384

Greenland, is almost one of surprise. For it seems indeed to
be quite a different race. In West Greenland we are accustomed
to regard the Eskimos’ racial character as distinctly ‘“Mongolian”,
and up here the Mongolian type is little in evidence in com-
parison with another type, which may provisionally be called
“Indian”, in spite of the fact, that it also occurs in North-Asia
and that it is not so marked as in the traditional, extreme
Indian type. It is a type which is much less separated from
the European than the Mongolian is, and I have a very strong
impression that the reason why the existence of this type in
West Greenland is almost entirely overlooked is, not only that
the Mongolian type is perhaps predominant, but also that these
non-Mongolian individuals have been unintentionally considered
as mixed-European more than they really are.

The Polar Eskimos resemble more the Central Eskimo tribes
on the mainland, for example, the Netchillik Eskimos!, than the
West Greenlanders to the south. Probably the natives in the
Upernivik district form a transition, however, as is pointed out
by Soren Hansen”. The same author” also shows, that the
so-called Mongolian racial characters, namely, the low nose,
oblique eyes, flat face, broad and big cheek-bones etc., are
more prominent in the women than in the men of West Green-
land. Exactly the same condition is found among the Polar
Eskimos.

The colour of the skin is not so variable individually as
is the case in West Greenland. This applies for the rest to
practically all characters and is evidence, that the tribe is un-
mixed or at least only in very little degree mixed with European
elements. Even in the generation which is growing up, there are
but few exceptions to this rule. The skin has always a yellowish
ground-colour, but this may appear in various modifications in

1 ef. Roald Amundsen, Nordvest-Passagen. Kristiania 1907.
2 Bidrag til Vestgronlandenes Antropologi. Meddel. om Grønland. Vol. 7.
С.

385

the same individuals. On the covered parts of the body it is
as a rule yellowish-white, whereas on the face and especially
on the cheeks it changes over to reddish-brown or copper-
coloured. To the touch the skin is soft and somewhat oily.
The so-called ‘‘Mongolian spot” is present; I observed one
6 cm long and 3cm broad on a 13 months old child; it lay
over the sacro-lumbar region along the vertebral column with
a slight asymmetry to the right side.

All the individuals have dark-brown or brown eyes. In a
single case the colour of the eyes was nearly brownish black,
and in one older individual the iris was somewhat spread out,
so that the colour was almost light-brown. The opening of
the eyes was in most cases fairly even, but in several it
could be noticed, that the upper eyelid descended very far
down at the inner corner, so that this curved downwards
at a sharp angle. The whole opening of the eye might thus
appear somewhat oblique, though it in no case attained the
most distinct form of the oblique Mongolian eye.

The colour of the hair did not differ appreciably in any case
from the pure black. Even the old Krulé only had some few
scattered gray hairs. The hair is smooth and coarse, but with a
tendency to be slightly wavy. It grows strongly and in quantities,
and no tendency was observed to baldness. The early loss of
hair, which the West Greenland cause by their tightly bound
hair-top, does not occur among the Polar Eskimos, as the hair
is here worn more loosely. One woman, the young Arnanguak,
was an exception in having such short hair that it could not
be bound up in “chignon”, but hung loose. The greatest
length of hair I observed in any of the men was 48 cm; the
rule was about 40cm. There was but slight growth of a beard,
and this was further reduced by the habit of pulling out the
hairs of the beard, as the ice which forms in it in winter is
extremely troublesome and dangerous.

The faces are broad and are chiefly characterized by the

386

strong cheek-bones and the broad, muscular lower jaw. The
length of the face is here measured from the root of the nose
to the chin; but if we consider the whole length of the face
from the beginning of the hair to the chin, its form becomes
on the whole a broad oval. The painter Moltke’ states, that
they have ‘‘smooth faces. The features are like those of a
child. The lines quiet and round. It is as if a smoothing
hand ‘‘has passed over them” and thus produced a beneficial
peacefulness and greatness in the lines — but also sometimes
taken away something of the character”.

The form of the nose is fairly constant. The root is not
specially depressed and the nose itself projects distinctly forward
and has a straight and comparatively long ridge. There is not
seldom an inconsiderable prominence, which gives the nose a
tendency to be aquiline. The tip of the nose may be a little
hanging. The breadth is not great, but in the case of a few
women with the broadest faces, e. g. Inadtliak, the nostrils were
somewhat distended, so that they appeared slightly broader
than high.

The teeth are fine and strong and form regular rows almost
always. It is well-known how they are greatly worn down, and
it is a common view among anthropologists, that the woman's
skull can be distinguished from the man’s among the Polar
Eskimos by the fact, that the teeth in the former are most
worn, due to the work of chewing skins done by the women.
It is quite possible that the women’s teeth become on the whole
somewhat more worn than the men’s in the course of time; but
that the difference in the amount should be so great and obvious,
that we could use it with any certainty to distinguish the sexes,
I think I can safely deny.

The men certainly do not chew skins; but they use the
teeth for so many different kinds of work and almost always

À Mylius Erichsen og Moltke, 1. с., р. 592.

387

with hard materials, that their teeth have good opportunities
of becoming worn. Both in the men and the women the inci-
sors are more worn than the molars, and of the latter the first
two molars are often the most worn. In the old Masaitsiak
the front teeth were so much worn, that the new growth of
dentine in the pulp took up a great part of the plane, worn
surface; on the molars both the cusps and the hollows were
worn, so that all the enamel had disappeared except along the
edge. According to the scale set up by Broca for degrees of
wornness, these teeth were thus in the 4t* or extreme stage.
In the old woman Krulé the stumps remaining did not show
any greater degree of wornness than in Masaitsiak. In the 50
year old woman Kiajuk the front teeth were worn down a good
deal into the pulp; the first molar teeth were in the 3 stage,
as the chewing surface was just worn level; on the wisdom
tooth, however, the cusps were not yet worn. In the ca. 35
year old Samik the pulp could be seen in the front teeth, and
the cusps were already worn down on the molars. In the ca.
30 year old woman Tukuminguark the pulp was not yet bare
in the front teeth, and the molars had not yet been worn quite
level. In the scarcely 30 year old man Manigssok the pulp of
the front teeth could already be seen, whilst the molars were
perhaps a little less worn than was the case with Tukumingu-
ark, who was about the same age. In the 20 year old man
Miterk facets had just begun to appear on the front teeth, but
distinct facets had not yet been worn on the enamel of the
molars. The unmarried girl Arnanguak, who was ca. 16 years
old, was at exactly the same stage, whilst the ca. 18 year old,
married woman Akutak also had distinct facets on the molars.
Thus, individual differences certainly occur in the amount the
teeth are worn, so that it is impossible to base general rules
for the wear of the teeth in men and women on so few examples;
but I think that the above observations are sufficient to prove
my contention, that the teeth of the men are also greatly worn.

388

The outer ear is fairly small in the Polar Eskimos and
symmetrically rounded. The lobe is in some cases faintly
indicated, but is wanting in most, so that the lower margin of
the ear is directly attached to the head. The so-called Darwin
point is but little apparent.

The form of the skull is far from being subject to such
great variations as would be the case in Denmark in a similar
number of individuals. The differences occurring are not so
great, that they cannot be regarded perhaps as variations of
one and the same typical form. This form is characterized by
a narrow, somewhat weakly arched forehead, and by a rising
crown which furthest back slopes down towards the occipital
bone, which is somewhat prominent. It is a form which greatly
resembles the common, long-skull form in Europe, and the
breadth-length indices found are also evidence of distinct doli-
chocephaly, which for the rest was already well-known for the
Polar Eskimo skulls. It is also the same form which by some
anthropologists is named the palæasiatic.

Apart from pulling out the beard, no kind of deformation
occurs. Nor is it the custom or use to tattoo. Only a single
one of the persons observed had tattoo markings. This was
the woman Tukuminguark who by means of soot, thread and
a needle had produced some few marks on her skin. Thus
she had 4 quite small spots in a row on the left forearm. On
the upper part of each breast she had a couple of larger, pa-
rallel streaks, but the operation was only to some extent suc-
cessful on the left breast. On asking why she had tattooed
herself, she only returned an uncertain answer, that she had
seen something of the kind. This has probably been among
the last-living of the Ponds Inlet immigrants, in the mother
tribe of which tattooing is a traditional custom. Tukuming-
uark’s few, casual and quite formless tattoo marks are thus
to be regarded as an unorganised offshoot of an organised

tradition.

389

The following table brings together some of the principal
anthropolugical measurements on the men and women. The
first three columns give respectively the total height, the height
in a sitting position (measured from the board sat upon) and
the spread of the arms in cm. The two following columns give
the length and breadth of the head in mm, from which the
index cephalicus has been calculated and given in column 6.
The last two columns contain similarly the length and breadth
of the face in mm.

Height | Spread | Length | Breadth | Index | Length | Breadth
Height |insitting| of of of cepha- of of
position | arms head head licus face face
Men; La a 7
Masaitsiak .... | 156 80 156 | 200 158 79 124 | 154
SAMIR ne. 163 83 161 205 155 76 128 |! 152
Napsanguark .. | 162 84 15%) | 1198 154 80 133 | 151
Uvdloriark .... | 159 89 155 | 200 155 77,5 | 124 | 150
Itsukusuk .... | 158 83 159 | 189 145 17 128 136
ес. 152 82 152 195 1650 81 130 | 153
Manigssok .... | 156 82 154 .| 196 | 150 a 127 22147
Мет 325) 158 77 150192 148 U0 113 138
Women:

Kiajuk ee ace 146 ts) 143 186 151 81 115 145
Tukuminguark. | 150 80 145 | 190 | 144 76 118 | 145
Alakrasina .... | 149 79 1419| 1927 esos TE 123 | 140
Arnaruniark .. | 145 80 144 | 197 152 7 115 | 146
Akutak "7 143 he 141 189 143 76 112 | 136
Säwuak ...... 143 76 139 181 145 80 117 140
Kruléwick aces 142 75 138 180 146 81 121 143
Kagssäluk .... | 145 19 144 | 179 137 tit 123. | 134
Inadtliak ..... 146 79 145 | 197 146 74 119 147
Arnanguak.... | 145 | 77 143 | 185 | 149 81 120 | 139

In the following figures 66—89, protraits are given of all the
adult Polar Eskimos measured, with exception of Kagssaluk and
Inadtliak, whose photographs are given earlier, as also of the ca.
16 year old girl Arnanguak, who is daugther of Napsanguark and
still unmarried, for the reason, so it was said, that she is not

390

beautiful, chiefly owing to her short hair, which is considered very
ugly among the Eskimos; her photograph was not successful.

Figs. 66—67. Masaitsiak — ca. 55 years old; one of the
greatest angakoks of the tribe. He is sitting on the chair I used
for the anthropological measurements.

Figs. 68—69. Ajorsalik — ca. 40; a little of an angakok.
At my request he has taken off his sealskin pelt and birdskin shirt
to be photographed.

Figs. 70—71. Samik or Anjudtluk — ca. 35; very intelligent
and one of the best hunters and cleverest handworkers of the
tribe. The hair is bound up in a peculiar method, otherwise
never used.

Figs. 72—73. Napsanguark — ca. 45; he is wearing the
hair-band typical for the Polar Eskimo men.

Fig. 74. Uvdloriark — ca. 35; his wife is Kagssäluk, whose
photograph is given in figs. 81—39.

Fig. 75. Itsukusuk — ca. 24; son of Masaitsiak. Along with
Uvdloriark he occupied the largest and best tent in Umanark (cf.
ferrand 22):

Fig. 76. Ihre — ca. 35; he is wearing skin gloves.

Fig. 77. Manigssok — ca. 28; he is married to the already
photographed Inadtliak (fig. 30), who may be ca. 24 years old.

Fig. 78—79. Miterk — ca. 20; brother of Itsukusuk and son
of Masaitsiak. He was the only one unmarried of the men men-
tioned. |

Figs. 80 —81. Kiajuk — са. 50; now married to Masaitsiak.

Figs. 82—83. Tukuminguark — ca. 30; married to Ajorsalik
and mother of 4 children, of whom 2 are boys.

Figs. 84—85. Alakrasina — ca. 40; married to Ihre and in
this marriage mother to a 5 years old boy, Kalé.

Fig. 86. Arnaruniark — са. 21; married to Samik and
mother of a 3 years old boy, Umark, who is standing furthest to
the left in front of his mother in fig. 90.

Fig. 87. Akutak — ca. 18; married to Itsukusuk and still
without children. She is wearing a foxskin pelt.

Fig. 88. Sdwuak — ca. 40; married to Napsanguark and
daughter of Krulé. She is carrying a child in the amaut.

Fig. 89. Krulé — ca. 65; widow, cf. fig. 18 and p. 325.
She is wearing a foxskin pelt.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.]

Fig. 68.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.]

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.)

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.]

391

Fig. 90. Adults and children in front of a tent at Umanark.
All the grown-up men and women are wearing sealskin pelts with
exception of Inadtliak and Masaitsiak, who are standing together in
the centre of the picture and both of whom have birdskin shirt or
inner pelt. Inadtliak’s is specially light as it is quite new (cf. p. 339).
To the left 3 small boys are standing in front of their mother,
with bearskin trousers like the adult men. The mother farthest to
the left is Arnaruniark with the loose, helmet-shaped hat on her
head.

Fig. 91. Group of children from Umanark.

VINE:

It was in the year 1818 that the Polar Eskimos first entered
into the light of history, and important and interesting changes
in their culture have occurred since that time. As the years
which have been of special importance for the cultural history
of the Polar Eskimos, during the hundred years that have nearly
passed, may be named ca. 1862—1863, 1891, 1904 and 1909.

At the date mentioned in the sixties the visiting Eskimos
from Ponds Inlet taught them the use of the forgotten apparatus
the kayak, the bow and arrow, as also the method of fishing
for salmon. 1891 was the year of Peary’s first visit. In 1904
a Danish expedition showed them the way over the ice of
Melville Bay, and since then the Polar Eskimos annually make
trading visits to the Danish trading posts in the district of
Upernivik. In 1909 a permanent Danish Mission Station was
settled in their country.

The history of the Polar Eskimos before 1818 is shrouded
in the deepest mystery. Where did they come from? What
other Eskimo tribe is their nearest kin?

From the West Greenland Eskimos they have been separated
geographically and culturally, and they seem to be so even in
regard to physical type. The attitude of the two tribes towards
one another, which has been partly one of avoidance partly of
direct hostility, also shows that they have not maintained any
visiting or family relations with one another throughout the
years, but that they have ignored one another’s existence if
they chanced to meet on the ice of Melville Bay.

393

The Polar Eskimos are at the least just as different from
their nearest neighbours on the other side of Baffin Bay, the
Ponds Inlet Eskimos, and it is quite impossible to think, that
they could have been directly transplanted from North Baffin
Land to Smith Sound. In addition to differences in apparatus
and dress we have also the evidence that the Polar Eski-
mos were not reindeer hunters. In Baffin Land the reindeer
hunting is of very great importance, and the Ponds Inlet
Eskimos have also always been keen hunters of this animal.
When Me Clintock met Kridlarssuark and his little band on
the east side of North Devon in 1858, the only thing they
had to complain about was that there was no reindeer in that
country.

To this must be added, that the nearest route from the
Ponds Inlet district to Smith Sound, namely, along the east
coast of North Devon and Ellesmere Land, is not of such
a nature, that it specially tempts the Eskimos to migrate.
Kridlarssuark’s migration is certainly a typical Eskimo migration
in regard to the mode of travelling and the period of time used,
but it is quite otherwise in regard to its motive. He and his
band did not journey because new hunting-places enticed them
further and further away, but — as is expressly stated — be-
cause they wished to seek the people the whalers had spoken
about as living further north along the coast, of whose existence
also they certainly had seen material signs, when the whalers
came to Ponds Inlet after visiting Cape York a short time be-
fore. The route followed, along the Ellesmere coast, is namely
not the least inviting to the Eskimos, as has already been
mentioned in this paper. The unfortunate fate of the returning
Ponds Inlet Eskimos in their attempt to get back the same
way, is indeed also witness that the country is not favour-
able to human life. Nor do there seem to be any ruins
of Eskimo houses on the east coast of Ellesmere Land,
from the mouth of Jones Sound towards Cape Isabella, except

394

some few more recent houses, which are said to be known
to the Polar Eskimos as having been built by Kridlarssuark
and his party.

Any group of Ponds Inlet Eskimos that passed over to
North Devon simply for the sake of hunting, would certainly
not be enticed northwards along the east coast of Ellesmere
Land, but would go westwards along the coasts of Jones Sound
over to the west side of North Devon and Ellesmere Land,
where plenty of musk-ox are to be found; an example of this
was obtained by Boas? from an Eskimo woman, whom he met
at Cape Kater. She had been with an Eskimo band, which had
passed over the ice-covered North Devon on sledges and on to
the south-west part of Ellesmere Land, which is called the
“Umingman Мипа’” or the musk-ox land, where it is said they
even found some natives. For the rest, there is still the
belief among the Ponds Inlet Eskimos, that a musk-ox hunting
Eskimo tribe lives up in these regions, a belief, however,
that later expeditions have shown to be incorrect for the
present time.

Further, it is known that the Ponds Inlet Eskimos some-
times journey to North Somerset to hunt the musk-ox, and that
this journey may then extend over the Barrow Strait to the
south-west coast of North Devon”, This last direction re-
presents, I think, an old and original route for the expansion
of the Eskimos. From North Somerset it goes straight north
to the west coast of North Devon, right across the north-
westernmost part of this island and further north along the
west coast of Ellesmere Land as far as Bay Fjord, where one
route goes eastwards overland to Buchanan Bay and Smith Sound,
whilst another continues northwards up to Lake Hazen in the
interior. The part of the route which is connected with Elles-

1 Baffin Land. Petermann’s Mitteilungen. Ergänzungsband. 1884, р. 40.
2A. P. Low. 1.6. p. 57 et seq:

395

mere Land! has been made known by Gunnar Isachsen*?, who
took part in the Fram Expedition under O. Sverdrup. In agree-
ment with Е. Boas” Isachsen considered that the main route
went from Ponds Inlet over the eastern end of North Devon
and from there along the north coast of this island; but I am
of the same opinion as H. G. Simmons‘, that this route is
certainly only used exceptionally.

In using the word “route” I must however remark, that
this does not mean a definite, measured line of migration. An
Eskimo band in pursuit of the musk-ox will direct its course
according to the distribution of the animals and will only be
tempted to move by richer hunting grounds; but the distribution
of the islands and their position in the Polar Archipelago is of
such a nature, that the main result of the migrations is, that
the Eskimos tend to go in definite directions. The starting-
points will be on the one hand the northern Baffin Land, where
for the rest it is the lines of migration of the reindeer, which
— in addition to the coastal ice and the voyages with the
women’s boats — determine the migration routes, and on the
other the north-eastern Barren Grounds themselves. And I
imagine, that the oldest migratory groups went out from this
last-mentioned region and from there followed the east coasts
of Boothia Felix and North Somerset, where ruins on the coasts
are evidence of earlier visits of the Eskimos.

With regard to these ruins of houses and other remains of
earlier Eskimo settlements reference may be made to W. Thal-
bitzer’s chart”, where their occurrence is indicated. In agree-

1 I use this name to indicate the whole of the large island lying to the
NW. of Greenland.

* С. Isachsen, Die Wanderungen der östlichen Eskimo in und nach
Gronland. Petermann’s Mitteilungen 1903.

3 The central Eskimo. 6th Ann. Rep. of the Bur. of Ethn. Washington 1888.

+ Eskimäernas Utbredning och Vandringsvägor. “Ymer” Stockholm 1905,

p. 182.
> A Phonetical Study of the Eskimo Language. Meddelelser om Grönland.
Copenhagen 1904. — cf. Boas, Ueber die ehemalige Verbreitung der

XXXIV. 26

396

ment with the distribution of the ruins, I have indicated on
the accompanying chart, where the distribution of the musk-ox
is given after А. Сб. Nathorst!, the main route along which the
Eskimo bands in pursuit of the musk-ox may be considered to
have been enticed further and further away from the American
continent. Some have gone westwards along the south coasts
of the Parry Islands, but the main body has gone up to Elles-
mere Land, and there is now — after that the Danish ‘Dan-
mark” Expedition under Mylius Erichsen has proved the occur-
rence of Eskimo remains right up to the Peary Channel on
the north coast of Greenland — no ground to doubt that they
have continued their journey northward round Greenland to the
north-east coast. For the rest, G. Holm long ago maintained
this migration north round Greenland, and later it has been
supported by C. Ryder and G. Amdrup on the basis of observa-
tions made on their expeditions respectively to Scoresby Sound
in 1891—92 and to the coast between Angmagsalik and Scoresby
Sound in 1898—99 and 1900.

As further support for the view, that these North-East
Greenlanders have been musk-ox hunters, we have the follow-
ing information, which I have received through the kindness
of Мг. С. В. Thostrup, who took over the ethnological investiga-
tions on the “Danmark” Expedition after the death of Mylius
Erichsen. ‘‘There is no doubt, that the Eskimos have carried
on the musk-ox hunting on a large scale at several places, for
example, at Selsé at the head of Dove Bay [i. e. ca. 77° N.B.]
— evidence of this is found in the many, large food-depots
and the bones in them, which were almost exclusively those
of Ovibos moschatus. A number of bones were brought home
from the remains of the Eskimo buildings and their determina-

Eskimos (Zeitschrift der Ges. fir Erdkunde, Vol. 18, Berlin 1883);
C. R. Markham, On the origin and migrations of the Greenlander
Esquimaux (Journ. Roy. Geogr. Soc Vol. 35. 1865).

1 Två Somrar i Norra Ishafvet. Stockholm 1900. Vol. II.

397

tion here — by Inspector H. Winge — has proved that among
the land animals it was chiefly the musk-ox, which served the
Eskimos for food. Reindeer bones occur but in smaller quan-
tity. Phoca foetida was found in considerable quantity every-
where at the settlements”. Bones of hare, bear, walrus, bearded
seal, narwhal, Greenland whale, salmon etc. also occurred.

We now have evidence from various sides with regard to
the importance the musk-ox has had for the Eskimos, right
from the regions between Repulse Bay and Back River! to
North-East Greenland. Both the Barren Grounds Eskimos and
the Polar Eskimos are very fond of musk-ox flesh and fat.
Its fat can also replace the blubber for the lamps, its skin can
be used for clothes, and its horns for various implements >”,

But we may now ask: if the occurrence of the musk-ox
has played so great a part for the migrations of the Eskimos,
why is it that we do not find the musk-ox regions inhabited at
the present day? — The answer is quite simply: because a
lasting settlement of a hunting-people can only occur at the
places, where there is always some reserve means of obtaining
food should the hunting fail at any time. In the temperate
regions there are roots and fruits of plants, bark (e.g. birch-
bark) etc. The polar regions do not have such easily obtained
plant-materials ; but among the Polar Eskimos, for example,
the bird-hunting is such a reserve livelihood in the summer,
whilst the seal hunting and in part the walrus hunting are the
same in winter. For most of the more southerly arctic Eskimo
tribes, fish is the reserve food in summer, and for the sub-
arctic tribes this holds good throughout the year.

As already mentioned, the coast from Cape York to Etah
is, however, an oasis in comparison with other regions in the
same latitude. Robeson Channel is poor in seal, walrus and
bears; west of Ellesmere Land the northern limit for the seal

1 Е. Boas, The Central Eskimos. Р. 450 et seq.
2 cf. Nathorst, l.c., p.143, Note.

398

and bear passes over the north end of Eureka Sound and goes
due westwards from the south end of Heiberg Land!.

Thus, for the so-called musk-ox Eskimos the seal and the
walrus could not have offered such a certain reserve livelihood
or so considerable a store of food as is the case among the
Polar Eskimos. The districts about Wellington Channel and
the west end of Jones Sound have perhaps been the nearest
approach to this. Nor could the birds have been of any import-
ance as reserve food during the summer”. The Eskimos must
have done the same as the previously mentioned 8 families,
who left Peary in 1906 and went to Lake Hazen; they lived
on musk-ox and hares throughout the autumn and winter, and
in the spring went on to the sea-ice, where they hunted the
seal on the way south.

The best time of year for the musk-ox hunting is the
summer and autumn, at which seasons the animals are fat and
owing to their size (up to about 550 kg) are able to yield large
quantities of meat and tallow for storage and fuel. These times
are the same as the seasons for the true reindeer hunting, and
further, the musk-ox lives in quite different localities from
those which are suited for the reindeer, as it does not feed
on lichens like the latter”; we can understand, therefore, that
where the musk-ox hunting is the main source of livelihood,
the other forms of summer hunting must be neglected or even
quite given up. The forms of hunting which are thus apt to
die out of use are for example the kayak hunting and the
salmon fishing. We can now understand, why we meet with
the winter-houses in the interior of the land at Lake Hazen,
whilst tent-rings are found at so many places on the coasts;

1 H.G. Simmons, L.c. р. 179. — Isachsen, l.c. Chart (Pl. 14).

2 Possibly the wild-goose and eider-duck have been of importance
locally. — The “Eider-duck nests” found in the west end of Jones Sound
and considered by the Sverdrup Expedition as originating from the old
Scandinavian Greenlanders, are, I think, old Eskimo egg-depots (cf. p. 300).

3 cf. Nathorst, 1. c., Vol. II, р. 148. — Greely, 1. c., Vol. II, р. 362.

399

these latter have without doubt been set up in the spring-time,
especially in May and June, when the Eskimos carried on the
‘“utok” hunting on the sea-ice.

For the rest, it appears from the experience of the expe-
ditions, that the small Rangifer Pearyi only oceurs in relatively
small numbers in Ellesmere Land and North Devon!. On the
other hand, apart from the eastern part of North Devon and
corresponding stretches in the eastern Ellesmere Land, where
the land is high and covered with glaciers, the musk-ox occurs
in considerable quantities. The latter, however, which lives in
local, small herds, can never become a constant and perman-
ent means of livelihood.

After being hunted for some time, perhaps as a rule
after a single year, the reduced herds of musk-ox can no
longer yield the considerable quantities of food for storing,
which are required for men and dogs, and the Eskimos must
move on.

These Eskimo bands cannot have been very numerous.
They were most probably groups of ca. 8—10 families, which
separated off from the constantly inhabited Eskimo centres on
the coast of the mainland and the Barren Grounds. Some have
again returned home; others have been enticed so far away,
that new generations have perhaps grown up, before the band
has gone under during a famine period in one or other out of
the way corner”, or perhaps succeeded in reaching a Green-
land coast, where a sure, reserve livelihood could be obtained.

1 Greely, 1.с., Vol. II, р. 363; O. Sverdrup, Nyt Land, Vols. I—II; В. Peary,
Nearest the Pole, pp. 60, 62, 70 etc.

2 As example cf how quickly a tribe, which has difficulties in finding a
reserve mode of obtaining food, may die out, I may mention the inhabi-
tants of Southampton Island, a small, almost untouched Eskimo tribe,
which lived essentially on reindeer hunting with the bow and arrow and
numbered 68 persons in 1900. In 1902 a whaler landed a party of
Baffinlanders armed with rifles on the island and these so destroyed the
hunting, that the original dwellers all to a man perished of hunger in
the course of the winter (А. Р. Low, 1. с., рр. 187—188).

400

The stretch of coast which, from its position and wealth
of animal life, as described in preceding pages, is best suited
to attract these wanderings bands, is that occupied by the
Polar Eskimos. And from these remarks with regard to the
wanderings of the musk-ox Eskimos — remarks, which are natur-
ally hypothetical, but which can only be contradicted or con-
firmed by archæological investigations in the regions mentioned —
it will scarcely be surprising, if I express the opinion, that the
Polar Eskimos are just the latest arrivals of the musk-ox
Eskimos. It is quite possible, of course, that hundreds of
years have passed since they came to Greenland; the remains
of houses found on Ellesmere Land seem all to be fairly old.
It is also probable that the tribe is made up of a fusion of
several bands.

This view of the origin of the Polar Eskimos I base
further on the following points.

1. As I have already pointed before, the Polar Eskimos
must at an earlier date have lived under conditions, when the
kayak hunting, the reindeer hunting and salmon fishing, or in
other words the main, summer modes of livelihood of the
ordinary, arctic Eskimo culture, had fallen into disuse. It is
difficult to imagine that this happened except under the con-
ditions described, when the musk-ox hunting was the main
mode of livelihood in the summer.

2. The musk-ox hunting has never been forgotten by the
Polar Eskimos and is still to this day a special attraction
for them.

3. In their folk-lore and their own experience the regions
beyond Smith Sound play a much greater part than, for example,
the lands lying to the south of them, and they held the view,
at any rate in Kane’s and Hayes’ time, that musk-ox hunting
Eskimos lived up here. Thus, a Polar Eskimo, who was con-
vinced that Hayes would meet with Eskimos to the north, said:
“There are good hunting-grounds to the north, plenty of musk-

The shading represents the distribution of the musk-ox.

hunting Eskimos.
-hunting Eskimos.

.. Route followed by the Ponds Inlet band of Eskimos between ca. 1856—63.

x x x x Direction taken by the Ponds Inlet Eskimos when musk-ox hunting.

Probable lines of migration of the musk-ox-
— — — Probable lines of migration of the reindeer

— Main direction followed by the Eskimos in their immigrations to Greenland.

402

ox (oomemak), and wherever there are good hunting-grounds,
there the Esquimaux will be found’!.

This explanation of the origin of the Polar Eskimos from
the north and west is in itself quite natural. What is remark-
able in the matter is, however, that they have come to
Greenland more on the basis of a pure land-hunting,
such as for the musk-ox, than in their character as
dwellers on the coast. And even after they had passed
Smith Sound, the Polar Eskimos still retained this distinctive
land-life, changing from their earlier summer hunting, the
musk-ox hunting, to the still easier bird-catching. They lived
for 3 months of the year on the margin of the open sea without
standing in any cultural relation whatsoever to it.

That they did not build kayaks stands just as much in
connection with the fact, that they did not hunt the reindeer
as with their relation to the sea; for the Central Eskimos,
namely, who live on and near the Barren Grounds, the kayak
is chiefly a river-conveyance, which is used in the reindeer
hunting of the summer’. The absence of wood would not of
itself be a sufficient cause for giving up an established custom
of building kayaks, but might well delay the adoption of this
apparatus from neighbouring tribes. Had the Polar Eskimos
been accustomed to and felt the need of building kayaks, they
would certainly have found some way of continuing to do so.
The Iglulik Eskimos had certainly just as little wood, and yet
Lyon” found kayaks there in 1822, regarding which he writes:
‘The ribs, of which there are sixty or seventy, are made of
ground willow, small bones, whalebone, or if it can be procured,
of good grained wood”.

1 Hayes, The open Polar Sea, p. 385. — ef. Carl Petersen, Erindringer
etc., pp. 80 and 91; Knud Rasmussen, Nye Mennesker, p. 118; Peary,
Northward etc., I, p. 488.

? H.P. Steensby, Il. c. —

® G.F. Lyon, The private journal ес. London 1824, р. 322.

403

The story or tradition which Knud Rasmussen heard!, that
some disease had once in the olden days carried away all the
old people, who knew how to build kayaks, and that these were
buried together with their owners, does not give a rational
explanation either of why they should give up the use of the
kayaks, since such a cause could have no effect with a tribe
accustomed to use the kayak. A probable explanation of the
story is, that these kayak builders who died were immigrants
— presumably from Baffin Land — who continued their custo-
mary summer mode of life, without at that time finding any
imitators among the true Polar Eskimos.

Taken on the whole, we must guard against concluding
that the absence of use means the complete absence of know-
ledge. It is not at all strange, therefore, that the Greenlanders
more to the south, who certainly must also have come originally
along the ‘‘musk-ox way’, early took up the use of the kayak
for their hunting by sea. It was only necessary that the whole
way from a kayak-building region in America to south of Mel-
ville Bay should be traversed by a single band within the period
of a single generation, so that some would remain to take the
initiative and produce a model for others to follow, when they
found it suited the conditions. The same applies with regard
to the reindeer hunting, the use of the bow and arrow etc.

I shall not enter, however, upon the question of the immigra-
tion of the more southerly Greenlanders. From an anthropogeogra-
phical standpoint it is obvious, that the main mass must have come
down along the west coast. The western immigrants already find
the natural basis for a more permanent settlement at Etah, just as
the band which goes to the north, first meet with corresponding
conditions at Scoresby Sound or perhaps even only at Angmagsalik.

Between Scoresby Sound and Angmagsalik lies the coastal
stretch charted by Amdrup, which is perhaps the most unap-

1 Nye Mennesker, р. 32.

404

proachable and for the Eskimos most difficult to pass along
the whole coast of Greenland. Nevertheless, there is no doubt
that there has been some communication along this stretch of
coast and certainly in both directions. The old Scoresby Sound
Eskimos seem, according to Ryder’, to have been distinctly
reindeer hunters, which points to a southern origin. On the
other hand, the smallness of the houses, their square-shaped
form and various other features point northward to Ellesmere
Land”. The rectangular ground-plan however is only a result
of using wood or whale-bones for the roof. It is only the
places, seemingly, where the roof is also built of stone, that
the ground-plan becomes rounded; this holds good, for example,
not only for the Polar Eskimos but also at Lake Hazen’°.

The fact pointed out by Holm, that the natives of Angmag-
salik knew about the musk-ox, suggests that they have been in
connection with the north. Among the West Greenlanders there
are only uncertain traditions regarding this animal, perhaps
indeed it bas been completely forgotten. On the other hand,
there is no reason to go so far as Schultz Lorentzen*, who
maintains that not only the Angmagsaliker but also the southern
West Greenlanders have migrated north and east round Green-
land. I am in agreement with О. Solberg” in his criticism of
this hypothesis. From the cultural standpoint the Angmagsaliker
are decidedly related to the West Greeniand population, but we
are obliged to take up the view that they have been mixed with
immigrants from the north.

In this way we perhaps obtain an explanation of the con-

1 Om den tidligere eskimoiske Bebyggelse af Scoresby Sund. Meddelelser
om Grönland 1895.

Simmons, 1. с., pp. 190—91.

Greely, 1. c., Vol. I, pp. 379—82.

Eskimoernes Indvandring i Grönland. Medd. om Grönland 1904. —
cf. H. P. Steensby, Die Einwanderung der Eskimos nach Grönland.
Petermann's Mitteilungen 1905.

Beitrage zur Vorgeschichte der Osteskimo. Christiania 1907. p.57 et seq.

~ wo to

405

dition, first pointed out by Holm! and later by Ryder? for the
Scoresby Sound Eskimos, namely, that there are cultural points
of connection between the east coast of Greenland and some-
thing so far to the west as the Point Barrow Eskimos. Recently
Thalbitzer has also observed such points of resemblance*. When
these authors only mention the Point Barrow Eskimos, the reason
is certainly, that we have more definite knowledge of these than
of the other tribes along the coast of the mainland to the north.
Possibly, these resemblances will also prove to exist with the
tribes on the mainland from Boothia Felix to Coronation Gulf,
but from these tribes the ‘‘musk-ox way” — also perhaps by
slightly different lines from that shown on the accompanying
chart — leads northwards round Greenland, where the condi-
tions of life will mean a constant advance for a wandering band
and not permit of a long sojourn at any definite region.
On the other hand, we can hardly think of a direct connection
from more westerly regions than Coronation Gulf.

]. с., pp. 152 ef seq.

1. с., р. 343; cf. G. Amdrup, The former settlements on the East coast
of Greenland. Medd. om Grönland. 1909, р. 326.

3 W. Thalbitzer, The Amdrup Collection from East Greenland. Medd. om
Gronland. 1909, pp. 446, 492.

1
2

Contents.

e
Discovery of Polar Eskimos — Ponds Inlet immigrants ie
Recenty expeditions ее а ee Ce eee 255
Anthropogeographical features of the Polar Eskimos’ district 268
Industrial culture of the Polar Eskimos .................. 281
… Umanark — Winter-houses — Tents..............0...... 306
Clothing — Work and technical skill of the men and women
== Implements FS А ВН ео 333
Psvenology sand sociology re en 363
Апорт И 383
OnisinworthewBRolaryESskim 0 s реб ововоа ово нововововььс 392

The ethnological investigations on the Polar Eskimos described in these
pages were carried out on the initiative and at the expense of “Kommis-
sionen til Ledelsen af de geologiske og geografiske Undersøgelser i Gren-
land”. — The illustrations with exception of fig. 16 are original. The
photographs were all taken by the author.

Medd. om Gronl. XXXIV. [H. P. Steensby.]

DES
К }

HUMBOLO À
GLACIER| . \
do: |

Fis
FEN, I
(ESSEN
Nee 7

WOLSTENHOLM 1. ON

| Enter rad =
GREENLAND N.W. COAST.

С. YORK -— HUMBOLDT GLACIER

Jaurters

Ÿ
4
I
t
{
р
И
|
x J
' у
и
|
à

bec re

u se

Far) я
" In,
LP A ri х

4 ae

ПИТ
МИ ail

Wl lt

ПИ | | |

[nt

ПИ
т

{

4
—
+
vf z
fy
Ca

er
I Ber

1
_

3 >

5x
«

»
Let
Li
`

wer

и: £

a "x . y

Yin.

ÆN

; d i a у 2 *
р dn bo à . . hj { р 3
\ | i р kd , Е wu
a . . 4 - - FN
å 2 i EL $ à. Ne K “ we
Е i > То Pi
ы р < \ ps ©
] : 3 mk LO) 2
Е i a. D >
a à: * “

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Meddelelser om Grønland"

See other formats